Sie sind auf Seite 1von 792

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System V100R003C03

Maintenance Guide (U2000)


Issue Date 02 2012-01-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions


and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com

Website: Email:

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

About This Document

About This Document

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name OptiX RTN 980 iManager U2000 Version V100R003C03 V100R006C00

Intended Audience
This document provides the guidelines to maintaining the OptiX RTN 980. It also describes the alarms and performance events that are required for troubleshooting during the maintenance. This document is intended for: l l l Network planning engineer Data configuration engineer System maintenance engineer

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ii

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

About This Document

Symbol

Description Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.

General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root. Book titles are in italics. Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface Italic [] { x | y | ... } [ x | y | ... ] Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Command arguments are in italics. Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

About This Document

Convention { x | y | ... }*

Description Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface > Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C03


This document is the second issue of the V100R003C03 product version. Compared with the first issue, the updated contents are follows. Update A Alarm Reference A.2 Alarm List (Classified by Logical Boards) Description Added the DBMS_DELETE alarm, and deleted the DBMS_ABNORMAL alarm. Added the ETH_EFM_EVENT alarm to IFU2,IFX2,ISU2, and ISX2.

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C03


This document is the first issue of the V100R003C03 product version.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iv

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

Contents

Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Safety Precautions.........................................................................................................................1
1.1 General Safety Precautions.................................................................................................................................2 1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols.............................................................................................................................3 1.3 Electrical Safety..................................................................................................................................................4 1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas.........................................................................................................................7 1.5 Storage Batteries.................................................................................................................................................7 1.6 Radiation.............................................................................................................................................................9 1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers.....................................................................................................................9 1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure.......................................................................................................................11 1.6.3 Forbidden Areas......................................................................................................................................11 1.6.4 Laser........................................................................................................................................................11 1.6.5 Microwave...............................................................................................................................................12 1.7 Working at Heights...........................................................................................................................................13 1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects...........................................................................................................................13 1.7.2 Using Ladders..........................................................................................................................................14 1.8 Mechanical Safety............................................................................................................................................16 1.9 Other Precautions.............................................................................................................................................17

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations...........................................................................................19


2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch.................................................................................................20 2.2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper...................................................................................................................22 2.3 Operation Guide for the IF Cable.....................................................................................................................23 2.4 Operation Guide for the IF Board.....................................................................................................................24

3 Routine Maintenance..................................................................................................................26 4 Emergency Maintenance............................................................................................................29


4.1 Definition of Emergency..................................................................................................................................30 4.2 Purposes of Emergency Maintenance...............................................................................................................30 4.3 Procedure for Emergency Maintenance............................................................................................................30

5 Troubleshooting..........................................................................................................................37
5.1 General Troubleshooting Procedure.................................................................................................................39 5.2 Troubleshooting Service Interruptions.............................................................................................................41 Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

Contents

5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link.......................................................................................................................47 5.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors in TDM Services..................................................................................................55 5.5 Troubleshooting Pointer Justifications.............................................................................................................61 5.6 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with SDH Equipment............................................................................65 5.7 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with PDH Equipment............................................................................68 5.8 Troubleshooting Native Ethernet Service Faults..............................................................................................72 5.9 Troubleshooting Ethernet Service on the EoS/EoPDH Plane..........................................................................78 5.10 Troubleshooting MPLS Tunnels....................................................................................................................84 5.11 Troubleshooting CES Services.......................................................................................................................88 5.12 Troubleshooting ATM Services.....................................................................................................................93 5.13 Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Carried by PWs......................................................................................97 5.14 Troubleshooting Orderwire Faults................................................................................................................101

6 Part Replacement.......................................................................................................................104
6.1 Removing a Board..........................................................................................................................................106 6.2 Inserting a Board............................................................................................................................................109 6.3 Replacing the SDH Optical Interface Board..................................................................................................111 6.4 Replacing the PDH Interface Board...............................................................................................................112 6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board.......................................................................................................................113 6.6 Replacing the Ethernet Interface Board..........................................................................................................114 6.7 Replacing the IF Board...................................................................................................................................115 6.8 Replacing the CF Card...................................................................................................................................117 6.9 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board.............................................................................118 6.10 Replacing the Auxiliary Board.....................................................................................................................120 6.11 Replacing the Fan Board..............................................................................................................................121 6.12 Replacing the Power Board..........................................................................................................................123 6.13 Replacing the SFP........................................................................................................................................124 6.14 Replacing the ODU......................................................................................................................................125 6.15 Replacing the IF Cable.................................................................................................................................126

7 Database Backup and Restoration.........................................................................................128


7.1 NE Database...................................................................................................................................................129 7.2 Backing Up the Database Manually...............................................................................................................129 7.3 Setting the Database Backup Policy...............................................................................................................130 7.3.1 Setting the User-Defined Backup Policy...............................................................................................130 7.3.2 Enable the Backup Policy of the Device...............................................................................................131 7.3.3 Disable the Backup Policy of the Device..............................................................................................132 7.4 Restoring the Database...................................................................................................................................132

8 Supporting Task........................................................................................................................134
8.1 Hardware Loopback.......................................................................................................................................137 8.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters.......................................................................................................137 8.2.1 Cleaning Fiber Connectors by Using Cartridge Cleaners.....................................................................137 8.2.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors by Using Lens Tissue................................................................................139 Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

Contents

8.2.3 Cleaning Fiber Adapters by Using Optical Cleaning Sticks.................................................................140 8.3 Browsing Alarms, Abnormal Events, and Performance Events.....................................................................141 8.3.1 Checking the NE Status.........................................................................................................................141 8.3.2 Checking the Board Status....................................................................................................................142 8.3.3 Browsing Current Alarms......................................................................................................................142 8.3.4 Browsing Abnormal Events...................................................................................................................144 8.3.5 Browsing Current Performance Events.................................................................................................145 8.3.6 Browsing History Alarms......................................................................................................................145 8.3.7 Browsing History Performance Events.................................................................................................146 8.3.8 Browsing the Performance Event Threshold-Crossing Records...........................................................147 8.3.9 Browsing UAT Events...........................................................................................................................147 8.3.10 Configuring the Performance Monitoring Status of NEs....................................................................148 8.3.11 Setting Severity and Auto Reporting Status of Alarms.......................................................................149 8.3.12 Suppressing Alarms for Monitored Objects........................................................................................149 8.3.13 Suppressing Alarms for NEs...............................................................................................................150 8.3.14 Reversing Alarms for Service Ports....................................................................................................150 8.3.15 Setting Trigger Conditions of AIS Insertion.......................................................................................151 8.3.16 Setting Trigger Conditions of UNEQ Insertion...................................................................................152 8.3.17 Setting Bit Error Thresholds for Service Ports....................................................................................152 8.3.18 Setting Monitoring and Auto-Report Status of Performance Events..................................................153 8.3.19 Setting Performance Thresholds..........................................................................................................153 8.3.20 Resetting Performance Registers.........................................................................................................154 8.4 Using the RMON............................................................................................................................................154 8.4.1 Browsing the Performance Data in the Statistics Group of a Port........................................................154 8.4.2 Configuring an Alarm Group for a Port................................................................................................157 8.4.3 Configuring a Historical Control Group................................................................................................159 8.4.4 Browsing the Performance Data in the Historical Group of a Port.......................................................160 8.5 Querying a Report..........................................................................................................................................163 8.5.1 Querying the Board Information Report ..............................................................................................163 8.5.2 Querying the Board Manufacturing Information Report ......................................................................163 8.5.3 Querying the Microwave Link Information Report...............................................................................164 8.5.4 Querying the Network-wide License Report.........................................................................................165 8.6 Software Loopback.........................................................................................................................................165 8.6.1 Setting Loopback for the SDH Optical Interface Board........................................................................165 8.6.2 Setting Loopback for the Tributary Board............................................................................................167 8.6.3 Setting a Loopback for the Smart E1 Processing Board.......................................................................169 8.6.4 Setting a Loopback for the Packet-plane Ethernet Interface Board......................................................170 8.6.5 Setting Loopbacks for the EOS/EoPDH-Plane Ethernet Interface Board.............................................172 8.6.6 Setting Loopback for the IF Board........................................................................................................175 8.6.7 Locating a Fault by Performing Loopback Operations.........................................................................177 8.7 Reset...............................................................................................................................................................178 8.7.1 Cold Reset..............................................................................................................................................178 Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

Contents

8.7.2 Warm Reset...........................................................................................................................................179 8.8 PRBS Test.......................................................................................................................................................179 8.8.1 Performing a PRBS Test for the Tributary Board.................................................................................179 8.8.2 Performing a PRBS Test for the IF Board.............................................................................................182 8.9 Querying the License Capacity.......................................................................................................................183 8.10 Setting the On/Off State of the Laser...........................................................................................................184 8.11 Setting the ALS Function.............................................................................................................................184 8.12 Setting the Automatic Release Function......................................................................................................185 8.13 Querying Power Consumption of Boards.....................................................................................................186 8.14 Querying the Impedance of an E1 Channel..................................................................................................186 8.15 Monitoring Ethernet Packets Through Port Mirroring.................................................................................187 8.16 Querying the Attributes of an Ethernet Port.................................................................................................188 8.17 Setting Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet Ports.......................................189 8.18 Querying Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet Ports...................................189 8.19 Setting the Threshold of Received Traffic Flow on an Ethernet Port..........................................................190 8.20 Using the Ethernet Test Frames....................................................................................................................191 8.21 Switching the System Control Unit and the Cross-Connect Unit................................................................193 8.22 End-to-End Management on Fibers, Tunnels, and PWE3 Services.............................................................193 8.22.1 Expanding/Collapsing Fibers and Cables............................................................................................193 8.22.2 Querying Optical Power of Fibers and Cables....................................................................................194 8.22.3 Querying the Radio Link Information.................................................................................................195 8.22.4 Querying the Radio Link Performance................................................................................................195 8.22.5 Managing E-Line Services Transmitted in Native Ethernet Mode.....................................................196 8.22.6 Managing MPLS Tunnels in an End-to-End Mode.............................................................................196 8.22.7 Managing and Maintaining PWE3 Services........................................................................................197 8.22.8 Verifying Native Ethernet Services.....................................................................................................197 8.22.9 Verifying MPLS Tunnels in an End-to-End Mode.............................................................................199 8.22.10 Verifying PW Configurations in an End-to-End Mode.....................................................................201 8.22.11 Verifying PW-Based E-Line Service Configurations (in an End-to-End Mode)..............................203

A Alarm Reference.......................................................................................................................207
A.1 Alarm List (in Alphabetical Order)...............................................................................................................208 A.2 Alarm List (Classified by Logical Boards)....................................................................................................226 A.2.1 CSHN....................................................................................................................................................227 A.2.2 IF1.........................................................................................................................................................228 A.2.3 IFU2......................................................................................................................................................228 A.2.4 IFX2......................................................................................................................................................229 A.2.5 SL1D/SL1DA.......................................................................................................................................230 A.2.6 EM6T....................................................................................................................................................230 A.2.7 EM6TA.................................................................................................................................................231 A.2.8 EM6F....................................................................................................................................................231 A.2.9 EM6FA.................................................................................................................................................232 A.2.10 EFP8...................................................................................................................................................232 Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

Contents

A.2.11 EMS6..................................................................................................................................................233 A.2.12 SP3S/SP3D.........................................................................................................................................233 A.2.13 AUX....................................................................................................................................................234 A.2.14 PIU......................................................................................................................................................234 A.2.15 FAN....................................................................................................................................................234 A.2.16 ISU2....................................................................................................................................................234 A.2.17 ISX2....................................................................................................................................................235 A.2.18 ML1/MD1...........................................................................................................................................236 A.2.19 SL4D...................................................................................................................................................236 A.2.20 EG2D..................................................................................................................................................237 A.2.21 ODU....................................................................................................................................................237 A.3 Alarms and Handling Procedures..................................................................................................................238 A.3.1 A_LOC.................................................................................................................................................238 A.3.2 ALM_E1RAI........................................................................................................................................239 A.3.3 ALM_GFP_dCSF.................................................................................................................................239 A.3.4 ALM_GFP_dLFD.................................................................................................................................240 A.3.5 ALM_IMA_LIF....................................................................................................................................242 A.3.6 ALM_IMA_LODS...............................................................................................................................243 A.3.7 ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE......................................................................................................244 A.3.8 ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE......................................................................................................246 A.3.9 ALM_IMA_RFI...................................................................................................................................247 A.3.10 AM_DOWNSHIFT............................................................................................................................249 A.3.11 APS_FAIL..........................................................................................................................................250 A.3.12 APS_INDI...........................................................................................................................................251 A.3.13 APS_MANUAL_STOP......................................................................................................................253 A.3.14 ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELL_EXC..................................................................................................254 A.3.15 AU_AIS..............................................................................................................................................254 A.3.16 AU_LOP.............................................................................................................................................255 A.3.17 B1_EXC..............................................................................................................................................256 A.3.18 B1_SD.................................................................................................................................................259 A.3.19 B2_EXC..............................................................................................................................................261 A.3.20 B2_SD.................................................................................................................................................263 A.3.21 B3_EXC..............................................................................................................................................265 A.3.22 B3_EXC_VC3....................................................................................................................................267 A.3.23 B3_SD.................................................................................................................................................270 A.3.24 B3_SD_VC3.......................................................................................................................................272 A.3.25 BD_NOT_INSTALLED.....................................................................................................................274 A.3.26 BD_STATUS......................................................................................................................................275 A.3.27 BIOS_STATUS..................................................................................................................................277 A.3.28 BIP_EXC............................................................................................................................................277 A.3.29 BIP_SD...............................................................................................................................................279 A.3.30 BOOTROM_BAD..............................................................................................................................281 Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

Contents

A.3.31 BUS_ERR...........................................................................................................................................282 A.3.32 CES_ACR_LOCK_ABN...................................................................................................................284 A.3.33 CES_JTROVR_EXC..........................................................................................................................285 A.3.34 CES_JTRUDR_EXC..........................................................................................................................286 A.3.35 CES_LOSPKT_EXC..........................................................................................................................287 A.3.36 CES_MALPKT_EXC.........................................................................................................................288 A.3.37 CES_MISORDERPKT_EXC.............................................................................................................289 A.3.38 CES_RDI............................................................................................................................................290 A.3.39 CES_STRAYPKT_EXC....................................................................................................................291 A.3.40 CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFAULT......................................................................................................291 A.3.41 CESPW_OPPOSITE_RAI.................................................................................................................292 A.3.42 CFCARD_FAILED............................................................................................................................293 A.3.43 CFCARD_OFFLINE..........................................................................................................................294 A.3.44 CHCS..................................................................................................................................................295 A.3.45 CLK_NO_TRACE_MODE................................................................................................................296 A.3.46 COMMUN_FAIL...............................................................................................................................298 A.3.47 CONFIG_NOSUPPORT....................................................................................................................299 A.3.48 DBMS_DELETE................................................................................................................................302 A.3.49 DBMS_ERROR..................................................................................................................................302 A.3.50 DBMS_PROTECT_MODE...............................................................................................................303 A.3.51 DCNSIZE_OVER...............................................................................................................................304 A.3.52 DDN_LFA..........................................................................................................................................305 A.3.53 DOWN_E1_AIS.................................................................................................................................306 A.3.54 DROPRATIO_OVER.........................................................................................................................308 A.3.55 E1_LOC..............................................................................................................................................309 A.3.56 E1_LOS..............................................................................................................................................310 A.3.57 ETH_APS_LOST...............................................................................................................................311 A.3.58 ETH_APS_PATH_MISMATCH.......................................................................................................312 A.3.59 ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL...............................................................................................................313 A.3.60 ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATCH........................................................................................................314 A.3.61 ETH_CFM_LOC................................................................................................................................315 A.3.62 ETH_CFM_MISMERGE...................................................................................................................318 A.3.63 ETH_CFM_RDI.................................................................................................................................321 A.3.64 ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI....................................................................................................................323 A.3.65 ETH_EFM_DF...................................................................................................................................326 A.3.66 ETH_EFM_EVENT...........................................................................................................................327 A.3.67 ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK...................................................................................................................328 A.3.68 ETH_EFM_REMFAULT...................................................................................................................329 A.3.69 ETH_LOS...........................................................................................................................................330 A.3.70 ETH_NO_FLOW...............................................................................................................................332 A.3.71 ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FAIL..........................................................................................................333 A.3.72 ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FAULT.......................................................................................................334 Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. x

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

Contents

A.3.73 ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP....................................................................................................................336 A.3.74 ETHOAM_RMT_SD.........................................................................................................................337 A.3.75 ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP...................................................................................................................339 A.3.76 ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_LOOP.........................................................................................................340 A.3.77 EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS...................................................................................................................342 A.3.78 EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNFLCT.......................................................................................................343 A.3.79 EXT_SYNC_LOS..............................................................................................................................345 A.3.80 FAN_AGING.....................................................................................................................................346 A.3.81 FAN_FAIL.........................................................................................................................................346 A.3.82 FCS_ERR...........................................................................................................................................348 A.3.83 FLOW_OVER....................................................................................................................................349 A.3.84 HARD_BAD.......................................................................................................................................350 A.3.85 HP_CROSSTR...................................................................................................................................352 A.3.86 HP_LOM............................................................................................................................................353 A.3.87 HP_RDI..............................................................................................................................................354 A.3.88 HP_REI...............................................................................................................................................355 A.3.89 HP_SLM.............................................................................................................................................356 A.3.90 HP_TIM..............................................................................................................................................357 A.3.91 HP_UNEQ..........................................................................................................................................358 A.3.92 HPAD_CROSSTR..............................................................................................................................359 A.3.93 IF_CABLE_OPEN.............................................................................................................................360 A.3.94 IF_INPWR_ABN...............................................................................................................................361 A.3.95 IF_MODE_UNSUPPORTED............................................................................................................363 A.3.96 IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN................................................................................................................364 A.3.97 IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN...............................................................................................................365 A.3.98 IMA_TXCLK_MISMATCH..............................................................................................................366 A.3.99 IN_PWR_ABN...................................................................................................................................367 A.3.100 IN_PWR_HIGH...............................................................................................................................369 A.3.101 IN_PWR_LOW................................................................................................................................370 A.3.102 J0_MM..............................................................................................................................................371 A.3.103 K1_K2_M.........................................................................................................................................372 A.3.104 K2_M................................................................................................................................................374 A.3.105 LAG_BWMM...................................................................................................................................375 A.3.106 LAG_DOWN....................................................................................................................................376 A.3.107 LAG_MEMBER_DOWN................................................................................................................377 A.3.108 LAG_PORT_FAIL...........................................................................................................................379 A.3.109 LAG_VC_PORT_FAIL...................................................................................................................381 A.3.110 LAN_LOC........................................................................................................................................383 A.3.111 LASER_CLOSED............................................................................................................................384 A.3.112 LASER_MOD_ERR.........................................................................................................................385 A.3.113 LASER_MOD_ERR_EX.................................................................................................................386 A.3.114 LASER_SHUT.................................................................................................................................387 Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

Contents

A.3.115 LCAS_FOPR....................................................................................................................................388 A.3.116 LCAS_FOPT....................................................................................................................................390 A.3.117 LCAS_PLCR....................................................................................................................................391 A.3.118 LCAS_PLCT....................................................................................................................................393 A.3.119 LCAS_TLCR....................................................................................................................................394 A.3.120 LCAS_TLCT....................................................................................................................................396 A.3.121 LCD..................................................................................................................................................397 A.3.122 LCS_LIMITED.................................................................................................................................399 A.3.123 LFA...................................................................................................................................................401 A.3.124 LICENSE_DIFF...............................................................................................................................402 A.3.125 LICENSE_LOST..............................................................................................................................406 A.3.126 LINK_ERR.......................................................................................................................................407 A.3.127 LMFA...............................................................................................................................................408 A.3.128 LOOP_ALM.....................................................................................................................................409 A.3.129 LP_CROSSTR..................................................................................................................................411 A.3.130 LP_R_FIFO......................................................................................................................................412 A.3.131 LP_RDI.............................................................................................................................................413 A.3.132 LP_RDI_VC12.................................................................................................................................414 A.3.133 LP_RDI_VC3...................................................................................................................................415 A.3.134 LP_REI.............................................................................................................................................416 A.3.135 LP_REI_VC12..................................................................................................................................417 A.3.136 LP_REI_VC3....................................................................................................................................418 A.3.137 LP_RFI.............................................................................................................................................419 A.3.138 LP_SLM...........................................................................................................................................420 A.3.139 LP_SLM_VC12................................................................................................................................420 A.3.140 LP_SLM_VC3..................................................................................................................................421 A.3.141 LP_T_FIFO.......................................................................................................................................422 A.3.142 LP_TIM............................................................................................................................................423 A.3.143 LP_TIM_VC12.................................................................................................................................424 A.3.144 LP_TIM_VC3...................................................................................................................................425 A.3.145 LP_UNEQ.........................................................................................................................................427 A.3.146 LP_UNEQ_VC12.............................................................................................................................428 A.3.147 LP_UNEQ_VC3...............................................................................................................................429 A.3.148 LPS_UNI_BI_M...............................................................................................................................430 A.3.149 LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT.................................................................................................................431 A.3.150 LPT_INEFFECT...............................................................................................................................432 A.3.151 LPT_RFI...........................................................................................................................................434 A.3.152 LSR_NO_FITED..............................................................................................................................435 A.3.153 LTI....................................................................................................................................................436 A.3.154 MAC_EXT_EXC.............................................................................................................................438 A.3.155 MAC_FCS_EXC..............................................................................................................................439 A.3.156 MOD_COM_FAIL...........................................................................................................................440 Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xii

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

Contents

A.3.157 MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH.............................................................................................................441 A.3.158 MPLS_PW_BDI...............................................................................................................................443 A.3.159 MPLS_PW_Excess...........................................................................................................................443 A.3.160 MPLS_PW_LOCV...........................................................................................................................444 A.3.161 MPLS_PW_MISMATCH................................................................................................................446 A.3.162 MPLS_PW_MISMERGE.................................................................................................................447 A.3.163 MPLS_PW_SD.................................................................................................................................448 A.3.164 MPLS_PW_SF.................................................................................................................................449 A.3.165 MPLS_PW_UNKNOWN.................................................................................................................450 A.3.166 MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI.....................................................................................................................451 A.3.167 MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess.................................................................................................................451 A.3.168 MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI.....................................................................................................................452 A.3.169 MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV.................................................................................................................453 A.3.170 MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH......................................................................................................455 A.3.171 MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE.......................................................................................................456 A.3.172 MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL..........................................................................................................456 A.3.173 MPLS_TUNNEL_SD.......................................................................................................................458 A.3.174 MPLS_TUNNEL_SF.......................................................................................................................458 A.3.175 MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN.......................................................................................................459 A.3.176 MS_AIS............................................................................................................................................460 A.3.177 MS_CROSSTR.................................................................................................................................461 A.3.178 MS_RDI............................................................................................................................................463 A.3.179 MS_REI............................................................................................................................................464 A.3.180 MSAD_CROSSTR...........................................................................................................................465 A.3.181 MULTI_RPL_OWNER....................................................................................................................466 A.3.182 MW_AM_TEST...............................................................................................................................467 A.3.183 MW_BER_EXC...............................................................................................................................467 A.3.184 MW_BER_SD..................................................................................................................................472 A.3.185 MW_CFG_MISMATCH..................................................................................................................476 A.3.186 MW_CONT_WAVE........................................................................................................................477 A.3.187 MW_E1_LOST.................................................................................................................................478 A.3.188 MW_FEC_UNCOR..........................................................................................................................479 A.3.189 MW_LIM..........................................................................................................................................483 A.3.190 MW_LOF.........................................................................................................................................485 A.3.191 MW_RDI..........................................................................................................................................490 A.3.192 NESF_LOST.....................................................................................................................................491 A.3.193 NESOFT_MM..................................................................................................................................493 A.3.194 NESTATE_INSTALL......................................................................................................................496 A.3.195 NO_BD_SOFT.................................................................................................................................497 A.3.196 NP1_MANUAL_STOP....................................................................................................................498 A.3.197 NP1_SW_FAIL................................................................................................................................499 A.3.198 NP1_SW_INDI.................................................................................................................................500 Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

Contents

A.3.199 NTP_SYNC_FAIL...........................................................................................................................501 A.3.200 OCD..................................................................................................................................................502 A.3.201 OUT_PWR_ABN.............................................................................................................................503 A.3.202 PATCH_ACT_TIMEOUT...............................................................................................................504 A.3.203 PATCH_DEACT_TIMEOUT..........................................................................................................505 A.3.204 PATCH_PKGERR...........................................................................................................................506 A.3.205 PG_LINK_FAIL...............................................................................................................................506 A.3.206 PG_PRT_DEGRADED....................................................................................................................507 A.3.207 PLA_CFG_MISMATCH.................................................................................................................508 A.3.208 PORTMODE_MISMATCH.............................................................................................................510 A.3.209 PORT_EXC_TRAFFIC....................................................................................................................511 A.3.210 PORT_MODULE_OFFLINE...........................................................................................................512 A.3.211 POWER_ABNORMAL...................................................................................................................513 A.3.212 POWER_ALM.................................................................................................................................514 A.3.213 PW_DROPPKT_EXC......................................................................................................................516 A.3.214 PWAPS_LOST.................................................................................................................................517 A.3.215 PWAPS_PATH_MISMATCH.........................................................................................................517 A.3.216 PWAPS_SWITCH_FAIL.................................................................................................................518 A.3.217 PWAPS_TYPE_MISMATCH.........................................................................................................519 A.3.218 R_F_RST..........................................................................................................................................520 A.3.219 R_LOC..............................................................................................................................................521 A.3.220 R_LOF..............................................................................................................................................522 A.3.221 R_LOS..............................................................................................................................................524 A.3.222 R_S_ERR..........................................................................................................................................526 A.3.223 RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF...........................................................................................527 A.3.224 RADIO_MUTE................................................................................................................................529 A.3.225 RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH............................................................................................................530 A.3.226 RADIO_RSL_HIGH........................................................................................................................530 A.3.227 RADIO_RSL_LOW.........................................................................................................................531 A.3.228 RADIO_TSL_HIGH.........................................................................................................................533 A.3.229 RADIO_TSL_LOW.........................................................................................................................534 A.3.230 RELAY_ALARM_CRITICAL........................................................................................................535 A.3.231 RELAY_ALARM_IGNORE...........................................................................................................535 A.3.232 RELAY_ALARM_MAJOR.............................................................................................................536 A.3.233 RELAY_ALARM_MINOR.............................................................................................................537 A.3.234 RMFA...............................................................................................................................................538 A.3.235 RPS_INDI.........................................................................................................................................539 A.3.236 RS_CROSSTR..................................................................................................................................541 A.3.237 RTC_FAIL........................................................................................................................................542 A.3.238 S1_SYN_CHANGE.........................................................................................................................543 A.3.239 SCCDATA_BACKUP_FAIL...........................................................................................................544 A.3.240 SEC_RADIUS_FAIL.......................................................................................................................546 Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiv

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

Contents

A.3.241 SECU_ALM.....................................................................................................................................547 A.3.242 SRV_SHUTDOWN_LD..................................................................................................................548 A.3.243 SWDL_ACTIVATED_TIMEOUT..................................................................................................548 A.3.244 SWDL_AUTOMATCH_INH..........................................................................................................549 A.3.245 SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH.....................................................................................................550 A.3.246 SWDL_COMMIT_FAIL..................................................................................................................551 A.3.247 SWDL_INPROCESS.......................................................................................................................552 A.3.248 SWDL_NEPKGCHECK..................................................................................................................552 A.3.249 SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT..............................................................................................................553 A.3.250 SWDL_PKGVER_MM....................................................................................................................554 A.3.251 SWDL_ROLLBACK_FAIL.............................................................................................................555 A.3.252 SYN_BAD........................................................................................................................................556 A.3.253 SYNC_C_LOS.................................................................................................................................557 A.3.254 T_ALOS...........................................................................................................................................558 A.3.255 T_F_RST..........................................................................................................................................559 A.3.256 T_LOC..............................................................................................................................................560 A.3.257 TEMP_ALARM...............................................................................................................................561 A.3.258 THUNDERALM..............................................................................................................................562 A.3.259 TR_LOC...........................................................................................................................................563 A.3.260 TU_AIS.............................................................................................................................................564 A.3.261 TU_AIS_VC12.................................................................................................................................566 A.3.262 TU_AIS_VC3...................................................................................................................................568 A.3.263 TU_LOP...........................................................................................................................................570 A.3.264 TU_LOP_VC12................................................................................................................................571 A.3.265 TU_LOP_VC3..................................................................................................................................572 A.3.266 TUNNEL_APS_DEGRADED.........................................................................................................574 A.3.267 UHCS................................................................................................................................................575 A.3.268 UP_E1_AIS......................................................................................................................................576 A.3.269 VC_AIS............................................................................................................................................577 A.3.270 VC_LOC...........................................................................................................................................579 A.3.271 VC_RDI............................................................................................................................................580 A.3.272 VCAT_LOA.....................................................................................................................................582 A.3.273 VCAT_LOM_VC12.........................................................................................................................583 A.3.274 VCAT_LOM_VC3...........................................................................................................................585 A.3.275 VCAT_SQM_VC12.........................................................................................................................586 A.3.276 VCAT_SQM_VC3...........................................................................................................................588 A.3.277 VOLT_LOS......................................................................................................................................589 A.3.278 VP_AIS.............................................................................................................................................590 A.3.279 VP_LOC...........................................................................................................................................592 A.3.280 VP_RDI............................................................................................................................................594 A.3.281 WRG_BD_TYPE.............................................................................................................................596 A.3.282 XPIC_LOS........................................................................................................................................597 Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xv

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

Contents

B Abnormal Event Reference.....................................................................................................599


B.1 Major Abnormal Performance Event List......................................................................................................600 B.2 Abnormal Performance Events and Handling Procedures.............................................................................600 B.2.1 IF 1+1 Protection Switching.................................................................................................................600 B.2.2 N+1 Protection Switching.....................................................................................................................603 B.2.3 SNCP Switching...................................................................................................................................605 B.2.4 Linear MSP Switching..........................................................................................................................607 B.2.5 Ring MSP Switching.............................................................................................................................609 B.2.6 Status Change of an APS Protection Group.........................................................................................613 B.2.7 Reporting of PW APS Switching Events..............................................................................................614 B.2.8 System Control Board Switching..........................................................................................................616 B.2.9 RMON Performance Value Below the Lower Limit............................................................................617 B.2.10 RMON Performance Value Above the Upper Limit..........................................................................618

C Performance Event Reference................................................................................................620


C.1 Performance Events (by Event Type)............................................................................................................621 C.1.1 SDH/PDH Performance Event List......................................................................................................621 C.1.2 Radio Performance Events....................................................................................................................624 C.1.3 Other Performance Events....................................................................................................................627 C.2 Performance Events (by Logical Board)........................................................................................................628 C.2.1 CSHN....................................................................................................................................................628 C.2.2 IF1.........................................................................................................................................................629 C.2.3 IFU2/ISU2.............................................................................................................................................632 C.2.4 IFX2/ISX2.............................................................................................................................................636 C.2.5 SL4D.....................................................................................................................................................640 C.2.6 SL1D/SL1DA.......................................................................................................................................642 C.2.7 EM6T....................................................................................................................................................644 C.2.8 EM6TA.................................................................................................................................................645 C.2.9 EM6F....................................................................................................................................................645 C.2.10 EM6FA...............................................................................................................................................646 C.2.11 EFP8....................................................................................................................................................646 C.2.12 EMS6..................................................................................................................................................647 C.2.13 SP3S/SP3D.........................................................................................................................................649 C.2.14 EG2D..................................................................................................................................................650 C.2.15 ML1/MD1...........................................................................................................................................650 C.2.16 ODU....................................................................................................................................................651 C.3 Performance Events and Handling Procedures..............................................................................................652 C.3.1 AUPJCHIGH, AUPJCLOW, and AUPJCNEW...................................................................................653 C.3.2 TUPJCHIGH, TUPJCLOW, and TUPJCNEW....................................................................................654 C.3.3 RSBBE, RSES, RSSES, RSCSES, and RSUAS..................................................................................655 C.3.4 RSOOF and RSOFS..............................................................................................................................656 C.3.5 MSBBE, MSES, MSSES, MSCSES, and MSUAS..............................................................................657 C.3.6 MSFEBBE, MSFEES, MSFESES, MSFECSES, and MSFEUAS.......................................................658 Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvi

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

Contents

C.3.7 HPBBE, HPES, HPSES, HPCSES, and HPUAS.................................................................................659 C.3.8 HPFEBBE, HPFEES, HPFESES, HPFECSES, and HPFEUAS..........................................................661 C.3.9 IF_BBE, IF_ES, IF_SES, IF_CSES, and IF_UAS...............................................................................662 C.3.10 LPBBE, LPES, LPSES, LPCSES, and LPUAS..................................................................................663 C.3.11 LPFEBBE, LPFEES, LPFESES, LPFECSES, and LPFEUAS..........................................................664 C.3.12 E1_LCV_SDH, E1_LLOSS_SDH, E1_LES_SDH, and E1_LSES_SDH.........................................665 C.3.13 TSL_MAX, TSL_MIN, TSL_CUR, and TSL_AVG.........................................................................666 C.3.14 RSL_MAX, RSL_MIN, RSL_CUR, and RSL_AVG........................................................................667 C.3.15 FEC_BEF_COR_ER, FEC_COR_BYTE_CNT and FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT........................667 C.3.16 QPSKWS, QAMWS16, QAMWS32, QAMWS64, QAMWS128, and QAMWS256.......................668 C.3.17 ATPC_P_ADJUST and ATPC_N_ADJUST.....................................................................................669 C.3.18 FB_AMDCNT and FB_AMUCNT....................................................................................................670 C.3.19 RLHTT, RLLTT, TLHTT, TLLTT....................................................................................................671 C.3.20 TPLMAX, TPLMIN, and TPLCUR...................................................................................................671 C.3.21 RPLMAX, RPLMIN, and RPLCUR..................................................................................................672 C.3.22 BDTEMPMAX, BDTEMPMIN, and BDTEMPCUR........................................................................672 C.3.23 XPIC_XPD_VALUE..........................................................................................................................673 C.3.24 PG_IF_BBE, PG_IF_ES, PG_IF_SES, PG_IF_CSES, and PG_IF_UAS..........................................674 C.3.25 E1_BBE, E1_ES, E1_SES, E1_CSES, and E1_UAS.........................................................................675 C.3.26 IF_SNR_MAX, IF_SNR_MIN, and IF_SNR_AVG..........................................................................677 C.3.27 OSPITMPMAX, OSPITMPMIN, and OSPITMPCUR......................................................................677

D RMON Event Reference..........................................................................................................679


D.1 List of RMON Alarm Entries........................................................................................................................680 D.2 List of RMON Performance Entries on the Packet-Plane.............................................................................681 D.3 List of RMON Performance Entries on the EoS/EoPDH Plane....................................................................692 D.4 RMON Events and Handling Procedures......................................................................................................695 D.4.1 ETHDROP............................................................................................................................................695 D.4.2 ETHEXCCOL.......................................................................................................................................696 D.4.3 ETHLATECOL....................................................................................................................................697 D.4.4 RXBBAD..............................................................................................................................................698 D.4.5 TXDEFFRM.........................................................................................................................................699 D.4.6 ETHUNDER.........................................................................................................................................700 D.4.7 ETHOVER............................................................................................................................................701 D.4.8 ETHFRG...............................................................................................................................................701 D.4.9 ETHJAB...............................................................................................................................................702 D.4.10 ETHCOL.............................................................................................................................................703 D.4.11 ETHFCS.............................................................................................................................................704 D.4.12 ATMPW_LOSPKTS..........................................................................................................................705 D.4.13 ATMPW_MISORDERPKTS.............................................................................................................705 D.4.14 ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELLS..........................................................................................................706 D.4.15 ATM_CORRECTED_HCSERR........................................................................................................707 D.4.16 ATM_UNCORRECTED_HCSERR..................................................................................................707 Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvii

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

Contents

D.4.17 CES_MISORDERPKTS.....................................................................................................................708 D.4.18 CES_STRAYPKTS............................................................................................................................709 D.4.19 CES_MALPKTS................................................................................................................................709 D.4.20 CES_JTRUDR....................................................................................................................................710 D.4.21 CES_JTROVR....................................................................................................................................711 D.4.22 CES_LOSPKTS..................................................................................................................................711

E Alarm Management..................................................................................................................713
E.1 NE Alarm Management.................................................................................................................................714 E.2 Board Alarm Management.............................................................................................................................714 E.2.1 Setting the Alarm Severity....................................................................................................................714 E.2.2 Alarm Suppression................................................................................................................................714 E.2.3 Alarm Auto-Report...............................................................................................................................714 E.2.4 Alarm Reversion...................................................................................................................................715 E.2.5 Setting of the Bit Error Alarm Threshold.............................................................................................715 E.2.6 AIS Insertion.........................................................................................................................................716 E.2.7 UNEQ Insertion....................................................................................................................................717

F Performance Event Management...........................................................................................718


F.1 NE Performance Event Management.............................................................................................................719 F.2 Board Performance Event Management.........................................................................................................719

G Alarm Suppression Relationship..........................................................................................720 H Indicators of Boards.................................................................................................................724 I Glossary.......................................................................................................................................741


I.1 0-9....................................................................................................................................................................742 I.2 A-E..................................................................................................................................................................742 I.3 F-J....................................................................................................................................................................751 I.4 K-O..................................................................................................................................................................756 I.5 P-T...................................................................................................................................................................762 I.6 U-Z..................................................................................................................................................................771

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xviii

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

1
About This Chapter

Safety Precautions

This topic describes the safety precautions that you must follow when installing, operating, and maintaining Huawei devices. 1.1 General Safety Precautions This topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuring and testing instruments when you install, operate, and maintain Huawei devices. 1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols Before using the equipment, note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment. 1.3 Electrical Safety This topic describes safety precautions for high voltage, lightning strikes, high leakage current, power cables, fuses, and ESD. 1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas This topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device. 1.5 Storage Batteries This topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries. 1.6 Radiation This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers. 1.7 Working at Heights This topic describes safety precautions for working at heights. 1.8 Mechanical Safety This topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes, handling sharp objects, operating fans, and carrying heavy objects. 1.9 Other Precautions This topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards, binding signal cables, and routing cables.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

1.1 General Safety Precautions


This topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuring and testing instruments when you install, operate, and maintain Huawei devices.

All Safety Precautions


To ensure the safety of humans and a device, follow the marks on the device and all the safety precautions in this document when installing, operating, and maintaining a device. The "CAUTION", "WARNING", and "DANGER" marks in this document do not cover all the safety precautions that must be followed. They are supplements to the safety precautions.

Local Laws and Regulations


When operating a device, always comply with the local laws and regulations. The safety precautions provided in the documents are in addition/supplementary to the local laws and regulations.

Basic Installation Requirements


The installation and maintenance personnel of Huawei devices must receive strict training and be familiar with the proper operation methods and safety precautions before any operation. l l l l Only trained and qualified personnel are permitted to install, operate, and maintain a device. Only certified professionals are permitted to remove the safety facilities, and to troubleshoot and maintain the device. Only the personnel authenticated or authorized by Huawei are permitted to replace or change the device or parts of the device (including software). The operating personnel must immediately report the faults or errors that may cause safety problems to the person in charge.

Grounding Requirements
The grounding requirements are applicable to the device that needs to be grounded. l l l l When installing the device, always connect the grounding facilities first. When removing the device, always disconnect the grounding facilities last. Ensure that the grounding conductor is intact. Do not operate the device in the absence of a suitably installed grounding conductor. The device must be connected to the PGND permanently. Before operating the device, check the electrical connections of the device, and ensure that the device is properly grounded.

Human Safety
l l When there is a risk of a lightning strike, do not operate the fixed terminal or touch the cables. When there is risk of a lightning strike, unplug the AC power connector. Do not use the fixed terminal or touch the terminal or antenna connector.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)


NOTE

1 Safety Precautions

The preceding requirements apply to wireless fixed station terminals.

l l l

To avoid electric shocks, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits to telephone-network voltage (TNV) circuits. Do not look into optical ports without eye protection. Otherwise, human eyes may be hurt by laser beams. Before operating the device, wear an ESD protective coat, ESD gloves, and an ESD wrist strap. In addition, you need to get off the conductive objects, such as jewelry and watches, to prevent electric shock and burn. In case of fire, escape from the building or site where the device is located and press the fire alarm bell or dial the telephone number for fire alarms. Do not enter the burning building again in any situation.

Device Safety
l l l l Before any operation, install the device firmly on the ground or other rigid objects, such as on a wall or in a rack. When the system is working, ensure that the ventilation hole is not blocked. When installing the front panel, use a tool to tighten the screws firmly, if required. After installing the device, clean up the packing materials.

1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols


Before using the equipment, note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment. Table 1-1 lists the warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 980 and their meanings. Table 1-1 Warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 980 Symbol Indication This symbol is for ESD protection. A notice with this symbol indicates that you should wear an ES wrist strap or glove when you touch a board. Otherwise, you may cause damage to the board.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

This symbol is for the laser class. A notice with this symbol indicates the class of the laser. Avoid direct exposure to the laser beams. Otherwise, it may damage you eyes or skin.

LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

Symbol

Indication A notice with this symbol indicates where the subrack is grounded.

ATTENTION
CLEAN PERIODICALLY

A notice with this symbol indicates that the air filter should be cleaned periodically.

DON'T TOUCH THE FAN LEAVES BEFORE THEY SLOW DOWN !

This symbol is for fan safety. A notice with this symbol indicates that the fan leaves should not be touched when the fan is rotating.

1.3 Electrical Safety


This topic describes safety precautions for high voltage, lightning strikes, high leakage current, power cables, fuses, and ESD.

High Voltage

DANGER
l A high-voltage power supply provides power for device operations. Direct human contact with the high voltage power supply or human contact through damp objects can be fatal. l Unspecified or unauthorized high voltage operations could result in fire or electric shock, or both.

Thunderstorm
The requirements apply only to wireless base stations or devices with antennas and feeders.

DANGER
Do not perform operations on high voltage, AC power, towers, or backstays in stormy weather conditions.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

High Leakage Current

WARNING
Before powering on a device, ground the device. Otherwise, the safety of humans and the device cannot be ensured. If a high leakage current mark is labeled near the power connector of the device, you must connect the PGND terminal on the shell to the ground before connecting the device to an A/C input power supply. This is to prevent the electric shock caused by leakage current of the device.

Power Cables

DANGER
Do not install or remove the power cable with a live line. Transient contact between the core of the power cable and the conductor may generate electric arc or spark, which may cause fire or eye injury. l l Before installing or removing power cables, you must power off the device. Before connecting a power cable, you must ensure that the label on the power cable is correct.

Device with Power On

DANGER
Installing or removing a device is prohibited if the device is on.

DANGER
Do not install or remove the power cables of the equipment when it is powered on.

Short Circuits
When installing and maintaining devices, place and use the associated tools and instruments in accordance with regulations to avoid short-circuits caused by metal objects.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

CAUTION
To avoid short-circuits when using a tool (such as a screwdriver), do not place the tool on the ventilation plate of the subrack.

CAUTION
Prevent any screws from dropping into the subrack or chassis to avoid short-circuits.

Fuse

WARNING
If the fuse on a device blows, replace the fuse with a fuse of the same type and specifications to ensure safe operation of the device.

Electrostatic Discharge

CAUTION
The static electricity generated by the human body may damage the electrostatic sensitive components on the board, such as the large-scale integrated circuit (LSI). l The human body can generate static electromagnetic fields in the following situations: physical movement, clothing friction, friction between shoes and the ground, plastics in the hand. Such static electromagnetic effects can remain for an appreciable time. Before operating a device, circuit boards, or ASICs, wear an ESD wrist strap that is properly grounded. The ESD wrist strap can prevent the electrostatic-sensitive components from being damaged by the static electricity in the human body.

Figure 1-1 shows the method of wearing an ESD wrist strap.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

Figure 1-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap

1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas


This topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device.

DANGER
Do not place or operate devices in an environment of flammable or explosive air or gas. Operating an electronic device in an environment of flammable gas causes a severe hazard.

1.5 Storage Batteries


This topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries.

DANGER
Before operating a storage battery, you must read the safety precautions carefully and be familiar with the method of connecting a storage battery. l l l Incorrect operations of storage batteries cause hazards. During operation, prevent any shortcircuit, and prevent the electrolyte from overflowing or leakage. If the electrolyte overflows, it causes potential hazards to the device. The electrolyte may corrode metal parts and the circuit boards, and ultimately damage the circuit boards. A storage battery contains a great deal of energy. Misoperations may cause a short-circuit, which leads to human injuries.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

Basic Precautions
To ensure safety, note the following points before installing or maintaining the storage battery: l l l l l Use special insulation tools. Wear an eye protector and take effective protection measures. Wear rubber gloves and a protection coat to prevent the hazard caused by the overflowing electrolyte. When handling the storage battery, ensure that its electrodes are upward. Leaning or reversing the storage battery is prohibited. Before installing or maintaining the storage battery, ensure that the storage battery is disconnected from the power supply that charges the storage battery.

Short-Circuit

DANGER
A battery short-circuit may cause human injuries. Although the voltage of an ordinary battery is low, the instantaneous high current caused by a short-circuit emits a great deal of energy. Avoid any short-circuit of batteries caused by metal objects. If possible, disconnect the working battery before performing other operations.

Hazardous Gas

CAUTION
Do not use any unsealed lead-acid storage battery. Lay a storage battery horizontally and fix it properly to prevent the battery from emitting flammable gas, which may cause fire or device erosion. Working lead-acid storage batteries emit flammable gas. Therefore, ventilation and fireproofing measures must be taken at the sites where lead-acid storage batteries are placed.

Battery Temperature

CAUTION
If a battery overheats, the battery may be deformed or damaged, and the electrolyte may overflow. When the temperature of the battery is higher than 60C, you need to check whether the electrolyte overflows. If the electrolyte overflows, take appropriate measures immediately.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

Battery Leakage

CAUTION
In the event of acid overflow or spillage, neutralize the acid and clean it up appropriately. When handling a leaky battery, protect against the possible damage caused by the acid. When you find the electrolyte leaks, you can use the following substances to counteract and absorb the leaking electrolyte: l l Sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3) Sodium carbonate (Na2CO3)

In the event of acid overflow or spillage, neutralize the acid and clean it up as recommended by the battery manufacturer and any local regulations for acid disposal. If a person contacts battery electrolyte, clean the skin that contacts the battery electrolyte immediately by using water. In case of a severe situation, the person must be sent to a hospital immediately.

1.6 Radiation
This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers.

1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers


The laser beam can cause damage to your eyes. Hence, you must exercise caution when using optical fibers.

DANGER
When installing or maintaining an optical interface board or optical fibers, avoid direct eye exposure to the laser beams launched from the optical interface board or fiber connectors. The laser beam can cause damage to your eyes.

Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Optical Interfaces

CAUTION
If fiber connectors or flanges are contaminated, optical power commissioning is seriously affected. Therefore, the two endfaces and flange of every external fiber must be cleaned before the fiber is led into the equipment through the ODF for being inserted into an optical interface on the equipment.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

The fiber connectors and optical interfaces of the lasers must be cleaned with the following special cleaning tools and materials: l l l l l l Special cleaning solvent: It is preferred to use isoamylol. Propyl alcohol, however, can also be used. It is prohibited that you use alcohol and formalin. Non-woven lens tissue Special compressed gas Cotton stick (medical cotton or long fiber cotton) Special cleaning roll, used with the recommended cleaning solvent Special magnifier for fiber connectors

For cleaning steps, see Task Collection "Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters" in the OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance and Troubleshooting.

Replacing Optical Fibers


When replacing an optical fiber, cover the fiber connector of the unused optical fiber with a protective cap.

Connecting Optical Fibers


l l l Use an attenuator if the optical power is excessively high. A high received optical power damages the optical interface. Directly connect an attenuator to a slanting optical interface. Install the attenuator on the IN port instead of the OUT port. Do not directly connect an attenuator to the level optical interface. Use the optical distribution frame (ODF) to connect an attenuator to a level optical interface.

Figure 1-2 shows a slanting optical interface, and Figure 1-3 shows a level optical interface. Figure 1-2 Slanting optical interface

Slanting optical interface

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

Figure 1-3 Level optical interface

Level optical interface

1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure


This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure. If multiple transmit antennas are installed on a tower or backstay, keep away from the transmit directions of the antennas when you install or maintain an antenna locally.

CAUTION
Ensure that all personnel are beyond the transmit direction of a working antenna.

1.6.3 Forbidden Areas


The topic describes requirements for a forbidden area. l Before entering an area where the electromagnetic radiation is beyond the specified range, the associated personnel must shut down the electromagnetic radiator or stay at least 10 meters away from the electromagnetic radiator, if in the transmit direction. A physical barrier and an eye-catching warning flag should be available in each forbidden area.

1.6.4 Laser
This topic describes safety precautions for lasers.

WARNING
When handling optical fibers, do not stand close to, or look into the optical fiber outlet directly without eye protection.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

Laser transceivers are used in the optical transmission system and associated test tools. The laser transmitted through the bare optical fiber produces a small beam of light, and therefore it has very high power density and is invisible to human eyes. When a beam of light enters eyes, the eyes may be damaged. In normal cases, viewing an un-terminated optical fiber or a damaged optical fiber without eye protection at a distance greater than 150 mm does not cause eye injury. Eye injury may occur, however, if an optical tool such as a microscope, magnifying glass, or eye loupe is used to view an un-terminated optical fiber.

Safety Instructions Regarding Lasers


To avoid laser radiation, obey the following instructions: l l l l l l l All operations should be performed by authorized personnel who have completed the required training courses. Wear a pair of eye-protective glasses when you are handling lasers or fibers. Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber connectors. Do not look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector when you are not sure whether the optical source is switched off. Use an optical power meter to measure the optical power and ensure that the optical source is switched off. Before opening the front door of an optical transmission device, ensure that you are not exposed to laser radiation. Do not use an optical tool such as a microscope, a magnifying glass, or an eye loupe to view the optical connector or fiber that is transmitting optical signals.

Instructions Regarding Fiber Handling


Read and abide by the following instructions before handling fibers: l l Only trained personnel are permitted to cut and splice fibers. Before cutting or splicing a fiber, ensure that the fiber is disconnected from the optical source. After disconnecting the fiber, cap to the fiber connectors.

1.6.5 Microwave
When installing and maintaining the equipment of Huawei, follow the safety precautions of microwave to ensure the safety of the human body and the equipment.

WARNING
Strong radio frequency can harm the human body. When installing or maintaining an aerial on the tower or mast that is installed with multiple aerials, switch off the transmitter in advance.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

1.7 Working at Heights


This topic describes safety precautions for working at heights.

WARNING
When working at heights, be cautious to prevent objects from falling down. The requirements for working at heights are as follows: l l l l l The personnel who work at heights must be trained. Carry and handle the operating machines and tools with caution to prevent them from falling down. Safety measures, such as wearing a helmet and a safety belt, must be taken. Wear cold-proof clothes when working at heights in cold areas. Check all lifting appliances thoroughly before starting the work, and ensure that they are intact.

1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects


This topic describes the safety precautions for hoisting heavy objects that you must follow when installing, operating, and maintaining Huawei devices.

WARNING
When heavy objects are being hoisted, do not walk below the cantilever or hoisted objects. l l l l l Only trained and qualified personnel can perform hoisting operations. Before hoisting heavy objects, check that the hoisting tools are complete and in good condition. Before hoisting heavy objects, ensure that the hoisting tools are fixed to a secure object or wall with good weight-bearing capacity. Issue orders with short and explicit words to ensure correct operations. Ensure that the angle between the two cables is less than or equal to 90 degrees during the lifting, as shown in Figure 1-4.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

Figure 1-4 Hoisting heavy objects

1.7.2 Using Ladders


This topic describes safety precautions for using ladders.

Checking Ladders
l l Before using a ladder, check whether the ladder is damaged. After checking that the ladder is in good condition, you can use the ladder. Before using a ladder, you should know the maximum weight capacity of the ladder. Avoid overweighing the ladder.

Placing Ladders
The proper slant angle of the ladder is 75 degrees. You can measure the slant angle of the ladder with an angle square or your arms, as shown in Figure 1-5. When using a ladder, to prevent the ladder from sliding, ensure that the wider feet of the ladder are downward, or take protection measures for the ladder feet. Ensure that the ladder is placed securely.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

Figure 1-5 Slanting a ladder

Climbing Up a Ladder
When climbing up a ladder, pay attention to the following points: l l l Ensure that the center of gravity of your body does not deviate from the edges of the two long sides. Before operations, ensure that your body is stable to reduce risks. Do not climb higher than the fourth rung of the ladder (counted from up to down).

If you want to climb up a roof, ensure that the ladder top is at least one meter higher than the roof, as shown in Figure 1-6. Figure 1-6 Ladder top being one meter higher than the roof

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

1.8 Mechanical Safety


This topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes, handling sharp objects, operating fans, and carrying heavy objects.

Drilling Holes

WARNING
Do not drill holes on the cabinet without prior permission. Drilling holes without complying with the requirements affects the electromagnetic shielding performance of the cabinet and damages the cables inside the cabinet. In addition, if the scraps caused by drilling enter the cabinet, the printed circuit boards (PCBs) may be short-circuited. l l l l Before drilling a hole on the cabinet, remove the cables inside the cabinet. Wear an eye protector when drilling holes. This is to prevent eyes from being injured by the splashing metal scraps. Wear protection gloves when drilling holes. Take measures to prevent the metallic scraps from falling into the cabinet. After the drilling, clean up the metallic scraps.

Sharp Objects

WARNING
Wear protection gloves when carrying the device. This is to prevent hands from being injured by the sharp edges of the device.

Fans
l l When replacing parts, place the objects such as the parts, screws, and tools properly. This is to prevent them from falling into the operating fans, which damages the fans or device. When replacing the parts near fans, keep your fingers or boards from touching operating fans before the fans are powered off and stop running. Otherwise, the hands or the boards are damaged.

Carrying Heavy Objects


Wear protection gloves when carrying heavy objects. This is to prevent hands from being hurt.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

WARNING
l The carrier must be prepared for load bearing before carrying heavy objects. This is to prevent the carrier from being strained or pressed by the heavy objects. l When you pull a chassis out of the cabinet, pay attention to the unstable or heavy objects on the cabinet. This is to prevent the heavy objects on the cabinet top from falling down, which may hurt you. l Generally, two persons are needed to carry a chassis. It is prohibited that only one person carries a heavy chassis. When carrying a chassis, the carriers should stretch their backs and move stably to avoid being strained. When moving or lifting a chassis, hold the handles or bottom of the chassis. Do not hold the handles of the modules installed in the chassis, such as the power modules, fan modules, and boards.

1.9 Other Precautions


This topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards, binding signal cables, and routing cables.

Removing and Inserting a Board

CAUTION
When inserting a board, wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and handle the board gently to avoid distorting pins on the backplane. l l l Slide the board along the guide rails. Do not contact one board with another to avoid short-circuits or damage. When holding a board in hand, do not touch the board circuits, components, connectors, or connection slots of the board to prevent damage caused by ESD of the human body to the electrostatic-sensitive components.

Binding Signal Cables

CAUTION
Bind the signal cables separately from the high-current or high-voltage cables.

Routing Cables
In the case of extremely low temperature, heavy shock or vibration may damage the plastic skin of the cables. To ensure the construction safety, comply with the following requirements:
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

l l

When installing cables, ensure that the environment temperature is above 0C. If the cables are stored in a place where the ambient temperature is below 0C, transfer them to a place at room temperature and store the cables for more than 24 hours before installation. Handle the cables gently, especially in a low-temperature environment. Do not perform any improper operations, for example, pushing the cables down directly from a truck.

High Temperature

WARNING
If the ambient temperature exceeds 55C, the temperature of the front panel surface marked the flag may exceed 70C. When touching the front panel of the board in such an environment, you must wear the protection gloves.

IF Cables

WARNING
Before installing or removing an IF cable, you must turn off the power switch of the IF board.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

Notices for High-Risk Operations

About This Chapter


This chapter provides notices for the operations that may cause bodily injury or equipment damage if they are not performed properly during the commissioning and maintenance of microwave equipment. 2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch The ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is a toggle lever switch which must be turned on and off as per the following instructions to avoid damaging the IF board. 2.2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper Before removing or installing an IF jumper, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU. 2.3 Operation Guide for the IF Cable Before removing or installing an IF cable, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU. 2.4 Operation Guide for the IF Board Before removing or installing an IF board, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

19

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch


The ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is a toggle lever switch which must be turned on and off as per the following instructions to avoid damaging the IF board.

Position and Description of the Toggle Lever Switch


The toggle lever switch is located on the IF board and controls the power that is fed to the ODU, as shown in Figure 2-1. Figure 2-1 Toggle lever switch

Turning On the Toggle Lever Switch


1. Gently pull on the toggle lever switch out.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

20

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

2.

Turn it to the left.

3.

Release the toggle lever switch.

Turning Off the Toggle Lever Switch


1. Gently pull on the toggle lever switch.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

21

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

2.

Turn it to the right.

3.

Release the toggle lever switch.

2.2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper


Before removing or installing an IF jumper, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU.

Procedure
Step 1 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

22

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

DANGER
Ensure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF jumper. Step 2 Remove or install the IF jumper. ----End

2.3 Operation Guide for the IF Cable


Before removing or installing an IF cable, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU.

Procedure
Step 1 Turn off the ODU power switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

23

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

2 1

DANGER
Ensure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF cable. Step 2 Install or remove the IF cable. ----End

2.4 Operation Guide for the IF Board


Before removing or installing an IF board, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU.

Procedure
Step 1 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

24

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

DANGER
Ensure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF board. Step 2 Disconnect the IF jumper or IF cable. Step 3 Remove or install the IF board. ----End

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

25

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

3 Routine Maintenance

3
Maintenance Item

Routine Maintenance

Routine maintenance operations are performed to detect and rectify hidden faults before the hidden faults cause damage to equipment and affect services. Routine maintenance operations are preventive measures. For the OptiX RTN 980, routine maintenance items are classified into routine maintenance items carried out on the network management system (NMS), field maintenance items for indoor equipment, and field maintenance items for outdoor equipment.

Routine Maintenance Items Carried Out on the NMS


Recomm ended Mainten ance Cycle Every day Every day Every week Every week Every week Every week Every week Remarks

Checking the NE Status Browsing Current Alarms Browsing History Alarms Browsing Abnormal Events Browsing Current Performance Events Browsing History Performance Events Browsing History Transmit Power and Receive Power

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

26

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

3 Routine Maintenance

Maintenance Item

Recomm ended Mainten ance Cycle Half a year

Remarks

Testing IF 1+1 Switching

Applies only to the equipment that is configured in 1+1 protection mode. During the 1+1 protection switching, the protected services are interrupted. Hence, it is recommended that you perform the 1+1 protection switching when the traffic is light. Applies only to the equipment that is configured with N+1 protection.

Testing the IF N+1 Switching

Half a year

Field Maintenance Items for Indoor Equipment


Maintenance Item Checking the Telecommunications Room Recommended Maintenance Cycle Every two months Remarks -

Field Maintenance Items for Outdoor Equipment


Maintenance Item Recommended Maintenance Cycle Half a year Half a year Half a year Half a year Remarks

Checking the ODU Checking the Hybrid Coupler Checking the Antenna Checking the IF Cable

Carry out a complete check after a level-8 or higher hurricane, an earthquake, or other exceptional circumstances. In an area close to a pollution sourcea, the coating may be corroded. In the case of any coating corrosion, contact Huawei representative

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

27

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

3 Routine Maintenance

Maintenance Item

Recommended Maintenance Cycle Half a year

Remarks

Checking the LOS Condition

offices for maintenance.

NOTE
a:

An area close to a pollution source refers to the area that covers a radius within any of the following values: 3.7 km away from salty waters (such as an ocean and salty water), 3 km away from severe pollution sources (such as iron refinery works, and coal mines), 2 km away from intermediate pollution sources (such as chemical plants, rubber processing works, and electroplating workshops), and 1 km away from light pollution sources (such as food processing works, leather working plants, and heating boilers).

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

28

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

4 Emergency Maintenance

4
About This Chapter

Emergency Maintenance

Emergency maintenance operations are performed in the case of emergencies or natural factors that may result in emergencies during the operation of the equipment. 4.1 Definition of Emergency For microwave equipment, an emergency refers to interruption of microwave services. 4.2 Purposes of Emergency Maintenance Emergency maintenance operations are performed to restore the services quickly. This is different from troubleshooting, whose purposes are to locate and rectify the faults. 4.3 Procedure for Emergency Maintenance The procedure for emergency maintenance consists of a main procedure and a sub-procedure for field troubleshooting.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

29

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

4 Emergency Maintenance

4.1 Definition of Emergency


For microwave equipment, an emergency refers to interruption of microwave services.

4.2 Purposes of Emergency Maintenance


Emergency maintenance operations are performed to restore the services quickly. This is different from troubleshooting, whose purposes are to locate and rectify the faults.

4.3 Procedure for Emergency Maintenance


The procedure for emergency maintenance consists of a main procedure and a sub-procedure for field troubleshooting.
NOTE

In the case of emergency events, the customers in China can contact the 24-hour technical support center of Huawei at 400-830-2118, and the customers in areas outside China can contact the local Huawei offices.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

30

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

4 Emergency Maintenance

Main Procedure for Emergency Maintenance


Figure 4-1 Main procedure for emergency maintenance
Start

Is there an incorrect operation? No

Yes Cancel the operation

Service interruoted by external causes?

Yes

Contact tealted departments to handle the problem

No Query NE status and alarms by using the NMS

NE access successful and alaarms cleared? No Rectify the fault on site

Yes Clear the alarm

Proceed with the next step

No

Is the service restored? Yes

Is the service restored?

No

Contact Huawei engineers

Yes 5 Check the troubleshooting result

End

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

31

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

4 Emergency Maintenance

Table 4-1 Description of the main procedure for emergency maintenance Comment No. 1 Description The common incorrect operations are as follows: l Modifying data configuration l Performing loopback operations l Shutting down the laser l Muting the ODU l Replacing boards/cables l Loading the software 2 3 Faults owing to external factors, including the power supply, cables, environment, and terminal equipment (such as switch devices) The procedure is as follows: 1. Check the NE status. 2. If the NE is unreachable to the NMS, perform field troubleshooting according to Figure 4-2. If alarms are reported on the NE, browse the current alarms. 4 Generally, the following alarms can be cleared on the NMS: APS_MANUAL_STOP, APS_FAIL, BD_NOT_INSTALLED, DBMS_ERROR, ETH_APS_LOST, ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL, ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATCH, HP_TIM, HP_UNEQ, IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN, IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN, J0_MM, LOOP_ALM, LPS_UNI_BI_M, LP_SLM, LP_TIM, LP_UNEQ, NESOFT_MM, NESF_LOST, RADIO_MUTE, WRG_BD_TYPE, ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI, ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK, MW_CFG_MISMATCH. After the fault is rectified, proceed as follows: 1. Check the alarms, and ensure that the system is running properly. 2. Assign personnel to monitor the operation of the system during the peak service hour, ensuring that subsequent faults can be handled in time. 3. Fill in the field maintenance operation sheet, record the fault symptoms and troubleshooting results, and then send them to Huawei. Table 4-2 shows the field maintenance operation sheet.

Table 4-2 Field maintenance operation sheet Maintained on Actual Step Step in the Entire Procedure Maintained by Troubleshooting Result Remarks

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

32

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

4 Emergency Maintenance

Maintained on Actual Step Step in the Entire Procedure

Maintained by Troubleshooting Result Remarks

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

33

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

4 Emergency Maintenance

Field Troubleshooting Sub-Procedure


Figure 4-2 Field troubleshooting sub-procedure
Start

Obvious equipment Yes damage? No

Repair or replace the equipment

Is the PWR indicator on the PIU on?


2 Yes Browse alarms locally by using the LCT 3 Equipment alarm? No 4 Radio link alarm? No 5 Yes Yes

No

Troubleshoot the power input

Clear the alarm

Clear the alarm

High order path alarm?


No

Yes

Clear the alarm

Low order path alarm?


No

Yes

Clear the alarm

Faulty interconnection with SDH/PDH equipment?


No

Yes

7 Troubleshoot the inter-connection faulty 8

Packet service fault?


No

Yes

Troubleshoot the packet service fault

Locate the fault by performing loopback operations section by section

Proceed to the next step

No

Is the service restored?

Yes End

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

34

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

4 Emergency Maintenance

Table 4-3 Description of the field troubleshooting sub-procedure Comment No. 1 Description The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. Check whether the circuit breaker for the input power is off. If the circuit breaker is automatically turned off, find the cause (such as short circuits or insufficient fuse capacity), and rectify the fault accordingly. 2. Check the power cables, especially the connectors of the power cables. If the power cables or connectors of the power cables are incorrect, replace the power cables or re-prepare the connectors of the power cables. 3. Check the voltage and polarization of the input power. If the voltage or polarization of the input power does not meet the requirements, contact power engineers for troubleshooting.
NOTE l The fuse capacity should meet the requirement of actual power consumption. The following formula can be used to calculate the fuse capacity: Fuse capacity = (Total power consumption x 1.5) / (Rated voltage x 87.5%). l The rated voltage of the input power is -48 V/-60 V and the permitted voltage ranges from -38.4 V to -72.0 V.

The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU. 2. Creating NEs by Using the Search Method. 3. Logging In to an NE. 4. Checking Alarms.
NOTE If you fail to log in to the created NE, ensure that the operations you performed are correct, and then locate and rectify the fault according to the indicators of the system control, switching, and timing board. For details about the indicators, see the OptiX RTN 980 IDU Hardware Description.

Pay special attention to the following alarms: l HARD_BAD l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL l BD_STATUS l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l RADIO_RSL_HIGH l RADIO_RSL_LOW l RADIO_TSL_HIGH l RADIO_TSL_LOW l IF_INPWR_ABN l IF_CABLE_OPEN l VOLT_LOS

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

35

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

4 Emergency Maintenance

Comment No. 4

Description Pay special attention to the following alarms: l PG_LINK_FAIL l PG_PRT_DEGRADED l MW_LIM l MW_LOF l R_LOS l R_LOF l R_LOC l MS_AIS l AU_AIS l AU_LOP l B1_EXC l B2_EXC l MW_BER_EXC

Pay special attention to the following alarms: l HP_LOM l B3_EXC l HP_UNEQ

Pay special attention to the following alarms: l TU_AIS l TU_LOP l BIP_EXC l LP_UNEQ l T_ALOS l E1_LOC

7 8

See 5.6 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with SDH Equipment or 5.7 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with PDH Equipment. See 5.8 Troubleshooting Native Ethernet Service Faults, 5.9 Troubleshooting Ethernet Service on the EoS/EoPDH Plane, 5.11 Troubleshooting CES Services, 5.12 Troubleshooting ATM Services, and 5.13 Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Carried by PWs.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

36

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

5
About This Chapter

Troubleshooting

This guide describes the general troubleshooting procedure and the methods of rectifying the common faults. 5.1 General Troubleshooting Procedure When handling a fault, make a detailed record of the fault phenomena. The customers in China can contact our 24-hour technical support center at 400-830-2118, and the customers in areas outside China can contact the local Huawei offices. 5.2 Troubleshooting Service Interruptions The service interruption fault indicates the service transmission failure due to an equipment fault or a link fault. 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link When an NE reports MW_LOF, MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD or MW_FEC_UNCOR due to failure or performance deterioration of a radio link, there is a radio link fault. 5.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors in TDM Services When an NE reports an alarm or a performance event on the IF board, regenerator section (RS), multiplex section (MS), higher order path (HP), or lower order path (LP), there are bit errors in services. 5.5 Troubleshooting Pointer Justifications When an NE reports a large number of justification events about the administrative unit (AU) pointer or the tributary unit (TU) pointer, there are pointer justification faults. 5.6 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with SDH Equipment An interconnection fault occurs when the NE fails in transmitting SDH services with other SDH equipment. 5.7 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with PDH Equipment An interconnection fault occurs when the NE fails in transmitting PDH services with other PDH equipment. 5.8 Troubleshooting Native Ethernet Service Faults An Ethernet service fault may be the Ethernet service interruption or Ethernet service deterioration.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 37

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

5.9 Troubleshooting Ethernet Service on the EoS/EoPDH Plane The Ethernet services transmitted on the EoS/EoPDH plane can be transmitted over a TDM network. The faults of the EoS/EoPDH-plane Ethernet services include service interruption and service degradation. 5.10 Troubleshooting MPLS Tunnels This section describes how to troubleshoot MPLS tunnels by using the MPLS OAM function or MPLS Ping/Traceroute function. 5.11 Troubleshooting CES Services This section describes how to troubleshoot CES services that are interrupted or degraded. 5.12 Troubleshooting ATM Services This section describes how to troubleshoot ATM services that are interrupted or degraded. 5.13 Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Carried by PWs This section describes how to troubleshoot Ethernet services that are carried by PWs and transmitted in the PSN. These Ethernet services are considered faulty when they are interrupted or deteriorate. 5.14 Troubleshooting Orderwire Faults If orderwire calls cannot get through when services are normal, there is an orderwire fault.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

38

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

5.1 General Troubleshooting Procedure


When handling a fault, make a detailed record of the fault phenomena. The customers in China can contact our 24-hour technical support center at 400-830-2118, and the customers in areas outside China can contact the local Huawei offices.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

39

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

General Troubleshooting Procedure


Figure 5-1 General troubleshooting procedure

Start
1

Record the fault phenomena

Caused by external factors? No

Yes

Other troubleshooting procedures

Analyze fault causes and locate the fault

Is the fault rectified?


4

Yes

No Report to Huawei

Make a solution together

Attempt to rectify the fault

No

Is the service restored? Yes Observe the operation

No

Is the fault rectified? Yes Fill in the troubleshooting report

End

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

40

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-1 General troubleshooting procedure Comment No. 1 Description When recording the fault phenomena, make a true and detailed record of the entire process of the fault. Record the exact time when the fault occurs and the operations performed before and after the fault occurs. Save the alarms, performance events, and other important information. You can use the click-to-collect function on the U2000 to collect data. Faults owing to external factors, including the power supply, cables, environment, and terminal equipment (such as switch devices) If the fault is caused by the equipment, see 5.2 Troubleshooting Service Interruptions. To provide feedbacks or obtain technical support, customers in China can contact the 24-hour technical support center at 400-830-2118, and the customers in areas outside China can contact the local Huawei offices.

2 3 4

5.2 Troubleshooting Service Interruptions


The service interruption fault indicates the service transmission failure due to an equipment fault or a link fault.

Fault Causes
l The operation is improper. The configuration data changes, the loopback is performed, the cable is replaced, or the board is replaced. l l The transmission NE or link is faulty. The interconnection is improper. If the transmission equipment functions normally and the connection is normal, check whether the interconnection between the transmission equipment is proper and whether the switch equipment is faulty.

Fault Locating Methods


1. 2. Check the operations before the service interruption to determine whether the service interruption results from an incorrect operation. Query alarms on the centralized NMS or the NMS that is used on the site, and then locate the fault based on the alarm analysis. If multiple NEs report alarms, analyze the alarms in the following order: equipment alarm, line alarm, higher order path alarm, and lower order path alarm. 3. If the fault cannot be located through the alarm analysis method, locate the fault by performing loopback section by section or replacing the corresponding parts.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 41

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

CAUTION
If the fault cannot be rectified immediately, restore the services quickly by adjusting the service route or performing a forced switching.

Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-2 General procedure for troubleshooting the service interruption
Start

Incorrect operation?

Yes

Cancel the operation

No

Service interrupted by external causes? No


Query NE status and alarms by using the centralized NMS

Yes

Contact related departments to solve the problem

NE access successful and alarms cleared? No

Yes

Clear the alarm

Rectify the fault on site

Proceed with the next step

No Service restored?

Yes

End

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

42

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-2 Description of the general procedure for troubleshooting the service interruption Comment No. 1 Description The common incorrect operations are as follows: l Modifying the data configuration l Loopback l Shutting down the laser l Muting the ODU l Replacing the board or cable l Loading the software 2 3 4 Faults owing to external factors, including the power supply, cables, environment, and terminal equipment (such as switch devices) For details, see 8.3.1 Checking the NE Status and 8.3.3 Browsing Current Alarms. Generally, the following alarms can be cleared on the NMS: APS_MANUAL_STOP, APS_FAIL, BD_NOT_INSTALLED, DBMS_ERROR, HP_TIM, HP_UNEQ, J0_MM, LOOP_ALM, LPS_UNI_BI_M, LP_SLM, LP_TIM, LP_UNEQ, NESOFT_MM, NESF_LOST, NESTATE_INSTALL, MW_CFG_MISMATCH, RADIO_MUTE, and WRG_BD_TYPE.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

43

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Figure 5-3 Field troubleshooting sub-procedure


Start

Obvious equipment Yes damage? No

Repair or replace the equipment

Is the PWR indicator on the PIU on?


2 Yes Browse alarms locally by using the LCT 3 Equipment alarm? No 4 Radio link alarm? No 5 Yes Yes

No

Troubleshoot the power input

Clear the alarm

Clear the alarm

High order path alarm?


No

Yes

Clear the alarm

Low order path alarm?


No

Yes

Clear the alarm

Faulty interconnection with SDH/PDH equipment?


No

Yes

7 Troubleshoot the inter-connection faulty 8

Packet service fault?


No

Yes

Troubleshoot the packet service fault

Locate the fault by performing loopback operations section by section

Proceed to the next step

No

Is the service restored?

Yes End

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

44

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-3 Description of the field troubleshooting sub-procedure Comment No. 1 Description The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. Check whether the circuit breaker for the input power is off. If the circuit breaker is automatically turned off, find the cause (such as short circuits or insufficient fuse capacity), and rectify the fault accordingly. 2. Check the power cables, especially the connectors of the power cables. If the power cables or connectors of the power cables are incorrect, replace the power cables or re-prepare the connectors of the power cables. 3. Check the voltage and polarization of the input power. If the voltage or polarization of the input power does not meet the requirements, contact power engineers for troubleshooting.
NOTE l The fuse capacity should meet the requirement of actual power consumption. The following formula can be used to calculate the fuse capacity: Fuse capacity = (Total power consumption x 1.5) / (Rated voltage x 87.5%). l The rated voltage of the input power is -48 V/-60 V and the permitted voltage ranges from -38.4 V to -72.0 V.

The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU. 2. Creating NEs by Using the Search Method. 3. Logging In to an NE. 4. Checking Alarms.
NOTE If you fail to log in to the created NE, ensure that the operations you performed are correct, and then locate and rectify the fault according to the indicators of the system control, switching, and timing board. For details about the indicators, see the OptiX RTN 980 IDU Hardware Description.

Pay special attention to the following alarms: l HARD_BAD l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL l BD_STATUS l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l RADIO_RSL_HIGH l RADIO_RSL_LOW l RADIO_TSL_HIGH l RADIO_TSL_LOW l IF_INPWR_ABN l IF_CABLE_OPEN l VOLT_LOS

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

45

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Comment No. 4

Description Pay special attention to the following alarms: l PG_LINK_FAIL l PG_PRT_DEGRADED l MW_LIM l MW_LOF l R_LOS l R_LOF l R_LOC l MS_AIS l AU_AIS l AU_LOP l B1_EXC l B2_EXC l MW_BER_EXC

Pay special attention to the following alarms: l HP_LOM l B3_EXC l HP_UNEQ

Pay special attention to the following alarms: l TU_AIS l TU_LOP l BIP_EXC l LP_UNEQ l T_ALOS l E1_LOC

7 8

See 5.6 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with SDH Equipment or 5.7 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with PDH Equipment. See 5.8 Troubleshooting Native Ethernet Service Faults, 5.9 Troubleshooting Ethernet Service on the EoS/EoPDH Plane, 5.11 Troubleshooting CES Services, 5.12 Troubleshooting ATM Services, and 5.13 Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Carried by PWs.

Experience and Summary


The maintenance personnel need to perform the routine maintenance operations periodically, to detect and rectify faults before the faults affect the services and thus to reduce the equipment fault rate.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

46

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link


When an NE reports MW_LOF, MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD or MW_FEC_UNCOR due to failure or performance deterioration of a radio link, there is a radio link fault.

Context
The key to locating a radio link fault is to check whether the transmit power and the receive power are normal and whether there is an external interference. In the following two cases, the transmit power is abnormal. The first case is that the transmit power exceeds the range that the ODU supports. The second case is that the difference between the actual transmit power and the preset value is more than 2 dB when the ATPC is disabled. The relevant alarms and performance events are as follows: l l l l l l RADIO_TSL_HIGH RADIO_TSL_LOW TSL_CUR TSL_MAX TSL_MIN TSL_AVG
NOTE

For the range of the transmit power, see the OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Product Description.

In the following two cases, the receive power is abnormal. In the first case, the receive power is lower than the normal value (Normal value = Planned value - 3 dB). In the second case, the receive power is lower than the receiver sensitivity or higher than the free space receive power due to fading. The relevant alarms and performance events are as follows: l l l l l l l l RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH RADIO_RSL_HIGH RADIO_RSL_LOW RSL_CUR RSL_MAX RSL_MIN RSL_AVG
NOTE

In the case of the radio link whose AM function is enabled, the receiver sensitivity is the specific receiver sensitivity at the guaranteed capacity. For details on the receiver sensitivity, see the OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Product Description.

Generally, external interference is classified into co-channel interference and adjacent channel interference.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 47

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

l l

Co-channel interference refers to crosstalk from two different radio transmitters that use the same frequency channel. Hence, the entire spectrum may be affected. Adjacent channel interference refers to signal impairment to one frequency, due to presence of another signal on a nearby frequency. Hence, a part of the spectrum is affected.

Interference is closely related to the frequency. Hence, the radio link may be faulty in one direction if interference exists on the radio link.

Fault Causes
Table 5-4 Causes of radio link faults Fault The transmit power is abnormal. The receive power is always lower than the normal value. Common Fault Cause The ODU is faulty. l The antenna direction is not adjusted properly. l The antennas have different polarization directions. l There is a mountain or building in the transmit direction. l The antenna is faulty or the connection between the antenna and the ODU is abnormal (for example, the waveguide interface of the ODU is wet or the flexible waveguide is not connected properly). l The ODU is faulty. The receive power is abnormal due to slow down fading. The receive power is abnormal due to fast fading. The receive power is normal or slow up fading occurs, but the signal-noise ratio (SNR) is abnormal. The fading margin is insufficient. The multipath fading is fast. There is external interference.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

48

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)


NOTE

5 Troubleshooting

Based on the RSL, fading is classified into up fading and down fading. l Up fading The RSL is higher than the RSL in the free space. The difference can be 10-odd decibels. l Down fading The RSL is lower than the RSL after free space fading. The difference can be tens of decibels. Based on the fading time, fading is classified into fast fading and slow fading. l Fast fading The fading lasts from several milliseconds to tens of seconds. Generally, fast fading is caused by multipath fading. It occurs periodically. To be specific, fast fading occurs in the period from 18:00 to 20:00 of a day or in a certain season of a year. l Slow fading The fading lasts from tens of seconds to several hours. Generally, slow up fading is caused by interference. Slow down fading is caused by rain, and therefore is also called rain fading. Rain fading occurs on links working at a frequency of 10 GHz or in areas where heavy rain occurs. Generally, slow down fading and fast fading are caused by factors related to the transmission link. Hence, the radio link may be faulty in both directions in the case of slow down fading or fast fading.

Fault Locating Methods


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check whether the ODU is muted, powered off, or looped back. Check whether the data configuration is correct. Check whether the ODU and the IF board are faulty. If the transmit power is abnormal, replace the ODU. If the receive power is abnormal, analyze and locate the causes according to the fading type. If the receive power is normal but the SNR is abnormal, check whether there is interference before you proceed. If the preceding methods cannot locate faults, perform loopback operations.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

49

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-4 Procedure for troubleshooting the radio link
Start

Incorrect operation? No

Yes

Cancel the operation

ODU or IF related alarm? No

Yes Clear the alarm

Query the receive/transmit power and SNR

No Transmit power normal? Yes

4 Rectify the fault

RSL always lower than the normal value?


No

Yes

5 Rectify the fault

Slow down fading causes abnormal RSL?


No

Yes

6 Rectify the fault

Fast fading causes abnormal RSL?


No

Yes

7 Rectify the fault

Radio link faulty in one direction?


No 9 Perform loopback operations

Yes

8 Rectify the fault

Proceed to the next step

No

Is the fault rectified? Yes End

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

50

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-5 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting the radio link Comment No. 1 Rectify incorrect operations. Description Check the following points: l Check whether the ODU is powered off. l Check whether the ODU is muted. l Check whether the IF board is looped back. l Check whether the data configuration at the transmit end is the same as the data configuration at the receive end. l Check whether the data configuration matches the types of the ODU and the hybrid coupler. Pay special attention to the following alarms: 2 Rectify equipment faults. l VOLT_LOS l CONFIG_NOSUPPORT l HARD_BAD l TEMP_ALARM l IF_INPWR_ABN l RADIO_MUTE l RADIO_TSL_HIGH l RADIO_TSL_LOW l RADIO_RSL_HIGH l RADIO_RSL_LOW l IF_CABLE_OPEN l MW_CFG_MISMATCH 3 Query the receive/transmit power, and the SNR 4 Troubleshoot the anomaly of the transmit power. Query the receive/transmit power, and the SNR in the latest one week. For details, refer to Querying the Historical Transmit Power and Receive Power and Querying the SNR Values of a Radio Link. Replace the ODU.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

51

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Comment No. 5 Troubleshoot the anomaly that the receive power is lower than the normal value.

Description The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. If the receive power decreases sharply and does not recover, check the installation of the antenna. Ensure that the azimuth angle of the antenna meets the requirement. Check whether the antenna is aligned properly. Check whether the received signal is from the main lobe. If the antenna direction is not aligned properly, adjust the antenna in a wide range. 2. If the difference between the receive power of the main ODU and standby ODU at one end of the 1+1 HSB radio link is beyond the range from 0 dB to 9 dB (in the case of an unbalanced hybrid coupler) or beyond the range from 0 dB to 5 dB (in the case of a balanced hybrid coupler), perform 1+1 HSB switching or replace the ODUs and hybrid coupler to narrow down the fault to a specific part. 3. If the difference between the RSL at the receive end and transmit end is larger than 10 dB, replace the ODUs to check whether the main or standby ODU is faulty. 4. Check whether the setting of the polarization direction of the antenna is correct. Rectify the wrong polarization direction. 5. Check whether the cable connector is made in accordance with specifications. If any cable connectors do not comply with the specifications, see the Installation Reference and remake cable connectors. 6. Check whether the IF cable is soggy, broken, or pressed. If yes, replace the IF cable. 7. Check whether there is a mountain or building in the transmit direction. If the line of sight (LOS) is unavailable, adjust the height or position of the antenna. 8. Replace the ODUs and hybrid coupler to narrow down the fault to a specific part. 9. Check whether the gains of the antennas at the receive and transmit ends comply with the specifications. Replace the antenna whose gain does not comply with the specifications.

6 Troubleshoot slow down fading.

Contact the network planning department to make the following changes: l Increase the fade margin on links. l Use low-frequency ODUs. l Use vertical polarization instead of horizontal polarization.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

52

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Comment No. 7 Troubleshoot fast fading.

Description Contact the network planning department to make the following changes: l Adjust the position of the antenna to reduce the multipath fading. 1. Adjust the height of the antennas at both ends to increase the height difference between the antennas. 2. In the case of strong reflection surfaces such as water surfaces, plains, and smooth mountaintops, adjust the antenna to remove reflection points. Alternatively, use the actual terrain to mask surface reflection. 3. Lower the antenna height to reduce the path margin with LOS conditions guaranteed. l Adjust the RF configuration to change the radio link to the 1+1 SD mode. l In the case of a 1+1 SD radio link, adjust the height difference between two antennas to ensure that the receive power of one antenna is higher than the receive power of the other antenna. l Increase the fading margin, by replacing the original antennas with antennas of a larger diameter or increasing the transmit power of the original antennas.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

53

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Comment No. 8 Troubleshoot interference.

Description The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. There is co-channel interference. 1. Mute the ODU at the opposite end. 2. Check the RSL at the local end. If the RSL exceeds -90 dBm, it indicates that there is co-channel interference that may affect the long-term availability and performance of the system. 2. There is adjacent channel interference. 1. Mute the ODU at the opposite end. 2. Adjust the microwave working mode at the local end and use the minimum channel spacing. 3. Decrease the receive frequency at the local end by a half of the channel spacing. 4. Test and record the RSL. 5. Increase the receive frequency at the local end, with a step of 0.5 MHz or 1 MHz. Record the RSL accordingly until the receive frequency is equal to the original receive frequency plus a half of the channel spacing. 6. Compare the recorded RSL values, and check whether the RSL in a certain spectrum is abnormal if the received frequency is within the permitted range. 3. Use Huawei frequency scanning scripts or a spectrum analyzer to analyze the interference source. 4. Contact the network planning department to modify the networking planning and design. 1. Plan Tx high sites and Tx low sites correctly to avoid using them at the same time. 2. Plan frequencies or polarization modes correctly to avoid the same polarization direction for microwave signals and interference signals. Plan routes correctly. 5. Contact the spectrum management department to clear the interference spectrum.

9 Perform loopback operations to locate the fault.

The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. Perform an inloop at the IF port. If the fault persists after the inloop is performed, replace the IF board. 2. Replace the ODU. If the fault is rectified after the ODU is replaced, it indicates that the ODU is faulty.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

54

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Experience and Summary


l l During the commissioning, ensure that the antenna is aligned properly, to prevent possible incipient faults. Periodically collect and analyze the data about the changes in the transmit power and receive power so that you can detect and then rectify the incipient faults accordingly in time.

5.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors in TDM Services


When an NE reports an alarm or a performance event on the IF board, regenerator section (RS), multiplex section (MS), higher order path (HP), or lower order path (LP), there are bit errors in services.

Fault Phenomena
The IF bit errors refer to the bit errors that the IF board detects through the self-defined overhead byte in the microwave frame. The related alarms and performance events are as follows: l l l l l l l l l MW_BER_EXC MW_BER_SD MW_CFG_MISMATCH MW_LOF IF_BBE IF_ES IF_SES IF_CSES IF_UAS

The RS bit errors refer to the bit errors that the line processing unit or the IF board that works in SDH mode through the B1 overhead byte in the RS overhead. The related alarms and performance events are as follows: l l l l l l l l B1_EXC B1_SD RS_CROSSTR RSBBE RSES RSSES RSCSES RSUAS
NOTE

The IF board that works in PDH mode may also detect the previous RS bit error alarms and performance events. In this case, the IF board detects bit error alarms and performance events in the PDH microwave frame through the self-defined B1 byte.

The MS bit errors refer to the bit errors that the line board detects through the B2 byte in the MS overhead. The related alarms and performance events are as follows:
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 55

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

l l l l l l l l

B2_EXC B2_SD MS_CROSSTR MSBBE MSES MSSES MSCSES MSUAS

The HP bit errors refer to the bit errors that the line processing unit or the IF board that works in SDH mode through the B3 byte in the HP overhead. The related alarms and performance events are as follows: l l l l l l l l B3_EXC B3_SD HP_CROSSTR HPBBE HPES HPSES HPCSES HPUAS

The LP bit errors refer to the bit errors that the tributary board or IF board detects through the V5 byte in the VC-12 overhead. The related alarms and performance events are as follows: l l l l l l l l BIP_EXC BIP_SD LP_CROSSTR LPBBE LPES LPSES LPCSES LPUAS

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

56

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Fault Causes
Table 5-6 Causes of bit errors Fault There are IF bit errors. Common Fault Cause l The radio link is faulty. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR, MW_LOF or RPS_INDI alarm is reported. If yes, the radio link is faulty. l The services are incorrectly configured. Check whether the MW_CFG_MISMATCH alarm is reported. If yes, the number of E1 services is inconsistent on both ends of the radio link. l The IF board at the local end or opposite end is faulty. There are RS bit errors. l The line is faulty. The common causes for bit errors on the optical line are as follows: the optical fiber line, the optical power is abnormal, the fiber performance deteriorates, or the fiber connector is not clean. In the case of bit errors on the radio link, check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR or RPS_INDI alarm is reported. If yes, the radio link is faulty. l The line processing unit or IF board is faulty. l The clock unit is faulty. l The quality of the clock over the network declines. When the quality of the clock over the network declines, a pointer justification event occurs.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

57

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Fault There are not any RS bit errors but there are MS bit errors or HP bit errors.

Common Fault Cause l The line processing unit or IF board is faulty. l The quality of the clock over the network declines. When the quality of the clock over the network declines, a pointer justification event occurs. l The working temperature of the line processing unit or IF board is excessively high.

There are only LP bit errors.

l The tributary board is faulty. l The cross-connect unit is faulty. l The working temperature of the board is excessively high. l The working temperature of the crossconnect unit is excessively high. l There is a power surge or an external interference source, or the equipment is not properly grounded. (This cause does not need to be considered during the troubleshooting of an IF board.)

Fault Locating Methods


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Analyze the equipment alarms and performance events that are related to service configuration errors and bit errors. When there are many types of alarms and performance events on a service path, first analyze RS bit errors, then MS bit errors, HP bit errors, and finally LP bit errors. When multiple paths have bit errors, first check whether the overlapping part of the service paths is faulty. If you fail to locate the fault by analyzing the alarms and performance events, perform loopback operations section by section. Replace the parts whose performance may deteriorate with new ones.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

58

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-5 Procedure for troubleshooting bit errors
Start

2
Is there an equipment alarm? No Yes Clear the alarm

3
Is there a pointer justification event? No Yes Troubleshoot the pointer justification SDH optical interface board

Troubleshoot RS bit errors on the SDH optical interface board

Is there an RS bit error alarm or a performance event?

Yes

If the alarming board is IF board

No

4
Troubleshoot RS bit errors on the IF board

Is there an MS/ HP alarm or performance event? No

5
Yes Troubleshoot MS/HP bit errors

6
Is there an LP alarm? No Locate the fault by performing loopback operations section by section Yes Troubleshoot LP bit errors

Proceed with the next step

No

Is the fault rectified? Yes End

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

59

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-7 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting bit errors Comment No. 1 Description Pay special attention to the following alarms: l TEMP_ALARM l HARD_BAD l MW_CFG_MISMATCH 2 3 See 5.5 Troubleshooting Pointer Justifications. The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. Check whether the line board reports the B1_EXC, B1_SD, or RS_CROSSTR alarm. 2. Interchange the Tx fiber core and the Rx fiber core at both ends of the service path. If bit errors change after the exchange, it indicates that the fiber is faulty. Otherwise, the equipment at both ends of the service path is faulty. 3. In the case of a fiber fault, check whether the fiber between the equipment and the ODF and the section of the fiber that is led out of the telecommunications room are pressed. In addition, check whether the fiber connectors are clean. 4. In the case of faults at both ends of the service path, use a fiber jumper to loop back the optical ports. If the fault persists after the loopback, the line board may be faulty. 5. In the case of faults at both ends of the service path, you can also replace the board where the line unit is located or interchange between the board and another board of the same type that is working normally. If the alarm changes after the exchange, it indicates that the board is faulty. 4 The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. Check whether the IF board reports the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR, MW_LOF, RPS_INDI, B1_EXC, B1_SD, or RS_CROSSTR alarm. 2. If any of the alarms are reported, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link and rectify the fault. 3. If none of the alarms occurs, replace the IF board. 5 The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. Perform a loopback on the line board that reports the alarm. If the fault persists after the loopback, replace the line board. If the fault is rectified after the loopback, replace the line board at the transmit end. 2. If you fail to rectify the fault by replacing the line board, check whether there is a power surge or an external interference source or whether the equipment is not properly grounded.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

60

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Comment No. 6

Description The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. Replace the board where the services are configured based on how the service paths that have bit errors overlap each other. 2. If you fail to rectify the fault by replacing the board, check whether there is a power surge or an external interference source or whether the equipment is not properly grounded.

Experience and Summary


NOTE

The TDM services mentioned refer to Native TDM services. The handling procedure applies when the STM-1e port. is faulty

l l

During the routine maintenance, check bit error performance events periodically and handle them in time. To locate a fault, prefer the method of analyzing alarms and performance events to the method of performing loopback operations and the method of replacing the parts.

5.5 Troubleshooting Pointer Justifications


When an NE reports a large number of justification events about the administrative unit (AU) pointer or the tributary unit (TU) pointer, there are pointer justification faults.

Fault Phenomena
When the position of the first byte of the VC-4 in the AU-4 payload changes, the AU pointer makes a justification accordingly. The performance events related to the AU pointer justification are as follows: l l l AUPJCHIGH AUPJCLOW AUPJCNEW
NOTE

The AU pointer justification is made at an upstream NE but is detected and reported at a downstream NE.

When the service is configured to be at the VC-12 level, apply the reframing process to terminate the AU pointer justification. The terminating method is to transform the AU pointer justification into the TU pointer justification. The performance events related to the TU pointer justification are as follows: l l l TUPJCHIGH TUPJCLOW TUPJCNEW
NOTE

The TU pointer justification is made at the NE where the AU pointer is transformed into the TU pointer, but is detected and reported by the tributary board of the NE where services are terminated.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

61

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Fault Causes
l l l l The clock sources or the clock source levels are configured incorrectly. As a result, there are two clock sources on the same network or a timing loop occurs. The fiber connections are incorrect. As a result, a timing loop occurs. The quality of the clock source declines, the clock unit is faulty, or there are other clockrelated faults. The tributary board is faulty (only for the TU pointer justification).

Fault Locating Methods


When there are both AU pointer justifications and TU pointer justifications on a service path, first handle the AU pointer justifications and then the TU pointer justifications. Fault AU pointer justification Fault Locating Method 1. Analyze and clear clock alarms. 2. Rectify the incorrect data configuration and incorrect fiber connections. 3. Change the clock configuration to locate the station whose clock is asynchronous with the entire network. 4. Replace the parts whose performance may deteriorate with new ones. TU pointer justification 1. Analyze and clear clock alarms. 2. Rectify the incorrect data configuration and incorrect fiber connections. 3. Change the clock and service configuration to locate the station whose clock is asynchronous with the entire network. 4. Replace the parts whose performance may deteriorate with new ones.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

62

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-6 Procedure for troubleshooting pointer justifications
Start

Is there a clock-related alarm? No Check the clock configuration

Yes

Clear the alarm

Incorrect configuration? No Check the fiber connection

Yes

Modify the data configuration

Incorrect fiber connection? No

Yes Reconnect the fibers

4
An AU pointer justification event? Yes Locate the NE whose clock is out of synchronization

5
Locate the faulty board

No

6
A TU pointer justification event? Yes Locate the NE whose clock is out of synchronization

7
Locate the faulty board

No

Proceed with the next step

No

Is the fault rectified?

Yes End

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

63

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-8 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting pointer justifications Comment No. 1 Description Pay special attention to the following alarms: l TEMP_ALARM l HARD_BAD l LTI l SYNC_C_LOS l S1_SYN_CHANGE l EXT_SYNC_LOS 2 Check the following points: l Check whether there are two clock reference sources on the entire network. l Check whether a timing loop is generated. 3 Query ECC routes to check whether the fibers are connected correctly. Check the fiber connections in the east and west directions of the NE that reports the pointer justification event. The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. Locate a VC-4 channel that reports an AU pointer justification event. 2. Along the service source direction of the VC-4 channel, locate the source NE of the entire VC-4 service (not the source NE of a timeslot in the VC-4). 3. Set the clock of the source NE to the free-run mode. Set the other NEs to trace the clock of the source NE along the direction of the VC-4 service. 4. Along the clock tracing direction, locate the line board that is the first to report the AU pointer justification of the VC-4 path. The clock of the remote NE to which the line board is connected is asynchronous with the reference clock. Hence, the line board on the remote NE that receives the clock signal, the line board that sends the clock signal to the remote NE, and the clock unit of the remote NE, may be faulty. 5. Set the clock of the sink NE to the free-run mode. Set the other NEs to trace the clock of the sink NE along the direction of the VC-4 service. 6. Along the clock tracing direction, locate the line board that is the first to report the AU pointer justification of the VC-4 path. The clock of the remote NE to which the line board is connected is asynchronous with the reference clock. Hence, the line board on the NE that receives the clock signal, the line board that sends the clock signal to the NE, and the clock unit of the NE, may be faulty. 7. Compare the results and find out the common points. 5 Replace the possibly faulty boards.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

64

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Comment No. 6

Description The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. Modify the service configuration to ensure that the NE where the clock reference source functions as the central NE and that the other NEs have the E1 services of the central NE. 2. Along the clock tracing direction, locate the NE that is the first to report the TU pointer justification event. The clock of the NE is asynchronous with the reference clock. Hence, the line board on the NE that receives the clock signal, the line board that sends the clock signal to the NE, and the clock unit of the NE, may be faulty. 3. Modify the configuration data to ensure that all the NEs trace the clock along the other direction. 4. Along the clock tracing direction, locate the NE that is the first to report the TU pointer justification event. The clock of the NE is asynchronous with the reference clock. Hence, the line board on the NE that receives the clock signal, the line board that sends the clock signal to the NE, and the clock unit of the NE, may be faulty. 5. Compare the results and find out the common points.
NOTE This method is also applicable to locating an AU pointer justification event.

Replace the possibly faulty boards. In the case of a TU pointer justification event, check whether the line board, the clock board, and the tributary board are faulty.

Experience and Summary


On a properly synchronized network, there are few pointer justifications (less than six per day on each port). Hence, monitoring the pointer of an SDH transmission system is an effective way to check the synchronization status of the system.

5.6 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with SDH Equipment


An interconnection fault occurs when the NE fails in transmitting SDH services with other SDH equipment.

Fault Causes
l The VC-12 numbering method of the OptiX equipment is different from the numbering method of the equipment of certain vendors. The OptiX equipment applies the timeslot numbering method. The numbering formula is: VC-12 number = TUG-3 number + (TUG-2 number - 1) x 3 + (TU-12 number - 1) x 21. This method is also called as the method of numbering by order.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

65

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Certain equipment applies the line numbering method. The numbering formula is: VC-12 number = (TUG-3 number - 1) x 21 + (TUG-2 number - 1) x 3 + TU-12 number. This method is also called as the interleaved method. l l The overhead bytes at both ends are inconsistent. The indexes of the SDH interfaces do not meet the requirements.
NOTE

In the case of interconnection with ATM or Ethernet equipment, the common cause for an interconnection failure is that the service is not set to the VC-4 pass-through service and thus the overheads are processed in the terminating mode instead of the pass-through mode.

Fault Locating Methods


Analyze the fault phenomena and alarms that are generated on the equipment. Check the possible fault causes one after another.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

66

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-7 Procedure for troubleshooting the interconnection with SDH equipment
Start

Is the interconnected equipment Yes the ATM/IP equipment? No Query the VC-12 numbering method of the interconnected equipment

Set the interconnection service to be the VC-4 passthrough service

Is the numbering mode the line numbering? No 1 Is there an overhead setting related alarm? No Is the interface the STM-1 electrical interface? 3 No

Yes

Modify the data configuration. Use the line numbering method to set the VC-12

Yes

Handle the alarm

2 Yes Check the grounding

Test the indexes of interfaces

Do the interfaces meet relevant standards? Yes

No

Handle the faults of the interconnected equipment

Go to the next step Handle the faults of the local equipment

No

Is the fault cleared? Yes

End

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

67

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-9 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting the interconnection with SDH equipment Comment No. 1 Description Pay special attention to the following alarms: l J0_MM l HP_TIM l LP_TIM l HP_SLM l LP_SLM 2 Check the following points: l Check whether all the equipment and the DDF in the equipment room are jointly grounded. l Check whether the shielding layer of the coaxial cable connector on the DDF is connected to the protection ground. l Check whether the shielding layers of coaxial cables are grounded in the same way.
NOTE Disconnect all the signal cables between the interconnecting equipment. Use a multimeter to measure the level between the shielding layers of the coaxial cables at the receive and transmit ends of the SDH equipment. In addition, measure the level between the shielding layers of the coaxial cables at the receive and transmit ends of the opposite equipment. If the potential difference is large (about 0.5 V), the fault may be caused by the grounding.

Common indexes of the optical interfaces are as follows: l Mean launched optical power l Receiver sensitivity l Overload optical power l Permitted frequency deviation of the input interface Common indexes of the electrical interfaces: l Permitted frequency deviation of the input interface l Allowed attenuation of the input interface

Experience and Summary


To rectify an interconnection fault, you must be familiar with the characteristics of the interfaces on the interconnected equipment.

5.7 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with PDH Equipment


An interconnection fault occurs when the NE fails in transmitting PDH services with other PDH equipment.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 68

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Fault Causes
l l l l There is an impedance mismatch between interfaces. The equipment is not grounded properly. The cable performance deteriorates. The indexes of the PDH interfaces do not meet the requirements.

Fault Locating Methods


Analyze the fault phenomena and alarms that are generated on the equipment. Check the possible fault causes one after another.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

69

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-8 Procedure for troubleshooting the interconnection with PDH equipment
Start 1 Check the impedance of the interfaces

Is there an Yes impedance mismatch? No 2 Is the cable a coaxial cable? No 3 Check the cables Yes

Replace the cable or the tributary board

Check the grounding

Is in good conditions?

No

Adjust the cables

Yes Test the indexes of interfaces

Do the interfaces meet standards? Yes Troubleshoot the faults on the local equipment

No

Troubleshoot the faults on the interconnected equipment

Proceed with the next step

No

Is the fault rectified?

Yes

End

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

70

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-10 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting the interconnection with PDH equipment Comment No. 1 2 Description Check the impedance of the E1 path. Ensure that the impedance of the E1 path is consistent with the cable type. Check the following points: l Check whether all the equipment and the DDF in the telecommunications room are jointly grounded. l Check whether the shielding layers of the coaxial cable connectors on the DDF are connected to the protection ground. l Check whether the shielding layers of coaxial cables are grounded in the same manner.
NOTE Disconnect all the signal cables between the interconnecting equipment sets. Use a multimeter to measure the level between the shielding layers of the coaxial cables at the receive and transmit ends of the PDH equipment and the level between the shielding layers of the coaxial cables at the receive and transmit ends of the equipment at the opposite end. If the potential difference is large (about 0.5 V), the fault may be caused due to the improper grounding.

Check the following points: l Check whether the wires of the cable are correctly connected. l Check whether the cable is broken or pressed. l Check whether the cable signal is interfered (for example, when the trunk cable is bound with the power cable, the cable signal is interfered by the power signal).
NOTE Checking the cables involves checking the cables from the DDF to the client side and checking the cables from the DDF to the transmission equipment side.

Check the following indexes: l Input jitter tolerance l Permitted frequency deviation of the input interface l Output jitter l Output frequency deviation

Experience and Summary


NOTE

The PDH services mentioned refer to Native E1 services.

In the case of interconnection with PDH equipment, improper grounding is the most common cause for an interconnection failure.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

71

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

5.8 Troubleshooting Native Ethernet Service Faults


An Ethernet service fault may be the Ethernet service interruption or Ethernet service deterioration.

Prerequisites
The Ethernet service interruption indicates that the Ethernet service is completely interrupted. The Ethernet service deterioration indicates that the Ethernet service is abnormal. For example, the network access speed is low, the equipment delay is long, the packet loss occurs, or incorrect packets exist in the received or transmitted data.

Fault Phenomena
The Ethernet service interruption indicates that the Ethernet service is completely interrupted. The Ethernet service deterioration indicates that the Ethernet service is abnormal. For example, the network access speed is low, the equipment delay is long, the packet loss occurs, or incorrect packets exist in the received or transmitted data. Table 5-11 Common faults of Ethernet services Symptom Ethernet services are interrupted. Alarm HARD_BAD, TEMP_ALARM, WRG_BD_TYPE, or BD_STATUS COMMUN_FAIL, LAG_DOWN ETH_LOS, ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK, or LOOP_ALM LASER_MOD_ERR Ethernet services are degraded. HARD_BAD or TEMP_ALARM FLOW_OVER or LAG_MEMBER_DOWN AM_DOWNSHIFT EM6F, EG2D EG2D, EM6TA, EM6FA, EM6F or EM6T EG2D, EM6TA, EM6FA, EM6F or EM6T ISU2, ISX2, IFU2 or IFX2 Board EG2D, EM6TA, EM6FA, EM6F, EM6T

Fault Causes
l The possible human factors are as follows: An Ethernet board loopback or a transmission line loopback occurs.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

72

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

The parameter settings of the Ethernet ports, such as the port enabled state, working mode, and flow control, are different from the parameter settings of the Ethernet ports on the interconnected equipment. The service configuration is incorrect. l l l l l l The equipment at the local end is faulty. The line board is faulty or has bit errors. When the AM function is enabled, the Ethernet service bandwidth decreases due to the downward AM switch. The interconnected equipment is faulty. The network cable is faulty. The external electromagnetic interference is severe.

Fault Locating Methods


1. 2. 3. Rectify the human-caused faults such as a loopback and a data configuration error. Locate the fault cause according to the equipment alarms. Locate the fault cause according to the RMON performance events and alarms.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

73

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-9 Procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet service faults
Start

Incorrect operation? No

Yes

Cancel this operation

An equipment alarm or alarm on the radio link? No

Yes

Clear the alarm

An Ethernet alarm? No

Yes

Clear the alarm

5 Query the port and service traffic and analyze the fault causes No 6 Any abnormal RMON performance events? No Troubleshoot equipment faults by performing loopbacks section by section or replacing boards Yes

A loop formed by the E-LAN service trails? No

Yes

Release the loop

Troubleshoot the fault according to the flow of handling RMON performance events

Proceed with the next step

No

Is the fault rectified? Yes End

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

74

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-12 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet service faults Comment No. 1 Description Check the following points: l Whether a loopback is set for the Ethernet port l Whether a loopback is set for the transmission line l Whether the parameter settings of the Ethernet port, such as the port enabled state, working mode, and flow control, are the same as the parameter settings of the Ethernet port on the interconnected equipment l Check whether the Ethernet protocol and the Ethernet service configuration (especially the attributes of the Ethernet port) are correct. 2 Pay special attention to the following equipment alarms: l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL l HARD_BAD l BD_STATUS l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l RADIO_RSL_HIGH l RADIO_RSL_LOW l RADIO_TSL_HIGH l RADIO_TSL_LOW l IF_INPWR_ABN l AM_DOWNSHIFT Pay special attention to the following line alarms: l MW_LIM l MW_LOF l MW_BER_EXC l MW_BER_SD l MW_RDI l MW_FEC_UNCOR 3 Pay special attention to the following alarms: l ETH_LOS l ETH_NO_FLOW l LAG_DOWN l LAG_MEMBER_DOWN l FLOW_OVER 4 Follow instructions in Detecting E-LAN Service Loops to check whether ELAN services are looped back. Release the loops if any are formed.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

75

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Comment No. 5

Description Query the rate of an Ethernet port and locate faults based on the analysis of Ethernet port rates. l If the Ethernet port connecting the peer equipment has a too high or too low receive rate, the peer equipment is faulty. l If the rate of the Integrated IP radio port approaches or reaches the license capacity of the IF port, the license capacity is too low and you need to apply for a license allowing for a higher capacity. l If the transmit rate of the Integrated IP radio port approaches or reaches the maximum Ethernet bandwidth of the IF port, the bandwidth of the IF port is too low and needs to be increased by the network planning personnel. l If the transmit rate of the Integrated IP radio port is much lower than the receive rate of the Ethernet port, or if the receive rate of the Integrated IP radio port is much higher than the transmit rate of the Ethernet port, the local end is faulty. Locate the fault as follows: Check the Ethernet service configuration and QoS configuration. By querying QoS packet loss data in RMON events on the NMS, check whether QoS settings are correct according to the packet loss data. Check the Ethernet interface board, IF board, and system control, switching and timing board by means of board replacement. If the transmitted traffic is equal to the received traffic, query the traffic on the same port in each VLAN to check whether bandwidth preemption occurs.

For RMON performance events, see the D RMON Event Reference.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

76

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Figure 5-10 Procedure for troubleshooting an RMON performance event


Start 1 View the statistics group performance on an Ethernet port

Is there any FCS error? No Is there any collision or fragment? No Are broadcast packets excessive? No

Yes

Rectify the fault of line bit errors

Yes

Check the working mode of the port

Yes

Handle the problem on excessive broadcast packets

Use a meter to perform the test

Is the test passed? No 5 Is it a MTU setting problem? No Rectify the equipment fault by loopback section by section or replacing the board

Yes

Rectify the fault of the interconnected equipment

Yes

Modify the MTU value

Proceed with the next step

No

Is the fault rectified? Yes

End

Table 5-13 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting an RMON performance event No. 1 Description 8.18 Querying Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet Ports to obtain the real-time performance statistics data of the Ethernet port.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

77

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

No. 2

Description The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: l Check the Ethernet cable. If the Ethernet cable is not qualified, replace it with a new one. l Change the Ethernet port that accesses the services on the Ethernet board. If the new port does not have the RMON performance of an FCS error, it indicates that the hardware of the original port is faulty. Otherwise, the hardware of the Ethernet port on the equipment at the opposite end is faulty.

Check the following points: l Whether the port operating rates on the equipment at both ends are the same l Whether the working modes (full duplex or half duplex) of the Ethernet port on the equipment at both ends are the same l Whether the Ethernet port is set to auto-negotiation mode at one end and the Ethernet port is set to full duplex mode at the opposite end (When the Ethernet port is set to auto-negotiation mode at one end, the Ethernet port must not be set to full duplex mode at the opposite end.)

Check for the cause for excessive broadcast packets (for example, you have set the loopback for the Ethernet interface board or set the VB filtering table incorrectly) and solve the problem. If the problem is caused on the equipment at the opposite end, set the threshold of broadcast packet suppression for an Ethernet port to reduce broadcast packets. Test the MTU of the network by using a test meter. The maximum frame length that is set for a port should be longer than the MTU of the network.

Experience and Summary


To troubleshoot an Ethernet service fault, you must be familiar with the characteristics, working mode, and configured protocols of interfaces on the Ethernet equipment.

5.9 Troubleshooting Ethernet Service on the EoS/EoPDH Plane


The Ethernet services transmitted on the EoS/EoPDH plane can be transmitted over a TDM network. The faults of the EoS/EoPDH-plane Ethernet services include service interruption and service degradation.

Fault Phenomena
The Ethernet service interruption indicates that the Ethernet service is completely interrupted. The Ethernet service deterioration indicates that the Ethernet service is abnormal. For example, the network access speed is low, the equipment delay is long, the packet loss occurs, or incorrect packets exist in the received or transmitted data.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 78

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-14 Common faults of Ethernet services Symptom Ethernet services are interrupted. Alarm HARD_BAD, TEMP_ALARM, WRG_BD_TYPE, or BD_STATUS ALM_GFP_dLFD or ALM_GFP_dCSF ETH_LOS or LOOP_ALM LAG_PORT_FAIL, LAG_VC_PORT_FAIL, LCAS_TLCT, or LCAS_TLCR Ethernet services are abnormal. HARD_BAD or TEMP_ALARM FLOW_OVER LCAS_FOPT, LCAS_FOPR, LCAS_PLCT, or LCAS_PLCR Board EMS6/EFP8

Fault Causes
l The possible human factors are as follows: An Ethernet board loopback or a transmission line loopback occurs. The parameter settings of the Ethernet ports, such as the port enabled state, working mode, and flow control, are different from the parameter settings of the Ethernet ports on the interconnected equipment. The configuration of the encapsulation/mapping protocol or the LCAS protocol is inconsistent on both ends of the link. The timeslot binding of VCTRUNKs is inconsistent on both ends of the link The service configuration is incorrect. l l l l l The equipment at the local end is faulty. The line board is faulty or has bit errors. The interconnected equipment is faulty. The network cable is faulty. The external electromagnetic interference is severe.

Fault Locating Methods


1. 2.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Rectify the human-caused faults such as a loopback and a data configuration error. Locate the fault cause according to the equipment alarms.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 79

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

3.

Locate the fault cause according to the RMON performance events and alarms.

Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-11 Procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet service faults
Start

1 1

Incorrect operation? No

Yes

Cancel this operation

2 An equipment alarm Yes or alarm on the radio link? No 3 An Ethernet alarm? No 4 A loop formed by the Yes E-LAN service trails? No 5 Any abnormal RMON performance events? No Fault on the opposite equipment? No Troubleshoot equipment faults by performing loopbacks section by section or replacing boards Yes Yes Yes Clear the alarm

Clear the alarm

Query the port and service traffic and analyze the fault causes

Release the loop

Troubleshoot the fault according to the flow of handling RMON performance events

Troubleshoot faults on the opposite equipment

Proceed with the next step

No

Is the fault rectified? Yes En d

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

80

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-15 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet service faults Comment No. 1 Description Check the following points: l Whether a loopback is set for the Ethernet port l Whether a loopback is set for the transmission line l Whether the parameter settings of the Ethernet port, such as the port enabled state, working mode, and flow control, are the same as the parameter settings of the Ethernet port on the interconnected equipment l The configuration of the encapsulation/mapping protocol or the LCAS protocol is inconsistent on both ends of the link. l The timeslot binding of VCTRUNKs is inconsistent on both ends of the link. l Check whether the Ethernet protocol and the Ethernet service configuration (especially the attributes of the Ethernet port) are correct. 2 Pay special attention to the following equipment alarms: l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL l HARD_BAD l BD_STATUS l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l RADIO_RSL_HIGH l RADIO_RSL_LOW l RADIO_TSL_HIGH l RADIO_TSL_LOW l IF_INPWR_ABN Pay special attention to the following line alarms: l MW_LIM l MW_LOF l R_LOS l R_LOF l MS_AIS l AU_AIS l AU_LOP l B1_EXC l B2_EXC

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

81

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Comment No. 3

Description Pay special attention to the following alarms: l ETH_LOS l FLOW_OVER l ALM_GFP_dCSF l ALM_GFP_dLFD l FCS_ERR l LCAS_PLCT l LCAS_TLCT l LCAS_PLCR l LCAS_TLCR l LCAS_FOPT l LCAS_FOPR

If the LOOP_ALM alarm is reported after the configuring the Advanced Attributes of Ethernet Interfaces operation is performed, it indicates that the network to which Ethernet ports are connected has loops. For RMON performance events, see C Performance Event Reference.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

82

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Figure 5-12 Procedure for troubleshooting an RMON performance event


Start 1 View the statistics group performance on an Ethernet port

Is there any FCS error? No Is there any collision or fragment? No Is there any PAUSE frame? No Are broadcast packets excessive? No

Yes

Rectify the fault of line bit errors

Yes

Check the working mode of the port

4 Yes Handle the flow control problem or increase the bandwidth 5

Yes

Handle the problem on excessive broadcast packets

Use a meter to perform the test

Is the test passed? No 6 Is it a MTU setting problem? No Rectify the equipment fault by loopback section by section or replacing the board

Yes

Rectify the fault of the interconnected equipment

Yes

Modify the MTU value

Proceed with the next step

No

Is the fault rectified? Yes

End

Table 5-16 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting an RMON performance event Comment No. 1 Description View the statistics group performance on an Ethernet port to obtain the real-time performance statistics data of the Ethernet port.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

83

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Comment No. 2

Description The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: l Check the Ethernet cable. If the Ethernet cable is not qualified, replace it with a new one. l Change the Ethernet port that accesses the services on the Ethernet board. If the new port does not have the RMON performance of an FCS error, it indicates that the hardware of the original port is faulty. Otherwise, the hardware of the Ethernet port on the equipment at the opposite end is faulty.

Check the following points: l Whether the port operating rates on the equipment at both ends are the same l Whether the working modes (full duplex or half duplex) of the Ethernet port on the equipment at both ends are the same l Whether the Ethernet port is set to auto-negotiation mode at one end and the Ethernet port is set to full duplex mode at the opposite end (When the Ethernet port is set to auto-negotiation mode at one end, the Ethernet port must not be set to full duplex mode at the opposite end.)

Check the following points: l Whether the flow control method is the same. l Whether the Ethernet service traffic exceeds the bandwidth of the VCTRUNK.

Check for the cause for excessive broadcast packets (for example, you have set the loopback for the Ethernet interface board or set the VB filtering table incorrectly) and solve the problem. If the problem is caused on the equipment at the opposite end, set the threshold of broadcast packet suppression for an Ethernet port to reduce broadcast packets. Test the MTU of the network by using a test meter. The maximum frame length that is set for a port should be longer than the MTU of the network.

Experience and Summary


To troubleshoot an Ethernet service fault, you must be familiar with the characteristics, working mode, and configured protocols of interfaces on the Ethernet equipment.

5.10 Troubleshooting MPLS Tunnels


This section describes how to troubleshoot MPLS tunnels by using the MPLS OAM function or MPLS Ping/Traceroute function.

Fault Phenomena
Common faults of MPLS tunnels are as follows.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 84

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

l l l

MPLS tunnels fail to be created, and services are unavailable. MPLS tunnels are faulty, and services are interrupted. MPLS APS switching fails, services are interrupted, and packet loss or bit errors occur.

Table 5-17 Common faults of MPLS tunnels Symptom MPLS tunnels are faulty. Alarm HARD_BAD, TEMP_ALARM, WRG_BD_TYPE, BUS_ERR, BD_STATUS, MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL, MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV, MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess, MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH, MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE, MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN, MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI, MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI, MPLS_TUNNEL_SD, MPLS_TUNNEL_SF AM_DOWNSHIFT MW_CFG_MISMATCH MW_LIM MW_LOF Board CSHN

ISU2, ISX2, IFU2, or IFX2

Fault Causes
l Incorrect operations are performed. The transmission link is looped back. Service configuration data is inconsistent between the local end and the opposite end. Service configuration is incorrect. l l l l l The local NE is faulty. The transmission link is faulty or has bit errors. Service bandwidth decreases due to an AM downshift. The opposite NE is faulty. External electromagnetic interference is severe.

Fault Locating Methods


1. Check whether the data is modified, whether the line is looped back, and whether any boards are replaced.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 85

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

2. 3. 4.

Handle the link alarms on the MPLS server trail. Locate the faulty section by using the LSP Traceroute function. Locate the fault by replacing boards.

Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-13 Procedure for troubleshooting MPLS tunnels
Start

Any incorrect operation? No

Yes

Cancel the operation

Any equipment- or link-related alarm? No

Yes Clear the alarm

3 Any alarm related to MPLS tunnel ? No Any fault of interconnection equipment No

Yes Clear the alarm

Yes Handle the fault

Troubleshoot equipment faults by performing loopbacks on sections or replacing boards

Contact Huawei technical engineers

No

Faults are rectified?

Yes

End

Table 5-18 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting MPLS tunnels Comment No. 1 Description Check the following points: l Whether a loopback is set for E1 ports l Whether a loopback is set for the transmission link l Whether the parameter settings such as the working mode of Ethernet ports match those of the opposite NE l Whether the parameter settings such as frame format and frame mode at E1 ports match those of the opposite NE l Whether MPLS service configuration is correct, especially whether tunnel attributes are set correctly

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

86

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Comment No. 2

Description Pay special attention to the following equipment alarms: l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL l HARD_BAD l BD_STATUS l BUS_ERR l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l RADIO_RSL_HIGH l RADIO_RSL_LOW l RADIO_TSL_HIGH l RADIO_TSL_LOW l IF_INPWR_ABN l AM_DOWNSHIFT l MW_CFG_MISMATCH Pay special attention to the following line alarms: l MW_LIM l MW_LOF l MW_BER_EXC l MW_BER_SD l MW_RDI l MW_FEC_UNCOR

Pay special attention to the following alarms: l MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI l MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess l MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI l MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV l MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH l MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE l MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL l MPLS_TUNNEL_SD l MPLS_TUNNEL_SF l MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN

Experience and Summary


Learn about the working principle and protocol configuration of MPLS tunnels before troubleshooting MPLS tunnels.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 87

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

5.11 Troubleshooting CES Services


This section describes how to troubleshoot CES services that are interrupted or degraded.

Fault Phenomena
CES services are interrupted if they are completely unavailable. CES services are degraded if they have packet loss or incorrect packets. Table 5-19 Common faults of CES services Symptom CES services are interrupted. Alarm HARD_BAD, TEMP_ALARM, WRG_BD_TYPE, BUS_ERR, BD_STATUS, CES_LOSPKT_EXC AM_DOWNSHIFT MW_CFG_MISMATCH CES services are degraded. HARD_BAD, TEMP_ALARM, CES_JTROVR_EXC, CES_JTRUDR_EXC, CES_MALPKT_EXC, CES_MISORDERPKT_EX C, CES_STRAYPKT_EXC AM_DOWNSHIFT MW_CFG_MISMATCH CSHN, ML1, MD1 Board CSHN, ML1, MD1

ISU2, ISX2, IFU2, or IFX2

ISU2, ISX2, IFU2, or IFX2

Fault Causes
l Incorrect operations are performed. The transmission link is looped back. Service configuration data is inconsistent between the local end and the opposite end. Service configuration is incorrect. l l l l l l l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

The clock source is asynchronous. Jitters and delays on the network are too great. The local NE is faulty. The transmission link is faulty or has bit errors. Service bandwidth decreases due to an AM downshift. The opposite NE is faulty. External electromagnetic interference is severe.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 88

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Fault Locating Methods


1. 2. Check whether the data is modified, whether the line is looped back, and whether any boards are replaced. Check whether the PW works properly by using the PW ping function. If the PW is faulty, check whether the MPLS tunnel works properly by using the LSP ping function. If the MPLS tunnel works properly, check whether the PW has the same configuration at both ends. If the configuration is the same, replace the board on the NNI side. If the PW works properly, check whether the PE data configured at both ends is the same. If the PE data is different, change the PE data to the same. Check whether UNI-side data and CE-side data are consistent. Analyze the RMON performance events of CES services. Check whether there is impedance mismatch on channels and whether any electrical cables are connected incorrectly. Replace Smart E1 processing boards.

3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

89

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-14 Procedure for troubleshooting CES services
Start

Any incorrect operation? No

Yes

Cancel the operation

Any equipment- or link-related alarm? No

Yes Clear the alarm

3 Any alarm related to tunnels/PWs? No 4

Yes Clear the alarm

Any alarm related to CES services?

Yes Clear the alarm

Any alarm on E1 ports? No

Yes Clear the alarm

Any RMON performance event? No

Yes Handle the performance event

Any fault of interconnection with PDH equipment No

Yes Handle the fault

Troubleshoot equipment faults by performing loopbacks on sections or replacing boards

Contact Huawei technical engineers

No

Faults are rectified?

Yes

End

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

90

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-20 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting CES services Commen t No. 1 Description Check the following points: l Whether a loopback is set for the E1 port l Whether a loopback is set for the transmission link l Check whether the parameter settings of CES services, PWs, and tunnels are consistent at the source end and sink end. l Check whether the parameter settings of physical ports (including frame format, code, electrical port impedance, and overhead byte), are consistent. l Check whether the network bandwidth is sufficient for the service traffic. 2 Pay special attention to the following equipment alarms: l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL l HARD_BAD l BD_STATUS l BUS_ERR l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l RADIO_RSL_HIGH l RADIO_RSL_LOW l RADIO_TSL_HIGH l RADIO_TSL_LOW l IF_INPWR_ABN l AM_DOWNSHIFT l MW_CFG_MISMATCH Pay special attention to the following line alarms: l MW_LIM l MW_LOF l MW_BER_EXC l MW_BER_SD l MW_RDI l MW_FEC_UNCOR

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

91

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Commen t No. 3

Description Pay special attention to the following alarms: l MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI l MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess l MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI l MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV l MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH l MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE l MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL l MPLS_TUNNEL_SD l MPLS_TUNNEL_SF l MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN

Pay special attention to the following alarms: l CES_JTROVR_EXC l CES_JTRUDR_EXC l CES_LOSPKT_EXC l CES_MALPKT_EXC l CES_MISORDERPKT_EXC l CES_STRAYPKT_EXC

Pay special attention to the following alarms: l T_ALOS l UP_E1_AIS l LFA l LMFA l DOWN_E1_AIS l ALM_E1RAI

Pay special attention to the following alarms: l CES_MISORDERPKT l CES_LOSPKT l CES_MALPKT l CES_JTRUDR l CES_JTROVR l CES_STRAYPKT

Troubleshoot the interconnection with the PDH equipment.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

92

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Experience and Summary


Learn about the working principle and protocol configuration of CES services before troubleshooting CES services.

5.12 Troubleshooting ATM Services


This section describes how to troubleshoot ATM services that are interrupted or degraded.

Fault Phenomena
ATM services are interrupted if they are completely unavailable. ATM services are degraded if they have packet loss or incorrect packets. Table 5-21 Common faults of ATM services Symptom ATM services are interrupted. Alarm HARD_BAD, TEMP_ALARM, WRG_BD_TYPE, BUS_ERR, BD_STATUS, ALM_IMA_LIF, ALM_IMA_LODS, ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE, ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE, IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN, IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN, LCD AM_DOWNSHIFT MW_CFG_MISMATCH ATM services are degraded. HARD_BAD, TEMP_ALARM, ALM_IMA_LIF, ALM_IMA_LODS, ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE, ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE, OCD AM_DOWNSHIFT MW_CFG_MISMATCH CSHN, ML1, MD1 Board CSHN, ML1, MD1

ISU2, ISX2, IFU2, or IFX2

ISU2, ISX2, IFU2, or IFX2

Fault Causes
l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Incorrect operations are performed.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 93

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

The transmission link is looped back. Service configuration data is inconsistent between the local end and the opposite end. Service configuration is incorrect. l l l l l The local NE is faulty. The transmission link is faulty or has bit errors. Service bandwidth decreases due to an AM downshift. The opposite NE is faulty. External electromagnetic interference is severe.

Fault Locating Methods


1. 2. Check whether the data is modified, whether the link is looped back, and whether any boards are replaced. Check whether the PW works properly by using the PW ping function. If the PW is faulty, check whether the MPLS tunnel works properly by using the LSP ping function. If the MPLS tunnel works properly, check whether the PW has the same configuration at both ends. If the configuration is the same, replace the board on the NNI side. If the PW works properly, check whether the PE data configured at both ends is the same. If the PE data is different, change the PE data to the same. Check whether UNI-side data and CE-side data are consistent. Analyze the RMON performance events of ATM services. Check whether there is impedance mismatch on channels and whether any electrical cables are connected incorrectly. Replace Smart E1 processing boards.

3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

94

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-15 Procedure for troubleshooting ATM services
Start

Any incorrect operation? No

Yes

Cancel the operation

Any equipment- or link-related alarm? No

Yes Clear the alarm

Yes Any alarm related to ATM services? No 4 Any alarm at the E1 port? No 5 Yes Clear the alarm Clear the alarm

Any RMON performance event? No

Yes Handle the performance event

Any fault of interconnection with PDH equipment No

Yes Handle the fault

Troubleshoot equipment faults by performing loopbacks on sections or replacing boards

Contact Huawei technical engineers

No

Faults are rectified?

Yes

End

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

95

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-22 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting ATM services Comment No. 1 Description Check the following points: l Whether a loopback is set for the E1 port l Whether a loopback is set for the transmission link l Whether the parameter settings of ATM VPI/VCI, PWE3 CW, PW, and Tunnel are consistent between the source end and the sink end. l Whether the parameter settings of interconnected ports are consistent Whether E1 frame format, coding, overhead bytes, and E1 timeslot mode (30/31) are correctly configured Whether IMA parameters (including protocol version, clock mode, frame length, and maximum differential delay) are correctly configured l Check whether the network bandwidth is sufficient for the service traffic. 2 Pay special attention to the following equipment alarms: l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL l HARD_BAD l BD_STATUS l BUS_ERR l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l RADIO_RSL_HIGH l RADIO_RSL_LOW l RADIO_TSL_HIGH l RADIO_TSL_LOW l IF_INPWR_ABN l AM_DOWNSHIFT l MW_CFG_MISMATCH Pay special attention to the following line alarms: l MW_LIM l MW_LOF l MW_BER_EXC l MW_BER_SD l MW_RDI l MW_FEC_UNCOR

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

96

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Comment No. 3

Description Pay special attention to the following alarms: l ALM_IMA_LIF l ALM_IMA_LODS l ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE l ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE l IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN l IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN l OCD l LCD

Pay special attention to the following alarms: l T_ALOS l UP_E1_AIS l LFA l LMFA l DOWN_E1_AIS

Pay special attention to the following alarms: l ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELLS l ATM_UNCORRECTED_HCSERR

Troubleshoot the interconnection with the PDH equipment.

Experience and Summary


Learn about the working principle and protocol configuration of ATM services before troubleshooting ATM services.

5.13 Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Carried by PWs


This section describes how to troubleshoot Ethernet services that are carried by PWs and transmitted in the PSN. These Ethernet services are considered faulty when they are interrupted or deteriorate.

Fault Symptoms
Ethernet services are interrupted if they are completely unavailable. Ethernet services deteriorate if they have great delays, packet loss, or incorrect packets.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

97

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-23 Common faults of Ethernet services Symptom Ethernet services are interrupted. Alarm HARD_BAD, TEMP_ALARM, WRG_BD_TYPE, BUS_ERR, BD_STATUS COMMUN_FAIL, LAG_DOWN ETH_LOS, ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK, or LOOP_ALM LASER_MOD_ERR Ethernet services deteriorate. HARD_BAD or TEMP_ALARM FLOW_OVER or LAG_MEMBER_DOWN AM_DOWNSHIFT EM6FA, EM6F or EG2D EG2D, EM6TA, EM6FA, EM6F or EM6T EG2D, EM6TA, EM6FA, EM6F or EM6T ISU2, ISX2, IFU2 or IFX2 Board EG2D, EM6TA, EM6FA, EM6F or EM6T

Fault Causes
l Incorrect operations are performed. The transmission link is looped back. Service configuration data is inconsistent between the local end and the opposite end. Service configuration is incorrect. l l l l l The local NE is faulty. The transmission link is faulty or has bit errors. Service bandwidth decreases due to an AM downshift. The opposite NE is faulty. External electromagnetic interference is severe.

Fault Locating Methods


1. 2. Check whether the data is modified, whether the link is looped back, and whether any boards are replaced. Check whether the PW works properly by using the PW ping function. If the PW is faulty, check whether the MPLS tunnel works properly by using the LSP ping function. If the MPLS tunnel works properly, check whether the PW has the same configuration at both ends. If the configuration is the same, replace the board on the NNI side. If the PW works properly, check whether the PE data configured at both ends is the same. If the PE data is different, change the PE data to the same. Check whether UNI-side data and CE-side data are consistent. Analyze the RMON performance events of Ethernet services.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 98

3. 4. 5.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

6. 7.

Check whether there is impedance mismatch on channels and whether any electrical cables are connected incorrectly. Replace Ethernet interface boards.

Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-16 Procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet services carried by PWs
Start

Any incorrect operation? No

Yes

Cancel the operation

Any equipment- or link-related alarm? No

Yes Clear the alarm

Yes Any alarm related to tunnels/PWs that carry services? No 4 Any alarm on the UNI side? No 5 Yes Clear the alarm Clear the alarm

Any RMON performance event? No

Yes Handle the performance event

Any fault of interconnection with PDH equipment No

Yes Handle the fault

Troubleshoot equipment faults by performing loopbacks on sections or replacing boards

Contact Huawei technical engineers

No

Faults are rectified?

Yes

End

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

99

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-24 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet services carried by PWs No. 1 Description Check the following points: l Whether a loopback is set for the E1 port l Whether a loopback is set for the transmission link l Whether the parameter settings of ATM VPI/VCI, PWE3 CW, PW, and tunnel are consistent between the source end and the sink end l Whether the parameter settings of interconnected ports are consistent Whether E1 frame format, coding, overhead bytes, and E1 timeslot mode (30/31) are correctly configured Whether IMA parameters (including protocol version, clock mode, frame length, and maximum differential delay) are correctly configured l Check whether the network bandwidth is sufficient for the service traffic. 2 Pay special attention to the following equipment alarms: l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL l HARD_BAD l BD_STATUS l BUS_ERR l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l RADIO_RSL_HIGH l RADIO_RSL_LOW l RADIO_TSL_HIGH l RADIO_TSL_LOW l IF_INPWR_ABN l AM_DOWNSHIFT l MW_CFG_MISMATCH Pay special attention to the following line alarms: l MW_LIM l MW_LOF l MW_BER_EXC l MW_BER_SD l MW_RDI l MW_FEC_UNCOR

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

100

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

No. 3

Description Pay special attention to the following alarms: l MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI l MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess l MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI l MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV l MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH l MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE l MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL l MPLS_TUNNEL_SD l MPLS_TUNNEL_SF l MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN

Check the following points: l Whether the UNI-side performance of the faulty service is normal l Whether the working mode and tag attribute of the UNI are the same as those of its interconnected port Pay special attention to the following alarms: l ETH_LOS l ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI

5 6

For RMON performance events, see D RMON Event Reference. Troubleshoot the interconnection with the PDH equipment.

Experience and Summary


Learn about the working principle and protocol configuration of Ethernet services carried by PWs before troubleshooting these services.

5.14 Troubleshooting Orderwire Faults


If orderwire calls cannot get through when services are normal, there is an orderwire fault.

Fault Causes
l l l l l l The phone set is set incorrectly. The phone line is connected incorrectly. The orderwire is configured incorrectly. The orderwire unit is faulty. The system control unit is faulty. The line unit or radio link is faulty.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

101

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Fault Locating Methods


l l Check whether the phone set is set correctly, whether the phone line is connected correctly, and whether the orderwire is configured correctly. Replace the possibly faulty board to locate the fault.

Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-17 Procedure for troubleshooting orderwire faults
Start

Check the phone setting

Is the phone correctly set? Yes

No

Modify the phone setting

Is the phone line correctly connected? Yes


2

No

Reconnect the phone line

Check the orderwire configuration

Is the configuration correct? Yes Replace the possibly faulty board

No

Modify the configuration

No Proceed with the next step

Is the fault rectified?

Yes

End

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

102

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-25 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting orderwire faults Comment No. 1 Description Check the following points: l Check whether the ring current switch "RING" on the phone set is set to "ON". l Check whether the dialing mode switch is set to "T", namely, the dual tone multi-frequency mode. l An orderwire phone set should be in on-hook state when it is not in communication, and the upper-right red indicator in the front view of the orderwire phone set should be off. If the red indicator is on, it indicates that the phone set is in off-hook state. Press the "TALK" button in the front of phone set to hook it up. In certain occasions, the maintenance personnel press the "TALK" button is pressed by mistake. As a result, the phone set stay in off-hook state all the time and the orderwire call from the other NEs cannot get through. 2 Check the following points: l Whether all orderwire phone numbers on a subnet are of the same length l Whether all orderwire phone numbers on a subnet are unique l Whether the overhead bytes of all the NEs on a subnet are the same l Whether the orderwire port is set correctly 3 Replace the boards where the orderwire unit, system control unit, and line unit are located to locate the fault.

Experience and Summary


To troubleshoot orderwire faults, you must check the orderwire phone periodically.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

103

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

6
About This Chapter
Background Information
Table 6-1 Part replacement description Part Name SL1D, SL1DA EM6T, EM6F, EMS6, EM6TA, EM6FA, and EFP8 CF card CSHN AUX SP3D and SP3S IF1, IFU2, ISX2, ISU2, and IFX2 PIU Operation

Part Replacement

Part replacement is a method frequently used to locate faults. The replacement operation varies according to the specific part type.

Tool l l l l ESD wrist strap Screwdriver U2000 Fiber remover

6.3 Replacing the SDH Optical Interface Board 6.6 Replacing the Ethernet Interface Board

6.8 Replacing the CF Card 6.9 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board 6.10 Replacing the Auxiliary Board 6.4 Replacing the PDH Interface Board 6.7 Replacing the IF Board l ESD wrist strap l Screwdriver l U2000

6.12 Replacing the Power Board

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

104

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

Part Name ML1 and MD1 FAN

Operation 6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board 6.11 Replacing the Fan Board

Tool

l ESD wrist strap l U2000

ODU

6.14 Replacing the ODU

l Ejector lever (torque wrench) l U2000 l Silicon l Waterproof adhesive tape

IF cable

6.15 Replacing the IF Cable

l Multimeter l Ejector lever l Electro-technical knife l File l Installation parts and accessories of the connector l IF cable l Waterproof adhesive tape

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

105

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

6.1 Removing a Board


Removing a board is a basic operation for replacing a board.

Procedure
Step 1 Insert one end of the ESD wrist strap into the ESD connector on the cabinet. Wear the ESD wrist strap. Figure 6-1 Wear the ESD wrist strap

Step 2 Optional: If cables are connected to the board, make labels for the cables and then remove the cables.
NOTE

Use fiber removers to remove fibers or network cables.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

106

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

Figure 6-2 Tweezer fiber remover

Step 3 Remove the board. 1. Loosen the screws on the panel of the board. Figure 6-3 Removing a board (1)

2.

Hold the left and right ejector levers with hands. Push them outwards to disengage the board from the backplane.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

107

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

Figure 6-4 Removing a board (2)

NOTE

As shown in Figure 6-5, there is a latch on each ejector lever of the System control Switch&Timing board. To remove the System control Switch&Timing board, you need to push the latches when pulling the ejector levers outward.

Figure 6-5 Removing the System control Switch&Timing board

3.

Pull out the board gently along the slot guide rail. Figure 6-6 Removing a board (3)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

108

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

CAUTION
Remove the board slowly to prevent the components on the boards from colliding.

Step 4 Put the removed board into the antistatic box or bag. ----End

6.2 Inserting a Board


Inserting a board is a basic operation for replacing a board.

Procedure
Step 1 Insert one end of the ESD wrist strap into the ESD connector on the cabinet. Wear the ESD wrist strap. Figure 6-7 Wear the ESD wrist strap

Step 2 Insert the board. 1. 2.


Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Hold the ejector levers on the panel with both hands. Push them outwards so that the angle between the ejector lever and the panel is about 45 degrees. Push the board gently along the slot guide rail until the board cannot slide further.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 109

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

Figure 6-8 Inserting a board (1)

CAUTION
Insert the board slowly to prevent the components on the boards from colliding. 3. Press the two ejector levers inward with force. Figure 6-9 Inserting a board (2)

4.

Tighten screws on the panel.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

110

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

Figure 6-10 Inserting a board (3)

Step 3 Optional: If cables are connected to the board, recover the original cable connections according to the labels that are made previously. ----End

6.3 Replacing the SDH Optical Interface Board


When the SDH optical interface board is replaced, the unprotected services on the board are interrupted.

Prerequisites
l l l l You must know the impact of board replacement. You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced. You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced. The spare SDH optical interface board must be available, and the version and type of the spare board must be the same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturing information to obtain the version of the board to be replaced.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l l l ESD wrist strap Screwdriver U2000 Fiber remover

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board. Step 2 Optional: If the services on the board are configured with SNCP, ensure that the services are already switched to the protection channel. 1.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Query the SNCP protection group.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 111

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

2.

Perform the forced switching, if the port on the board functions as the current working channel, the current protection channel is not on the board, and the state of the current protection channel is normal or SD.

Step 3 Optional: If the services on the board are configured with linear MSP, ensure that the services are already switched to the protection channel. 1. 2. Query the linear MSP group. Perform the forced switching, if the port on the board functions as the current working channel, the current protection channel is not on the board, and the state of the current protection channel is normal or SD.

Step 4 Remove the board. Step 5 Check whether the version and SFP type of the spare board are the same as the version and SFP type of the board to be replaced. Step 6 Insert the board. Step 7 After the board starts to work, check the STAT indicator on the board. The STAT indicator should be on and green. Step 8 Query the current alarms of the board. There should be no new alarms on the board. Step 9 Optional: If the forced switching has been performed on the board, release the forced switching. Step 10 Optional: If the linear MSP switching has been performed for the services, release the forced switching. ----End

6.4 Replacing the PDH Interface Board


When the PDH interface board is replaced, the services on the board are interrupted.

Prerequisites
l l l l You must know the impact of board replacement. You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced. You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced. The spare board must be made available, and the version and type of the spare board must be the same as those of the board to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturing information to obtain the version of the board to be replaced.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l l ESD wrist strap Screwdriver U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 112

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

Step 2 Remove the board. Step 3 Check and ensure that the version and type of the spare board are the same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. Step 4 Insert the board. Step 5 After the board starts to work, check the indicators on the board. The STAT indicator should be on and green. Step 6 Query the current alarms of the board. There should be no new alarms on the board. ----End

6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board


When the Smart E1 board is replaced, the services on the board are interrupted.

Prerequisites
l l l l You must know the impact of board replacement. You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced. You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced. The spare board must be available, and the version and type of the spare board must be the same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturing information to obtain the version of the board to be replaced.

Tools, Instruments and Materials


l l l ESD wrist strap Screwdriver U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board to be replaced. Step 2 Remove the board. Step 3 Verify that the spare board has the same board version and board type as the board to be replaced. Step 4 Insert the spare board. Step 5 After the substitute board starts to work, check the indicators on the board. The STAT indicator is on and green.
NOTE

Smart E1 boards are hot-swappable. After the spare board is installed, it enters initialization state and starts to work 2 minutes later.

Step 6 Query the current alarms of the substitute board. There is no new alarm on the board. ----End
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 113

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

6.6 Replacing the Ethernet Interface Board


When the Ethernet interface board is replaced, the unprotected services on the board are interrupted.

Prerequisites
l l l l You must know the impact of board replacement. You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced. You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced. The spare board must be made available, and the version and type of the spare board must be the same as those of the board to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturing information to obtain the version of the board to be replaced.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l l l ESD wrist strap Screwdriver U2000 Fiber remover

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board. Step 2 Optional: If the services are configured with MPLS APS, ensure that the services are already switched to the protection tunnel. 1. 2. Querying MPLS APS Status. If the board functions as the current working board, perform the forced switching.

Step 3 Optional: If the services are configured with PW APS, ensure that the services are already switched to the protection PW. 1. 2. Querying PW APS Status. If the board functions as the current working board, perform the forced switching.

Step 4 Remove the board. Step 5 Check and ensure that the board version and the model of the SFP module on the spare board are the same as the board version and the model of the SFP module on the board to be replaced. Step 6 Insert the board.
NOTE

Ethernet interface boards are hot-swappable. After the substitute board is installed, it enters initialization state and starts working two minutes later. If dynamic ARP is disabled on the NE at the opposite end of an MPLS tunnel, you need to change the static ARP table entries of the opposite NE.

Step 7 After the board starts to work, check the indicators on the board. The STAT indicator should be on and green.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 114

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

Step 8 Query the current alarms of the board. There should be no new alarms on the board. Step 9 Optional: If the forced switching has been performed for the services, release the forced switching. ----End

6.7 Replacing the IF Board


When the IF board is replaced, the unprotected services on the board are interrupted.

Prerequisites
l l l l You must know the impact of board replacement. You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced. You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced. The spare board must be available, and the version and type of the spare board must be the same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturing information to obtain the version of the board to be replaced.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l l ESD wrist strap Screwdriver U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board. Step 2 Optional: If the services on the board are configured with SNCP, ensure that the services are already switched to the protection channel. 1. 2. Query the SNCP protection group. If the port on the board functions as the current working channel, the current protection channel is not on the board, perform the forced switching.

Step 3 Optional: If the services on the radio link are configured with 1+1 protection, switch the service to the protection IF board. 1. 2. Query the IF 1+1 protection group. If the board functions as the current working board, perform the forced switching.

Step 4 Optional: If the services on the radio link are configured with N+1 protection, ensure that the services are already switched to the protection IF board. 1. 2. Query the IF N+1 protection group. If the board functions as the current working board, perform the forced switching.

Step 5 Optional: If the services are configured with MPLS APS, ensure that the services are already switched to the protection tunnel. 1.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Querying MPLS APS Status.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 115

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

2.

If the board functions as the current working board, perform the forced switching.

Step 6 Optional: If the services are configured with PW APS, ensure that the services are already switched to the protection PW. 1. 2. Querying PW APS Status. If the board functions as the current working board, perform the forced switching.

Step 7 Optional: If the IF board is configured with the XPIC function, see Setting the ODU Transmitter State and mute the ODU at the opposite end. Step 8 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board to be replaced.

CAUTION
To turn off the ODU-PWR switch, you need to pull the switch lever outwards slightly and then set the switch to the "O" position. Step 9 Remove the board. Step 10 Check and ensure that the version and type of the spare board are the same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. Step 11 Ensure that the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the spare IF board is turned off. Step 12 Insert the board. Step 13 After the board starts to work, check the indicators on the board. The STAT indicator should be on and green. Step 14 Turn on the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board.

CAUTION
To turn on the ODU-PWR switch, you need to pull the switch lever outwards slightly and then set the switch to the "I" position. IF boards are hot-swappable. After the substitute board is installed, it enters initialization state and starts working two minutes later. If dynamic ARP is disabled on the NE at the opposite end of an MPLS tunnel, you need to change the static ARP table entries of the opposite NE. Step 15 Query the current alarms of the board. There should be no new alarms on the board. Step 16 Optional: If the forced switching has been performed for the services, release the forced switching. Step 17 Optional: If the forced protection switching has been performed for the radio link, release the forced switching.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 116

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

Step 18 If the IF board is configured with the XPIC function, see Setting the ODU Transmitter State and unmute the ODU at the opposite end. ----End

6.8 Replacing the CF Card


all the services are interrupted during the replacement of the CF card.

Prerequisites
l l l l You must be aware of the impact of CF card replacement. You must know the specific position of the CF card to be replaced. You must be a user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher. You must obtain a spare CF card that has the same capacity as the CF card to be replaced.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l l ESD wrist strap U2000 Fiber remover

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board. Step 2 Optional: If the board is configured with 1+1 protection, ensure that the services are switched from the current working board to the protection board. 1. 2. See 8.21 Switching the System Control Unit and the Cross-Connect Unit, and ensure that the current working board functions as the protection board. If the board functions as the current working board, perform the manual switching.

Step 3 Remove the board. Step 4 Remove the CF card according to the illustration in the following figure.

Step 5 Check the spare CF card.


Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 117

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

Step 6 Install the spare CF card according to the illustration in the following figure.

Step 7 Insert the board. Step 8 After the board starts to work, observe the indicators on the board. The STAT indicator should be on and green. Step 9 Query the current alarms of the board. There should be no new alarms. Step 10 Optional: If the manual switching has been performed on the board, release the manual switching. ----End

6.9 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board


All the services are interrupted during the period of replacing the system control switch and timing board, if the NE is configured with only one system control switch and timing board.

Prerequisites
l l l l You must be aware of the impact of board replacement. You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced. You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced. The spare board must be made available, and the version and type of the spare board must be the same as those of the board to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturing information to learn about the version of the board to be replaced.

Impact on System
If no protection board is available, the replacement of the System Control Switch and Timing board results in service interruption.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l l l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

ESD wrist strap Screwdriver U2000 Fiber remover


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 118

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

Context
NOTE

After the NE database is restored successfully, a cold reset is automatically performed on the NE.

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board. Step 2 Replace the System control Switch&Timing board. If... One System control Switch and Timing board is configured Then... 1. Notify the onsite maintenance personnel to remove the board. 2. Check and ensure that the version and type of the spare board (including the patch version) are correct.
NOTE If the spare board and the board to be replaced have different patch versions, contact Huawei engineers for loading correct patches.

3. Remove the CF card from the original board and then install the CF card to the spare board. For details about how to install the CF card, see 6.8 Replacing the CF Card. 4. Insert the spare board into the chassis. 5. Press and hold the CF RCV button on the board for 8 seconds so that the board automatically restores the NE databases, system parameters, software packages, and NE logs from the CF card.
NOTE l In the process of restoring the NE database, the PROG indicator on the board blinks green for about 20 minutes. l If the database restoration is successful, the NE resets automatically. After the NE resets successfully, the STAT and PROG indicator is on and green. l If the database restoration fails, the NE does not reset, and the PROG is red. In this case, contact Huawei technical support engineers for rectifying the fault. NOTE After the NE starts up normally, the STAT and PROG indicator on the board is green.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

119

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

If... Two System control Switch and Timing boards are configured

Then... 1. Before replacing the main system control board, switch the main system control board to the protection board. For details, see 8.21 Switching the System Control Unit and the Cross-Connect Unit.
NOTE Replacing the standby system control board does not need to switch the system control board to the protection board.

2. Remove the board to be replaced. 3. Check whether the version and type of the spare board are the same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. 4. Insert the spare board. 5. Wait for about 10 minutes to complete the backup of the data on the main and standby system control units.
NOTE After the NE starts up normally, the STAT and PROG indicator on the board is green.

Step 3 Query the current alarms of the board. There should be no new alarms. ----End

6.10 Replacing the Auxiliary Board


When the auxiliary board is replaced, the services on the auxiliary board are interrupted.

Prerequisites
l l l You must know the impact of board replacement. You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced. The spare board must be made available, and the version and type of the spare board must be the same as those of the board to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturing information to obtain the version of the board to be replaced.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l l l ESD wrist strap Screwdriver U2000 Fiber remover

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 120

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

Step 2 Remove the board. Step 3 Check and ensure that the version and type of the spare board are the same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. Step 4 Insert the spare board. Step 5 After the board starts to work, check the indicators on the board. The STAT indicator should be on and green. Step 6 Query the current alarms of the board. There should be no new alarms on the auxiliary board. ----End

6.11 Replacing the Fan Board


The IDU cannot perform air cooling in the process of replacing the fan board. Therefore, you need to replace the fan board quickly.

Prerequisites
l l l You must be aware of the impact of board replacement. You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced. The spare board must be made available, and the version and type of the spare board must be the same as those of the board to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturing information to learn about the version of the board to be replaced. You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l ESD wrist strap U2000

Precautions

WARNING
Do not touch the blades until the fan has stopped rotating.

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board. Step 2 Move the cables away from the front panel of the fan board assembly. Step 3 Loosen captive screws. Step 4 Remove the fan board.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 121

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

Step 5 Check and ensure that the version and type of the spare board are the same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. Step 6 Insert the standby fan board.

Step 7 Tighten captive screws. Step 8 After the board starts to work, observe the indicators on the board. The FAN indicator should be on and green.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

122

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

Step 9 Query the current alarms of the board. There should be no new alarms. ----End

6.12 Replacing the Power Board


If another power board works normally during the replacement period, the services at the IDU are not affected.

Prerequisites
l l l You must be aware of the impact of board replacement. You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced. The spare board must be made available, and the version and type of the spare board must be the same as those of the board to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturing information to obtain the version of the board to be replaced.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l l ESD wrist strap Screwdriver U2000

Precautions

WARNING
Before replacing the board, you must turn off the power switch of the PDU. Do not connect the interface to the power plug. After inserting the PIU properly, insert the power plug, and then turn on the power switch of the PDU.

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board. Step 2 Notify the onsite maintenance personnel to turn off the output power switch on the power supply equipment. Step 3 Remove the cables connected to the board. Step 4 Remove the power board gently and horizontally along the guide rail. Step 5 Check and ensure that the version and type of the spare board are the same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. Step 6 Insert the spare board steadily along the guide rail. Step 7 Reconnect the cables between the board and the power supply equipment.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 123

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

Step 8 Notify the onsite maintenance personnel to turn on the output power switch on the equipment. Step 9 After the board starts to work, observe the indicators on the board. The PWR indicator should be on and green. ----End

6.13 Replacing the SFP


When the small form pluggable (SFP) is replaced, the unprotected services on the optical/ electrical port are interrupted.

Prerequisites
l l l l You must know the impact of SFP replacement. You must know the specific position of the SFP to be replaced. You must know the service protection and protection channels of the SFP to be replaced. The spare SFP must be available, and the version and type of the spare SFP must be the same as the version and type of the SFP to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturing information to obtain the version of the SFP to be replaced.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


l l l ESD wrist strap Screwdriver U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board. Step 2 Optional: If SNCP is configured for services at the optical interface, ensure that the services are already switched to the protection channel. 1. 2. Query the status of the SNCP group. If the port on the local board functions as the working channel, the protection channel does not involve the local board, and the protection channel is in the normal or SD state, perform forced switching.

Step 3 Optional: If linear MSP is configured for services at the optical interface, ensure that the services are already switched to the protection channel. 1. 2. Query the status of the linear MSP group. If the port on the local board functions as the working channel, the protection channel does not involve the local board, and the protection channel is in the normal or SD state, perform forced switching.

Step 4 Record the cable connections of the SFP, and then disconnect cables. Step 5 Check the types of the spare SFP and the SFP to be replaced, and remove the SFP module.
NOTE

When removing the STM1 electrical module, press the blcak button first.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

124

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

1 2

1 Press the unclocking button. 2 Remove the STM-1 electical module.

Step 6 Insert the standby SFP module and reconnect cables based on the record. Step 7 Query the current alarms of the board. There should be no new alarms on the board. Step 8 Optional: If the forced switching has been performed on the board, release the forced switching. Step 9 Optional: If the linear MSP switching has been performed for the services, release the forced switching. ----End

6.14 Replacing the ODU


When the ODU is replaced, the unprotected services on the ODU are interrupted.

Prerequisites
l l l You must know the impact of ODU replacement. You must know the specific positions of the ODU to be replaced and the IF board connected to the ODU. The spare ODU must be at hand, whose type must be the same as the type of the ODU to be replaced.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l l l Ejector lever (torque spanner) U2000 Silicon Waterproof adhesive tape

Precautions
Before you replace an ODU that is installed on the coupler, power off the ODU to be replaced, but do not power off or mute the other ODU. Otherwise, the services may be affected. The interface of the coupler ejects little RF radiation, thus meeting the safety standards for microwave radiation.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 125

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

Do not damage the coating when you replace an ODU. In the case of any coating damage, repair the coating timely.

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms on the ODU and then record the results. Step 2 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board. Step 3 Remove the IF cable and the PGND cable from the ODU. Step 4 Remove the ODU. Option If... You need to remove the RTN 600 ODU with a waveguide interface You need to remove the RTN 600 ODU with a coaxial interface Description Then... Loosen the four latches of the ODU and disconnect the ODU from the antenna, the hybrid coupler, or ODU adapter. Remove the ODU from the post.

You need to remove the RTN XMC ODU Loosen the captive screws on the ODU and disconnect the ODU from the antenna, the hybrid coupler, or ODU adapter. Step 5 Ensure the type of the spare ODU is the same as the type of the ODU to be replaced. Step 6 Install the ODU. Option If... You need to install a new RTN 600 ODU with a waveguide interface You need to install a new RTN 600 ODU with a coaxial interface Description Then... See the RTN 600 ODU Quick Installation Guide. See the RTN 600 ODU Quick Installation Guide.

You need to install a new RTN XMC ODU See the RTN XMC ODU Installation Guide. Step 7 Connect the PGND cable and the IF cable to the ODU. Step 8 Waterproof the IF interface on the ODU. Step 9 Turn on the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board. Step 10 After the ODU starts to work, check the ODU indicator and LINK indicator on the IF board. The ODU indicator and LINK indicator should be on and green. Step 11 Query the current alarms of the ODU. There should be no new alarms on the ODU. ----End

6.15 Replacing the IF Cable


When the IF cable is replaced, the unprotected services on the IF cable are interrupted.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 126

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

Prerequisites
l l l You must know the impact of IF cable replacement. You must know the specific positions of the IF cable to be replaced and the IF board connected to the IF jumper. In the case of the RG-8U IF cable or the 1/2-inch IF cable, an IF jumper is required to connect the IF cable to the IDU and both ends of the IF cable should be terminated with type-N connectors. In the case of the 5D IF cable, the IF cable is connected directly to the IDU and the cable end connecting to the IDU should be terminated with the TNC connector and the cable end connecting to the ODU should be terminated with the type-N connector.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l l l l l l Multimeter Ejector lever Electro-technical knife File Installation parts and accessories of the connector IF cable Waterproof adhesive tape

Procedure
Step 1 Query and record the current alarm of the IDU. Step 2 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board. Step 3 Disconnect the IF cable from the IF jumper and from the ODU. Step 4 Use a multimeter to test the connectivity of the IF cable to determine whether you need to make new connectors for the IF cable or replace the IF cable with a new one. If... You need to make new connectors for the IF cable Then... See the Installation Reference and make new connectors for the IF cable.

You need to replace the IF cable with a new Replace the IF cable with a new one. one Step 5 Connect the IF cable to the IF jumper and to the ODU. Step 6 Waterproof the connectors at the two ends of the IF cable with the waterproof adhesive tape. Step 7 Turn on the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board. Step 8 After the ODU starts to work, check the ODU and LINK indicators on the IF board. The ODU indicator and LINK indicator should be on and green. Step 9 Query the current alarms of the IDU. There should be no new alarms on the IDU. ----End
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 127

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

7 Database Backup and Restoration

Database Backup and Restoration

About This Chapter


The OptiX RTN 980 supports database backup and restoration through the NMS. 7.1 NE Database An NE database stores the communication data, security data, alarm data, performance data, and configuration data of an NE in a certain structure to facilitate the relevant query and modification, hence ensuring that the data can be restored after the NE is reset. 7.2 Backing Up the Database Manually The NE configuration data is stored in the database of an NE. To prevent the database from being damaged due to certain risky operations such as replacing a faulty system control, crossconnect, and timing board or upgrading the software, you need to manually back up the database on a regular basis and before performing any risk operation. 7.3 Setting the Database Backup Policy You can set the policy of backing up a database to realize the function of periodically backing up the database. 7.4 Restoring the Database If the database is damaged, you can restore the NE database by using the database files that are saved previously.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

128

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

7 Database Backup and Restoration

7.1 NE Database
An NE database stores the communication data, security data, alarm data, performance data, and configuration data of an NE in a certain structure to facilitate the relevant query and modification, hence ensuring that the data can be restored after the NE is reset. An NE database includes the following types: l Memory database (MDB) The data in the MDB varies according to the configuration and is lost when the system control unit is reset or when the NE is powered off. l Dynamic random database (DRDB) The DRDB automatically stores the data that is checked successfully. The DRDB is resident in the reserved memory. Hence, the data in the DRDB is not lost when a warm reset is performed on the system control unit. The data, however, is lost when a cold reset is performed on the system control unit or when the NE is powered off. l Flash database (FDB) The FDB includes FDB0 and FDB1. The FDB is resident in the flash memory on the board. Hence, the data in the FDB is permanently stored. After being delivered to the system control unit, the NE configuration data is stored in the MDB. After checking the NE configuration data successfully, the system control unit automatically copies the data from the MDB to the DRDB and delivers the board configuration data generated after successful check to the relevant board. The NE backs up the DRDB database into the FDB0 and FDB1 databases of the flash memory at an interval of 30 minutes. After the NE is restarted because of power-off, the system control unit checks whether the configuration data in the DRDB is available. If yes, the system control unit restores the data. If the configuration data in the DRDB is damaged, the system control unit restores the data from FDB0 or FDB1. On the CF card, NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IP, NE-ID, and subnet mask), software packages, and NE logs are stored. After the CRV button on the system control, switching and timing board is pressed and held for 8 seconds, the data stored on the CF card is loaded to the board. To synchronize the data on the CF card with the NE databases, system parameters, and NE logs on the system control, switching and timing board, the regular backup function needs to be enabled. By default, the data is backed up every 24 hours.
NOTE

The software packages on the CF card are updated with those on the system control, switching and timing board during package diffusion. Therefore, no automatic or manual operation is performed to synchronize the software packages. The system control, switching and timing board and the CF card must have same software packages. If they have different software packages, the SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH alarm is reported.

7.2 Backing Up the Database Manually


The NE configuration data is stored in the database of an NE. To prevent the database from being damaged due to certain risky operations such as replacing a faulty system control, crossIssue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 129

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

7 Database Backup and Restoration

connect, and timing board or upgrading the software, you need to manually back up the database on a regular basis and before performing any risk operation.

Prerequisites
l l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. You must log in to the NE.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 On the NMS, choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Data Backup/ Restoration from the Main Menu. Step 2 In NE View, click Find. Step 3 In the Find NE dialog box, set the search conditions and search for the NE that requires database backup. Step 4 Click OK. Step 5 Click Backup.
NOTE

Press and hold the Ctrl button on the keyboard, you can select multiple NEs to back up the data at one time.

Step 6 Set the data backup path to NMS Server or NMS Client according to the requirements. Step 7 Click Start to start backing up the NE data. In NE View, Operation Status indicates the progress of backing up the data. After the data backup is successful, Operation Status displays a message, indicating that the operation is successful. ----End

7.3 Setting the Database Backup Policy


You can set the policy of backing up a database to realize the function of periodically backing up the database.

7.3.1 Setting the User-Defined Backup Policy


Through this task, you can set the backup policy for a specific NE.

Prerequisites
l l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. You must log in to the NE.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 130

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

7 Database Backup and Restoration

Background Information
Each NE has a default data backup policy. l l l l Database packages are backed up once at 2:00. The default backup policy is disabled by default. A maximum of five database packages can be backed up at a time. Data changes do not trigger any backup operations.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Backup Policy Management from the Main Menu. Then, the NE Backup Policy Management dialog box is displayed. Step 2 In Auto Backup Policy window, set NE type. The version, name, and IP address of the selected NE are displayed. Step 3 Click New Policy. Step 4 Optional: Click Step 5 Optional: Click to import the information of the NEs. to export the information of the NEs.

The information of the selected NEs is stored in the specified location. Step 6 In NE Table, select one or more NEs. Step 7 Click Next. Then, the Setting Policy dialog box is displayed. Step 8 Set Policy Name, Period Backup Policy, and Period Save Policy.
NOTE

l If The Added NE's Policy Status is set to Enable, the NMS performs the backup operation within the specified period, day, and time. l If The Added NE's Policy Status is set to Disable, the backup policy is still in the Disable state although the policy period reaches the specified period, day, and time.

Step 9 Click Advanced Settings, and set Backup Type, Max Backup Num, and Configuration Change Backup for a certain type of NEs. Step 10 Click OK. Step 11 Click OK. ----End

7.3.2 Enable the Backup Policy of the Device


Through this task, you can set the backup policy of a device to the running state.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 131

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

7 Database Backup and Restoration

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Backup Policy Management from the Main Menu. Then, the NE Backup Policy Management dialog box is displayed. Step 2 In Auto Backup Policy window, set NE type. The version, name, and IP address of the selected NE are displayed. Step 3 Right click the selected NE, Click Enable Backup Policy. ----End

7.3.3 Disable the Backup Policy of the Device


Through this task, you can set the backup policy of a device to the suspended state.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Backup Policy Management from the Main Menu. Then, the NE Backup Policy Management dialog box is displayed. Step 2 In Auto Backup Policy window, set NE type. The version, name, and IP address of the selected NE are displayed. Step 3 Right click the selected NE, Click Disable Backup Policy. ----End

7.4 Restoring the Database


If the database is damaged, you can restore the NE database by using the database files that are saved previously.

Prerequisites
l l l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. The data to be restored must be backed up. You must log in to the NE.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 132

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

7 Database Backup and Restoration

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 On the NMS, choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Data Backup/ Restoration from the Main Menu. The NE Data Backup/Restoration window is displayed. Step 2 In NE View, click Find. Then, the Find NE dialog box is displayed. Step 3 In the Find NE dialog box, set the search conditions to search for the NEs that need to restore databases. Step 4 Click OK. Step 5 Select the NE whose data needs to be recovered, and click Recover.
NOTE

You can select multiple NEs to recover the data at one time.

Then, the Recover dialog box is displayed. Step 6 Select Browse in File Name. Then, the Select File dialog box is displayed. Step 7 Select files from NMS Server or NMS Client, and then choose the files to be recovered. Click OK. Step 8 In the Recover dialog box, click Start. Step 9 Click Yes in the prompt dialog box. The system starts recovering the selected data files on the specified NE. In the NE list of NE View, Operation Status indicates the progress of recovering the data. After the data is recovered, Operation Status displays a message, indicating that the operation is successful. Step 10 In NE View, right-click the NE and choose Active Database from the shortcut menu. The Active Database dialog box is displayed. Step 11 Click Start to start activating the database.
NOTE

If the NE transmits data services, select Deliver to Board. Services are interrupted during the activation of databases.

In NE View, Operation Status indicates the progress of activating the database. After the database is activated, Operation Status indicates that the operation is successful. ----End

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

133

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

8
About This Chapter

Supporting Task

This chapter describes the common maintenance operations. 8.1 Hardware Loopback Hardware loopback refers to the loopback operation performed by changing the physical connection. 8.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters The optical connectors are easily contaminated in the maintenance process. The minute dust particles that can be seen only in the microscope can also affect the quality of optical signals. In this case, the system performance deteriorates. Hence, the fiber connectors or adapters that are terminated need to be cleaned in time. 8.3 Browsing Alarms, Abnormal Events, and Performance Events The U2000 is used to browse alarms, abnormal events, and performance events at the network layer. 8.4 Using the RMON Remote monitoring (RMON) is mainly used to monitor the data traffic on a network segment or on the entire network. Currently, it is one of the widely used network management standards. 8.5 Querying a Report You can obtain the version, manufacture, and microwave link information of all the boards by querying the corresponding report. 8.6 Software Loopback Software loopback refers to the loopback operation that is implemented by using the NMS. During software loopback, you need not visit the engineering site. Hence, software loopback is used more widely than hardware loopback. 8.7 Reset Reset is an important method of troubleshooting software faults. Reset is classified into cold reset, warm reset. 8.8 PRBS Test The pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) test is an important method of network maintenance and self-check.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 134

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

8.9 Querying the License Capacity You can check whether the loaded license file meets the requirements by querying the license capacity. 8.10 Setting the On/Off State of the Laser When performing operations such as testing a fiber cut, you can set the on/off state of the laser rather than removing and re-inserting the optical fiber on site. 8.11 Setting the ALS Function The SDH optical interface board supports the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. This function enables the board to turn off a laser when the board does not transmit services, the optical fiber is faulty, or the received optical signals are lost. 8.12 Setting the Automatic Release Function To protect the communication between the NMS and NE against improper operations, an NE supports the automatic release of the ODU muting, software loopback, and other operations that require you to exercise caution. The automatic release time is five minutes by default. You can set whether to enable the automatic release function and the automatic release time through the NMS. 8.13 Querying Power Consumption of Boards This section describes how to query power consumption of the ODU and each board. 8.14 Querying the Impedance of an E1 Channel The impedance of an E1 channel is 75 ohms or 120 ohms. 8.15 Monitoring Ethernet Packets Through Port Mirroring To monitor and analyze the Ethernet packets at a port, you can enable the port mirroring function so that the received or transmitted packets on the port are duplicated to another Ethernet port to which the Ethernet tester is connected. Then, you can monitor and analyze the packets. This function is supported by the EFP8/EMS6 board of the OptiX RTN 980. 8.16 Querying the Attributes of an Ethernet Port Through the operation, you can learn about the attributes of an Ethernet port, such as rate. 8.17 Setting Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet Ports To query the traffic, physical bandwidth, or bandwidth utilization of Ethernet ports within a certain period, you need to enable the monitoring for the object before that period starts. The FE/GE ports and Integrated IP radio ports on the packet plane support this operation. 8.18 Querying Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet Ports This section describes how to query the change curve of the traffic, physical bandwidth, or bandwidth utilization of Ethernet ports within a certain period. The FE/GE ports and Integrated IP radio ports on the packet plane support this operation. 8.19 Setting the Threshold of Received Traffic Flow on an Ethernet Port The FLOW_OVER alarm is reported when the traffic flow received on an Ethernet port exceeds the specified threshold. Only the FE port on the EFP8 board supports this operation. 8.20 Using the Ethernet Test Frames By using the Ethernet test frames, you can check the connectivity of VCTRUNKs. Only the EFP8 board supports this operation. 8.21 Switching the System Control Unit and the Cross-Connect Unit When the OptiX RTN 980 is configured with two system control, cross-connect, and timing boards, you can manually switch the system control unit and the cross-connect unit as required. 8.22 End-to-End Management on Fibers, Tunnels, and PWE3 Services
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 135

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

This section describes the common maintenance operations for end-to-end management on fibers, MPLS tunnels, and PWE3 services.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

136

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

8.1 Hardware Loopback


Hardware loopback refers to the loopback operation performed by changing the physical connection.

Background Information
Hardware loopback is classified into optical cable loopback, PDH cable loopback, and Ethernet electrical port loopback. l Optical cable loopback indicates that the receive and transmit optical fibers are connected through a fiber jumper on the ODF. In certain occasions, an optical attenuator is added based on the actual situation, to prevent the optical SFP from being damaged by the excessive receive optical power. PDH cable loopback indicates that the receive and transmit PDH cables are connected through a short-circuiting cable or connector on the DDF. Ethernet electrical port loopback indicates that the receive and transmit service signals on one Ethernet port are looped back through a special loopback Ethernet cable.

l l

8.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters


The optical connectors are easily contaminated in the maintenance process. The minute dust particles that can be seen only in the microscope can also affect the quality of optical signals. In this case, the system performance deteriorates. Hence, the fiber connectors or adapters that are terminated need to be cleaned in time.

8.2.1 Cleaning Fiber Connectors by Using Cartridge Cleaners


When there are special cartridge cleaners (such as the CLETOP cassette cleaner), use them for cleaning the fiber connectors.

Prerequisites
l l Disconnect both ends of the fiber. Ensure that there is no laser light on the fiber connectors. Inspect the fiber connector with a fiber microscope to ensure that the fiber connectors are contaminated.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Cartridge cleaner

Procedure
Step 1 Press down and hold the lever. Then, the shutter slides back and exposes a new cleaning area.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

137

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Figure 8-1 Using the CLETOP cassette cleaner

Step 2 Position the fiber tip slightly against the cleaning area and drag the fiber tip slightly in the downward direction. Figure 8-2 Dragging the fiber tip slightly on one cleaning area

Step 3 Repeat the same in the other cleaning area in the same direction as Step 2.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 138

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Figure 8-3 Dragging the fiber tip slightly on the other cleaning area

Step 4 Release the lever to close the cleaning area. ----End

8.2.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors by Using Lens Tissue


When there is no cartridge cleaners, use the lens tissue for cleaning fiber connectors.

Prerequisites
l l Disconnect both ends of the fiber. ensure that there is no laser light on the fiber connectors. Inspect the fiber connector with a fiber microscope to ensure that the fiber connectors are contaminated.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l l Clean solvent Non-woven lens tissue Special compressed gas
NOTE

l The isoamylol is preferred as the clean solvent, and the propyl can also be used as the clean solvent. Do not use alcohol or formalin. l The fiber cleaning tissue or lint-free wipes can substitute the non-woven lens tissue. l The special cleaning roll can substitute the special compressed gas.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

139

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Procedure
Step 1 Place a small amount of cleaning solvent on the lens tissue. Step 2 Drag the fiber tip slightly on the lens tissue. Figure 8-4 Cleaning the fiber with the lens tissue

Step 3 Repeat Step 2 several times on the areas of the lens tissue that have not been used. Step 4 Use the compressed gas to blow the fiber tip. When using compressed gas, note the following points: l First spray it into the air because the initial spray of condensation may contain certain sediment. l Ensure that the injector nozzle is as close as possible to (but does not touch) the connector surface. ----End

8.2.3 Cleaning Fiber Adapters by Using Optical Cleaning Sticks


The fiber adapters need to be cleaned with optical cleaning sticks. This section describes the method of cleaning fiber adapters on the optical interface board. The same method can be used to clean fiber adapters on the optical attenuators and flanges.

Prerequisites
l l Before you clean the fiber adapter, remove the optical fiber and shut down the laser. For details about how to shut down a laser, see 8.10 Setting the On/Off State of the Laser. Inspect the fiber adapter with a fiber microscope to ensure that the fiber adapter is contaminated.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 140

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l l Optical cleaning sticks Clean solvent Special compressed gas
NOTE

l In the case of the SC and FC optical interface, use the cleaning stick with a diameter of 2.5 mm. In the case of the LC optical interface, use the cleaning stick with a diameter of 1.25 mm. l The medical cotton or long fiber cotton can substitute the optical cleaning stick. l The isoamylol is preferred as the clean solvent, and the propyl can also be used as the clean solvent. Do not use alcohol or formalin. l The special cleaning roll can substitute the special compressed gas.

Procedure
Step 1 Apply a small amount of cleaning solvent on the optical cleaning stick. Step 2 Touch the adapter gently with the optical cleaning stick and turn the stick clockwise four to five times. Ensure that there is direct contact between the stick tip and fiber tip so that the solvent can clean the adapter tip. Step 3 Use the compressed gas to blow the fiber adapter. When using compressed gas, note the following points: l First spray the compressed gas into the air because the initial spray of condensation gas may contain some sediment. l Ensure that the injector nozzle is as close as possible to (but does not touch) the inner surface of the connector. ----End

8.3 Browsing Alarms, Abnormal Events, and Performance Events


The U2000 is used to browse alarms, abnormal events, and performance events at the network layer.

8.3.1 Checking the NE Status


You can learn about the basic information such as whether the NE fails to communicate with the NMS and whether any alarms are reported by checking the NE status.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 141

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Precautions
NOTE

By default, the color of the NE icon on the NMS indicates the NE status.

Procedure
Step 1 In Main Topology, select the required NE. Step 2 In Main Topology, click Step 3 Click the Attribute tab. Step 4 View the NE status and alarm status.
TIP

You can also determine the NE status based on the comparison between the NE icon and the description at the Legend tab.

----End

8.3.2 Checking the Board Status


You can learn about the board status in a visual manner by checking the slot diagram.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 On the Main Topology, double-click the desired NE. The NE Panel is displayed. The NE is in Running Status. Step 2 Click the icon. The legend description is displayed.

Step 3 Check the running status of the boards based on the legend description. If a board is running normally, the board icon is green. ----End

8.3.3 Browsing Current Alarms


You can find the faults that occur on the equipment by browsing current alarms.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 142

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm from the Main Menu. Step 2 Optional: In the Filter dialog box, click the Basic Settings tab. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. In Severity, select the alarm severity to be queried. In Status, select the alarm status to be queried. In Type, select the alarm type. In Last Occurrence Time Segment, specify the alarm generation time. In Clearance Time Segment, specify the alarm clearance time.

Step 3 In the Filter dialog box, click the Alarm Source tab. Step 4 Select the object to be queried. Option Browse all alarms on the NE. Description Select All Objects. 2. Choose Add > Object below NE. 3. Select the required NE in the left pane of Object below NE, and click 4. Click OK. Alarm Source displays Selected Alarm Source. Step 5 Click OK. Step 6 Browse the displayed alarms. Step 7 Select the newly generated alarms, record the details of the alarms, and click Acknowledge. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Step 8 Click Yes. Step 9 Notify the troubleshooting personnel to clear the alarms in time. For the details, see A.3 Alarms and Handling Procedures. ----End .

Browse certain alarms on the NE. 1. Select Custom.

Related Information
A current alarm refers to an alarm that is not cleared. You can browse the network-wide alarms based on the alarm severity by clicking the alarm indicators in the upper right corner. l l l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

You can click You can click You can click

(red) to browse the network-wide critical alarms. (orange) to browse the network-wide major alarms. (yellow) to browse the network-wide minor alarms.
143

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

You can click


NOTE

(light-blue) to browse the network-wide warning alarms.

By default, the number shown by each indicator indicates the number of current network-wide alarms, which are not cleared, of the specific severity.

8.3.4 Browsing Abnormal Events


You can find the faults that occur on the equipment in a specific time by browsing abnormal events. An abnormal event refers to an exception that occurs on the system at a particular time rather than an exception that persists for a certain time of period.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Fault > Browse Event Logs from the Main Menu. Step 2 In the Filter dialog box, click the Event Source tab. Step 3 Select the object to be queried. Option Description

Browse all performance events on the NE. Select All Objects. Browse certain performance events on the 1. Select Custom. NE. 2. Choose Add > Object below NE. 3. Select the required NE in the left pane of Object below NE, and click 4. Click OK. Event Source displays Selected Event Source. Step 4 Click OK. Step 5 Browse the abnormal events. For details on how to handle an abnormal event, see B.2 Abnormal Performance Events and Handling Procedures. ----End .

Related Information
Being different from an alarm that has both the occurrence time and the clearance time, an abnormal event has only the occurrence time.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 144

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

8.3.5 Browsing Current Performance Events


You can know the running status of the equipment by browsing current SDH/PDH performance events. The counter of current performance events measures all the performance events that arise between the start time of the monitoring period and the current time.

Prerequisites
l The performance monitoring function must be enabled. For details about how to enable the performance monitoring function, see 8.3.10 Configuring the Performance Monitoring Status of NEs. You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Performance > Browse SDH Performance from the Main Menu, and then click the Current Performance Data tab. Step 2 Select one or more NEs from the left pane, and click Step 3 Select All in Monitored Object Filter Condition. Step 4 Select 15-Minute in the Monitor Period field. Step 5 Click the Count tab, and then select Display Continuous Severely Errored Seconds. Step 6 Click Query to browse the current performance events. In normal cases, no bit error performance events should be displayed, and the number of pointer justification events should be less than six per day. Step 7 Click the Measure tab, click Select All. In the Measure tag page, the maximum and minimum values of the performance events are displayed with the current value. Step 8 Click Query to browse the displayed performance events. In normal cases, compared with the history records, the gauge indicators, such as the board temperature, do not change drastically. Step 9 Re-define the time span by setting Monitor Period to 24-Hour. Step 10 Repeat Step 5 through Step 8 to query the current performance events in a period of 24 hours. ----End .

8.3.6 Browsing History Alarms


You can know the faults that occur on the equipment in a past period of time by browsing history alarms. A history alarm refers to an alarm that is already cleared.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 145

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Fault > Browse History Alarm from the Main Menu. Step 2 Optional: In the Filter dialog box, click the Basic Settings tab. 1. 2. 3. 4. In Severity, select the alarm severity to be queried. In Type, select the alarm type. In Occurrence Time Segment, specify the alarm generation time. In Clearance Time Segment, specify the alarm clearance time. The time span starts from the time when the last history alarm browsing operation was performed to the current time. Step 3 In the Filter dialog box, click the Alarm Source tab. Step 4 Select the object to be queried. Option Browse all alarms on the NE. Description Select All Objects. 2. Choose Add > Object below NE. 3. Select the required NE in the left pane of Object below NE, and click 4. Click OK. Alarm Source displays Selected Alarm Source. Step 5 Click OK. Step 6 Browse the displayed history alarms. ----End .

Browse certain alarms on the NE. 1. Select Custom.

8.3.7 Browsing History Performance Events


You can know the faults that occur on the equipment in a past period of time by browsing history performance events.

Prerequisites
l The performance monitoring function must be enabled. For details about how to enable the performance monitoring function, see 8.3.10 Configuring the Performance Monitoring Status of NEs. You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 146

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Performance > Browse SDH Performance from the main menu, and then click the History Performance Data tab. Step 2 Select one or more NEs from the left pane, and click .

Step 3 Set the parameters, such as Monitored Object Filter Condition, Monitor Period, Data Source. Step 4 Click the Gauge tab, and set Performance Event Type. Step 5 Click the Count tab, and set Performance Event Type. Step 6 Click Query. ----End

8.3.8 Browsing the Performance Event Threshold-Crossing Records


You can learn about the threshold-crossing information of the performance events of an NE by browsing the performance event threshold-crossing records.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Browse the performance event threshold-crossing records that are displayed. Step 2 Choose Performance > Browse SDH Performance from the Main Menu. Step 3 Click the Performance Threshold-Crossing Record tab. Step 4 Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Click .

Step 5 Set the parameters such as Monitored Object Filter Condition, Monitor Period, and Performance Event Type. Step 6 Click Query. ----End

8.3.9 Browsing UAT Events


Learn about the severe abnormalities on the transmission line by browsing UAT events.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 147

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Tools, Instruments and Materials


U2000

Context
UAT refers to a period of 10 consecutive seconds during which the bit error ratio per second of the digital signal in either of the transmission directions of a transmission system is inferior to 10-3. These 10 seconds are considered to be part of the unavailable time.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board. Step 2 Choose Performance > UAT Event from the Function Tree. Step 3 Set Monitored Object Filter Condition, From, To, and Data Source. Step 4 Set Function Block Type and Display Options. Step 5 Click Query. Step 6 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.3.10 Configuring the Performance Monitoring Status of NEs


By performing this operation task, you can manually enable or disable performance monitoring for NEs, or set the performance monitoring period.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree, and then choose Performance > NE Performance Monitoring Time from the Function Tree. Step 2 Configure the performance monitoring parameters of the NEs. 1. 2. 3. Select 15-Minute or 24-Hour. Select Enabled or Disabled in Set 15-Minute Monitoring or Set 24-Hour Monitoring. Set the start time and end time of the performance monitoring of NEs.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

148

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)


NOTE

8 Supporting Task

l Generally, both Set 15-Minute Monitoring and Set 24-Hour Monitoring are enabled. l You can specify the start time of the performance monitoring function, only after selecting Enabled in the Set 15-Minute Monitoring or Set 24-Hour Monitoring area. l You can specify the end time of the performance monitoring function, only after selecting Enabled and then selecting To in the Set 15-Minute Monitoring or Set 24-Hour Monitoring area.

4.

Click Apply. Close the displayed dialog box.

----End

8.3.11 Setting Severity and Auto Reporting Status of Alarms


This section describes how to set the severity and auto reporting status of specific alarms.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Instruments and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired object. Step 2 Choose Alarm > Alarm Severity and Auto Reporting from the Function Tree. Step 3 Select any items in the column Event and set Severity and Auto Reporting Status for them. Step 4 Click Apply to save the settings. Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.3.12 Suppressing Alarms for Monitored Objects


This section describes how to suppress specific alarms for a specific monitored object.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 149

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Instruments and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board. Step 2 Choose Alarm > Alarm Suppression from the Function Tree. Step 3 Set Monitored Object and click Query. Step 4 Set Status in Alarm Suppression. Step 5 Click Apply. Step 6 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.3.13 Suppressing Alarms for NEs


This section describes how to suppress certain alarms for NEs.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Instruments and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE. Step 2 Choose Alarm > Alarm Suppression from the Function Tree. Step 3 Set Status in Alarm Suppression. Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.3.14 Reversing Alarms for Service Ports


This section describes how to reverse alarms for service ports.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 150

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Tools, Instruments and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE. Step 2 Choose Alarm > NE Alarm Attribute from the Function Tree. Step 3 Set Alarm Reversion to Enable (Manually Restore). Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed. Step 6 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board. Step 7 Choose Alarm > Alarm Reversion from the Function Tree. Step 8 Set Reversion Status for the required port. Step 9 Click Apply. Step 10 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.3.15 Setting Trigger Conditions of AIS Insertion


This section describes how to set the trigger conditions of AIS insertion for specific monitored objects.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Instruments and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board. Step 2 Choose Alarm > QoS Alarm > AIS Insertion from the Function Tree. Step 3 Set the trigger conditions of AIS insertion. If you select Enabled under an alarm, the AIS signal is inserted when this alarm occurs; otherwise, the AIS signal is not inserted when this alarm occurs. Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 151

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

8.3.16 Setting Trigger Conditions of UNEQ Insertion


This section describes how to set the trigger conditions of UNEQ insertion for service ports.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Instruments and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board. Step 2 Choose Alarm > QoS Alarm > UNEQ Insertion Switch from the Function Tree. Step 3 Set the trigger conditions of UNEQ insertion. If you select Enabled under an alarm, the UNEQ signal (all 0s) is inserted when this alarm occurs; otherwise, the UNEQ signal is not inserted when this alarm occurs. Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.3.17 Setting Bit Error Thresholds for Service Ports


This section describes how to set bit error thresholds for service ports.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Instruments and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board. Step 2 Choose Alarm > QoS Alarm > Bit Error Alarm Threshold from the Function Tree. Step 3 Set bit error thresholds. Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 152

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

8.3.18 Setting Monitoring and Auto-Report Status of Performance Events


This section describes how to set monitoring and auto-report status of specific performance events for monitored objects.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Instruments and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board. Step 2 Choose Performance > Performance Monitor Status from the Function Tree. Step 3 Set the following parameters: Monitor Status, 15-Minute Auto-Report, and 24-Hour AutoReport. Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.3.19 Setting Performance Thresholds


This section describes how to set the thresholds of specific performance events for monitored objects.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Instruments and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board. Step 2 Choose Performance > Performance Threshold from the Function Tree. Step 3 Set Threshold Value. Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 153

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

8.3.20 Resetting Performance Registers


This section describes how to reset performance registers. After performance registers are reset, their counts are cleared and they immediately start a new counting period.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Instruments and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board. Step 2 Choose Performance > Reset Board Performance Register from the Function Tree. Step 3 Set Monitored Object and register types. Step 4 Click Reset. Step 5 In the Hint dialog box that is displayed, click Yes. Step 6 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.4 Using the RMON


Remote monitoring (RMON) is mainly used to monitor the data traffic on a network segment or on the entire network. Currently, it is one of the widely used network management standards.

8.4.1 Browsing the Performance Data in the Statistics Group of a Port


After you configure an RMON statistics group for a port, you can browse the real-time statistical performance data of the port.

Prerequisites
l l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. The corresponding board must be added in the NE Panel.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, navigate to the performance query interfaces for different objects according to the following tables.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 154

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Table 8-1 Packet plane Performa nce Object Basic performan ce Extended performan ce MPLS tunnel performan ce MPLS tunnel Browse Object Ethernet porta Navigation Path

Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
NOTE a: Ethernet ports on the packet plane include FE/GE ports, Integrated IP radio ports, port 10 on the EFP8 board, and port 8 on the EMS6 board.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree. 2. Click the Static Tunnel tab. 3. Select one or more tunnels, right-click the tunnel(s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.

L2 VPNPW performan ce

ETH PWE3 service

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree. 2. Select one or more ETH PWE3 services, right-click the service (s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.

L2 VPN performan ce

UNI-UNI E-Line service

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree. 2. Select one or more UNI-UNI E-Line services, right-click the service(s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.

CES-PW performan ce CES performan ce ATM/IMA (access side) performan ce ATM-PW performan ce

CES service

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CES Service Management from the Function Tree. 2. Select one or more CES services, right-click the service(s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.

Smart E1 port

Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.

ATM PWE3 service

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM Service Management from the Function Tree. 2. Select one or more ATM PWE3 services, right-click the service(s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

155

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Performa nce Object ATM PWE3 performan ce Port traffic classificati on performan ce

Browse Object

Navigation Path

Ports that perform complex traffic classificati on

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree. 2. Click the Application Object tab. 3. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.
NOTE Complete the operation Creating Traffic before monitoring the port traffic classification performance.

Port priority performan ce

Egress queues

For FE/GE ports: 1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. 2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. 3. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. 4. Select the desired egress queue in the Object drop-down list. For Integrated IP radio ports: 1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. 2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. 3. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. 4. Select the desired egress queue in the Object drop-down list.

Port DS domain performan ce

Ports in a DS domain

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree. 2. Select the desired DS domain. 3. Click the Application Object tab. 4. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.

Step 2 Click the Statistics Group tab. Step 3 Set the required parameters for the statistics group.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

156

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

1. 2. 3.

Select the desired object or port from the drop-down list. Select the performance items for which statistics need to be collected. Set Sampling Period. Sampling Period represents the time unit of the performance statistics.

Step 4 Click Resetting begins.


NOTE

If you click Start, the register of the statistics group is not reset to clear the existing data.

----End

8.4.2 Configuring an Alarm Group for a Port


After you configure an RMON alarm group for a port, you can monitor whether the performance value of the port crosses the configured thresholds in the long term.

Prerequisites
l l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. The corresponding boards must be added in the NE Panel.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, navigate to the performance query interfaces for different objects according to the following tables. Table 8-2 Packet plane Performa nce Object Basic performan ce Extended performan ce MPLS tunnel performan ce MPLS tunnel Browse Object Ethernet porta Navigation Path

Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
NOTE a: Ethernet ports on the packet plane include FE/GE ports, Integrated IP radio ports, port 10 on the EFP8 board, and port 8 on the EMS6 board.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree. 2. Click the Static Tunnel tab. 3. Select one or more tunnels, right-click the tunnel(s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

157

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Performa nce Object L2 VPNPW performan ce

Browse Object ETH PWE3 service

Navigation Path

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree. 2. Select one or more ETH PWE3 services, right-click the service (s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.

L2 VPN performan ce

UNI-UNI E-Line service

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree. 2. Select one or more UNI-UNI E-Line services, right-click the service(s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.

CES-PW performan ce CES performan ce ATM/IMA (access side) performan ce ATM-PW performan ce ATM PWE3 performan ce Port traffic classificati on performan ce

CES service

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CES Service Management from the Function Tree. 2. Select one or more CES services, right-click the service(s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.

Smart E1 port

Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.

ATM PWE3 service

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM Service Management from the Function Tree. 2. Select one or more ATM PWE3 services, right-click the service(s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.

Ports that perform complex traffic classificati on

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree. 2. Click the Application Object tab. 3. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.
NOTE Complete the operation Creating Traffic before monitoring the port traffic classification performance.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

158

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Performa nce Object Port priority performan ce

Browse Object Egress queues

Navigation Path

For FE/GE ports: 1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. 2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. 3. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. 4. Select the desired egress queue in the Object drop-down list. For Integrated IP radio ports: 1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. 2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. 3. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. 4. Select the desired egress queue in the Object drop-down list.

Port DS domain performan ce

Ports in a DS domain

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree. 2. Select the desired DS domain. 3. Click the Application Object tab. 4. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.

Step 2 Click the RMON Setting tab. Step 3 Click the Object tab and set the corresponding parameters. Step 4 Click the Event tab and set the corresponding parameters. Step 5 Click Apply. Close the displayed dialog box. ----End

8.4.3 Configuring a Historical Control Group


When configuring a historical control group for an Ethernet port, you can configure how the historical performance data of the port is monitored. The Ethernet board monitors the historical performance data of each port at the default sampling interval of 30 minutes. A maximum of 50 historical performance entries can be saved.

Prerequisites
l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 159

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

The corresponding boards must be added in the NE Panel.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON History Control Group. Step 2 Set the parameters of the historical control group. Step 3 Click Apply. Close the displayed dialog box. ----End

8.4.4 Browsing the Performance Data in the Historical Group of a Port


After you configure an RMON historical group for a port, you can browse the historical performance data of the port.

Prerequisites
l l l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. The corresponding boards must be added in the NE Panel. The objects and performance events to be monitored must be set.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, navigate to the performance query interfaces for different objects according to the following tables. Table 8-3 Packet plane Performa nce Object Basic performan ce Extended performan ce
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Browse Object Ethernet porta

Navigation Path

Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
NOTE a: Ethernet ports on the packet plane include FE/GE ports, Integrated IP radio ports, port 10 on the EFP8 board, and port 8 on the EMS6 board.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

160

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Performa nce Object MPLS tunnel performan ce

Browse Object MPLS tunnel

Navigation Path

1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree. 2. Click the Static Tunnel tab. 3. Select one or more tunnels, right-click the tunnel(s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.

L2 VPNPW performan ce

ETH PWE3 service

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree. 2. Select one or more ETH PWE3 services, right-click the service (s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.

L2 VPN performan ce

UNI-UNI E-Line service

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree. 2. Select one or more UNI-UNI E-Line services, right-click the service(s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.

CES-PW performan ce CES performan ce ATM/IMA (access side) performan ce ATM-PW performan ce ATM PWE3 performan ce

CES service

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CES Service Management from the Function Tree. 2. Select one or more CES services, right-click the service(s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.

Smart E1 port

Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.

ATM PWE3 service

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM Service Management from the Function Tree. 2. Select one or more ATM PWE3 services, right-click the service(s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

161

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Performa nce Object Port traffic classificati on performan ce

Browse Object Ports that perform complex traffic classificati on

Navigation Path

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree. 2. Click the Application Object tab. 3. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.
NOTE Complete the operation Creating Traffic before monitoring the port traffic classification performance.

Port priority performan ce

Egress queues

For FE/GE ports: 1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. 2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. 3. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. 4. Select the desired egress queue in the Object drop-down list. For Integrated IP radio ports: 1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. 2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. 3. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. 4. Select the desired egress queue in the Object drop-down list.

Port DS domain performan ce

Ports in a DS domain

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree. 2. Select the desired DS domain. 3. Click the Application Object tab. 4. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.

Step 2 Click the History Group tab. Step 3 Set the parameters of the historical group. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Select the desired object or port from the drop-down list. Click and specify the required time span. Select the performance items to browse. Under History Table Type, set the time span for the performance items to be browsed.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 162

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Step 4 Click Query. ----End

8.5 Querying a Report


You can obtain the version, manufacture, and microwave link information of all the boards by querying the corresponding report.

8.5.1 Querying the Board Information Report


You can obtain the logic version, and software version of each board by querying the board information report.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Inventory > Physical Inventory from the Main Menu. Step 2 Select Board from Physical Inventory Type in the Physical Inventory window. Step 3 In Physical Inventory, click the Board List tab. Step 4 Click Filter. In Filter window, set the board or board attributes that need to be queried. Click OK. Step 5 The board information displayed in the Board List. Step 6 Optional: Click Save As. Set the parameters in Saving Options. Step 7 Click OK. Then, you can save and archive the board information as a text file. Step 8 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.5.2 Querying the Board Manufacturing Information Report


You can obtain the manufacturing information about each board and the SFP module by querying the board manufacturing information report.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 163

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Inventory > Project Document > Board Manufacturer Information from the Main Menu. Step 2 In Board Manufacturer Information, click the Board Manufacturer Information tab. Step 3 Select one or multiple NEs from the left pane, and click Step 4 Close the dialog box that is displayed. Step 5 Click Query. The Query processing bar is displayed. Step 6 Close the dialog box that is displayed. Step 7 Optional: Click Save As. Step 8 Set the parameters in Saving Options. Step 9 Click OK. Then, you can save and archive the board manufacturing information as a text file. ----End .

8.5.3 Querying the Microwave Link Information Report


You can obtain the current and recent transmit/receive power of microwave links by querying the microwave link information report.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In Main Menu, choose Inventory > Microwave Report > Microwave Link Report. Step 2 In the left pane of the Microwave Link Report tab page, choose one or more NEs, and click . Step 3 Close the dialog box that is displayed. Step 4 Optional: Click Save As. Step 5 Set the parameters in Saving Options. Step 6 Click OK. Then, you can save and archive the microwave link information as a text file. ----End
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 164

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

8.5.4 Querying the Network-wide License Report


By querying the network-wide license report, you can check the license information of each NE.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Inventory > Microwave Report > Microwave License Capacity Report from the Main Menu. Step 2 Select one or more NEs in the left pane, and click Step 3 Close the dialog box that is displayed. Step 4 Optional: Click Save As. Save the license report as a file and archive the file properly. Step 5 Set the parameters in Saving Options. Step 6 Click OK. Then, the license report is saved and archived as a file. ----End .

8.6 Software Loopback


Software loopback refers to the loopback operation that is implemented by using the NMS. During software loopback, you need not visit the engineering site. Hence, software loopback is used more widely than hardware loopback.

8.6.1 Setting Loopback for the SDH Optical Interface Board


The SDH optical interface board supports the optical/electrical interface inloop/outloop and the VC-4 path inloop/outloop.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Context
The optical/electrical interface inloop is a process wherein the signals over an SDH port are looped back at the overhead processing unit towards the backplane.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 165

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Figure 8-5 Optical/electrical interface inloop


SDH optical interface board SDH

Backplane

The optical/electrical interface outloop is a process wherein the signals over an SDH port are looped back at the overhead processing unit towards the remote equipment. Figure 8-6 Optical/electrical interface outloop
Backplane SDH optical interface board SDH

The VC-4 path outloop is a process wherein the signals on a VC-4 path are looped back at the logic processing unit towards the remote equipment. Figure 8-7 VC-4 path outloop
Backplane SDH optical interface board VC-4

The VC-4 path inloop is a process wherein the signals on a VC-4 path are looped back at the logic processing unit towards the backplane.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

166

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Figure 8-8 VC-4 path inloop


Backplane SDH optical board VC-4

Precautions

CAUTION
l The services may be interrupted at the port or on the path where the loopback is performed. l A software loopback may be released automatically after a certain period (five minutes, by defaults). For details, see 8.12 Setting the Automatic Release Function.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the SDH optical interface board from the Object Tree.
NOTE

The SDH optical interface boards described in this section include the physical SL1D and SL1DA board and the logical SL4D board that the physical CSHN board maps.

Step 2 Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 3 Select By Function, and select the loopback mode from the drop-down list. To Perform... Optical/electrical interface loopback VC-4 path loopback Choose... Optical(Electrical) Interface Loopback VC4 Loopback

Step 4 Set the loopback status of the port or path based on the requirements. Step 5 Click Apply. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed. Step 6 Click OK. Step 7 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.6.2 Setting Loopback for the Tributary Board


The tributary board supports the tributary inloop and outloop.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 167

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Context
The tributary inloop is a process wherein the signals over a PDH port are looped back at the coding/decoding unit towards the backplane. Figure 8-9 Tributary inloop

Backplane

PDH interface board PDH

The tributary outloop is a process wherein the signals on a tributary path are looped back at the PDH interface board of the local IDU towards the remote equipment. Figure 8-10 Tributary outloop

Backplane PDH interface board PDH

Precautions

CAUTION
The services may be interrupted on the port or on the path where the loopback is performed.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

168

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Procedure
Step 1 Select the PDH interface board from the Object Tree. Step 2 Choose Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 3 Select By Function, and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down list. Step 4 Set the loopback status of the path based on the requirements. Step 5 Click Apply. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed. Step 6 Click OK. Step 7 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.6.3 Setting a Loopback for the Smart E1 Processing Board


A Smart E1 processing board supports inloops and outloops on E1 ports.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


U2000

Context
The E1 inloop is a process wherein the signals over an E1 port are looped back from the coding/ decoding unit to the backplane. Figure 8-11 E1 inloop
Smart E1 Processing Board E1

Backplane

The E1 outloop is a process wherein the signals over an E1 port are looped back from the Smart E1 processing board of the local IDU to the remote equipment.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 169

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Figure 8-12 E1 outloop


Smart E1 Backplane Processing Boards E1

Precautions

CAUTION
l The services may be interrupted at the port or on the path where the loopback is performed. l A software loopback may be released automatically within a period (5 minutes, by default). For details, see 8.12 Setting the Automatic Release Function.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the Smart E1 processing board from the Object Tree. Step 2 Choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 3 In the Advanced Attributes tab, select the required port. Step 4 Set the loopback status of the port as required. Step 5 Click Apply. The system displays a prompt dialog box for confirmation. Step 6 Click OK. Step 7 Close the dialog box. ----End

8.6.4 Setting a Loopback for the Packet-plane Ethernet Interface Board


The Packet-plane Ethernet interface board supports the Ethernet port inloop (at the MAC layer and PHY layer).

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 170

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Context
The Ethernet port MAC inloop is a process wherein the Ethernet physical signals are looped back at the service processing module of the board at the MAC layer towards the backplane. The Ethernet port PHY inloop is a process wherein the Ethernet frame signals are looped back at the interface module of the board at the PHY layer towards the backplane. Figure 8-13 Ethernet port inloop
Backplane Ethernet service processing board

MAC

PHY

Precautions
NOTE

The tributary boards described in this section include the physical EM6TA, EM6FA, EM6T and EM6F boards and the logical EG2D board that the physical CSHN board map. PORT 10 on the EFP8 board can not be configured with loops. PORT 8 on the EMS6 board can not be configured with loops.

CAUTION
l A loopback operation results in service interruption. l A software loopback may be released automatically after a certain period (five minutes, by defaults). For details, see 8.12 Setting the Automatic Release Function.

CAUTION
When Port Mode of an Ethernet port is set to Layer 3, do not perform any loopback on the port. In this case, LSP Traceroute is recommended for locating faults.

Procedure
Step 1 Select an Ethernet processing board from the Object Tree.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 171

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Step 2 Select the corresponding function options from the Function Tree based on the loopback type. To Perform... Choose...

PHY loopback 1. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. 2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. MAC loopback 1. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. 2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Step 3 Set the loopback status of the port based on the requirements. Step 4 Click Apply. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed. Step 5 Click OK. Step 6 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.6.5 Setting Loopbacks for the EOS/EoPDH-Plane Ethernet Interface Board


EPF8 board supports the inloop at Ethernet ports (at the MAC layer and PHY layer) and the inloop in VC-12 paths. EMS6 board supports the inloop at Ethernet ports (at the MAC layer and PHY layer) and the inloop in VC-3 paths.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


U2000

Context
A MAC layer inloop is an inloop where the service processing module loops back the Ethernet physical signals towards the backplane through the MAC layer. A PHY layer inloop is an inloop where the interface module loops back the Ethernet frame signals towards the backplane through the PHY layer.
NOTE

PORT 9 in the EFP8 board only supports inloop at the MAC layer. PORT 7 in the EMS6 board only supports inloop at the MAC layer.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

172

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Figure 8-14 Ethernet port inloop


Backplane Ethernet service processing board

MAC

PHY

An inloop in a VC-12 path is an inloop where the logic processing unit of a board loops back the signals in a specific VC-12 path towards the backplane. Figure 8-15 VC-12 path inloop
Backplane EOPDH EFP8

An inloop in a VC-3 path is an inloop where the logic processing unit of a board loops back the signals in a specific VC-3 path towards the backplane. Figure 8-16 VC-3 path inloop
Backplane EOS EMS6

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

173

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Precautions

CAUTION
l A loopback operation may interrupt the services on the port where the loopback is performed. l A software loopback may be automatically released within a period (five minutes by default). For details, see 8.12 Setting the Automatic Release Function.
NOTE

A VC-3 loopback can be performed only after the EMS6 is configured with services.

Procedure
Step 1 In NE Explorer, select the required board from the Object Tree. Step 2 Select the corresponding function options from the Function Tree according to the loopback type. To Perform... PHY loopback Choose... 1. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. 2. Select External Port. 3. Click the Basic Attributes tab. MAC loopback 1. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. 2. Select External Port. 3. Click the Basic Attributes tab. VC-12 path inloop 1. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. 2. Select By Function. 3. Select the required VC-12 path. VC-3 path inloop 1. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. 2. Select By Board/Port(Channel). 3. Select the required VC-3 path. Step 3 Set the loopback status of the port as required. Step 4 Click Apply. The confirmation dialog box is displayed. Step 5 Click OK. The prompt dialog box is displayed. Step 6 Click OK. Step 7 Close the prompt dialog box. ----End
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 174

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

8.6.6 Setting Loopback for the IF Board


Loopbacks on the IF board are classified into IF port loopback, composite port loopback, and Integrated IP radio port MAC loopback. The IF1 board supports the IF port inloop, IF port outloop, composite port inloop, and composite port outloop. The IFU2/IFX2 board supports the IF port inloop, IF port outloop, composite port inloop, composite port outloop, and Integrated IP radio port MAC inloop. The ISU2/ISX2 board supports the IF port inloop, IF port outloop, composite port inloop, and composite port outloop.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Context
The IF port inloop is a process wherein the IF signals are looped back at the modem unit towards the backplane. Figure 8-17 IF port inloop
Backplane IF signal IF board

The IF port outloop is a process wherein the IF signals are looped back at the modem unit of the board towards the remote equipment. Figure 8-18 IF port outloop

Backplane

IF board IF signal

The composite port inloop is a process wherein the microwave baseband signal is looped back at the MUX/DEMUX unit of the board towards the backplane.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 175

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Figure 8-19 Composite port inloop


Backplane IF board

Microwave baseband signal

The composite outloop is a process wherein the microwave baseband signal is looped back at the MUX/DEMUX unit of the board towards the remote equipment. Figure 8-20 Composite port outloop
Backplane IF board Microwave baseband signal

Precautions

CAUTION
l The services may be interrupted at the port or on the path where the loopback is performed. l A software loopback may be released automatically after a certain period (five minutes, by defaults). For details, see 8.12 Setting the Automatic Release Function. l To perform the software loopback on the standby IF board of the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection group, switch the standby IF board to the working state forcedly. Otherwise, the operation may fail. l Before performing the loopback operation for the IFU2/IFX2 board, disable the AM function at both ends of the radio link.

CAUTION
When Port Mode of an Integrated IP radio port is set to Layer 3, do not perform any loopback on the port. In this case, LSP Traceroute is recommended for locating faults.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

176

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Procedure
Step 1 Select the corresponding IF board from the Object Tree in the NE explorer. Step 2 Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. Step 3 Select Loopback Attributes. Step 4 Select the port where the loopback needs to be performed and set loopback type. Step 5 Click Apply. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed. Step 6 Click OK to close the dialog box. Then, a dialog box is displayed. Step 7 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.6.7 Locating a Fault by Performing Loopback Operations


Loopback is a common method of locating the fault.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Service Trail
Figure 8-21 shows how to locate a fault by performing a loopback operation. Figure 8-21 Service trail
PDH tributary board Cross-connect IF board board ODU ODU SDH IF Cross-connect tributary board board board

NE1

NE2

PDH Cross-connect tributary board board

IF board

ODU

ODU

IF Cross-connect board board

SDH tributary board

NE4

NE3

Optical cable

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

177

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Precautions
The LSP Traceroute method, instead of sectional loopbacks, is recommended for locating the faults of PWE3 services.

Procedure
Step 1 If the services are available on the radio links, perform the inter-station loopbacks to narrow down the fault to a specific hop. 1. Set the outloops for the SDH optical interface boards on NE2 and NE3, and then perform the inter-station loopbacks to locate the fault.

Step 2 After the fault is located on the specific radio link, perform the intra-station loopbacks to narrow down the fault to a specific NE or board. 1. 2. 3. Set inloop for the IF board on the NEs at both ends of the radio link where the fault occurs, to check whether the service receiver or the radio link is faulty. If the fault is located in the service receiver, set outloop for the PDH tributary board to check whether the interface board or switch unit is faulty. If the radio link is faulty, replace the IF board and ODU to check whether the IF board or ODU is faulty.

----End

8.7 Reset
Reset is an important method of troubleshooting software faults. Reset is classified into cold reset, warm reset.

8.7.1 Cold Reset


Cold reset is a process wherein the board software is reset and the board is re-initiated. During the board initialization, the FPGA, if any, is re-loaded.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Precautions

CAUTION
Cold reset causes service interruption because it is similar to the procedure of removing and inserting a board.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

178

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Procedure
Step 1 In NE Panel, right-click the board where the cold reset needs to be performed. Step 2 Choose Cold Reset from the shortcut menu. Then, the dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Click OK. Step 4 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.7.2 Warm Reset


Warm reset is a process wherein the board software is reset but the board is not re-initiated.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Precautions
During warm reset, the board software is reset but the services are not interrupted.

Procedure
Step 1 In NE Panel, right-click the board where the warm reset needs to be performed. Step 2 Choose Warm Reset from the shortcut menu. Then, the dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Click OK. Step 4 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.8 PRBS Test


The pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) test is an important method of network maintenance and self-check.

8.8.1 Performing a PRBS Test for the Tributary Board


If a special test tool is unavailable, you can perform the PRBS test by using the embedded test system on the tributary board.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 179

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Context
The OptiX RTN 980 supports the PRBS test in the tributary direction and in the cross-connect direction. The PRBS test in the tributary direction can be performed to check the connection between the tributary board and the DDF, as shown in Figure 8-22. Figure 8-22 PRBS test in the tributary direction
DDF frame PDH interface board PRBS Transmitter 1 PRBS Recevicer 1 Loopback at the DDF frame

The PRBS test in the cross-connect direction can be performed to check the connection between the tributary board and the remote NE, as shown in Figure 8-23. Figure 8-23 PRBS test in the cross-connect direction
a) IF board working as the line board PDH interface board PRBS transmitter 1 PRBS receiver 2 IN Cross-connect board IF board OUT IF board

NE at the local end 1 VC-4 inloop or composite port inloop 2 IF port inloop 3 IF port outloop

NE at the opposite end

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

180

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)


b) Line board working as the SDH optical interface board PDH interface board PRBS transmitter 1 PRBS receiver 2 IN Cross-connect board OUT

8 Supporting Task

SDH optical interface board

NE at the local end 1 VC-4 inloop 2 Port inloop 3 Port outloop

NE at the opposite end

Precautions

CAUTION
l During the PRBS test, the services in the tested path are interrupted. l The PRBS test can be performed only in one path and in one direction at one time. l If you perform a PRBS test in the tributary direction of a port on the SP3D/SP3S board, the services carried on the other ports may be interrupted transiently.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the loopback at the proper location. For details, see Figure 8-22 and Figure 8-23. Step 2 Select the E1 interface board from the Object Tree. Step 3 Choose Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree. Step 4 Select the port to be tested. Step 5 Set Duration and Measured in Time.
NOTE

l The PRBS test supports three time units: one second, 10 minutes, and one hour. l A maximum of 255 test cycles is permissible for the PRBS test.

Step 6 Optional: Select Accumulating Mode. Step 7 Click Start to Test. A prompt is displayed. Step 8 Click OK. Step 9 When Process is displayed as 100%, click Query to check the test result.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 181

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)


NOTE

8 Supporting Task

The result of a PRBS test can be normal, error, or invalid. l Invalid: indicates that no bit is received. In this case, the curve is yellow. l Normal: indicates that the path is in normal state. In this case, the number of PRBSs is zero, and the curve is green. l Error: indicates that the path has errors. In this case, the number of total PRBSs is a non-zero number, and the curve is red.

----End

8.8.2 Performing a PRBS Test for the IF Board


If a special test tool is unavailable, you can perform the PRBS test by using the embedded test system on the IF board.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Precautions
Figure 8-24 PRBS test of the IF board

IF board PRBS transmitter

ODU

ODU

IF board

1 PRBS transmitter

NE at the local end

NE at the opposite end 1 IF port outloop

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

182

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

CAUTION
l During the PRBS test, the services in the tested path are interrupted. l The PRBS test can be performed only in one path and in one direction at one time. l The standby IF unit does not support the PRBS test. Before you perform the PRBS test for the standby IF board of a 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection group, you must switch the standby IF board to the working state.

Procedure
Step 1 Perform an outloop on the opposite IF board. For details, see 8.6.6 Setting Loopback for the IF Board. Step 2 Select the IF board from the Object Tree. Step 3 Choose Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree. Step 4 Select the port to be tested. Step 5 Set Duration and Measured in Time.
NOTE

l The time unit of the PRBS test can be one second, 10 minutes, or one hour. l A maximum of 255 test cycles is permissible for the PRBS test.

Step 6 Optional: Select Accumulating Mode. Step 7 Click Start to Test. A prompt is displayed. Step 8 Click OK. Step 9 When Process is displayed as 100%, click Query to check the test result.
NOTE

The result of a PRBS test can be normal, error, or invalid. l Invalid: indicates that no bit is received. In this case, the curve is yellow. l Normal: indicates that the path is in normal state. In this case, the number of PRBSs is zero, and the curve is green. l Error: indicates that the path has errors. In this case, the number of total PRBSs is a non-zero number, and the curve is red.

----End

8.9 Querying the License Capacity


You can check whether the loaded license file meets the requirements by querying the license capacity.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 183

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Step 2 Choose Configuration > License Management. Step 3 Click Query, browse the license capacity of the NE. ----End

8.10 Setting the On/Off State of the Laser


When performing operations such as testing a fiber cut, you can set the on/off state of the laser rather than removing and re-inserting the optical fiber on site.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Select the desired SDH optical interface board from the Object Tree. Step 2 Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 3 Select By Function. Step 4 Select Laser Switch from the drop-down list. Step 5 Select a port, and then set Laser Switch. Step 6 Click Apply. A confirmation dialog box is displayed. Step 7 Click OK. A prompt is displayed. Step 8 Click OK. ----End

8.11 Setting the ALS Function


The SDH optical interface board supports the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. This function enables the board to turn off a laser when the board does not transmit services, the optical fiber is faulty, or the received optical signals are lost.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 184

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Select the desired SDH optical interface board from the Object Tree. Step 2 Choose Configuration > Automatic Laser Shutdown from the Function Tree. Step 3 Select a port, and then set Automatic Shutdown to Enabled. Step 4 Click Apply to save the settings. Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.12 Setting the Automatic Release Function


To protect the communication between the NMS and NE against improper operations, an NE supports the automatic release of the ODU muting, software loopback, and other operations that require you to exercise caution. The automatic release time is five minutes by default. You can set whether to enable the automatic release function and the automatic release time through the NMS.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE Function from the Main Menu. Step 2 Select the desired NE from the Object Tree. Click .

Step 3 In Automatic Disabling of NE Function, set Auto Disabling and Auto Disabling Time (min). Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings for the automatic release function. ----End
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 185

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

8.13 Querying Power Consumption of Boards


This section describes how to query power consumption of the ODU and each board.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Power Management from the Main Menu. Step 2 In the NE Power dialog box, select the Board Power tab. Step 3 Select the required NE or board from the object tree, and then click Step 4 Click Query. The Query progress bar is displayed. Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed. Step 6 On the Board Power tab page, browse Nominal Power Consumption and Current Power Consumption of the selected board. ----End .

8.14 Querying the Impedance of an E1 Channel


The impedance of an E1 channel is 75 ohms or 120 ohms.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Select a PDH tributary board from the Object Tree. Step 2 Choose Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 3 Select By Board/Port(Channel). Step 4 Select Port in the list.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 186

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Step 5 Select a port, and check Port Impedance. ----End

8.15 Monitoring Ethernet Packets Through Port Mirroring


To monitor and analyze the Ethernet packets at a port, you can enable the port mirroring function so that the received or transmitted packets on the port are duplicated to another Ethernet port to which the Ethernet tester is connected. Then, you can monitor and analyze the packets. This function is supported by the EFP8/EMS6 board of the OptiX RTN 980.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Context
The OptiX RTN 980 supports the mirroring, monitoring, and analyzing of the Ethernet packets that are received or transmitted on the port. Figure 8-25 Schematic diagram of Ethernet port mirroring
Ethernet processing unit Mirroring port Ethernet equipment Duplication Monitoring port Ethernet tester

To monitor the data in different directions, port mirroring can be performed in the ingress direction and in the egress direction. For the ports on EFP8/EMS6 board: l In the ingress direction Also in the upstream direction. The equipment duplicates the packets received from the mirroring port to the observing port, and then transmits the packets from the observing port to the Ethernet tester. l In the egress direction Also in the downstream direction. The equipment duplicates the packets transmitted by the mirroring port to the observing port, and then transmits the packets from the observing port to the Ethernet tester. In the ingress direction, the ports mirror the data transmitted from the VCTRUNK to the TDM side. In the egress direction, the ports mirror the data transmitted from the TDM side to the VCTRUNK.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

187

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Procedure
Step 1 In NE Explorer, select the EFP8 or EMS6 board. Step 2 Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Port Mirroring from the Function Tree. Step 3 Click New, and set Mirror Listener Port, Uplink Listened Port, and Downlink Listened Port.

Step 4 Click OK. ----End

8.16 Querying the Attributes of an Ethernet Port


Through the operation, you can learn about the attributes of an Ethernet port, such as rate.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Query the attributes of the FE or GE port on the packet plane. 1. 2. 3. 4. In NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Check the parameters such as Port Physical Parameters, Transmitting Rate, and Receiving Rate.

Step 2 Optional: Querying the attributes of the Integrated IP radio port. 1. 2. 3.


Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

In NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 188

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

4.

Check the parameters such as Transmitting Rate and Receiving Rate.

----End

8.17 Setting Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet Ports


To query the traffic, physical bandwidth, or bandwidth utilization of Ethernet ports within a certain period, you need to enable the monitoring for the object before that period starts. The FE/GE ports and Integrated IP radio ports on the packet plane support this operation.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. The flow monitoring function is enabled on the Ethernet port. To enable the flow monitoring function on a port, see 8.17 Setting Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet Ports.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


U2000

Background Information
After the flow monitoring function is enabled, the system saves the statistics about the received traffic and transmitted traffic with an interval of 15 minutes. In normal cases, the system stores the statistics that are collected in the last 30 days. In the system, every measurement entry shows the average transmit rate and average receive rate within a period of 15 minutes. You can query the statistics in the last 30 days.

Procedure
Step 1 Select a board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Step 2 Choose Performance > Ethernet Port Flow Monitoring from the Function Tree. Step 3 Select the Set Monitoring tab. Set Flow Monitoring, Physical Bandwidth Monitoring, Bandwidth Usage Monitoring to Enabled for the Ethernet port. Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Close the displayed Result dialog box. ----End

8.18 Querying Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet Ports


This section describes how to query the change curve of the traffic, physical bandwidth, or bandwidth utilization of Ethernet ports within a certain period. The FE/GE ports and Integrated IP radio ports on the packet plane support this operation.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 189

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. The flow monitoring function is enabled on the Ethernet port. To enable the flow monitoring function on a port, see 8.17 Setting Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet Ports.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


U2000

Background Information
After the flow monitoring function is enabled, the system saves the statistics about the received traffic and transmitted traffic with an interval of 15 minutes. In normal cases, the system stores the statistics that are collected in the last 30 days. In the system, every measurement entry shows the average transmit rate and average receive rate within a period of 15 minutes. You can query the statistics in the last 30 days.

Procedure
Step 1 Select a board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Step 2 Choose Performance > Ethernet Port Flow Monitoring from the Function Tree. Step 3 Select the Query Flow tab. Step 4 Set the Monitored Object, Monitored Indicator, Start Time, End Time, and Display Mode.

Step 5 Click Query. The system displays the query result in a table or in a graph. Step 6 Close the displayed Result dialog box. ----End

8.19 Setting the Threshold of Received Traffic Flow on an Ethernet Port


The FLOW_OVER alarm is reported when the traffic flow received on an Ethernet port exceeds the specified threshold. Only the FE port on the EFP8 board supports this operation.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 190

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


U2000

Precautions
NOTE

The receive traffic threshold cannot be set for the Ethernet ports on the packet domain.

Procedure
Step 1 In NE Explorer, select an Ethernet processing board from the Object Tree. Step 2 Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Step 3 Select External Port. Step 4 Select the Advanced Attributes tab. Step 5 Select an Ethernet port and set Traffic Threshold and Port Traffic Threshold Time Window. Step 6 Click Apply. ----End

8.20 Using the Ethernet Test Frames


By using the Ethernet test frames, you can check the connectivity of VCTRUNKs. Only the EFP8 board supports this operation.

Prerequisites
l l You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. The service traffic is encapsulated or mapped by using the GFP method.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


U2000

Background Information
The Ethernet board uses the specific GFP management frame or Ethernet frame as the test frame. One frame is transmitted to the opposite Ethernet board per second. After receiving the test frame, the Ethernet board returns the response frame. Upon receiving the response frame, the Ethernet service processing board at the local end can judge the connectivity of the VCTRUNK in between.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

191

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Figure 8-26 Ethernet test frames between Ethernet boards


Test frame Local Ethernet board Remote Ethernet board

Response frame

Precautions

CAUTION
Do not use the test frames when the network traffic is heavy.

Procedure
Step 1 In NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board. Step 2 Choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Test from the Function Tree. Then, the Ethernet Test dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Select the test port and click Clear Counters. Select Clear All Counters . Step 4 Set Send Mode and Frames to Send.
NOTE

It is recommended that you choose "Burst mode", and a maximum of 10 frames can be transmitted each time.

Step 5 Click Apply. The system starts transmitting and receiving test frames. Step 6 After Status displays Finished Sending, click Query. Step 7 Check Counter of Frames Sent and Counter of Received Response of Test Frame. Test frames are used to check the network connectivity. If some of the test frames are lost but no alarm is reported on the SDH side, you can infer that the network is normal. If all the test frames are lost, you can infer that the network is faulty. ----End

Related Information
If you choose the continue mode, the local port transmits test frames continuously until the test is disabled.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 192

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

8.21 Switching the System Control Unit and the CrossConnect Unit
When the OptiX RTN 980 is configured with two system control, cross-connect, and timing boards, you can manually switch the system control unit and the cross-connect unit as required.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Select the desired NE from the Object Tree. Step 2 Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Step 3 In 1+1 Protection List, select Cross-Connect Protection Pair. Step 4 Perform the 1+1 protection switching on the board. If... Active Board is set to Working Board Active Board is set to Protection Board Step 5 In the prompt that is displayed, click OK. ----End Then... Click Working/Protection Switching. Click Restore Working/Protection.

8.22 End-to-End Management on Fibers, Tunnels, and PWE3 Services


This section describes the common maintenance operations for end-to-end management on fibers, MPLS tunnels, and PWE3 services.

8.22.1 Expanding/Collapsing Fibers and Cables


If multiple fibers, cables, or tunnels are available between network elements (NEs), you can collapse them to form a link, which is displayed in the topology. You can also expand the link to display the fibers, cables, or tunnels.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 193

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Expand fibers and cables. 1. In the main topology, if an NE link is displayed as

, select the link and right-click it. Then choose Expand Link from the shortcut menu. Step 2 Optional: Collapse fibers and cables.

1.

, In the main topology, if an NE link is displayed as select the link and right-click it. Then choose Collapse Link from the shortcut menu.

----End

8.22.2 Querying Optical Power of Fibers and Cables


When fiber connections are available between network elements (NEs), you can query the optical power related to the fibers.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the main topology, select the required radio link and right-click it. Then choose Query Relevant Optical Power from the shortcut menu. The Optical Power Management dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Click the Port Optical Power tab. Step 3 Click Query. The input and output optical power of the fiber is displayed in the dialog box. Step 4 In the Result dialog box that is displayed, click Close. Step 5 Click the Graphic tab to display the statistical graphics regarding optical power of the source and sink ends of a fiber. ----End
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 194

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

8.22.3 Querying the Radio Link Information


When fiber links are available between network elements (NEs), you can query the relevant information about radio links.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the main topology, select the required radio link and right-click it. Then choose Microwave Link Information from the shortcut menu. The Microwave Link Report dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Select the required NE or board from the object tree, and then click Step 3 Click Query. Step 4 In the Result dialog box that is displayed, click Close. ----End .

8.22.4 Querying the Radio Link Performance


When fiber links are available between network elements (NEs), you can query the relevant performance information about radio links.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the main topology, select the required radio link and right-click it. Then choose Radio Link Performance Statistics from the shortcut menu. The Radio Link Performance Statistics dialog box is displayed. Step 2 In the Radio Link Performance Statistics dialog box, choose Current Performance tab. Step 3 In the Current Performance dialog box, choose Auto Refresh to see the current performance of the radio link. Step 4 In the Radio Link Performance Statistics dialog box, choose History Performance tab. Step 5 In the Radio Link Performance Statistics dialog box, set Monitor Period, Ended From, To, and Options. Then click OK below Options.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 195

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Step 6 Click Query. Step 7 Click Save as, and save the data displayed in the current dialog box. ----End

8.22.5 Managing E-Line Services Transmitted in Native Ethernet Mode


This section describes how to perform management and maintenance operations, such as querying information about E-Line services transmitted in Native Ethernet mode and deploying/ deleting E-Line services.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Native Ethernet Service > Manage E-Line Service from the Main Menu. Step 2 In the Set Filter Criteria dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions and click Filter. The E-Line services that meet the criteria are listed in the query result. Step 3 Optional: Select the desired E-Line service from the query result, and view information in the Topology and Interface Information tab pages. Step 4 Optional: Select the desired E-Line service from the query result, click functional buttons under the query result or right-click the service and choose options from the shortcut menu to perform related maintenance operations. ----End

8.22.6 Managing MPLS Tunnels in an End-to-End Mode


This section describes how to perform management and maintenance operations on MPLS tunnels, such as querying tunnel information, running/deploying/deleting an MPLS tunnel, and troubleshooting MPLS tunnels.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Tunnel > Manage Tunnel from the Main Menu. Step 2 In the Set Filter Criteria dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions and click Filter. The MPLS tunnels that meet the criteria are listed in the query result. Step 3 Optional: Select a desired tunnel, and browse the tunnel information in the Topology, Hop Information, QoS Information, and Relevant Service tab pages at the bottom.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 196

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Step 4 Optional: Select the desired tunnels from the query result, click functional buttons under the query result or right-click the service and choose options from the shortcut menu to perform related maintenance operations. ----End

8.22.7 Managing and Maintaining PWE3 Services


This section describes how to perform management and maintenance operations, including querying PWE3 service information, deploying or deleting a PWE3 service, and detecting PW faults.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Manage PWE3 Service from the Main Menu. Step 2 In the Set Filter Criteria dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions and click Filter. The PWE3 services that meet the criteria are listed in the query result. Step 3 Optional: Select a desired PWE3 service and browse the service information in the Topology, SAI, Service Parameter, and PW tab pages at the bottom. Step 4 Optional: Select the desired PWE3 service from the query result, click functional buttons under the query result or right-click the service and choose options from the shortcut menu to perform related maintenance operations. ----End

8.22.8 Verifying Native Ethernet Services


This section describes how to use ETH OAM to verify connectivity of Native Ethernet services.

Prerequisites
l l l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. Native Ethernet services are configured in end-to-end mode and ETH OAM CC are enabled. The data on the NE and the NMS is synchronized.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Native Ethernet Service > Manage Native Ethernet Service from the main menu. Step 2 In the Set Filter Criteria dialog box, set filter conditions and click Filter. The Native Ethernet services that meet the criteria are listed in the query result. Step 3 Right-click the desired Native Ethernet service, and choose Ethernet OAM > LB Test from the shortcut menu.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 197

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Step 4 In the LB Test dialog box, select the desired service trail.

NOTE

l An LB test checks whether a service is bidirectional available. For a bidirectional service, select the NE at either end to initiate an LB test. l If Ethernet services are in different VLANs, the U2000 automatically selects the service in a VLAN for an LB test. l One NE cannot be involved in multiple LB tests simultaneously.

Step 5 Optional: Choose Config LB Parameter from the shortcut menu. Set Sent Packets, Sent Packets Length, and Sent Packets Priority. Then, click OK.

Step 6 Click Run. Step 7 Click the LB Testing Information and LB Statistics Information tabs, and determine whether the service is available based on the displayed information. Normally, Test Results indicates Test Succeeded.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

198

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

----End

8.22.9 Verifying MPLS Tunnels in an End-to-End Mode


This section describes how to verify that an MPLS tunnel is available using the LSP ping test or LSP traceroute function.

Prerequisites
l l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher. MPLS tunnels have already been deployed.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Tunnel > Manage Tunnel from the Main Menu. Step 2 In the Set Filter Criteria dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions and click Filter. The MPLS tunnels that meet the criteria are listed in the query result. Step 3 Right-click the tunnel to verify. Choose Test and Check from the shortcut menu.
TIP

You can select and verify several MPLS tunnels concurrently.

Step 4 Select LSP Ping or LSP Traceroute from Diagnosis Option.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

199

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Step 5 Optional: Click the on the right and set parameters about the LSP ping/LSP traceroute test in the dialog box that is displayed. The values for the related parameters are provided as follows. l Packet Size: Set this parameter according to requirements. l Response Mode: Set this parameter to Application Control Channel if the tunnel is bidirectional and its egress node supports reverse channel response. Set this parameter to IPv4 UDP Response if the egress node does not support reverse channel response, but support DCN channel response based on IP protocols. In other scenarios, set this parameter to No Response. l Other parameters: Other parameters take their default values.

Step 6 Click Run. Step 7 After the verification, query the verification result of each MPLS tunnel. ----End

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

200

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

8.22.10 Verifying PW Configurations in an End-to-End Mode


This section describes how to verify connectivity of a PW using the PW ping test or PW traceroute function.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Manage PWE3 Service from the Main Menu. The Set Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Click Filter.
NOTE

After you click Filter, all configured PWE3 services will be displayed.

Step 3 Right-click the PWE3 service to verify and choose Test And Check from the shortcut menu.

The Diagnosis Option tab page is displayed. Step 4 Perform a PW service connectivity test. If... You perform a PW ping test Then... Perform Step 5 and Step 9.

You perform a PW traceroute test Perform Step 10 and Step 14. Step 5 Select VCCV Ping from the Diagnosis Option list.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

201

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Step 6 Click

on the right of VCCV Ping.

The VCCV ping dialog box is displayed. Step 7 Set the connectivity test parameters.

Set the parameters as follows: l Response Mode: Application Control Channel l Unless otherwise specified, it is recommended that other parameters take their default values. Step 8 Click OK. Step 9 Click Run. Step 10 Select VCCV Traceroute from the Diagnosis Option list.

Step 11 Click
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

on the right of VCCV Traceroute.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 202

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

The VCCV Traceroute dialog box is displayed. Step 12 Set the connectivity test parameters.

Set the parameters as follows: l Response Mode: Application Control Channel l Unless otherwise specified, it is recommended that other parameters take their default values. Step 13 Click OK. Step 14 Click Run. ----End

8.22.11 Verifying PW-Based E-Line Service Configurations (in an End-to-End Mode)


This section describes how to use Ethernet OAM to verify connectivity of a PW-based E-Line service.

Prerequisites
l l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher. The Configuring PW-Based E-Line Services (in an End-to-End Mode) task has been completed.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Manage PWE3 Service from the Main Menu. Step 2 In the Set Filter Criteria window, select Source NE and Sink Node. Click Filter.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

203

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Step 3 Right-click the PWE3 service to verify, and choose Ethernet OAM > LB Test... from the shortcut menu.

Step 4 In the Eth Oam LB Test dialog box that is displayed, select the source NE for initiating an LB test.
NOTE

l An LB test detects whether a service is bidirectionally available. For a bidirectional service, it is recommended that you select either end of a PW as the source NE for initiating the LB test. l If a PW carries Ethernet services from different VLANs, the U2000 automatically select the service of a VLAN for the LB test.

Step 5 Optional: Right-click the service that is selected for an LB test, and choose Configure... from the shortcut menu. In the Config Eth Oam LB Test Parameter dialog box that is displayed, set Sent Packets, Sent Packets Length, and Sent Packets Priority. Then, click OK.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 204

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Step 6 Right-click the service that is selected for an LB test, and choose Run from the shortcut menu. Step 7 Click the LB Statistic Information tab and determines whether the service is available based on the displayed information. If Test Result displays Test Succeeded, the service is available.

If Packet Loss Ratio(%) displays 100 and Test Result displays Test Failed, the service is unavailable. If the service is unavailable, check whether the service configurations are incorrect.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

205

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

----End

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

206

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Reference

Alarms are important indicators when abnormalities occur on the equipment. This chapter describes all the possible alarms on the OptiX RTN 980 and how to handle these alarms. A.1 Alarm List (in Alphabetical Order) The following table lists all the possible alarms generated by the OptiX RTN 980 in alphabetical order. A.2 Alarm List (Classified by Logical Boards) This part lists the alarms that are reported by each board.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

207

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.1 Alarm List (in Alphabetical Order)


The following table lists all the possible alarms generated by the OptiX RTN 980 in alphabetical order. Table A-1 Alarm list Alarm Name A_LOC ALM_E1RAI ALM_GFP_dCSF ALM_GFP_dLFD Description Loss of clock in the upstream bus E1 link remote alarm indication Loss of GFP client signals Out of frame state of generic framing procedure (GFP) frames Frame delimitation is out-of-frame at the local end of the IMA link. Differential delay of the IMA link crosses the threshold. The IMA link on the opposite NE fails in the receive direction. The IMA link on the opposite NE fails in the transmit direction. Frame delimitation is out-of-frame at the remote end of the IMA link. Downshift of AM modes Failure indication of MS protection switching Alarm Severity Major Minor Critical Major

ALM_IMA_LIF

Major

ALM_IMA_LODS

Major

ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE

Minor

ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE

Minor

ALM_IMA_RFI

Major

AM_DOWNSHIFT APS_FAIL

Major Major

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

208

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name APS_INDI APS_MANUAL_STOP ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELL_EXC

Description Indication of the APS protection switching MS protocol stopped manually The number of unknown ATM cells exceeds the specified threshold in a time unit. AU alarm indication Loss of AU pointers Excessive regenerator section errors (B1) Signal degradation due to excessive regenerator section errors (B1) Excessive multiplex section errors (B2) Signal degradation due to excessive multiplex section errors (B2) Excessive higher order path bit errors (B3) Excessive B3 bit errors in a VC-3 path Signal degradation due to excessive higher order path bit errors (B3) The logical board is not added on the NMS. The board is out-ofposition. The board is in BIOS state.

Alarm Severity Major Minor Major

AU_AIS AU_LOP B1_EXC

Major Major Minor

B1_SD

Minor

B2_EXC B2_SD

Major Minor

B3_EXC

Major

B3_EXC_VC3 B3_SD

Major Minor

BD_NOT_INSTALLED

Minor

BD_STATUS BIOS_STATUS

Major Major

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

209

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name BIP_EXC BIP_SD

Description Excessive BIP errors Signal degradation due to excessive BIP errors BOOTROM data check fails. Bus errors The locking function of CES ACR service clock is abnormal. The number of jitter buffer overflows crosses the specified threshold. The number of jitter buffer underflows crosses the specified threshold. The number of lost packets crosses the specified threshold in a time unit. The number of deformed packets crosses the specified threshold in a time unit. The number of lost disordered packets crosses the specified threshold in a time unit. Remote defect indication The number of errored packets crosses the specified threshold in a time unit. The AC circuit on the opposite NE is faulty.

Alarm Severity Minor Minor

BOOTROM_BAD BUS_ERR CES_ACR_LOCK_ABN

Major Critical Minor

CES_JTROVR_EXC

Major

CES_JTRUDR_EXC

Major

CES_LOSPKT_EXC

Major

CES_MALPKT_EXC

Major

CES_MISORDERPKT_EXC

Major

CES_RDI CES_STRAYPKT_EXC

Minor Major

CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFAULT

Major

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

210

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name CESPW_OPPOSITE_RAI CFCARD_FAILED CFCARD_OFFLINE CHCS COMMUN_FAIL CLK_NO_TRACE_MODE CONFIG_NOSUPPORT DBMS_DELETE DBMS_ERROR

Description Remote alarm indication The operation on the CF card fails. The CF card is offline. Correctable cell errors Inter-board communication fails. The clock source is not in locked mode. Configuration is not supported. The status of databases is delete. Errors in the processing of system databases System databases in protection mode Over-sized DCN network The frame alignment signal of framed E1 services is lost. Alarm indication of 2 Mbit/s downstream signals The number of lost packets due to port congestion crosses the threshold. Loss of 2M clock in upstream signals Loss of 2 Mbit/s line signals Loss of APS frames

Alarm Severity Major Major Major Minor Major Minor Major Major Major

DBMS_PROTECT_MODE DCNSIZE_OVER DDN_LFA

Critical Major Major

DOWN_E1_AIS

Minor

DROPRATIO_OVER

Minor

E1_LOC E1_LOS ETH_APS_LOST

Major Minor Minor

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

211

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name ETH_APS_PATH_MISMATCH

Description The working and protection paths of the APS protection group differ between the two ends. Protection switching failure Protection scheme mismatch Loss of connectivity Misconnection The maintenance association end point (MEP) fails to receive CCM packets. Errored frames Discovery failure Performance events at the opposite end A loopback occurs. Faults occur at the opposite end. Loss of Ethernet port connection No flow on the Ethernet port Discovery failure is detected by point-topoint Ethernet OAM. A remote loopback is detected by point-topoint Ethernet OAM. Remote Ethernet performance degradation is detected by point-topoint Ethernet OAM.

Alarm Severity Major

ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATCH ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_CFM_MISMERGE ETH_CFM_RDI

Major Major Critical Critical Minor

ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI ETH_EFM_DF ETH_EFM_EVENT ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK ETH_EFM_REMFAULT ETH_LOS ETH_NO_FLOW ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FAIL

Minor Major Major Major Critical Critical Major Minor

ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP

Minor

ETHOAM_RMT_SD

Minor

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

212

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FAULT

Description Severe faults are detected by point-topoint Ethernet OAM at the remote end. An MAC port loopback is detected by point-to-point Ethernet OAM. A VCTRUNK port loopback is detected by point-to-point Ethernet OAM. Loss of periodical connectivity check packets Conflict of maintenance point IDs Loss of external clock sources Aged fans Failure of fan boards Frame check sequence (FCS) errors Excessive data traffic received by Ethernet ports Hardware faults Threshold-crossing performance event of the higher order path Loss of multiframes in the higher order path Higher order path remote defect indication Higher order path remote error indication

Alarm Severity Minor

ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP

Major

ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_LOOP

Major

EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS

Critical

EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNFLCT

Major

EXT_SYNC_LOS FAN_AGING FAN_FAIL FCS_ERR

Critical Minor Major Critical

FLOW_OVER

Minor

HARD_BAD HP_CROSSTR

Critical Minor

HP_LOM

Major

HP_RDI

Minor

HP_REI

Warning

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

213

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name HP_SLM HP_TIM HP_UNEQ HPAD_CROSSTR

Description Higher order path signal label mismatch High order path trace identifier mismatch Unequipped higher order path Adaptation performance threshold-crossing of the higher order path IF cables are disconnected. The power supplied by an IF board to an ODU is abnormal. Preset IF working mode is not supported. The IMA group at the local end fails. The IMA group at the remote end fails. The transmit clock modes at the two ends of the IMA group are different. Abnormal input optical power Over high input optical power Over low input optical power Trace identifier mismatch K1 and K2 mismatch K2 mismatch Bandwidth inconsistency in the LAG group

Alarm Severity Minor Minor Minor Minor

IF_CABLE_OPEN IF_INPWR_ABN

Major Major

IF_MODE_UNSUPPORTED

Major

IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN IMA_TXCLK_MISMATCH

Major Major Minor

IN_PWR_ABN IN_PWR_HIGH IN_PWR_LOW J0_MM K1_K2_M K2_M LAG_BWMM

Major Critical Critical Minor Minor Minor Major

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

214

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name LAG_DOWN LAG_MEMBER_DOWN

Description The LAG is unavailable. A member port of a link aggregation group (LAG) is unavailable. A member port of a LAG fails. A VCG port of an LAG fails. Ethernet communication failure The laser is shut down. The type of the pluggable optical module on the board does not match the type of the optical interface. The type of the pluggable optical module on the board does not match the type of the optical interface. LCAS protocol fails in the receive direction. LCAS protocol fails in the transmit direction. Loss of partial bandwidth in the LCAS receive direction Loss of partial bandwidth in the LCAS transmit direction

Alarm Severity Major Minor

LAG_PORT_FAIL LAG_VC_PORT_FAIL LAN_LOC

Minor Minor Major

LASER_CLOSED LASER_MOD_ERR

Major Major

LASER_MOD_ERR_EX

Major

LCAS_FOPR

Major

LCAS_FOPT

Major

LCAS_PLCR

Minor

LCAS_PLCT

Minor

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

215

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name LCAS_TLCR

Description Loss of total bandwidth in the LCAS receive direction Loss of total bandwidth in the LCAS transmit direction Loss of cell delimitation The capacity of the configured services exceeds the range permitted by the license file. Out of frame state of E1 frames The license file on the IF board is different from the backup file on the system control board. The NE fails to detect any license file. Faults occur in a data link. Out of frame state of E1 multiframes A loopback occurs. Performance threshold-crossing of the lower order path FIFO overflow on the receive side of the lower order path Lower order path remote defect indication VC-12 path remote defect indication

Alarm Severity Major

LCAS_TLCT

Major

LCD LCS_LIMITED

Major Major

LFA LICENSE_DIFF

Major Warning

LICENSE_LOST LINK_ERR LMFA LOOP_ALM LP_CROSSTR

Major Critical Major Minor Minor

LP_R_FIFO

Minor

LP_RDI

Minor

LP_RDI_VC12

Minor

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

216

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name LP_RDI_VC3 LP_REI

Description VC-3 path remote defect indication Lower order path remote error indication VC-12 path remote error indication VC-3 path remote error indication Lower order path remote failure indication Lower order path signal label mismatch VC-12 path signal label mismatch VC-3 path signal label mismatch FIFO overflow on the transmit side of the lower order path Lower order path trace identifier mismatch VC-12 path trace identifier mismatch VC-3 path tracking identification mismatch Unequipped lower order paths Unequipped VC-12 paths Unequipped VC-3 paths The switching mode is single-ended at one end and dual-ended at the other end.

Alarm Severity Minor Minor

LP_REI_VC12 LP_REI_VC3 LP_RFI

Minor Minor Minor

LP_SLM LP_SLM_VC12 LP_SLM_VC3 LP_T_FIFO

Minor Minor Minor Minor

LP_TIM

Minor

LP_TIM_VC12 LP_TIM_VC3

Minor Minor

LP_UNEQ LP_UNEQ_VC12 LP_UNEQ_VC3 LPS_UNI_BI_M

Minor Minor Minor Minor

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

217

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT

Description The LPT closes the access port of the local NE. LPT function failed Link state passthrough function fails at the remote end. Laser not installed Loss of clock synchronization source The number of bit errors at the MAC layer crosses the threshold. The software detects that the number of bit errors at the MAC layer crosses the threshold. Module communication failure Port module type mismatch PW backward defect indication Excessive trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) are received on the PW. Loss of PW connectivity The trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) on the PW do not match with the specified one.

Alarm Severity Major

LPT_INEFFECT LPT_RFI

Major Critical

LSR_NO_FITED LTI

Critical Major

MAC_EXT_EXC

Major

MAC_FCS_EXC

Major

MOD_COM_FAIL

Major

MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH MPLS_PW_BDI MPLS_PW_Excess

Critical Minor Minor

MPLS_PW_LOCV MPLS_PW_MISMATCH

Critical Critical

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

218

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name MPLS_PW_MISMERGE

Description The trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) are mismerged on the PW. Signal degradation on the PW Signal failure on the PW Unknown defects on the PW Tunnel backward defect indication Excessive trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) are received on the tunnel. Tunnel forward defect indication Loss of tunnel connectivity The trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) on the tunnel do not match with the specified one. The trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) are mismerged on the tunnel. The OAM protocol negotiation between the two ends of the tunnel fails. Signal degradation on the tunnel Signal failure on the tunnel

Alarm Severity Major

MPLS_PW_SD MPLS_PW_SF MPLS_PW_UNKNOWN MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess

Major Major Major Minor Minor

MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH

Major Critical Critical

MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE

Major

MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL

Minor

MPLS_TUNNEL_SD MPLS_TUNNEL_SF

Major Major

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

219

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN MS_AIS MS_CROSSTR

Description Unknown defects on the tunnel Multiplex section alarm indication Multiplex section performance threshold-crossing Multiplex section remote defect indication Multiplex section remote error indication Multiplex section adaptation performance threshold-crossing The ring network has multiple RPL_OWNER nodes. The IF port is in the AM testing state. Excessive errors on radio links Signal degradation due to excessive errors on radio links Configuration mismatch on radio links Continuous wave Loss of E1 signals Microwave frames have the errors that cannot be corrected by using the forward error correction (FEC) technology. Label mismatch on radio links

Alarm Severity Major Major Minor

MS_RDI

Minor

MS_REI

Warning

MSAD_CROSSTR

Minor

MULTI_RPL_OWNER

Minor

MW_AM_TEST MW_BER_EXC MW_BER_SD

Minor Minor Minor

MW_CFG_MISMATCH

Critical

MW_CONT_WAVE MW_E1_LOST MW_FEC_UNCOR

Minor Major Minor

MW_LIM

Major

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

220

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name MW_LOF MW_RDI

Description Loss of microwave frames Remote defect indication on radio links The NE software is lost. The software in the main area is different from that in the standby area. The NE is in the installation state. The board software is lost. The N+1 protection protocol is stopped manually. The N+1 protection switching fails. N+1 protection switching indication Synchronization with the NTP time fails. Out of cell delimitation Abnormal output optical power Activating patch packages times out. Deactivating patch packages times out. Abnormal patch package Links of the 1+1 protection group fail.

Alarm Severity Critical Minor

NESF_LOST NESOFT_MM

Critical Major

NESTATE_INSTALL NO_BD_SOFT NP1_MANUAL_STOP

Critical Critical Minor

NP1_SW_FAIL NP1_SW_INDI NTP_SYNC_FAIL OCD OUT_PWR_ABN PATCH_ACT_TIMEOUT PATCH_DEACT_TIMEOUT PATCH_PKGERR PG_LINK_FAIL

Major Major Minor Major Critical Minor Minor Minor Critical

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

221

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name PG_PRT_DEGRADED

Description The working link or protection link of the 1+1 protection group is faulty. Inconsistent PLA configurations The traffic is higher than the port bandwidth threshold. Port not in position The working mode of the remote FE port does not match that of the local FE port. Power input alarm Power module alarm The number of lost packets in a PW crosses the threshold. Loss of APS frames The working and protection paths of the APS protection group differ between the two ends. Protection switching failure Protection scheme mismatch Reset of the receive FIFO Loss of clock on the receive line side Loss of frame on the receive line side Loss of signal or loss of microwave frame on the receive line side

Alarm Severity Major

PLA_CFG_MISMATCH PORT_EXC_TRAFFIC

Critical Warning

PORT_MODULE_OFFLINE PORTMODE_MISMATCH

Major Minor

POWER_ABNORMAL POWER_ALM PW_DROPPKT_EXC

Major Major Warning

PWAPS_LOST PWAPS_PATH_MISMATCH

Minor Major

PWAPS_SWITCH_FAIL PWAPS_TYPE_MISMATCH R_F_RST R_LOC R_LOF R_LOS

Major Major Minor Critical Critical Critical

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

222

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name R_S_ERR RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF RADIO_MUTE RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH RADIO_RSL_HIGH RADIO_RSL_LOW RADIO_TSL_HIGH RADIO_TSL_LOW RELAY_ALARM_CRITICAL RELAY_ALARM_IGNORE RELAY_ALARM_MAJOR RELAY_ALARM_MINOR RMFA

Description Errors in the received signal Radio fading margin is insufficient. The radio transmitter is muted. Antennas are not aligned. Over high radio receive signal level Over low radio receive signal level Over high radio transmit signal level Over low radio transmit signal level There are critical alarm inputs. There are warning inputs. There are major alarm inputs. There are minor alarm inputs. Loss of multiframe alignment at the remote end Radio protection switching indication Regenerator section performance threshold-crossing The real-time clock (RTC) of the system control board fails. Clock source switching in S1 mode RADIUS authentication fails.

Alarm Severity Critical Minor Warning Minor Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Warning Major Minor Minor

RPS_INDI RS_CROSSTR

Major Minor

RTC_FAIL

Major

S1_SYN_CHANGE SEC_RADIUS_FAIL

Major Major

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

223

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name SECU_ALM SRV_SHUTDOWN_LD SWDL_ACTIVATED_TIMEOUT

Description Security alarm Ethernet services are interrupted. The commit operation is not performed during software package loading. The automatic match function is disabled. The board software version and the version of the running software are inconsistent. The submit operation fails. The package diffusion is being performed on the NE. Certain files in the package stored in flash memory are lost. The software package does not contain any board software. Software package version consistency check fails. The version rollback on an NE fails. Synchronous source degradation Loss of synchronization clock sources Batch backup of SCC boards fails.

Alarm Severity Major Warning Critical

SWDL_AUTOMATCH_INH SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH

Minor Critical

SWDL_COMMIT_FAIL SWDL_INPROCESS

Minor Warning

SWDL_NEPKGCHECK

Critical

SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT

Minor

SWDL_PKGVER_MM

Minor

SWDL_ROLLBACK_FAIL SYN_BAD SYNC_C_LOS

Minor Minor Warning

A.3.239 SCCDATA_BACKUP_FAIL

Minor

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

224

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name T_ALOS

Description Loss of analog signals at 2 Mbit/s interfaces Reset of the transmit FIFO Loss of clock on the transmit line side Excessive board temperature Surge protection fails. Clock failure TU alarm indication VC-12 path TU alarm indication VC-3 path TU alarm indication Loss of TU pointers Loss of TU pointers in VC-12 paths Loss of TU pointers in VC-3 paths The tunnel protection group degrades. Alarm indication of 2 Mbit/s upstream signals Uncorrectable cell errors Alarm indication signal of the VC connection Loss of VC connectivity check Remote defect indication of the VC connection

Alarm Severity Major

T_F_RST T_LOC TEMP_ALARM THUNDERALM TR_LOC TU_AIS TU_AIS_VC12 TU_AIS_VC3 TU_LOP TU_LOP_VC12 TU_LOP_VC3 TUNNEL_APS_DEGRADED UP_E1_AIS

Minor Major Minor Minor Major Major Major Major Major Major Major Major Minor

UHCS VC_AIS

Minor Critical

VC_LOC VC_RDI

Major Major

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

225

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name VCAT_LOA VCAT_LOM_VC12

Description Excessive virtual concatenation delay Loss of multiframe of VC-12 path virtual concatenation Loss of multiframe of VC-3 path virtual concatenation SQ mismatch of VC-12 path virtual concatenation SQ mismatch of VC-3 path virtual concatenation Loss of voltage Alarm indication signal of the VP connection Loss of VP connectivity check Remote defect indication of the VP connection Failure in reading and writing chip registers Errored board types Loss of XPIC compensation signals

Alarm Severity Critical Major

VCAT_LOM_VC3

Major

VCAT_SQM_VC12

Major

VCAT_SQM_VC3

Major

VOLT_LOS VP_AIS

Major Critical

VP_LOC VP_RDI

Major Major

W_R_FAIL WRG_BD_TYPE XPIC_LOS

Major Major Critical

A.2 Alarm List (Classified by Logical Boards)


This part lists the alarms that are reported by each board.
NOTE

The NE software consider a physical board as one or more logical boards when managing the physical board. The NMS also considers a physical board as one or more logical boards when managing the physical board. For OptiX RTN 980, all physical boards, except the system control, switching, and timing board, correspond to logical boards of the same names. Table A-2 shows the logical boards corresponding to the system control, switching, and timing board.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

226

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Table A-2 Logical boards corresponding to the system control, switching, and timing board Physical Board CSHN Logical Board l CSHN in slot 15 + SL4D in slot 16 + EG2D in slot 17 l CSHN in slot 20 + SL4D in slot 21 + EG2D in slot 22

A.2.1 CSHN
APS_FAIL BD_STATUS CFCARD_OFFLIN E DBMS_PROTECT_ MODE ETH_APS_SWITC H_FAIL HARD_BAD LAN_LOC LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT MPLS_PW_Excess MPLS_PW_SD MPLS_TUNNEL_E xcess MPLS_TUNNEL_ MISMERGE MPLS_TUNNEL_U NKNOWN NP1_MANUAL_ST OP PATCH_ACT_TIM EOUT PG_PRT_DEGRAD ED
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

APS_INDI BIOS_STATUS CLK_NO_TRACE_ MODE DCNSIZE_OVER ETH_APS_TYPE_ MISMATCH K1_K2_M LCS_LIMITED LTI MPLS_PW_LOCV MPLS_PW_SF MPLS_TUNNEL_F DI MPLS_TUNNEL_O AMFAIL NESF_LOST NP1_SW_FAIL PATCH_DEACT_T IMEOUT PLA_CFG_MISMA TCH

APS_MANUAL_ST OP BOOTROM_BAD DBMS_DELETE ETH_APS_LOST EXT_SYNC_LOS K2_M LICENSE_LOST MOD_COM_FAIL MPLS_PW_MISM ATCH MPLS_PW_UNKN OWN MPLS_TUNNEL_L OCV MPLS_TUNNEL_S D NESOFT_MM NP1_SW_INDI PATCH_PKGERR POWER_ALM

BD_NOT_INSTAL LED CFCARD_FAILED DBMS_ERROR ETH_APS_PATH_ MISMATCH FLOW_OVER LAG_BWMM LPS_UNI_BI_M MPLS_PW_BDI MPLS_PW_MISME RGE MPLS_TUNNEL_B DI MPLS_TUNNEL_ MISMATCH MPLS_TUNNEL_S F NESTATE_INSTA LL NTP_SYNC_FAIL PG_LINK_FAIL PW_DROPPKT_EX C
227

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

PWAPS_LOST RPS_INDI SEC_RADIUS_FAI L SWDL_AUTOMAT CH_INH SWDL_NEPKGCH ECK SYN_BAD WRG_BD_TYPE

PWAPS_PATH_MI SMATCH RTC_FAIL SECU_ALM SWDL_CHGMNG_ NOMATCH SWDL_PKG_NOB DSOFT SYNC_C_LOS -

PWAPS_SWITCH_ FAIL S1_SYN_CHANGE SRV_SHUTDOWN _LD SWDL_COMMIT_ FAIL SWDL_PKGVER_ MM TEMP_ALARM -

PWAPS_TYPE_MI SMATCH SCCDATA_BACK UP_FAIL SWDL_ACTIVATE D_TIMEOUT SWDL_INPROCES S SWDL_ROLLBAC K_FAIL TUNNEL_APS_DE GRADED -

A.2.2 IF1
AU_AIS B2_EXC BD_STATUS HP_RDI HP_UNEQ LICENSE_DIFF MS_CROSSTR MW_CONT_WAV E MW_RDI RS_CROSSTR WRG_BD_TYPE AU_LOP B2_SD HARD_BAD HP_REI IF_CABLE_OPEN LICENSE_LOST MS_RDI MW_FEC_UNCOR R_LOC T_LOC B1_EXC B3_EXC HP_CROSSTR HP_SLM IF_MODE_UNSUP PORTED LOOP_ALM MS_REI MW_LIM R_LOF TEMP_ALARM B1_SD B3_SD HP_LOM HP_TIM LCS_LIMITED MS_AIS MSAD_CROSSTR MW_LOF R_LOS VOLT_LOS -

A.2.3 IFU2
AM_DOWNSHIFT BUS_ERR BD_STATUS DROPRATIO_OVE R BIP_EXC ETH_CFM_LOC BIP_SD ETH_CFM_MISME RGE
228

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK HARD_BAD LAG_MEMBER_D OWN LOOP_ALM MAC_EXT_EXC MW_BER_SD MW_FEC_UNCOR PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC TU_AIS

ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT IF_CABLE_OPEN LCS_LIMITED LP_RDI MAC_FCS_EXC MW_CFG_MISMA TCH MW_LIM R_LOC TU_LOP

ETH_EFM_DF ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP LAG_BWMM LICENSE_DIFF LP_REI MULTI_RPL_OWN ER MW_CONT_WAV E MW_LOF R_LOF VOLT_LOS

ETH_EFM_EVENT FLOW_OVER LAG_DOWN LICENSE_LOST LP_UNEQ MW_BER_EXC MW_E1_LOST MW_RDI TEMP_ALARM WRG_BD_TYPE

A.2.4 IFX2
AM_DOWNSHIFT BUS_ERR ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK HARD_BAD LAG_MEMBER_D OWN LOOP_ALM MAC_EXT_EXC MW_BER_SD MW_FEC_UNCOR BD_STATUS DROPRATIO_OVE R ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT IF_CABLE_OPEN LCS_LIMITED LP_RDI MAC_FCS_EXC MW_CFG_MISMA TCH MW_LIM BIP_EXC ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_EFM_DF ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP LAG_BWMM LICENSE_DIFF LP_REI MULTI_RPL_OWN ER MW_CONT_WAV E MW_LOF BIP_SD ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETH_EFM_EVENT FLOW_OVER LAG_DOWN LICENSE_LOST LP_UNEQ MW_BER_EXC MW_E1_LOST MW_RDI

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

229

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC TU_AIS XPIC_LOS

R_LOC TU_LOP -

R_LOF VOLT_LOS -

TEMP_ALARM WRG_BD_TYPE -

A.2.5 SL1D/SL1DA
AU_AIS B2_EXC BD_STATUS HP_RDI HP_UNEQ LASER_CLOSED MS_AIS MSAD_CROSSTR RS_CROSSTR AU_LOP B2_SD HARD_BAD HP_REI IN_PWR_HIGH LASER_MOD_ER R_EX MS_CROSSTR R_LOC T_LOC B1_EXC B3_EXC HP_CROSSTR HP_SLM IN_PWR_LOW LOOP_ALM MS_RDI R_LOF WRG_BD_TYPE B1_SD B3_SD HP_LOM HP_TIM J0_MM LSR_NO_FITED MS_REI R_LOS -

A.2.6 EM6T
BD_STATUS ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_EFM_DF ETH_LOS HARD_BAD LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC BUS_ERR ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETH_EFM_EVENT ETH_NO_FLOW LAG_DOWN MAC_EXT_EXC PORTMODE_MISMATCH COMMUN_FAIL ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP LAG_MEMBER_D OWN MAC_FCS_EXC TEMP_ALARM DROPRATIO_OVE R ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT FLOW_OVER LOOP_ALM MULTI_RPL_OWN ER WRG_BD_TYPE

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

230

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.2.7 EM6TA
BD_STATUS ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_EFM_DF ETH_LOS HARD_BAD LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC BUS_ERR ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETH_EFM_EVENT ETH_NO_FLOW LAG_DOWN MAC_EXT_EXC PORTMODE_MISMATCH COMMUN_FAIL ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP LAG_MEMBER_D OWN MAC_FCS_EXC TEMP_ALARM DROPRATIO_OVE R ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT FLOW_OVER LOOP_ALM MULTI_RPL_OWN ER WRG_BD_TYPE

A.2.8 EM6F
BD_STATUS ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_EFM_DF ETH_LOS HARD_BAD LASER_MOD_ER R LSR_NO_FITED PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC BUS_ERR ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETH_EFM_EVENT ETH_NO_FLOW IN_PWR_ABN LASER_SHUT MAC_EXT_EXC PORTMODE_MISMATCH COMMUN_FAIL ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP LAG_DOWN LOOP_ALM MAC_FCS_EXC TEMP_ALARM DROPRATIO_OVE R ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT FLOW_OVER LAG_MEMBER_D OWN LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT MULTI_RPL_OWN ER WRG_BD_TYPE

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

231

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.2.9 EM6FA
BD_STATUS ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_EFM_DF ETH_LOS HARD_BAD LASER_MOD_ER R LSR_NO_FITED PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC BUS_ERR ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETH_EFM_EVENT ETH_NO_FLOW IN_PWR_ABN LASER_SHUT MAC_EXT_EXC PORTMODE_MISMATCH COMMUN_FAIL ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP LAG_DOWN LOOP_ALM MAC_FCS_EXC TEMP_ALARM DROPRATIO_OVE R ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT FLOW_OVER LAG_MEMBER_D OWN LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT MULTI_RPL_OWN ER WRG_BD_TYPE

A.2.10 EFP8
ALM_GFP_dCSF BIP_SD ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETHOAM_DISCO VER_FAIL ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP FCS_ERR LAG_VC_PORT_F AIL LCAS_PLCT LMFA LP_SLM_VC12 NO_BD_SOFT TU_LOP_VC12
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

ALM_GFP_dLFD COMMUN_FAIL ETH_CFM_RDI ETHOAM_RMT_C RIT_FAULT ETHOAM_VCG_S ELF_LOOP FLOW_OVER LCAS_FOPR LCAS_TLCR LOOP_ALM LP_TIM_VC12 RMFA VCAT_LOA

BD_STATUS DOWN_E1_AIS ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETHOAM_RMT_L OOP EX_ETHOAM_CC _LOS HARD_BAD LCAS_FOPT LCAS_TLCT LP_RDI_VC12 LP_UNEQ_VC12 TEMP_ALARM VCAT_LOM_VC12

BIP_EXC ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_LOS ETHOAM_RMT_S D EX_ETHOAM_MPI D_CNFLCT LAG_PORT_FAIL LCAS_PLCR LFA LP_REI_VC12 LPT_RFI TU_AIS_VC12 VCAT_SQM_VC12
232

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

W_R_FAIL

WRG_BD_TYPE

A.2.11 EMS6
ALM_GFP_dCSF BD_STATUS COMMUN_FAIL ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETHOAM_RMT_L OOP EX_ETHOAM_MPI D_CNFLCT IN_PWR_ABN LCAS_FOPT LCAS_TLCT LP_RDI_VC3 LP_SLM_VC3 LP_UNEQ_VC3 MULTI_RPL_OWN ER TEMP_ALARM TU_LOP_VC3 VCAT_SQM_VC12 ALM_GFP_dLFD BIP_EXC ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_LOS ETHOAM_RMT_S D FCS_ERR LAG_PORT_FAIL LCAS_PLCR LINK_ERR LP_REI_VC12 LP_TIM_VC12 LPT_INEFFECT NO_BD_SOFT TU_AIS_VC12 VCAT_LOA VCAT_SQM_VC3 B3_EXC_VC3 BIP_SD ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETHOAM_DISCO VER_FAIL ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP FLOW_OVER LAG_VC_PORT_F AIL LCAS_PLCT LOOP_ALM LP_REI_VC3 LP_TIM_VC3 LPT_RFI OUT_PWR_ABN TU_AIS_VC3 VCAT_LOM_VC12 WRG_BD_TYPE B3_SD_VC3 BUS_ERR ETH_CFM_RDI ETHOAM_RMT_C RIT_FAULT EX_ETHOAM_CC _LOS HARD_BAD LCAS_FOPR LCAS_TLCR LP_RDI_VC12 LP_SLM_VC12 LP_UNEQ_VC12 MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH PORT_MODULE_ OFFLINE TU_LOP_VC12 VCAT_LOM_VC3 -

A.2.12 SP3S/SP3D
A_LOC DOWN_E1_AIS HPAD_CROSSTR LP_RDI
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

BD_STATUS E1_LOC LOOP_ALM LP_REI

BIP_EXC E1_LOS LP_CROSSTR LP_RFI

BIP_SD HARD_BAD LP_R_FIFO LP_SLM


233

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

LP_T_FIFO R_S_ERR TU_AIS

LP_TIM WRG_BD_TYPE TU_LOP

LP_UNEQ T_ALOS UP_E1_AIS

R_F_RST T_F_RST DDN_LFA

A.2.13 AUX
BD_STATUS RELAY_ALARM_ MAJOR HARD_BAD RELAY_ALARM_ MINOR RELAY_ALARM_ CRITICAL WRG_BD_TYPE RELAY_ALARM_I GNORE -

A.2.14 PIU
BD_STATUS WRG_BD_TYPE HARD_BAD POWER_ABNORM AL THUNDERALM -

A.2.15 FAN
BD_STATUS WRG_BD_TYPE FAN_AGING FAN_FAIL POWER_ALM -

A.2.16 ISU2
AM_DOWNSHIFT B1_SD B3_SD BUS_ERR ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK AU_AIS B2_EXC BD_STATUS DROPRATIO_OVE R ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT AU_LOP B2_SD BIP_EXC ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_EFM_DF ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP B1_EXC B3_EXC BIP_SD ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETH_EFM_EVENT FLOW_OVER

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

234

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

HARD_BAD HP_REI IF_CABLE_OPEN LCS_LIMITED LP_RDI MAC_FCS_EXC MS_REI MW_BER_EXC MW_E1_LOST MW_RDI RS_CROSSTR TU_LOP

HP_CROSSTR HP_SLM LAG_BWMM LICENSE_DIFF LP_REI MS_AIS MSAD_CROSSTR MW_BER_SD MW_FEC_UNCOR PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC T_LOC VOLT_LOS

HP_LOM HP_TIM LAG_DOWN LICENSE_LOST LP_UNEQ MS_CROSSTR MULTI_RPL_OWN ER MW_CFG_MISMA TCH MW_LIM R_LOC TEMP_ALARM WRG_BD_TYPE

HP_RDI HP_UNEQ LAG_MEMBER_D OWN LOOP_ALM MAC_EXT_EXC MS_RDI MW_AM_TEST MW_CONT_WAV E MW_LOF R_LOF TU_AIS -

A.2.17 ISX2
AM_DOWNSHIFT B1_SD B3_SD BUS_ERR ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK HARD_BAD HP_REI IF_CABLE_OPEN LCS_LIMITED LP_RDI AU_AIS B2_EXC BD_STATUS DROPRATIO_OVE R ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT HP_CROSSTR HP_SLM LAG_BWMM LICENSE_DIFF LP_REI AU_LOP B2_SD BIP_EXC ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_EFM_DF ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP HP_LOM HP_TIM LAG_DOWN LICENSE_LOST LP_UNEQ B1_EXC B3_EXC BIP_SD ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETH_EFM_EVENT FLOW_OVER HP_RDI HP_UNEQ LAG_MEMBER_D OWN LOOP_ALM MAC_EXT_EXC

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

235

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

MAC_FCS_EXC MS_REI MW_BER_EXC MW_E1_LOST MW_RDI RS_CROSSTR TU_LOP

MS_AIS MSAD_CROSSTR MW_BER_SD MW_FEC_UNCOR PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC T_LOC VOLT_LOS

MS_CROSSTR MULTI_RPL_OWN ER MW_CFG_MISMA TCH MW_LIM R_LOC TEMP_ALARM WRG_BD_TYPE

MS_RDI MW_AM_TEST MW_CONT_WAV E MW_LOF R_LOF TU_AIS XPIC_LOS

A.2.18 ML1/MD1
ALM_E1RAI ALM_IMA_RE_TX _UNUSABLE CES_ACR_LOCK_ ABN CES_MALPKT_EX C CESPW_OPPOSIT E_ACFAULT HARD_BAD LCD OCD TR_LOC VC_LOC VP_RDI ALM_IMA_LIF ALM_IMA_RFI CES_JTROVR_EX C CES_MISORDERP KT_EXC CESPW_OPPOSIT E_RAI IMA_GROUP_LE_ DOWN LFA POWER_ABNORM AL UHCS VC_RDI BUS_ERR ALM_IMA_LODS ATMPW_UNKNO WNCELL_EXC CES_JTRUDR_EX C CES_RDI CHCS IMA_GROUP_RE_ DOWN LMFA T_ALOS UP_E1_AIS VP_AIS ALM_IMA_RE_RX _UNUSABLE BD_STATUS CES_LOSPKT_EX C CES_STRAYPKT_ EXC WRG_BD_TYPE IMA_TXCLK_MISMATCH LOOP_ALM TEMP_ALARM VC_AIS VP_LOC -

A.2.19 SL4D
AU_AIS AU_LOP B1_EXC B1_SD

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

236

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

B2_EXC BD_STATUS HP_RDI HP_UNEQ LASER_CLOSED LSR_NO_FITED MS_REI R_LOS

B2_SD HARD_BAD HP_REI IN_PWR_HIGH LASER_MOD_ER R_EX MS_AIS MSAD_CROSSTR RS_CROSSTR

B3_EXC HP_CROSSTR HP_SLM IN_PWR_LOW LOOP_ALM MS_CROSSTR R_LOC T_LOC

B3_SD HP_LOM HP_TIM J0_MM WRG_BD_TYPE MS_RDI R_LOF -

A.2.20 EG2D
BD_STATUS ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETH_EFM_EVENT ETH_NO_FLOW IN_PWR_ABN LASER_SHUT MAC_EXT_EXC PORTMODE_MISMATCH COMMUN_FAIL ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP LAG_DOWN LOOP_ALM MAC_FCS_EXC TEMP_ALARM DROPRATIO_OVE R ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT FLOW_OVER LAG_MEMBER_D OWN LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT MULTI_RPL_OWN ER WRG_BD_TYPE ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_EFM_DF ETH_LOS HARD_BAD LASER_MOD_ER R LSR_NO_FITED PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC -

A.2.21 ODU
BD_STATUS LOOP_ALM CONFIG_NOSUPP ORT POWER_ALM HARD_BAD RADIO_FADING_ MARGIN_INSUFF IF_INPWR_ABN RADIO_MUTE

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

237

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH RADIO_TSL_LOW

RADIO_RSL_HIG H TEMP_ALARM

RADIO_RSL_LOW WRG_BD_TYPE

RADIO_TSL_HIG H -

A.3 Alarms and Handling Procedures


This chapter describes all the alarms on the OptiX RTN 980 in alphabetical order and how to handle these alarms.

A.3.1 A_LOC
Description
The A_LOC is an alarm indicating that a clock signal is lost in the uplink bus.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the A_LOC alarm occurs, the services carried by the board are interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: A certain board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: A certain board is faulty. 1. Replace the board where the alarmed tributary unit is located.

----End

Related Information
None.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

238

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.2 ALM_E1RAI
Description
The ALM_E1RAI is an alarm indicating that the E1 link on the opposite NE reports alarms. This alarm is reported on the local NE when the T_ALOS, UP_E1_AIS, DOWN_E1_AIS, LFA, or LMFA alarm is reported on the opposite NE.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the services on the local NE in the downstream direction are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The E1 link on the opposite NE reports the T_ALOS, LFA, LMFA, UP_E1_AIS, or DOWN_E1_AIS alarm.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The E1 link on the opposite NE reports the T_ALOS, LFA, LMFA, UP_E1_AIS, or DOWN_E1_AIS alarm. Step 2 Handle these alarms first. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.3 ALM_GFP_dCSF
Description
The ALM_GFP_dCSF is an alarm indicating that the generic framing procedure (GFP) customer signal is lost. When the source end fails to receive the GFP customer signal, it sends the management frame to the sink end. The ALM_GFP_dCSF alarm is reported when the sink end receives the management frame.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

239

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUNK 1.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: Timeslot binding is different at the source and sink VCTRUNKs. Cause 2: The radio link performance degrades. Cause 3: The alarmed board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Timeslot binding is different at the source and sink VCTRUNKs. 1. Reconfigure the timeslot binding at the source and sink VCTRUNKs.

Step 2 Cause 2: The radio link performance degrades. 1. Troubleshoot the radio link.

Step 3 Cause 3: The alarmed board is faulty. 1. Replace the faulty board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.4 ALM_GFP_dLFD
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 240

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Description
The ALM_GFP_dLFD is an alarm indicating that the GFP frame is out of frame. This alarm occurs when a board detects that the GFP frame is out of frame.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the logical port, and the value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUNK 1.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: Bit errors occur on certain links or certain links are faulty. Cause 2: When the LCAS is disabled, the source and the sink VCTRUNKs are configured with different timeslots or different numbers of paths.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Bit errors occur on certain links or certain links are faulty. 1. Check whether the links where the service travels have errors or become faulty. If... The links are faulty The links are normal Then... Rectify the fault. Replace the alarmed board.

Step 2 Cause 2: When the LCAS is disabled, the source and the sink VCTRUNKs are configured with different timeslots or different numbers of paths. 1. Correct the configuration data. For details, see Configuring VCTRUNKs on an Ethernet Board.

----End
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 241

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.3.5 ALM_IMA_LIF
Description
The ALM_IMA_LIF is an alarm indicating that the IMA link is out of frame in the receive direction. This alarm occurs when the frame alignment is lost on the IMA link in the receive direction.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Meaning Indicate the ATM Trunk ID.

Impact on the System


l When this alarm occurs, the alarmed IMA link is unavailable. Therefore, the number of available links in the IMA group decreases. If the bandwidth of the services configured for the IMA group exceeds the total bandwidth of available IMA links, congestion occurs on the IMA port, causing loss of cells. After this alarm is cleared, the affected IMA link becomes available.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS, R_LOF, and MS_AIS. Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends. Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS, R_LOF, and MS_AIS.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 242

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The path reports any SDH alarm The path does not report any SDH alarm

Then... Handle the relevant alarms first. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends. 1. 2. 3. 4. Disable the IMA protocol at the two ends. Check the IMA group configuration at the two ends and ensure that the configuration is consistent. Enable the IMA protocol at the two ends. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Step 3 Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty. 1. Replace the board. For details, see 6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board. Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 3.

----End

Related Information
Loss of frame alignment A frame alignment word, provided at the physical layer, occupies the initial position of a frame and defines the start of information field. An Out Of Frame (OOF) defect is declared when the position of frame alignment word cannot be determined in the input bit stream.

A.3.6 ALM_IMA_LODS
Description
The ALM_IMA_LODS is an alarm indicating the differential delay on the IMA link crosses the threshold. This alarm occurs when the maximum differential delay on the IMA link exceeds the preset value.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 243

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2

Meaning Indicate the ATM Trunk ID.

Impact on the System


The IMA links are unavailable.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The maximum differential delay is configured incorrectly. Cause 2: Within one IMA group, the transmission distances of member links have too large gaps.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The maximum differential delay is configured incorrectly. 1. Change the maximum differential delay to a greater value. For details, see Modifying CES Service Parameters.

Step 2 Cause 2: Within one IMA group, the transmission distances of member links have too large gaps. 1. Use the meter to measure the transmission time on E1 links. If the transmission time on different links has a gap larger than 25 ms (default value), adjust the IMA links or delete the member link with over long transmission time from the IMA group.

----End

Related Information
Differential delay Differential delay refers to the service delay difference between E1 links.

A.3.7 ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE
Description
The ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE is an alarm indicating that the IMA link on the opposite NE fails in the receive direction.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 244

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Meaning Indicate the ATM Trunk ID.

Impact on the System


l When this alarm occurs, the alarmed IMA link is unavailable. Therefore, the number of available links in the IMA group decreases. If the bandwidth of the services configured for the IMA group exceeds the total bandwidth of available IMA links, congestion occurs on the IMA port, causing loss of cells. After this alarm is cleared, the affected IMA link becomes available.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS, R_LOF, and MS_AIS. Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends. Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS, R_LOF, and MS_AIS. If... The path reports any SDH alarm The path does not report any SDH alarm Then... Handle the relevant alarms first. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends. 1. 2. 3. 4. Disable the IMA protocol at the two ends. Check the IMA group configuration at the two ends and ensure that the configuration is consistent. Enable the IMA protocol at the two ends. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Step 3 Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty. 1. Replace the board. For details, see 6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board. Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 3.

----End
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 245

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.3.8 ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE
Description
The ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE is an alarm indicating that the IMA link on the opposite NE fails in the transmit direction.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Meaning Indicate the ATM Trunk ID.

Impact on the System


l When this alarm occurs, the alarmed IMA link is unavailable. Therefore, the number of available links in the IMA group decreases. If the bandwidth of the services configured for the IMA group exceeds the total bandwidth of available IMA links, congestion occurs on the IMA port, causing loss of cells. After this alarm is cleared, the affected IMA link becomes available.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS, R_LOF, and MS_AIS. Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends. Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS, R_LOF, and MS_AIS.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 246

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The path reports any SDH alarm The path does not report any SDH alarm

Then... Handle the relevant alarms first. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends. 1. 2. 3. 4. Disable the IMA protocol at the two ends. Check the IMA group configuration at the two ends and ensure that the configuration is consistent. Enable the IMA protocol at the two ends. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Step 3 Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty. 1. Replace the board. For details, see 6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board. Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 3.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.9 ALM_IMA_RFI
Description
The ALM_IMA_RFI is an alarm indicating that the IMA link on the opposite NE is out of frame (OOF) in the receive direction. This alarm occurs when the frame alignment is lost on the IMA link of the opposite NE and the opposite NE notifies the local NE of its OOF state.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

247

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2

Meaning Indicate the ATM Trunk ID.

Impact on the System


l When this alarm occurs, the alarmed IMA link is unavailable. Therefore, the number of available links in the IMA group decreases. If the bandwidth of the services configured for the IMA group exceeds the total bandwidth of available IMA links, congestion occurs on the IMA port, causing loss of cells. After this alarm is cleared, the affected IMA link becomes available.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS, R_LOF, and MS_AIS. Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends. Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS, R_LOF, and MS_AIS. If... The path reports any SDH alarm The path does not report any SDH alarm Then... Handle the relevant alarms first. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends. 1. 2. 3. 4. Disable the IMA protocol at the two ends. Check the IMA group configuration at the two ends and ensure that the configuration is consistent. Enable the IMA protocol at the two ends. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Step 3 Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty. 1. Replace the board. For details, see 6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board. Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 3.

----End

Related Information
Frame alignment loss
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 248

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A frame alignment word, provided at the physical layer, occupies the initial position of a frame and defines the start of information field. An Out Of Frame (OOF) defect is declared when the position of frame alignment word cannot be determined in the input bit stream.

A.3.10 AM_DOWNSHIFT
Description
The AM_DOWNSHIFT is an alarm indicating the downshift of the AM scheme. This alarm occurs when the AM scheme is downshifted from the highest-efficiency scheme to the lowerefficiency scheme. When the AM scheme is upshifted from the lower-efficiency scheme to the highest-efficiency scheme, this alarm is cleared.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the AM_DOWNSHIFT alarm occurs, the transmission capacity is reduced.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The external factors (for example, the climate) cause the degradation of the working channels. Cause 2: There are interferences around the working channels. Cause 3: The ODU at the transmit end has abnormal transmit power. Cause 4: The ODU at the receive end has abnormal receive power.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The external factors (for example, the climate) cause the degradation of the working channels. 1. When the external factors (for example, the climate) cause the degradation of the working channels, the downshift of the AM scheme is normal. Hence, no measures should be taken to handle the alarm.

Step 2 Cause 2: There are interferences around the working channels. 1. Eliminate the interferences around the working channels.

Step 3 Cause 3: The ODU at the transmit end has abnormal transmit power.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 249

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Use the NMS to check whether the transmit power of the ODU at the transmit end is normal. For details on troubleshooting at the transmit end, see Troubleshooting Microwave Links.

Step 4 Cause 4: The ODU at the receive end has abnormal receive power. 1. Use the NMS to check whether the receive power of the ODU at the receive end is normal. For details on troubleshooting at the receive end, see Troubleshooting Microwave Links.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.11 APS_FAIL
Description
The APS_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the MS protection switching fails.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning

Parameter 1 Indicates the type of the protection group. l 0x01: linear MS protection l 0x02: ring MS protection Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1.

Impact on the System


When the APS_FAIL alarm occurs, the services cannot be switched. If the current paths are unavailable, the services are interrupted.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 250

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The parameters of the MSP protocol are set incorrectly. Cause 2: The parameters of the MSP protocol are lost.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The parameters of the MSP protocol are set incorrectly. 1. Check whether the parameters of the MSP protocol are set correctly. If... The parameters are set incorrectly The parameters are set correctly Step 2 Cause 2: The parameters of the MSP protocol are lost. 1. 2. Check whether the MSP protocol is normal on the network. Check whether the MSP protocol is normal on the network. For details, see Enabling/ Disabling the linear MSP protocol or Enabling/Disabling the ring MSP protocol. If... Then... Then... Set the parameters correctly. Go to the next step.

The alarm is cleared after the protocol is End the alarm handling. restarted The alarm persists after the protocol is restarted ----End Contact Huawei engineers to handle the alarm.

Related Information
None.

A.3.12 APS_INDI
Description
The APS_INDI is an alarm indicating that the MS protection switching occurs.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 251

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning

Parameter 1 Indicates the type of the protection group. l 0x01: linear MS protection. l 0x02: ring MS protection. Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1.

Impact on the System


During the switching ( 50 ms), the service is interrupted. After the switching is complete, the services are restored to normal. In the case of 1:N MS protection, after the switching starts and before the switching is complete, the extra services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The MS protection switching occurs.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The MS protection switching occurs. 1. 2. Query the linear MSP group or query the ring MSP group. Check whether the MSP protocol is in the manual switching state, forced switching state, or locked switching state. If yes, release the switching and check whether the alarm is cleared. Check whether the MSP protocol is in the automatic switching state. Do as follows: a. Handle the R_LOS, R_LOF, MS_AIS, B2_EXC, or B2_SD alarm that the equipment reports. After the alarms are cleared, wait until the MSP protocol is changed from the automatic switching state to the normal state. Then, check whether the APS_INDI alarm is cleared. Check whether the service board configured with the MSP protocol is faulty. If yes, replace the faulty board and then check whether the APS_INDI alarm is cleared. Check whether the currently working system control and cross-connect board is faulty. If the currently working system control and cross-connect board is faulty and a protection system control and cross-connect board is available, switch the service to the protection system control and cross-connect board and replace the faulty system control and cross-connect board. Then, check whether the APS_INDI alarm is cleared.

3.

b. c.

----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 252

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.13 APS_MANUAL_STOP
Description
The APS_MANUAL_STOP is an alarm indicating that the MSP protocol is stopped manually.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning

Parameter 1 Indicates the type of the protection group. l 0x01: linear MS protection. l 0x02: ring MS protection. Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1.

Impact on the System


When the APS_MANUAL_STOP alarm occurs, the MSP protocol may fail and therefore the protection switching may fail.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The MSP protocol is stopped manually.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The MSP protocol is stopped manually. 1. Enable/Disable the linear MSP protocol or Enable/Disable the ring MSP protocol.

----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 253

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.14 ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELL_EXC
Description
The ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELL_EXC is an alarm indicating that the number of unknown cells exceeds the specified threshold in a time unit. This alarm occurs when the board detects that, within a period (2.5s), the number of unknown cells crosses the specified threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


An unknown cell is discarded once it is detected. As a result, the packet loss rate increases and services are affected.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: PW control words mismatch. Cause 2: PW types mismatch. Cause 3: Fragments are received on the network side.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the configuration at the two ends of the PW is consistent. If not, modify the configuration. Step 2 Check whether connections are correct. If not, reconnect fibers or reconfigure connections. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.15 AU_AIS
Description
The AU_AIS is an alarm indicating the administrative unit (AU). This alarm occurs when the board detects the AU pointer of all 1s for three consecutive frames.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 254

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the AU_AIS alarm occurs, the service in the alarmed AU-4 path is interrupted. If the services are configured with protection, protection switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The opposite NE inserts the AU_AIS alarm. Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite NE is faulty. Cause 3: The receive unit of the local NE is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite NE inserts the AU_AIS alarm. If... The alarm that triggers the AU_AIS insertion occurs No such alarms that trigger the AU_AIS insertion occur Step 2 Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite NE is faulty. 1. Replace the board where the line unit is located or the IF board. If... The alarm is cleared after the board is replaced The alarm persists after the board is replaced 2. 1. Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Go to the next step. Then... Clear the alarm immediately. Go to Cause 2.

Replace the system control board on the opposite NE. Replace the alarmed board.

Step 3 Cause 3: The receive unit of the local NE is faulty. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.16 AU_LOP
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 255

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Description
The AU_LOP is an alarm indicating the loss of the AU pointer. This alarm occurs when a board detects the AU pointer of invalid values or with the NDF for eight consecutive frames.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the AU_LOP alarm occurs, the service in the alarmed AU-4 path is interrupted. If the services are configured with protection, protection switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The transmit unit of the opposite NE is faulty. Cause 2: The receive unit of the local NE is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The transmit unit of the opposite NE is faulty. 1. Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE. If... The alarm is cleared after the board is replaced The alarm persists after the board is replaced 2. Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Go to the next step.

Replace the system control board on the opposite NE.

Step 2 Cause 2: The receive unit of the local NE is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.17 B1_EXC
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 256

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Description
The B1_EXC is an alarm indicating that the B1 errors (in the regenerator section) exceed the threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the B1 errors exceed the preset B1_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default). An IF board that works in PDH mode may also report this alarm. This alarm is detected by using the self-defined overhead byte B1 in PDH microwave frames.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the B1_EXC alarm occurs, the services on the port are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l l l Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). 1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite end and the receive power at the local end meet the specifications of the optical interfaces. For details, see 8.3.5 Browsing Current Performance Events. If... Then...

The transmit power of the opposite NE is Replace the board where the SDH over low optical interface unit is located on the opposite NE. The transmit power of the opposite NE is The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step. normal, but the receive power of the local NE is close to the value (for example, within 3 dB) of the receiver sensitivity. 2. Exchange the core fibers of the optical cables in the receive and transmit directions of a channel.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 257

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If...

Then...

The errors vary with the change of the fiber The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step. The errors do not vary with the change of the Ensure that the board is normal. fiber. 3. If the fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out of the equipment room are pressed, and whether the fiber connector is dirty. If yes, replace the fiber jumper or fiber connector. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR or RPS_INDI alarm is reported. If yes, clear the alarm. Check the network clock status of the alarmed NE. If... The clock source of the local NE is different from the clock source of the opposite NE Then... The clock may become asynchronous and B1 errors may occur. Reconfigure the clock source, and ensure that the clock is synchronized on the local NE and opposite NE.

Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). 1.

Step 3 Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. 1.

The clock of the local NE and the clock This may cause errors and even service of the opposite NE form a timing loop interruption. In this case, reconfigure the clock source and release the timing loop. Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). 1. The board of the SDH line unit on the local NE is faulty. Loop back the optical interfaces of the NE by using a fiber jumper to locate the fault. If... Then...

The fault is not rectified after the optical Replace the board where the alarmed interfaces are looped back line unit is located on the local NE. The fault is rectified after the optical interfaces are looped back Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE.

Step 5 Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). 1. Perform an inloop for the multiplexing interface of the IF board on the local NE. If... The fault is not rectified after the multiplexing interface is looped back Then... Replace the alarmed IF board on the local NE.

The fault is rectified after the multiplexing Replace the alarmed IF board on the interface is looped back opposite NE. ----End

Related Information
The handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 258

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Handle the errors of TDM services.

A.3.18 B1_SD
Description
The B1_SD is an alarm indicating that the signal degrades due to the excessive B1 errors (in the regenerator section). This alarm occurs when the board detects that the B1 errors exceed the preset B1_SD alarm threshold (10-6 by default) but do not reach the preset B1_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default). An IF board that works in PDH mode may also report this alarm. This alarm is detected by using the self-defined overhead byte B1 in PDH microwave frames.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the B1_SD alarm occurs, the service performance on the port degrades.

Possible Causes
l l l l l Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). 1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite end and the receive power at the local end meet the specifications of the optical interfaces. For details, see 8.3.5 Browsing Current Performance Events. If... Then...

The transmit power of the opposite NE is Replace the board where the SDH over low optical interface unit is located on the opposite NE.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 259

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If...

Then...

The transmit power of the opposite NE is The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step. normal, but the receive power of the local NE is close to the value (for example, within 3 dB) of the receiver sensitivity 2. Exchange the core fibers of the optical cables in the receive and transmit directions of a channel. If... Then...

The errors vary with the change of the fiber The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step. The errors do not vary with the change of the Ensure that the board is normal. fiber 3. If the fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out of the equipment room are pressed, and whether the fiber connector is dirty. If yes, replace the fiber jumper or fiber connector.

Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). 1. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is generated. If yes, clear the alarm.

Step 3 Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. 1. Check the network clock status of the alarmed NE. If... The clock source of the local NE is different from the clock source of the opposite NE Then... The clock may become asynchronous and errors may occur. Reconfigure the clock source, and ensure that the clock is synchronized on the local NE and opposite NE.

The clock of the local NE and the clock This may cause errors and even service of the opposite NE form a timing loop interruption. In this case, reconfigure the clock source and release the timing loop. Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). 1. The SDH optical line board of the local NE is faulty. Loop back the optical interfaces of the NE by using a fiber jumper to locate the fault. If... Then...

The fault is not rectified after the optical Replace the board where the alarmed interfaces are looped back line unit is located on the local NE. The fault is rectified after the optical interfaces are looped back Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE.

Step 5 Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). 1. Perform an inloop for the multiplexing interface of the IF board on the local NE.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

260

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The fault is not rectified after the multiplexing interface is looped back

Then... Replace the alarmed IF board on the local NE.

The fault is rectified after the multiplexing Replace the alarmed IF board on the interface is looped back opposite NE. ----End

Related Information
The handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port. Handle the errors of TDM services.

A.3.19 B2_EXC
Description
The B2_EXC is an alarm indicating that the B2 errors (in the multiplex section) exceed the threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number of B2 errors exceeds the preset B2_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default).

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The services on the port are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l l l Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 261

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Check whether the transmit power at the opposite end and the receive power at the local end meet the specifications of the optical interfaces. For details, see 8.3.5 Browsing Current Performance Events. If... Then...

The transmit power of the opposite NE is Replace the board where the SDH over low optical interface unit is located on the opposite NE. The transmit power of the opposite NE is The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step. normal, but the receive power of the local NE is close to the value (for example, within 3 dB) of the receiver sensitivity 2. Exchange the core fibers of the optical cables in the receive and transmit directions of a channel to locate the fault. If... Then...

The errors vary with the change of the fiber The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step. The errors do not vary with the change of the Ensure that the board is normal. fiber 3. If the fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out of the equipment room are pressed, and whether the fiber connector is dirty. If yes, replace the fiber jumper or fiber connector.

Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). 1. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR or RPS_INDI alarm is reported. If yes, clear the alarm.

Step 3 Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. 1. Check the network clock status of the alarmed NE. If... The clock source of the local NE is different from the clock source of the opposite NE Then... The clock may become asynchronous and errors may occur. Reconfigure the clock source, and ensure that the clock is synchronized on the local NE and opposite NE.

The clock of the local NE and the clock This may cause errors and even service of the opposite NE form a timing loop interruption. In this case, reconfigure the clock source and release the timing loop. Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). 1. The board of the SDH line unit on the local NE is faulty. Loop back the optical interfaces of the NE by using a fiber jumper to locate the fault. If... Then...

The fault is not rectified after the optical Replace the board where the alarmed interfaces are looped back line unit is located on the local NE.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 262

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The fault is rectified after the optical interfaces are looped back

Then... Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE.

Step 5 Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). 1. Perform an inloop for the multiplexing interface of the IF board on the local NE. If... The fault is not rectified after the multiplexing interface is looped back Then... Replace the alarmed IF board on the local NE.

The fault is rectified after the multiplexing Replace the alarmed IF board on the interface is looped back opposite NE. ----End

Related Information
The handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port. Handle the errors of TDM services.

A.3.20 B2_SD
Description
The B2_SD is an alarm indicating that the signal degrades due to the excessive B2 errors (in the multiplex section). This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number of B2 errors is higher than the preset B2_SD alarm threshold (10-6 by default) and lower than the preset B2_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default).

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The service performance on the port degrades.

Possible Causes
l l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 263

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

l l l

Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). 1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite end and the receive power at the local end meet the specifications of the optical interfaces. For details, see 8.3.5 Browsing Current Performance Events. If... Then...

The transmit power of the opposite NE is Replace the board where the SDH over low optical interface unit is located on the opposite NE. The transmit power of the opposite NE is The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step. normal, but the receive power of the local NE is close to the value (for example, within 3 dB) of the receiver sensitivity 2. Exchange the core fibers of the optical cables in the receive and transmit directions of a channel to locate the fault. If... Then...

The errors vary with the change of the fiber The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step. The errors do not vary with the change of the Ensure that the board is normal. fiber 3. If the fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out of the equipment room are pressed, and whether the fiber connector is dirty. If yes, replace the fiber jumper or fiber connector.

Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). 1. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is generated. If yes, clear the alarm.

Step 3 Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. 1. Check the network clock status of the alarmed NE. If... The clock source of the local NE is different from the clock source of the opposite NE Then... The clock may become asynchronous and errors may occur. Reconfigure the clock source, and ensure that the clock is synchronized on the local NE and opposite NE.

The clock of the local NE and the clock This may cause errors and even service of the opposite NE form a timing loop interruption. In this case, reconfigure the clock source and release the timing loop.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 264

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). 1. The SDH optical/electrical line board of the local NE is faulty. Loop back the optical interfaces of the station by using a fiber jumper to locate the fault. If... Then...

The fault is not rectified after the optical Replace the board where the alarmed interfaces are looped back line unit is located on the local NE. The fault is rectified after the optical interfaces are looped back Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE.

Step 5 Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). 1. Perform an inloop for the multiplexing interface of the IF board on the local NE. If... The fault is not rectified after the multiplexing interface is looped back Then... Replace the alarmed IF board on the local NE.

The fault is rectified after the multiplexing Replace the alarmed IF board on the interface is looped back opposite NE. ----End

Related Information
The handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port. Handle the errors of TDM services.

A.3.21 B3_EXC
Description
The B3_EXC is an alarm indicating that the B3 errors (in the higher order path) exceed the threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number of B3 errors exceeds the preset B3_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default).

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the B3_EXC alarm occurs, the service on the alarmed path is interrupted.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 265

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l l l l Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). 1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite end and the receive power at the local end meet the specifications of the optical interfaces. For details, see 8.3.5 Browsing Current Performance Events. If... Then...

The transmit power of the opposite NE is Replace the board where the SDH over low optical interface unit is located on the opposite NE. The transmit power of the opposite NE is The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step. normal, but the receive power of the local NE is close to the value (for example, within 3 dB) of the receiver sensitivity 2. Exchange the core fibers of the optical cables in the receive and transmit directions of a channel to locate the fault. If... Then...

The errors vary with the change of the fiber The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step. The errors do not vary with the change of the Ensure that the board is normal. fiber 3. If the fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out of the equipment room are pressed, and whether the fiber connector is dirty. If yes, replace the fiber jumper or fiber connector. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR or RPS_INDI alarm is reported. If yes, clear the alarm. Check the network clock status of the alarmed NE.

Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). 1.

Step 3 Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. 1.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

266

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The clock source of the local NE is different from the clock source of the opposite NE

Then... In this case, the clock may become asynchronous and errors may occur. Reconfigure the clock source, and ensure that the clock is synchronized on the local NE and opposite NE.

The clock of the local NE and the clock This may cause errors and even service of the opposite NE form a timing loop interruption. In this case, reconfigure the clock source and release the timing loop. Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). 1. The board of the SDH line unit on the local NE is faulty. Loop back the optical interfaces of the NE by using a fiber jumper to locate the fault. If... Then...

The fault is not rectified after the optical Replace the board where the alarmed interfaces are looped back line unit is located on the local NE. The fault is rectified after the optical interfaces are looped back Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE.

Step 5 Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). 1. Perform an inloop for the multiplexing interface of the IF board on the local NE. If... The fault is not rectified after the multiplexing interface is looped back Then... Replace the alarmed IF board on the local NE.

The fault is rectified after the multiplexing Replace the alarmed IF board on the interface is looped back opposite NE. ----End

Related Information
The handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port. Handle the errors of TDM services.

A.3.22 B3_EXC_VC3
Description
The B3_EXC_VC3 alarm indicates that the number of B3 bit errors in a VC-3 path crosses the threshold. A board reports this alarm when detecting that the number of B3 bit errors crosses the B3_EXC_VC3 alarm threshold (10-3, by default).

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

267

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Has a fixed value of 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.

Impact on the System


The services in the alarmed path have a large number of bit errors.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: Higher-level bit error alarms occur in the system. Cause 2: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet optical port). Cause 3: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet electrical port). Cause 4: A board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Higher-level bit error alarms occur in the system. 1. 2. Check whether the local or upstream site detects B1_EXC, B1_SD, B2_EXC, B2_SD, B3_EXC, or B3_SD alarms. If yes, clear the higher-level alarms. Check whether the alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 2 or Cause 3.

Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet optical port). 1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite site and the receive power at the local site meet the specifications of the optical ports. For details, see Browsing Current Performance Events.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 268

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If...

Then...

The transmit power at the opposite site is Replace the optical module at the too low opposite site. The transmit power at the opposite site is A fiber is faulty. Go to the next step. normal, but the receive power at the local site is close to the receiver sensitivity (for example, a difference within 3 dB) 2. Exchange the optical fibers in the receive and transmit directions of an optical path segment. If... The number of bit errors changes The number of bit errors does not change 3. Then... Go to the next step. Go to Cause 4.

If a fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out from the equipment room are pressed, and whether any fiber connector is dirty or damaged. If yes, clean or replace the fiber connector, or replace the fiber jumper. Check whether the alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 4.

Step 3 Cause 3: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet electrical port). 1. 2. Check whether the cable grounding, cable connectors, and cables are damaged. If yes, replace the faulty cables. Check whether the alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Step 4 Cause 4: A board is faulty. 1. Perform an inloop at the Ethernet port that connects to the alarmed VC-3 path. If... The fault is not rectified after the Ethernet port is looped back Then... Replace the alarmed Ethernet processing board at the local site. Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 4.

The fault is rectified after the Ethernet Replace the Ethernet processing board at port is looped back the opposite site. ----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 269

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.23 B3_SD
Description
The B3_SD is an alarm indicating that the signal degrades due to the excessive B3 errors (in the higher order path). This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number of B3 errors is higher than the preset B3_SD alarm threshold (10-6 by default) and lower than the preset B3_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default).

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The service performance on the port degrades.

Possible Causes
l l l l l Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). 1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite end and the receive power at the local end meet the specifications of the optical interfaces. For details, see 8.3.5 Browsing Current Performance Events. If... Then...

The transmit power of the opposite NE is Replace the board where the SDH over low optical interface unit is located on the opposite NE. The transmit power of the opposite NE is The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step. normal, but the receive power of the local NE is close to the value (for example, within 3 dB) of the receiver sensitivity
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 270

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

2.

Exchange the core fibers of the optical cables in the receive and transmit directions of a channel to locate the fault. If... Then...

The errors vary with the change of the fiber The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step. The errors do not vary with the change of the Ensure that the board is normal. fiber 3. If the fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out of the equipment room are pressed, and whether the fiber connector is dirty. If yes, replace the fiber jumper or fiber connector.

Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). 1. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is generated. If yes, clear the alarm.

Step 3 Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. 1. Check the network clock status of the alarmed NE. If... The clock source of the local NE is different from the clock source of the opposite NE Then... In this case, the clock may become asynchronous and errors may occur. Reconfigure the clock source, and ensure that the clock is synchronized on the local NE and opposite NE.

The clock of the local NE and the clock This may cause errors and even service of the opposite NE form a timing loop interruption. In this case, reconfigure the clock source and release the timing loop. Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). 1. The SDH optical/electrical line board of the local NE is faulty. Loop back the optical interfaces of the station by using a fiber jumper to locate the fault. If... Then...

The fault is not rectified after the optical Replace the board where the alarmed interfaces are looped back line unit is located on the local NE. The fault is rectified after the optical interfaces are looped back Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE.

Step 5 Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). 1. Perform an inloop for the multiplexing interface of the IF board on the local NE. If... The fault is not rectified after the multiplexing interface is looped back Then... Replace the alarmed IF board on the local NE.

The fault is rectified after the multiplexing Replace the alarmed IF board on the interface is looped back opposite NE. ----End
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 271

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
The handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port. Handle the errors of TDM services.

A.3.24 B3_SD_VC3
Description
The B3_SD_VC3 alarm indicates a signal degrade (SD) condition caused by excessive B3 bit errors in VC-3 paths. A board reports this alarm when detecting that the number of B3 bit errors crosses the B3_SD_VC3 alarm threshold (10-6, by default).

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Has a fixed value of 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.

Impact on the System


When the B3_SD_VC3 alarm occurs, the services in the alarmed path deteriorate.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: Higher-level bit error alarms occur in the system. Cause 2: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet optical port). Cause 3: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet electrical port). Cause 4: A board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Higher-level bit error alarms occur in the system.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 272

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1. 2.

Check whether the local or upstream site detects B1_EXC, B1_SD, B2_EXC, B2_SD, B3_EXC, or B3_SD alarms. If yes, clear the higher-level alarms. Check whether the alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 2 or Cause 3.

Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet optical port). 1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite site and the receive power at the local site meet the specifications of the optical ports. For details, see Browsing Current Performance Events. If... Then...

The transmit power at the opposite site is Replace the optical module at the too low opposite site. The transmit power at the opposite site is A fiber is faulty. Go to the next step. normal, but the receive power at the local site is close to the receiver sensitivity (for example, a difference within 3 dB) 2. Exchange the optical fibers in the receive and transmit directions of an optical path segment. If... The number of bit errors changes The number of bit errors does not change 3. Then... Go to the next step. Go to Cause 4.

If a fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out from the equipment room are pressed, and whether any fiber connector is dirty or damaged. If yes, clean or replace the fiber connector, or replace the fiber jumper. Check whether the alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 4.

Step 3 Cause 3: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet electrical port). 1. 2. Check whether the cable grounding, cable connectors, and cables are damaged. If yes, replace the faulty cables. Check whether the alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Step 4 Cause 4: A board is faulty. 1.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 4.

Perform an inloop at the Ethernet port that connects to the alarmed VC-3 path.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 273

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The fault is not rectified after the Ethernet port is looped back

Then... Replace the alarmed Ethernet processing board at the local site.

The fault is rectified after the Ethernet Replace the Ethernet processing board at port is looped back the opposite site. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.25 BD_NOT_INSTALLED
Description
The BD_NOT_INSTALLED is an alarm indicating that the physical board is installed in a certain slot, but the logical board is not added.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Meaning Indicates the ID of the slot.

Impact on the System


When the BD_NOT_INSTALLED alarm occurs, the physical board in this slot cannot work.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The logical board is not added in the corresponding logical slot.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The logical board is not added in the corresponding logical slot.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 274

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Configure the logical board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.26 BD_STATUS
Description
The BD_STATUS is an alarm indicating that the board is not in position.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the BD_STATUS alarm occurs, the alarmed board fails to work.

Possible Causes
If the alarm is reported by a board of the IDU, the possible causes are as follows: l l l l Cause 1 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The board is installed in an incorrect slot. Cause 2 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The board and the backplane are not connected properly. Cause 3 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The slot is faulty. Cause 4 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: A certain board is faulty.

If the alarm is reported by the ODU, the possible causes are as follows: l l Cause 1 of the alarm reported by the ODU: The other alarms are generated. Cause 2 of the alarm reported by the ODU: The ODU is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The board is installed in an incorrect slot. 1. Check whether the logical slot and physical slot of the alarmed board are consistent. For details, see 8.3.2 Checking the Board Status.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 275

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The alarmed board is installed in an incorrect slot The alarmed board is installed in a correct slot

Then... Install the board in a correct slot. Ensure that the board and the backplane are connected properly.

Step 2 Cause 2 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The board and the backplane are not connected properly. 1. Remove and insert the alarmed board. If... The alarm is cleared after the board is removed and inserted The alarm persists after the board is removed and inserted Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Ensure that the board is normal.

Step 3 Cause 3 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The slot is faulty. 1. Contact Huawei engineers to handle the fault of the slot.
TIP

Generally, the slot becomes faulty due to the broken pin or bent pin. Remove the board, and use a torch to observe whether there is any broken pin or bent pin.

2.

If a vacant slot is available, insert the board in the vacant slot and add the board again. Then, the board can work normally.

Step 4 Cause 4 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: A certain board is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board. If... The alarm is cleared after the board is replaced The alarm persists after the board is replaced Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Ensure that the slot is normal.

Step 5 Cause 1 of the alarm reported by the ODU: The other alarms are generated. 1. Query whether the IF board reports the HARD_BAD, BD_STATUS, IF_CABLE_OPEN, BD_NOT_INSTALLED or VOLT_LOS alarm. If... The IF board reports any of the preceding alarms The IF board does not report any of the preceding alarms Then... Clear the alarm immediately. Replace the alarmed ODU.

Step 6 Cause 2 of the alarm reported by the ODU: The ODU is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed ODU.

----End
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 276

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.3.27 BIOS_STATUS
Description
The BIOS_STATUS is an alarm indicating that the board is in BIOS state.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the slot ID of the board that is in BIOS state.

Impact on the System


The services on the alarmed board are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The board software is lost. Cause 2: The board software becomes abnormal.

Procedure
Step 1 Perform a cold reset on the alarmed standby system control, switching, and timing board, and then check whether the alarm is cleared. Step 2 If the alarm persists, remove the standby system control, switching, and timing board, and then reseat the board. Step 3 If the alarm persists, replace the board. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.28 BIP_EXC
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 277

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Description
The BIP_EXC is an alarm indicating that the BIP errors exceed the threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number of BIP-2 errors (in byte V5) exceeds the preset BIP_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default).

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the BIP_EXC alarm occurs, the service on the alarmed path is interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board). Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board). Cause 3: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board). Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board).

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board). 1. Check whether the performance degradation alarm occurs on the STM-1 path or radio link along which the E1 service signal travels. If yes, clear the alarm immediately. The common line performance degradation alarms are as follows: B1_EXC, B1_SD, B2_EXC, B2_SD, B3_EXC, B3_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR, RPS_INDI, MW_BER_EXC, and MW_BER_SD. If... There is any of the preceding alarms No such alarms occur Then... Clear the alarm immediately. Ensure that the board is normal.

Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board). 1. Check whether any alarm occurs on the tributary board or IF board that transmits the service signal. If yes, clear the alarm immediately.

Step 3 Cause 3: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board). 1. Replace the board where the E1 service unit is located. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 278

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists

Then... End the alarm handling. Replace the system control and cross-connect board.

Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board). 1. Replace the Hybrid IF board. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists ----End Then... End the alarm handling. Replace the system control and cross-connect board.

Related Information
Handle the errors of TDM services. The alarm parameters have the meanings listed in Table A-3 when EMS6 board report the alarm. Table A-3 Alarm Parameters of EMS6 Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Meaning The value is always 0x01. Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in path 1.

A.3.29 BIP_SD
Description
The BIP_SD is an alarm indicating that the signal degrades due to the BIP errors. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number of BIP-2 errors (in byte V5) is higher than the preset BIP_SD alarm threshold (10-6 by default) and lower than the preset BIP_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default).

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 279

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


When the BIP_SD alarm occurs, the service on the alarmed path degrades.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board). Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board). Cause 3: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board). Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board).

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board). 1. Check whether the performance degradation alarm occurs on the STM-1 path or radio link along which the E1 service signal travels. If yes, clear the alarm immediately. The common line performance degradation alarms are as follows: B1_EXC, B1_SD, B2_EXC, B2_SD, B3_EXC, B3_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR, RPS_INDI, MW_BER_EXC, and MW_BER_SD. If... There is any of the preceding alarms No such alarms occur Then... Clear the alarm immediately. Ensure that the board is normal.

Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board). 1. Check whether any alarm occurs on the tributary board or IF board that transmits the service signal. If... An alarm occurs No alarm occurs Then... Clear the alarm immediately. Ensure that the board is normal.

Step 3 Cause 3: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board). 1. Replace the board where the E1 service unit is located. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Replace the system control and cross-connect board.

Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board). 1. Replace the Hybrid IF board. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Then... End the alarm handling.


280

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The alarm persists ----End

Then... Replace the system control and cross-connect board.

Related Information
Handle the errors of TDM services. The alarm parameters have the meanings listed in Table A-4 when EMS6 board report the alarm. Table A-4 Alarm Parameters of EMS6 Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Meaning The value is always 0x01. Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in path 1.

A.3.30 BOOTROM_BAD
Description
The BOOTROM_BAD is an alarm indicating that the BOOTROM data consistency check fails. This alarm occurs when the BOOTROM data is damaged during a periodical check by the system.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning The value is always 0x01.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

281

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 2, Parameter 3

Meaning Indicates the type of the BOOTROM damage. l 0x00, 0x01: damage of the basic BIOS l 0x00, 0x02: damage of the extended BIOS

Parameter 4, Parameter 5

The values are always 0xff 0xff.

Impact on the System


When the BOOTROM_BAD alarm occurs, it indicates that errors occur in the system database processing. The system configuration may be lost. As a result, the failure indication is returned for certain query and setting commands, and certain system functions cannot work. l l When the NE is already started, the BOOTROM_BAD alarm does not affect the system and services. If the BOOTROM_BAD alarm occurs and a hard reset is performed on a board, the board fails to load the BIOS and cannot be started.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The basic BIOS is damaged. Cause 2: The extended BIOS is damaged. Cause 3: The BOOTROM database is damaged. Cause 4: The system control switch and timing board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Replace the alarmed board. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.31 BUS_ERR
Description
The BUS_ERR alarm indicates bus errors. This alarm occurs when the bus becomes abnormal.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 282

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Meaning Indicates the ID of the board that has errors.

Impact on the System


When the BUS_ERR alarm occurs, the services that travel along the faulty bus are interrupted or have errors.

Possible Causes
The possible causes of the BUS_ERR alarm are as follows: l l Cause 1: The board is not properly inserted. Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The board is not properly inserted. 1. Remove and insert the board.

Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty. 1. Perform a cold reset on the alarmed board. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists ----End Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Replace the alarmed board.

Related Information
The alarm parameters have the meanings listed in Table A-5 when EMS6 board report the alarm. Table A-5 Alarm parameters of EMS6 Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the bus error type. 0x10: The Serdes bus of the GE bridge is faulty.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

283

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.32 CES_ACR_LOCK_ABN
Description
The CES_ACR_LOCK_ABN is an alarm indicating that the locking function of CES ACR service clock is abnormal.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
Name Meaning Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Indicate the index of PW that carries the services associated with the ACR clock source. Parameter 5 Indicates clock mode. l 0x01: tracing mode. l 0x02: holdover mode. l 0x03: free-run mode. Parameter 6 Indicates whether the clock is locked. l 0x00: unlocked. l 0x01: locked.

Impact on the System


Service quality is affected.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: CES ACR services are unavailable or have alarms. Cause 2: The network is unstable. Cause 3: NEs on the service path are abnormal.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: CES ACR services are unavailable or have alarms. 1. 2. Query the CES services associated with the ACR clock source. For details, see Configuring the Primary Clock for an ACR Clock Domain. Check whether these services have alarms. For details, see 8.3.3 Browsing Current Alarms.

Step 2 Cause 2: The network is unstable.


Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 284

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1. 2.

Check for jitters and delays on the network. Query service performance statistics. For details, see 8.3.5 Browsing Current Performance Events. Analyze service performance statistics. If the network is unstable, rectify the faults on the network, or switch the affected services to a stable network. Query alarms reported by the NEs on the service path. For details, see 8.3.3 Browsing Current Alarms. Handle the alarms. For details, see A.3 Alarms and Handling Procedures.

Step 3 Cause 3: NEs on the service path are abnormal. 1. 2.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.33 CES_JTROVR_EXC
Description
The CES_JTROVR_EXC is an alarm indicating that the number of jitter buffer overflows crosses the specified threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that, the number of jitter buffer overflows per second crosses the specified threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The buffer area does not have sufficient space for the received frames. As a result, packets are discarded.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The size of buffer area is set to a low value. Cause 2: The PSN network clocks used for the transmission of CES services are not synchronized.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The size of buffer area is set to a low value. 1. 2. Query the size of buffer area. For details, see Querying CES Service Information. Determine whether the size can be increased according to network planning. If yes, change the size to a greater value. For details, see Managing CES Services.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 285

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Step 2 Cause 2: The PSN network clocks used for the transmission of CES services are not synchronized. 1. Synchronize the PSN network clock by setting clock synchronization, reducing transmission nodes, and optimizing transmission routes.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.34 CES_JTRUDR_EXC
Description
The CES_JTRUDR_EXC is an alarm indicating that the number of jitter buffer underflows crosses the specified threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that, within a period (10s), the number of jitter buffer underflows per second crosses the specified threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, no packets are available in the buffer area for transmission. As a result, underflows occur in the buffer area.

Possible Causes
l l l l l Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link. Cause 2: The PSN network clocks used for the transmission of CES services are not synchronized. Cause 3: The link is looped. Cause 4: The link is congested. Cause 5: The size of buffer area is set to a low value.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link. 1. Troubleshoot the link. For details, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link. Step 2 Cause 2: The PSN network clocks used for the transmission of CES services are not synchronized.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 286

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Synchronize the PSN network clock by setting clock synchronization, reducing transmission nodes, and optimizing transmission routes.

Step 3 Cause 3: The link is looped. 1. Release the loop.

Step 4 Cause 4: The link is congested. 1. Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.

Step 5 Cause 5: The size of buffer area is set to a low value. 1. 2. Query the size of buffer area. For details, see Querying CES Service Information. Determine whether the size can be increased according to network planning. If yes, change the size to a greater value. For details, see Managing CES Services.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.35 CES_LOSPKT_EXC
Description
The CES_LOSPKT_EXC is an alarm indicating that the number of lost packets of CES services crosses the threshold in a time unit. This alarm occurs when the board detects that, within a period (10s), the number of lost packets per second crosses the specified threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, all 1s are inserted and services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link. Cause 2: The link is looped. Cause 3: The link is congested.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 287

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link. 1. Troubleshoot the link. For details, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link.

Step 2 Cause 2: The link is looped. 1. Release the loop.

Step 3 Cause 3: The link is congested. 1. Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.

----End

Related Information
Packets are lost when the sequence numbers of received packets are greater than expected.

A.3.36 CES_MALPKT_EXC
Description
The CES_MALPKT_EXC is an alarm indicating that, in a time unit, the number of deformed frames in CES services crosses the threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that, within a period (10s), the number of deformed frames in CES services crosses the specified threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


A deformed frame is discarded once it is detected. As a result, the packet loss rate increases and services are affected.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The RTP head enabling status is different between the two ends of the PW. Cause 2: Bit errors occur on the link.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The RTP head enabling status is different between the two ends of the PW.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 288

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Set the RTP head enabling status to the same on the two ends of the PW. For details, see Modifying CES Service Parameters. Troubleshoot the link. For details, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link.

Step 2 Cause 2: Bit errors occur on the link. 1. ----End

Related Information
If a CESoPSN frame contains valid TDM data and does not contain any error indication, but the size of the CESoPSN frame is not consistent with the specified size, a deformed CESoPSN frame is generated.

A.3.37 CES_MISORDERPKT_EXC
Description
The CES_MISORDERPKT_EXC is an alarm indicating that, in a unit time, the number of lost disordered packets crosses the specified threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that, within a period (10s), the number of lost disordered packets per second crosses the specified threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The packets are disordered. As a result, the packet loss rate increases and services are affected.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link. Cause 2: The link is looped. Cause 3: The link is congested.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link. 1. 1. See 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link. Release the loop. Step 2 Cause 2: The link is looped. Step 3 Cause 3: The link is congested.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 289

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.

----End

Related Information
Packets are disordered when the sequence numbers of received packets are smaller than expected.

A.3.38 CES_RDI
Description
The CES_RDI is an alarm of remote defect indication. When the CES_LOSPKT_EXC alarm is reported at the remote end, the remote end sets the R bit in control word to 1. Upon receiving a packet in which the R bit is 1, the local end reports the CES_RDI alarm.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The packet loss rate at the remote end crosses the specified threshold.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link. Cause 2: The link is looped. Cause 3: The link is congested.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link. 1. See 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link. Step 2 Cause 2: The link is looped. 1. Release the loop. Step 3 Cause 3: The link is congested. 1. Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.

----End
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 290

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.3.39 CES_STRAYPKT_EXC
Description
The CES_STRAYPKT_EXC is an alarm indicating that, in a time unit, the number of errored packets in CES services crosses the threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that, within a period (10s), the number of errored packets in CES services per second crosses the specified threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


An errored packet is discarded once it is detected. As a result, the packet loss rate increases and services are affected.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: Links are misconnected.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Links are misconnected. 1. Check the link configuration and rectify the fault. ----End

Related Information
Incorrect packets are received when the tracing source field in the RTP head is different from expected.

A.3.40 CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFAULT
Description
The CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFAULT is an alarm indicating that the AC circuit on the remote NE is faulty. On detection of an AC circuit fault, the remote NE sets the L bit in the control word to 1. When receiving a packet in which the L bit is 1, the local NE reports the CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFAULT alarm.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 291

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The remote NE reports the T_ALOS, UP_E1_AIS, LFA, LMFA, R_LOS, R_LOF, or MS_AIS alarm.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the remote NE reports the T_ALOS, UP_E1_AIS, LFA, LMFA, R_LOS, R_LOF, or MS_AIS alarm. 1. If yes, handle these alarms.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.41 CESPW_OPPOSITE_RAI
Description
The CESPW_OPPOSITE_RAI is a remote alarm indication. On detection of the RAI alarm, the remote NE sets the L bit of the control word to 0 and the M field of the control word to 10. When receiving the packet in which the L bit is 0 and the M field is 10, the local NE reports the CESPW_OPPOSITE_RAI alarm.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 292

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


The services in the downstream direction of the remote NE are interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The remote NE detects the RAI alarm.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The remote NE detects the RAI alarm. 1. Clear the ALM_E1RAI alarm on the remote NE. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.42 CFCARD_FAILED
Description
The CFCARD_FAILED is an alarm indicating that the operation on the CF card fails.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the CFCARD_FAILED alarm occurs, the database cannot be backed up to the CF card or be restored from the CF card. This alarm may cause rollback of the package loading upgrade.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The CF card fails to be initialized. Cause 2: The file system of the CF card does not match. Cause 3: The system control and communication board is faulty, and the file system of the CF card fails to be created.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The CF card fails to be initialized. Cause 2: The file system of the CF card does not match.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 293

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Replace the CF card and check whether the alarm is cleared. If... Yes No Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 3.

Step 2 Cause 3: The system control and communication board is faulty, and the file system of the CF card fails to be created. 1. 2. Check whether the HARD_BAD alarm occurs on the system control and communication board. If yes, perform a cold reset on the system control and communication board. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared. If... Yes No ----End Then... End the alarm handling. Replace the system control and communication board.

Related Information
None.

A.3.43 CFCARD_OFFLINE
Description
The CFCARD_OFFLINE is an alarm indicating that the CF card is out of service.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the CFCARD_OFFLINE alarm occurs, the database cannot be backed up to the CF card or be restored from the CF card. This alarm may cause rollback of the package loading upgrade.

Possible Causes
l l l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Cause 1: The CF card is not inserted. Cause 2: The CF card is in poor contact with the system control and communication board. Cause 3: The CF card is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 294

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Cause 4: The system control and communication board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The CF card is not inserted. 1. Check whether the CF card is installed on the system control and communication board. If... No Yes Then... Install the CF card. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The CF card is in poor contact with the system control and communication board. 1. 2. Check whether the CF card is loosened. If yes, re-insert the CF card. Check whether the alarm is cleared. If... Yes No Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: The CF card is faulty. 1. 2. Replace the CF card. Check whether the alarm is cleared. If... Yes No Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 4.

Step 4 Cause 4: The system control and communication board is faulty. 1. 2. 3. Check whether the HARD_BAD alarm occurs on the system control and communication board. If yes, perform a cold reset on the system control and communication board. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared. If the alarm persists, replace the system control and communication board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.44 CHCS
Description
The CHCS is an alarm indicating the correctable cell error. When a correctable bit error is detected in the cell header, the CHCS alarm occurs.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 295

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the CHCS alarm occurs, the services are not affected. The alarm only indicates that some cells with a bit error are detected during cell delimitation at the ATM port.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: A few bit errors occur in the receive tunnel corresponding to the alarmed ATM port. Cause 2: The ATM physical-layer processing chip of the board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: A few bit errors occur in the receive tunnel corresponding to the alarmed ATM port. 1. 2. 3. On the NMS, check whether the receive tunnel reports any alarms about excessive bit errors, such as B1_SD, B2_SD, and B3_SD. On the NMS, check whether the service is looped. If yes, modify the service configuration to release the loop, and then check whether the alarm is cleared. Perform a cold reset on the board that reports the CHCS alarm and check whether the alarm is cleared. For details, see 8.7.1 Cold Reset. Optional: If the CHCS alarm persists after the cold reset, replace the alarmed board and check whether the alarm is cleared. For details, see 6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board.
NOTE

Step 2 Cause 2: The ATM physical-layer processing chip of the board is faulty. 1. 2.

Board replacement is not recommended because the alarm does not affect the services.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.45 CLK_NO_TRACE_MODE
Description
The CLK_NO_TRACE_MODE alarm indicates that a clock source is not in locked mode. This alarm is reported when the current clock does not trace any clock sources.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 296

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the clock mode. l 0x01: holdover l 0x02: free-run

Impact on the System


When the clock source is not in the locked mode, the system clock is not of high quality. Services may have bit errors when the clocks of the NEs are not synchronized. Pointer justification may occur in TDM services. If a base station traces a clock that is carried by an Ethernet service, an alarm indicating a large clock frequency deviation may occur.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The system clock source priority table is not configured. Cause 2: All the clock sources in the clock source priority table fail.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The system clock source priority table is not configured. 1. Configure the system clock source priority table. For details, see Configuring the Clock Sources.

Step 2 Cause 2: All the clock sources in the clock source priority table fail. 1. Troubleshoot the synchronization sources that are listed in the clock source priority table. If... The synchronization source is an external clock The synchronization source is a line clock The synchronization source is an IF clock
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Then... Handle the EXT_SYNC_LOS alarm. Handle the alarm that occurs on the line board. Handle the alarm that occurs on the IF board.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

297

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The synchronization source is a tributary clock The synchronization source is an Ethernet clock ----End

Then... Handle the alarm that occurs on the tributary board. Handle the alarm that occurs on the Ethernet board.

Related Information
None.

A.3.46 COMMUN_FAIL
Description
The COMMUN_FAIL is an alarm indicating the inter-board communication failure. This alarm is reported when the communication between a board and the SCC board is interrupted.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the port. The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicates the ID of the path on which the alarm is generated. Parameter 2 is always 0x00. Parameter 3 has the following meanings: l 0x03: inter-board Ethernet communication Parameter 4, Parameter 5 Parameters 4 and 5 are reserved, and their values are always 0xFF.

Impact on the System


The NE configuration cannot be delivered to the board or the board cannot work. Consequently, the services cannot be configured or the protection switching function is unavailable.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 298

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: A certain board is reset. Cause 2: A board and the backplane are connected improperly. Cause 3: The alarmed board is faulty. Cause 4: A slot is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: A certain board is reset. 1. 1. After you reset the board, the alarm disappears automatically. Remove and insert the alarmed board. For details, see 6.1 Removing a Board and 6.2 Inserting a Board. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared. If... The alarm disappears after the board is removed and inserted The alarm persists after the board is replaced. Step 3 Cause 3: The alarmed board is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board, and then check whether the alarm is cleared. For details, see 6 Part Replacement. If... The alarm disappears after the board is replaced The alarm persists after the board is replaced Step 4 Cause 3: A slot is faulty. 1. Contact Huawei engineers to handle the faulty slot.
TIP

Step 2 Cause 2: A board and the backplane are connected improperly.

Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Clear the alarm according to the solution for the alarm that is generated when a board is faulty.

Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Clear the alarm according to the solution for the alarm that is generated when a slot is faulty.

The slot becomes faulty due to broken pins or bent pins. Remove the board, and use a torch to check whether any pins are broken or bent.

2.

If a vacant slot is available, insert the board in the vacant slot, and then update the data on the NMS so that the board can work normally.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.47 CONFIG_NOSUPPORT
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 299

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Description
The CONFIG_NOSUPPORT is an alarm indicating that the configuration is not supported. This alarm is reported if the ODU detects that the specified parameters do not meet the requirements of the ODU.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates that the configuration data does not meet the requirements. l 0x01: The frequency is set incorrectly. l 0x02: The T/R spacing is set incorrectly. l 0x03: The transmit power is set incorrectly. l 0x04: The ATPC threshold is set incorrectly. l 0x05: The bandwidth is set incorrectly. l 0x06: The modulation mode is set incorrectly.

Impact on the System


When the CONFIG_NOSUPPORT alarm occurs, the ODU fails to work normally. If the equipment is configured with the 1+1 FD protection, the active ODU generates the CONFIG_NOSUPPORT alarm. In this case, the IF 1+1 protection switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The type and configuration parameters of the ODU do not match the requirements. Cause 2: The AM parameters are incorrectly changed. (This cause can be verified only when Parameter 1 is 0x03.)
NOTE

Perform the handling procedure of Cause 2 if the following conditions are met: The AM function is enabled on the radio link; the transmit power configured for the ODU is lower than the maximum rated power in AM guaranteed capacity mode.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The type and configuration parameters of the ODU do not match the requirements.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 300

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Determine the parameter that does not meet the requirement according to the alarm parameter. Then, handle the fault accordingly. If... Then...

The alarm parameter takes a value from Perform the operation described in Step 0x01 to 0x03 1.2. The alarm parameter takes a value from Perform the operation described in Step 0x04 to 0x06 1.3. 2. Check whether the parameters of the ODU interface meet the requirements of network planning. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. If... The parameters meet the requirements of network planning The parameters do not meet the requirements of network planning 3. Then... Use the ODU of the proper model. Modify the ODU interface parameters.

Check whether the parameters of the IF interface meet the requirements of network planning. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. If... Then...

The parameters meet the requirements of Replace the IF board. network planning The parameters do not meet the requirements of network planning Modify the IF interface parameters. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link.

Step 2 Cause 2: The AM parameters are incorrectly changed. (This cause can be verified only when Parameter 1 is 0x03.) 1. Verify that the alarm is caused by incorrect change of AM parameters. Perform the handling procedure of Cause 2 if the following conditions are met: l The AM function is enabled on the radio link. l The transmit power configured for the ODU is lower than the maximum rated power in AM guaranteed capacity mode If... Then...

The conditions are met and the transmit Perform a cold reset for the alarmed power needs to be changed ODU. The conditions are met but the transmit Change the parameters of ODU interfaces power does not need to be changed to recover the original value of transmit power. ----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 301

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.48 DBMS_DELETE
Description
The DBMS_DELETE alarm indicates that a database is being deleted. This alarm is reported when a user runs a command to delete the database and the NE is in Deleting Database state.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None

Impact on the System


All data is lost if an NE is powered off or a system control board is cold reset within 48 hours.

Possible Causes
l Cause 1: A database is deleted.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management from the main menu. The NE Configuration Data Management window is displayed. Step 2 Select the alarmed NE, and click .

Step 3 Under NE Configuration Data Management, select the NE. Step 4 Choose Back up NE Data > Back up Database to SCC. ----End

Related Information
None

A.3.49 DBMS_ERROR
Description
The DBMS_ERROR is an alarm indicating that errors occur in the processing of the system database.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 302

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the DBMS_ERROR alarm occurs, it indicates that errors occur in the system database processing. The system configuration may be lost. As a result, the failure indication is returned for certain query and setting commands, and certain system functions cannot work.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The database processing fails or the database is damaged. Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The database processing fails or the database is damaged. 1. Reset the system control board. If... The alarm is cleared after the board is reset The alarm persists after the board is reset Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty. 1. 6.9 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board. Then... End the fault handling. Ensure that the system control board is normal.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.50 DBMS_PROTECT_MODE
Description
The DBMS_PROTECT_MODE is an alarm indicating that the system database is in protection mode.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 303

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, it indicates that errors occur in the system database processing and the system configuration may be lost. As a result, the failure indication is returned for some query and setting commands, and some system functions are unavailable.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The database enters the protection mode due to frequent resets of the NE software.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The database enters the protection mode due to frequent resets of the NE software. 1. 6.9 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.51 DCNSIZE_OVER
Description
The DCNSIZE_OVER is an alarm indicating an over-sized DCN network.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 304

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2

Meaning Indicate the size of the DCN network.

Impact on the System


l l Some NEs become unreachable to the NMS because DCN packets cannot be forwarded timely due to insufficient CPU resources. The DCN network is prone to route flapping and storms.

Possible Causes
Cause: The size of the DCN network crosses the preset threshold.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause: The size of the DCN network crosses the preset threshold. 1. Replan the DCN network based on actual networking conditions.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.52 DDN_LFA
Description
The DDN_LFA is an alarm indicating loss of basic frame alignment for framed E1 services. This alarm occurs when DDN side fails to receive the basic frame alignment signal for framed E1 services.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


E1 services on the alarmed board are unavailable.

Possible Causes
l l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Cause 1: The interconnected user equipment is faulty. Cause 2: The service frame format is configured incorrectly.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 305

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Cause 3: The alarmed board has hardware faults.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The interconnected user equipment is faulty. 1. Troubleshoot the interconnected user equipment. Step 2 Cause 2: The service frame format is configured incorrectly. 1. Set the E1 frame format of the local port to the same as that of the opposite port. Step 3 Cause 3: The alarmed board has hardware faults. 1. 2. Check whether the alarmed board also reports any hardware alarms, such as HARD_BAD. If yes, perform a cold reset on the alarmed board and check whether the DDN_LFA alarm is cleared.

CAUTION
If the service on the board is not protected, a cold reset on the board causes service interruptions. 3. If the alarm persists, replace the board.

----End

Related Information
Basic frame As defined in ITU-T G.704, a basic frame is an even frame with frame alignment sequence (FAS) or an odd frame with non frame alignment sequence (NFAS).

A.3.53 DOWN_E1_AIS
Description
The DOWN_E1_AIS is an alarm of the 2 Mbit/s downlink signal. This alarm occurs when the tributary board detects the 2 Mbit/s downlink signal of all 1s.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 306

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


When the DOWN_E1_AIS alarm occurs, the E1 signal in the alarmed path is unavailable.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The opposite NE transmits the E1_AIS alarm. Cause 2: On the local NE, the receive unit of the tributary board or the system control and cross-connect board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite NE transmits the E1_AIS alarm. 1. Check whether the opposite NE reports the UP_E1_AIS or T_ALOS alarm. If... Then...

The opposite NE reports the UP_E1_AIS Clear the alarm immediately. or T_ALOS alarm The opposite NE does not report the UP_E1_AIS or T_ALOS alarm Ensure that the board on the local NE is normal.

Step 2 Cause 2: On the local NE, the receive unit of the tributary board or the system control and crossconnect board is faulty. 1. Replace the board where the alarmed tributary unit is located. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared. If... Then...

The alarm is cleared The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. The alarm persists ----End Replace the system control and cross-connect board on the local NE.

Related Information
If EFP8 reports the alarm, the alarm parameters have the meanings listed inTable A-6. Table A-6 Alarm Parameters of EFP8 Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Meaning 0x01, indicates optical interface number. Indicates the number of the path.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

307

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.54 DROPRATIO_OVER
Description
The DROPRATIO_OVER alarm indicates that the number of lost packets crosses the threshold when queue congestion occurs at a port. This alarm is reported when the ratio of lost packets on an object under performance monitoring is higher than the expected ratio.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the direction in which traffic crosses the threshold. l 0x00: Traffic crosses the threshold in the receive direction. l 0x01: Traffic crosses the threshold in the transmit direction.

Impact on the System


Service packet loss occurs.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: Service configuration is incorrect. Cause 2: Actual traffic exceeds the configured port bandwidth or committed information rate (CIR).

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Service configuration is incorrect. 1. Check and reconfigure services according to the network plan.

Step 2 Cause 2: Actual traffic exceeds the configured port bandwidth or CIR. 1. 8.18 Querying Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet Ports. If traffic is large, check whether a network storm has occurred, and eliminate the source that illegally sends a large amount of data. If the port bandwidth is too low, follow instructions in Modifying the Port Policy to increase port bandwidth or expand the network.

2.

----End

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

308

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
If packet loss is indicated in the receive direction, check the method of handling red packets in the traffic classification configuration. If the method of handling red packets is non-discard, packets may not be actually lost in the receive direction.

A.3.55 E1_LOC
Description
The E1_LOC is an alarm indicating that the uplink 2M clock is lost. This alarm occurs when the tributary board fails to extract the clock from the E1 signal.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the E1_LOC occurs, the service is not affected.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The opposite NE is faulty. Cause 2: The wiring sequence of the cable is incorrect. Cause 3: The receive unit of the tributary board on the local NE is faulty. Cause 4: The input E1 signal has an abnormal waveform.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite NE is faulty. 1. 1. 1. 1. Rectify the fault on the opposite NE. Redo the cable. Replace the board where the line unit is located. Check whether any external interference causes the abnormal waveform of the E1 signal. If... There is the external interference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Step 2 Cause 2: The wiring sequence of the cable is incorrect. Step 3 Cause 3: The receive unit of the tributary board on the local NE is faulty. Step 4 Cause 4: The input E1 signal has an abnormal waveform.

Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling.


309

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... There is no external interference ----End

Then... Contact Huawei engineers.

Related Information
None.

A.3.56 E1_LOS
Description
The E1_LOS is an alarm indicating the loss of the E1 signal. This alarm occurs when the tributary board detects the uplink E1 signal of all 0s.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the E1_LOS alarm occurs, the E1 service is interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The cable is not connected or the cable is faulty. Cause 2: The opposite NE is faulty. Cause 3: The tributary board on the local NE is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The cable is not connected or the cable is faulty. 1. Check whether the cable is connected properly. If... The cable is not connected properly The cable is prepared incorrectly Step 2 Cause 2: The opposite NE is faulty. 1. Rectify the fault on the opposite NE. Step 3 Cause 3: The tributary board on the local NE is faulty.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 310

Then... Connect the cable properly. Redo the cable.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Replace the board where the tributary unit is located.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.57 ETH_APS_LOST
Description
The ETH_APS_LOST is an alarm indicating that the APS frame is lost. This alarm occurs when no APS frame is received from the protection channel.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the APS protection may fail.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The opposite NE is not configured with the APS protection. Cause 2: The APS protection group is deactivated. Cause 3: The settings of the APS protection group differ between the two ends. Cause 4: The service on the protection channel is interrupted.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite NE is not configured with the APS protection. 1. On the NMS, check whether the opposite NE is configured with the APS protection. For details, see Querying MPLS APS Status. If... The opposite NE is not configured with the APS protection The opposite NE is configured with the APS protection 2. 3.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Then... Go to the next step. Go to Cause 2.

Create a matching APS protection group on the opposite NE, and activate the APS protocol. Check whether the alarm clears. If the alarm persists, proceed to cause 4.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 311

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Step 2 Cause 2: The APS protection group is deactivated. 1. Check whether the APS protocol is activated at both ends. If... The APS protocol is deactivated at one end The APS protocol is activated at both ends 2. Then... Activate the APS protocol at the end. Go to Cause 3.

Check whether the alarm clears. If the alarm persists, go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: The settings of the APS protection group differ between the two ends. 1. On the NMS, check whether the settings of the APS protection group are the same at the two ends. If the settings differ between the two ends, change them to the same. Then, deactivate and activate the APS protection group at the two ends. Check whether the alarm clears. If the alarm persists, go to Cause 4.

2.

Step 4 Cause 4: The service on the protection channel is interrupted. 1. Check whether the protection channel reports an alarm related to signal loss or signal degrade, such as ETH_LOS. If yes, clear the alarm immediately.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.58 ETH_APS_PATH_MISMATCH
Description
The ETH_APS_PATH_MISMATCH is an alarm indicating that the working and protection paths of the APS protection group differ between the two ends. This alarm is reported when the working and protection paths of one APS protection group at one end are different from those at the other end.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, service protection fails.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 312

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The configured working and protection paths differ between the two ends. Cause 2: The physical link is connected incorrectly.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The configured working and protection paths differ between the two ends. 1. 2. 3. Check whether the APS settings at the two ends are the same. For details, see Querying MPLS APS Status. If the APS settings are different, change the settings to the same. Then, deactivate and activate the APS protection group at the two ends. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If the alarm persists, go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The physical link is connected incorrectly. 1. Check whether the fiber or cable is correctly connected between the two ends. If not, connect the fiber or cable properly.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.59 ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL
Description
The ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL is an alarm of a protection switching failure. This alarm is reported when the request signal in the transmitted Automatic Protection Switching (APS) frame is different from the bridge signal in the received APS frame and this symptom lasts for 50 ms.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, service protection fails.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The settings of the APS protection group differ between the two ends.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 313

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The settings of the APS protection group differ between the two ends. 1. Change the settings to the same. For details, see Creating an MPLS APS Protection Group. Then, deactivate and activate the APS protection group at the two ends.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.60 ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATCH
Description
The ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATCH is an alarm of protection scheme mismatch. This alarm is reported when the information in the received Automatic Protection Switching (APS) frame is different from the APS settings at the local end.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the specific difference. l 0x01: Indicates that the switching type is different. l 0x02: Indicates that the switching direction is different. l 0x03: Indicates that the revertive mode is different.

Impact on the System


This alarm may cause the APS protection failure, and therefore the service protection fails.

Possible Causes
l l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Cause 1: The switching type is different. Cause 2: The switching direction is different.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 314

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Cause 3: The revertive mode is different.

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the possible cause of the alarm according to the alarm parameters. 1. Change the settings of the APS protection group to the same at the two ends. For details, see Querying MPLS APS Status. Then, deactivate and activate the APS protection group at the two ends.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.61 ETH_CFM_LOC
Description
The ETH_CFM_LOC is an alarm indicating the loss of connectivity. This alarm occurs when the system fails to receive the CCM packet from the remote MEP in 3.5 connectivity check (CC) periods successively.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2, Parameter 3, Parameter 4 (Port) Parameter 5, Parameter 6 (VLAN ID) Parameter 7 (Direction) Meaning Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP. Indicates the direction of the local MEP. l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive. l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction. l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

315

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 8 (Level)

Meaning Indicates the MD level of the local MEP. l 0x00: consumer MEP level (low) l 0x01: consumer MEP level (medium) l 0x02: consumer MEP level (high) l 0x03: provider MEP level (low) l 0x04: provider MEP level (high) l 0x05: operator MEP level (low) l 0x06: operator MEP level (medium) l 0x07: operator MEP level (high)
NOTE Consumer indicates the user, provider indicates the supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.

Parameter 9, Parameter 10 (RMEPID)

Indicates the ID of the remote MEP.

Impact on the System


l l When the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm occurs, the LB and LT detection functions of Ethernet service OAM are unavailable. The service between the relevant standard MEPs may be interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The line between the local standard MEP and the remote standard MEP is interrupted. Cause 2: The Ethernet service in the maintenance association (MA) to which the local MEP belongs is faulty. Cause 3: Serious congestion occurs on the network.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line between the local standard MEP and the remote standard MEP is interrupted. 1. Check whether the physical links (such as network cables and fibers) between the standard MEPs are connected properly. If... The physical links are connected improperly The physical links are connected properly Then... Connect the physical links properly. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The Ethernet service in the maintenance association (MA) to which the local MEP belongs is faulty. 1. Check whether Ethernet service in the maintenance association (MA) to which the local MEP belongs is configured correctly.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

316

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If...

Then...

The service is configured incorrectly Modify the configuration of the service to ensure consistency at two ends. The service is configured correctly Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: Serious congestion occurs on the network. 1. Check the utilization of bandwidth. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.

----End

Related Information
The Table A-7 describes the meanings of the parameters in the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm reported by the EoS/EoPDH plane. Table A-7 Alarm Parameters Name Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Parameter 5 to Parameter 8 Parameter 9, Parameter 10 Parameter 11 to Parameter 14 Meaning MD MA MEP ID Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. When these parameters indicate the VCTRUNK ID, parameter values = (0x01 0x10) + 0x80. Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP. Indicates the direction of the local MEP. l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive. l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction. l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction. Parameter 18 Indicates the MD level of the local MEP. l 0x00: consumer MEP level (low) l 0x01: consumer MEP level (medium) l 0x02: consumer MEP level (high) l 0x03: provider MEP level (low) l 0x04: provider MEP level (high) l 0x05: operator MEP level (low) l 0x06: operator MEP level (medium) l 0x07: operator MEP level (high)
NOTE Consumer indicates the user, provider indicates the supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.

Parameter 15, Parameter 16 Parameter 17

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

317

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 19, Parameter 20

Meaning Indicates the ID of the remote MEP.


NOTE If the alarmed port is a VCTRUNK, these parameters are not supported.

A.3.62 ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
Description
The ETH_CFM_MISMERGE is an alarm indicating an incorrect connection. This alarm occurs when the system receives the CCM packet whose MA mismatches or whose priority is lower.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2, Parameter 3, Parameter 4 (Port) Parameter 5, Parameter 6 (VLAN ID) Parameter 7 (Direction) Meaning Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP. Indicates the direction of the local MEP. l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive. l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction. l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

318

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 8 (Level)

Meaning Indicates the MD level of the local MEP. l 0x00: consumer MEP level (low) l 0x01: consumer MEP level (medium) l 0x02: consumer MEP level (high) l 0x03: provider MEP level (low) l 0x04: provider MEP level (high) l 0x05: operator MEP level (low) l 0x06: operator MEP level (medium) l 0x07: operator MEP level (high)
NOTE Consumer indicates the user, provider indicates the supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.

Impact on the System


When the ETH_CFM_MISMERGE alarm occurs, the service between the relevant standard MEPs may be interrupted, and the data flow may be routed incorrectly.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The names of the maintenance domain and the maintenance alliance that the standard MEPs correspond to are inconsistent. Cause 2: The levels of the maintenance domains that the standard MEPs correspond to are different. Cause 3: The physical connection is incorrect.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The names of the maintenance domain and the maintenance alliance that the standard MEPs correspond to are inconsistent. 1. Check whether the names of the maintenance domain and the maintenance alliance that the standard MEPs correspond to are consistent. If... Then...

The names are inconsistent Set the other names of maintenance domain and maintenance alliance to ensure consistency at both ends. The names are consistent Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The levels of the maintenance domains that the standard MEPs correspond to are different. 1. Check whether the MD levels of the standard MEPs are the same. If... Then...

The levels are different Set the MD levels again to ensure consistency at both ends.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 319

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If...

Then...

The levels are the same Go to Cause 3. Step 3 Cause 3: The physical connection is incorrect. 1. Check the physical connection of the Ethernet service route and rectify the fault of the physical connection if any.

----End

Related Information
The Table A-8 describes the meanings of the parameters in the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm reported by the EoS/EoPDH plane. Table A-8 Alarm Parameters Name Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Parameter 5 to Parameter 8 Parameter 9, Parameter 10 Parameter 11 to Parameter 14 Meaning MD MA MEP ID Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. When these parameters indicate the VCTRUNK ID, parameter values = (0x01 0x10) + 0x80. Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP. Indicates the direction of the local MEP. l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive. l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction. l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction. Parameter 18 Indicates the MD level of the local MEP. l 0x00: consumer MEP level (low) l 0x01: consumer MEP level (medium) l 0x02: consumer MEP level (high) l 0x03: provider MEP level (low) l 0x04: provider MEP level (high) l 0x05: operator MEP level (low) l 0x06: operator MEP level (medium) l 0x07: operator MEP level (high)
NOTE Consumer indicates the user, provider indicates the supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.

Parameter 15, Parameter 16 Parameter 17

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

320

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.63 ETH_CFM_RDI
Description
The ETH_CFM_RDI is an alarm indicating the CCM packet with RDI received from the remote MEP. This alarm occurs when the system receives the CCM packet with RDI from the remote maintenance end point (MEP).

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2, Parameter 3, Parameter 4 (Port) Parameter 5, Parameter 6 (VLAN ID) Parameter 7 (Direction) Meaning Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP. Indicates the direction of the local MEP. l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive. l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction. l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction. Parameter 8 (Level) Indicates the MD level of the local MEP. l 0x00: consumer MEP level (low). l 0x01: consumer MEP level (medium). l 0x02: consumer MEP level (high). l 0x03: provider MEP level (low). l 0x04: provider MEP level (high). l 0x05: operator MEP level (low). l 0x06: operator MEP level (medium). l 0x07: operator MEP level (high).
NOTE Consumer indicates the user, provider indicates the supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.

Parameter 9, Parameter 10 (RMEPID)

Indicates the ID of the remote MEP.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

321

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


l l When the ETH_CFM_RDI alarm occurs, the loopback (LB) and link trace (LT) detection functions of Ethernet service OAM are unavailable. The service between the relevant standard MEPs may be interrupted.

Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The remote MEP fails to receive the correct CCM packet.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The remote MEP fails to receive the correct CCM packet. 1. 2. Determine the alarmed port according to the alarm parameter. Check whether the remote MEP that is connected to the port reports the ETH_CFM_MISMERGE, ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI, or ETH_CFM_LOC alarm.

----End

Related Information
The Table A-9 describes the meanings of the parameters in the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm reported by the EoS/EoPDH plane. Table A-9 Alarm Parameters Name Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Parameter 5 to Parameter 8 Parameter 9, Parameter 10 Parameter 11 to Parameter 14 Meaning MD MA MEP ID Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. When these parameters indicate the VCTRUNK ID, parameter values = (0x01 0x10) + 0x80. Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP. Indicates the direction of the local MEP. l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive. l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction. l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction.

Parameter 15, Parameter 16 Parameter 17

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

322

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 18

Meaning Indicates the MD level of the local MEP. l 0x00: consumer MEP level (low) l 0x01: consumer MEP level (medium) l 0x02: consumer MEP level (high) l 0x03: provider MEP level (low) l 0x04: provider MEP level (high) l 0x05: operator MEP level (low) l 0x06: operator MEP level (medium) l 0x07: operator MEP level (high)
NOTE Consumer indicates the user, provider indicates the supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.

Parameter 19, Parameter 20

Indicates the ID of the remote MEP.


NOTE If the alarmed port is a VCTRUNK, these parameters are not supported.

A.3.64 ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
Description
The ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI is an alarm indicating the errored frame. This alarm occurs when the system receives invalid CCM packets.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2, Parameter 3, Parameter 4 (Port) Parameter 5, Parameter 6 (VLAN ID)
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Meaning Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP.
323

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 7 (Direction)

Meaning Indicates the direction of the local MEP. l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive. l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction. l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction.

Parameter 8 (Level)

Indicates the MD level of the local MEP. l 0x00: consumer MEP level (low) l 0x01: consumer MEP level (medium) l 0x02: consumer MEP level (high) l 0x03: provider MEP level (low) l 0x04: provider MEP level (high) l 0x05: operator MEP level (low) l 0x06: operator MEP level (medium) l 0x07: operator MEP level (high)
NOTE Consumer indicates the user, provider indicates the supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.

Impact on the System


l l When the ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI alarm occurs, the LB and LT detection functions of Ethernet service OAM are unavailable. The service may become abnormal due to the loop.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: No remote MEP is configured. Cause 2: The configuration of the MEPs at both ends is inconsistent. For example, the connectivity check (CC) periods are different, and the IDs of the MEPs are in conflict. Cause 3: The service is looped back and the looped packet is received.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: No remote MEP is configured. 1. Check whether the remote MEP is configured. If not, configure the remote MEP first. Step 2 Cause 2: The configuration of the MEPs at both ends is inconsistent. For example, the connectivity check (CC) periods are different, and the IDs of the MEPs are in conflict. 1. Check whether the CC periods set at the MEPs are the same. If... Then...

The CC periods are different Change the CC periods to ensure consistency at both ends. The CC periods are the same Go to the next step. 2.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Check whether the IDs of the MEPs in the maintenance domain are in conflict.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 324

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The IDs are in conflict The IDs are not in conflict

Then... Change the conflicting IDs. Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: The service is looped back and the looped packet is received. 1. Check whether any loop exists at each IP port of the service trail. If yes, release the loop and clear the alarm.

----End

Related Information
The Table A-10 describes the meanings of the parameters in the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm reported by the EoS/EoPDH plane. Table A-10 Alarm Parameters Name Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Parameter 5 to Parameter 8 Parameter 9, Parameter 10 Parameter 11 to Parameter 14 Meaning MD MA MEP ID Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. When these parameters indicate the VCTRUNK ID, parameter values = (0x01 0x10) + 0x80. Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP. Indicates the direction of the local MEP. l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive. l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction. l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction. Parameter 18 Indicates the MD level of the local MEP. l 0x00: consumer MEP level (low) l 0x01: consumer MEP level (medium) l 0x02: consumer MEP level (high) l 0x03: provider MEP level (low) l 0x04: provider MEP level (high) l 0x05: operator MEP level (low) l 0x06: operator MEP level (medium) l 0x07: operator MEP level (high)
NOTE Consumer indicates the user, provider indicates the supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.

Parameter 15, Parameter 16 Parameter 17

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

325

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.65 ETH_EFM_DF
Description
The ETH_EFM_DF is an alarm indicating negotiation failure. This alarm occurs when the pointto-point OAM protocol negotiation fails at the Ethernet port.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning

Parameter 1 Indicates the reason why the negotiation fails. l 0x01: The local link is faulty. l 0x02: The local end fails to receive any OAM packets in a specified period. l 0x03: The OAM settings of the opposite end do not meet the requirements of the local end. l 0x04: The OAM settings of the local end do not meet the requirements of the opposite end.

Impact on the System


When the ETH_EFM_DF alarm occurs, the service at the alarmed port may be interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The physical port of the local end is faulty. Cause 2: The point to point OAM protocol is not enabled at the opposite end. Cause 3: The OAM configuration at both ends is inconsistent.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The physical port of the local end is faulty. 1. Check whether the physical port is faulty. If yes, replace the board where the Ethernet port is located.

Step 2 Cause 2: The point to point OAM protocol is not enabled at the opposite end.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 326

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1. 1.

Enable the point to point OAM protocol at the opposite end. Reconfigure the point to point OAM protocol and ensure the consistency at both ends.

Step 3 Cause 3: The OAM configuration at both ends is inconsistent.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.66 ETH_EFM_EVENT
Description
The ETH_EFM_EVENT is an alarm indicating the performance event reported on the opposite NE. This alarm occurs when the local end receives the link error indication packet (OAMPDUM) from the opposite end.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the type of the link event. l 0x01: errored symbol period. l 0x02: errored frame. l 0x03: errored frame period. l 0x04: errored frame seconds summary.

Impact on the System


When the ETH_EFM_EVENT alarm occurs, the service at the alarmed port may be interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Cause 1: The physical port at the local end is faulty. Cause 2: The equipment at the opposite end is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 327

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The physical port at the local end is faulty. 1. Check whether the physical port is faulty. If yes, replace the board where the Ethernet port is located. Rectify the fault of the equipment at the opposite end.

Step 2 Cause 2: The equipment at the opposite end is faulty. 1. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.67 ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK
Description
The ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK is an alarm indicating the loopback. This alarm occurs when the local end initiates a loopback or responds to a loopback request from the opposite end.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the state of the loopback. l 0x01: The local end initiates a loopback. l 0x02: The local end responds to a loop request from the opposite end.

Impact on the System


When the ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK alarm occurs, the service at the alarmed port is looped back.

Possible Causes
l l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Cause 1: The local end initiates a loopback. Cause 2: The opposite end initiates a loopback.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 328

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local end initiates a loopback. 1. According to the alarm parameter, it is determined that the local end initiates a loopback. Determine the causes of the loopback initiated at the local end and release the loopback as soon as possible.

Step 2 Cause 2: The opposite end initiates a loopback. 1. According to the alarm parameter, it is determined that the opposite end initiates a loopback. Determine the causes of the loopback initiated at the opposite port and release the loopback as soon as possible.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.68 ETH_EFM_REMFAULT
Description
The ETH_EFM_REMFAULT is an alarm indicating the fault on the opposite NE. This alarm occurs when the local end receives the fault indication packet (OAMPDUM) from the opposite end.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the fault type at the opposite end. l 0x01: link fault. l 0x02: dying gasp. l 0x03: critical event.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

329

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


When the ETH_EFM_REMFAULT alarm occurs, the service at the alarmed port may be interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The opposite NE is reset. Cause 2: The opposite NE is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite NE is reset. 1. Check whether the opposite NE is reset frequently. If... The opposite NE is reset frequently Then... Rectify the fault on the opposite NE.

The opposite NE is not reset frequently Reset the opposite NE, and the alarm is cleared. Step 2 Cause 2: The opposite NE is faulty. 1. Rectify the fault on the opposite NE.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.69 ETH_LOS
Description
The ETH_LOS is an alarm indicating the loss of Ethernet port connection.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the ETH_LOS alarm occurs, the service at the alarmed port is interrupted.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 330

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The negotiation fails because the transmit port and receive port work in different modes. Cause 2: The cable or fiber is faulty. Cause 3: The local NE is faulty. Cause 4: The opposite NE is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The negotiation fails because the transmit port and receive port work in different modes. 1. Check whether the transmit port and receive port work in the same mode. If... Then...

The transmit port and receive port work Correctly set the working modes of the in different modes transmit port and receive port. The transmit port and receive port work Go to Cause 2. in the same mode Step 2 Cause 2: The cable or fiber is faulty. 1. Check the network cable or fiber jumper connected to the alarmed port. If... The network cable is loose or damaged Then... Connect the network cable properly or replace the damaged network cable.

The connector of the fiber jumper is dirty Clean the connector. The connector or fiber is damaged The connection is normal Step 3 Cause 3: The local NE is faulty. 1. Check whether any fault occurs on the alarmed port. If... The equipment is faulty The equipment is normal Step 4 Cause 4: The opposite NE is faulty. 1. 2. Check whether any fault occurs on the equipment interconnected with the alarmed port. Rectify the fault. Then... Replace the alarmed board on the local NE. Go to Cause 4. Insert the connector properly or replace the damaged fiber jumper. Go to Cause 3.

----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 331

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.70 ETH_NO_FLOW
Description
The ETH_NO_FLOW is an alarm indicating that the Ethernet port has no flow. This alarm is reported when an enabled Ethernet port is in link up state but has no flow.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the MAC port number.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the path ID. Parameter 2 indicates the most significant bits and the value is always 0x00. Parameter 3 indicates the least significant bits and the value is always 0x01. Parameter 4 Indicates the direction in which the flow is unavailable. l 0x00: Rx direction. l 0x01: Tx direction.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, it indicates that the alarmed port has no flow.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The port is enabled and in link up state, but is configured with no service. Cause 2: The port is enabled and in link up state, but does not transmit any packet due to the service fault at the local end. Cause 3: The port is enabled and in link up state, but does not receive any packet due to the service fault at the remote end.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

332

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the MAC port number, alarmed board, and cause according to the parameters. Step 2 Cause 1: No services are configured. 1. Configure the Ethernet service.

Step 3 Cause 2: No services are available. If... No services are available in the transmit direction No services are available in the receive direction ----End Then... Check whether the service is normal at the local end. Check whether the service is normal at the remote end.

Related Information
None.

A.3.71 ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FAIL
Description
The ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FAIL alarm indicates a discovery failure when the point-to-point ETH-OAM function is enabled. This alarm occurs when the OAM function is enabled at a port of a board and the negotiation between the port and the opposite equipment fails.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 The values are always 0x00 0x01.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

333

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 4

Meaning Indicates the reason why the negotiation fails. l 0x01: A fault occurs at the local receive link. l 0x02: The local end fails to transmit OAM packets. l 0x03: The OAM packets from the opposite end are not received. l 0x04: The OAM configuration of the opposite end does not meet the requirements of the local end. l 0x05: The OAM configuration of the local end does not meet the requirements of the opposite end. l 0x06-0xff: other unknown reasons.

Impact on the System


The OAM function based on IEEE 802.3ah is unavailable.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The physical port of the local end is faulty. Cause 2: The P2P OAM protocol is not enabled at the opposite end. Cause 3: The OAM configuration at both ends is inconsistent.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The physical port of the local end is faulty. 1. 1. Check whether the physical port is faulty. If yes, replace the alarmed board. Enable the P2P OAM protocol at the opposite end. For details, see Enabling the OAM Auto-Discovery Function. Reconfigure the P2P OAM protocol and ensure the consistency at both ends. For details, see Enabling the OAM Auto-Discovery Function. Step 2 Cause 2: The P2P OAM protocol is not enabled at the opposite end.

Step 3 Cause 3: The OAM configuration at both ends is inconsistent. 1.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.72 ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FAULT
Description
The ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FAULT is an alarm indicating that the point-to-point Ethernet OAM detects a critical fault at the remote end. This alarm occurs when a port with the OAM function enabled receives the OAM packets that contain critical fault information from the opposite end.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 334

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 The values are always 0x00 0x01. Parameter 4 Indicates the type of the fault. l 0x01: A link fault occurs at the port of the opposite end. l 0x02: Irrecoverable problems such as the power failure occur at the opposite end. l 0x03-0xff: other faults.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the services on the link may be interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: A link fault occurs at the remote MEP. Cause 2: Irrecoverable problems such as power failure occur at the remote MEP. Cause 3: Other faults occur at the remote MEP.

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the fault type according to Parameter 4. If... The value of Parameter 4 is 0x01 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x02 Parameter 4 is a value from 0x03 to 0xff. Step 2 Cause 1: A link fault occurs at the remote MEP. 1.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Then... Go to Cause 1. Go to Cause 2. Go to Cause 3.

Handle the ETH_LOS alarm at the remote port.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 335

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Step 3 Cause 2: Irrecoverable problems such as power failure occur at the remote MEP. 1. Handle the problems such as power failure at the remote MEP, and recover the power supply to the remote MEP.

Step 4 Cause 3: Other faults occur at the remote MEP. 1. Contact Huawei technical support engineers.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.73 ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP
Description
The ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP is an alarm indicating that a remote loopback is initiated when the point-to-point Ethernet OAM function is enabled. This alarm occurs when the local equipment initiates a remote loopback or responds to the remote loopback initiated by the opposite equipment.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Parameter 4 Meaning Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. The values are always 0x00 0x01. l 0x01: The loopback is initiated. l 0x02: The loopback is responded.

Impact on the System


The services are looped back between the local equipment and the opposite equipment. The services and other protocol packets are interrupted.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 336

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The local end issues a loopback command and the opposite end responds to the command. Cause 2: The opposite end issues a loopback command and the local end responds to the command.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the alarm on the NMS and determine the type of loopback according to the alarm parameters. If... The value of Parameter 4 is 0x01 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x02 Then... Go to Cause 1. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 1: The local end issues a loopback command and the opposite end responds to the command. 1. Determine the causes of the loopback at the local end and release the loopback. Step 3 Cause 2: The opposite end issues a loopback command and the local end responds to the command. 1. Determine the causes of the loopback at the opposite end and release the loopback. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.74 ETHOAM_RMT_SD
Description
The ETHOAM_RMT_SD alarm indicates that the point-to-point Ethernet-OAM detects the degradation of remote Ethernet performance. This alarm occurs when a port with the OAM function enabled receives link event notification packets from the opposite end.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 337

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Parameter 4

Meaning Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. The values are always 0x00 0x01. Indicates the type of the received link event. l 0x01: errored frame event l 0x02: errored frame period event l 0x03: errored frame second event

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the performance of services degrades.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The link event notification function is enabled at the opposite end. Cause 2: The link performance thresholds of the opposite end are inappropriate. Cause 3: The link performance deteriorates.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The link event notification function is enabled at the opposite end. 1. Check whether the link event notification function is enabled at the opposite end. If... If yes If not Then... Disable the link event notification function at the opposite end. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The link performance thresholds of the opposite end are inappropriate. 1. Check whether the link performance thresholds of the opposite end are appropriate. If... If not If yes Then... Set the thresholds to appropriate values. Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: The link performance deteriorates. 1. Improve the link performance at the opposite end so that the opposite end does not send any link event notification packet to the local end. Then, the alarm at the local end is cleared automatically.

----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 338

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.75 ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
Description
The ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP is an alarm indicating the loopback of the MAC port that runs the point-to-point OAM protocol. This alarm occurs when the MAC port of a board receives the OAM protocol packet sent by the port itself or the board after the loop detection function is enabled.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Environmental alarms

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the loopback type. l 0x01: selfloop of the port. l 0x02: selfloop of the board.

Impact on the System


When the ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP alarm occurs, a network storm may occur due to the loopback.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The cable connected to the port is self-looped, or the port is connected to a LAN that has a loopback, or the PHY/MAC loopback is manually configured at the port. Cause 2: Two ports of the board are connected through cables or two ports of the board are connected to the same LAN.

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the loopback type according to Parameter 1, and then handle the loopback accordingly. If... The value of Parameter 1 is 0x01
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Then... Go to Cause 1.
339

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The value of Parameter 1 is 0x02

Then... Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 1: The cable connected to the port is self-looped, or the port is connected to a LAN that has a loopback, or the PHY/MAC loopback is manually configured at the port. If... The PHY/MAC loopback is manually configured at the port Then... Manually release the PHY/MAC loopback (or wait five minutes for the automatic release by the NE if the automatic loopback release function is enabled on the NE). Then, the selfloop is released. Connect the cable properly to release the selfloop. Release the loopback on the LAN, or break the connection between the port and the LAN, to release the selfloop.

The cable connected to the port is selflooped The port is connected to a LAN that has a loopback

Step 3 Cause 2: Two ports of the board are connected through cables or two ports of the board are connected to the same LAN. 1. Check whether two ports of the board are connected through cables or whether two ports of the board are connected to the same LAN. If... The two ports are connected through cables Then... Disconnect the cables to release the selfloop.

The two ports are connected to the same Break the connection between a port and the network LAN to release the selfloop. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.76 ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_LOOP
Description
The ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_LOOP alarm indicates that a VCTRUNK port is looped back when the point-to-point Ethernet OAM function is enabled. This alarm occurs when the loopback detection function is enabled and the VCTRUNK port receives the OAM protocol packets transmitted by the port itself or the board where the VCTRUNK port resides.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

340

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Environment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the loopback type. l 0x01: The port is self-looped. l 0x02: The board is self-looped. l 0x03-0xff: unknown types.

Impact on the System


If the function of automatic shutdown in the case of a selfloop is enabled at the alarmed port, the services at the alarmed port are interrupted. Otherwise, a network storm may occur.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: A loopback occurs on the lines connected to one VCTRUNK. Cause 2: The lines connected to two VCTRUNKs on the same board are interconnected.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the alarm on the NMS and determine the type of loopback according to the alarm parameters. If... The value of Parameter 4 is 0x01 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x02 Step 2 Cause 1: The port is self-looped. 1. 2. Release the loopback at the port. Reconfigure the lines connected to the VCTRUNK port and ensure that the port is not selflooped. Then... Go to Cause 1. Go to Cause 2.

Step 3 Cause 2: The board is self-looped.


Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 341

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Reconfigure the lines connected to the VCTRUNK ports and ensure that the lines connected to any two VCTRUNK ports on the same board are not interconnected.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.77 EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS
Description
The EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS is an alarm indicating the loss of periodic connectivity check (CC) packets. This alarm occurs when the sink MEP fails to receive CC packets from the same source MEP in a period (3.5 transmission periods of CC packets at the source MEP).

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Parameter 5 to Parameter 8 Parameter 9, Parameter 10 Meaning Indicates the ID of the remote MEP. Indicates the ID of the local MEP. Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. l PORT number, Parameter 9 is 0x00. l VCTRUNK number, Parameter 9 is 0x80. Parameter 11, Parameter 12 Parameter 13 Parameter 14 to Parameter 17 Parameter 18 - Parameter 21 Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP. Indicates the MD level of the local MEP. Indicates the ID of the remote MEP. Indicates the ID of the local MEP.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

342

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


A unidirectional connectivity failure occurs in the Ethernet service between two MEPs.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The line between two MEPs is interrupted. Cause 2: The Ethernet services in the MA to which the alarmed MEP belongs are faulty. Cause 3: The services between two MEPs are congested or interrupted.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line between two MEPs is interrupted. 1. Check whether the physical links (such as network cables or optical fibers) that carry services between the two MEPs are correctly connected. If... If not If yes Then... Re-connect the cables to rectify the faults on physical links. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The Ethernet services in the MA to which the alarmed MEP belongs are faulty. 1. Check whether the Ethernet services in the MA to which the alarmed MEP belongs are configured correctly. If... If not If yes Then... Modify the configuration to ensure consistency at both ends. Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: The services between two MEPs are congested or interrupted. 1. Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.78 EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNFLCT
Description
The EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNFLCT is an alarm indicating the conflict of MPIDs. This alarm occurs when two MEPs in one MD have the same maintenance point identity (MPID) and one MEP receives the packets from the other MEP.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

343

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Environment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Parameter 5, Parameter 6 Meaning Indicates the ID of the local MEP. Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. l PORT number, Parameter 9 is 0x00. l VCTRUNK number, Parameter 9 is 0x80. Parameter 7, Parameter 8 Parameter 9 Parameter 10 to Parameter 13 Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP. Indicates the MD level of the local MEP. Indicates the ID of the local MEP.

Impact on the System


MPIDs must be unique on a network. When this alarm occurs, the LB and LT functions are abnormal and OAM packets are received incorrectly.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: At least two MEPs in an MD have the same MPID.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: At least two MEPs in an MD have the same MPID. 1. 2. Check the alarm on the NMS and determine the associated MP ID according to the alarm parameters. Query the information about the MEP. Delete the incorrect MEPs and create MEPs with unique MP IDs.

----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 344

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.79 EXT_SYNC_LOS
Description
The EXT_SYNC_LOS is an alarm of the loss of the external clock source.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


l When the EXT_SYNC_LOS alarm occurs, if only the external clock source and internal clock source are configured in the clock source priority list, the NE traces the internal clock source after the external clock source is lost and enters the free-run state 24 hours later. If another valid clock source of higher priority and good quality is configured in the clock source priority list, however, the clock protection switching occurs.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The external clock source is configured in the clock source priority list, but the external clock source cannot be detected or become invalid.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The external clock source is configured in the clock source priority list, but the external clock source cannot be detected or become invalid. 1. Check whether the equipment that provides the external clock source is faulty. If... The equipment is faulty The equipment is normal 2. Then... Rectify the fault. Go to the next step.

Check whether the cable that connects the external clock source is normal. If... The cable is abnormal The cable is normal Then... Replace the cable. Replace the alarmed board.

----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 345

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.80 FAN_AGING
Description
The FAN_AGING is an alarm of the aged fan. This alarm occurs when the fan rotates at a speed lower than eighty percent of the nominal speed.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the number of the alarmed fan.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the temperature of the NE is too high and impacts the long-term operation of the NE.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The fan is aged.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The fan is aged. 1. Replace the fan. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.81 FAN_FAIL
Description
The FAN_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the fan is faulty.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 346

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the number of the fan.

Impact on the System


When the FAN_FAIL alarm occurs, the heat dissipation of the system is affected. After an alarm is reported, clear it immediately. Otherwise, services may be interrupted or equipment may be damaged. When a fan is faulty, perform the following operations: l l Replace the faulty fan with one that works properly within a period of 96 hours if the ambient temperature ranges from 0C to 40C . Replace the faulty fan with one that works properly within a period of 24 hours if the ambient temperature is higher than 40C .

When multiple fans are faulty, replace them immediately.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The board and the backplane are connected improperly. Cause 2: Fan failure occurs.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The board and the backplane are connected improperly. 1. Remove the fan board. Clean the dust on the fan and reinsert the fan board. If... The alarm is cleared after the board is removed and inserted The alarm persists after the board is removed and inserted Step 2 Cause 2: Fan failure occurs.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 347

Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 2.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Replace the alarmed fan board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.82 FCS_ERR
Description
The FCS_ERR is an alarm indicating the errors of frame check sequence (FCS). This alarm occurs when a board detects FCS errors in the received frames.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Meaning The value is always 0x01. Indicate the VCTRUNK number where the alarm occurs.

Impact on the System


When the FCS_ERR alarm occurs, if the encapsulation protocols or encapsulation parameters are inconsistent at both ends of Ethernet services, the services may have errors and even become interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Cause 1: The encapsulation protocols or encapsulation parameters are inconsistent at both ends of services. Cause 2: Service channels have errors. Cause 3: The alarmed board is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 348

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The encapsulation protocols or encapsulation parameters are inconsistent at both ends of services. 1. Check whether the encapsulation protocols or encapsulation parameters are consistent at both ends of services. If... The protocols are inconsistent The protocols are consistent 2. Then... Correct the configuration data. Go to the next step.

Check whether the encapsulation parameters are consistent at both ends of services. If... The parameters are inconsistent The parameters are consistent Then... Correct the configuration data. Go to the next step.

Step 2 Cause 2: Service channels have errors. 1. Check whether any error alarm or performance event occurs on the line board that carries the services. If... Yes No Then... Handle the alarm or performance event. Go to the next step.

Step 3 Cause 3: The alarmed board is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.83 FLOW_OVER
Description
The FLOW_OVER is an alarm indicating that the data flow received by the Ethernet port exceeds the threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Alarm Type Service alarm

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

349

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning

Parameter 1 Indicates the receive or transmit direction in which traffic crosses the specified threshold. l 0x00: the receive direction l 0x01: the transmit direction

Impact on the System


When the FLOW_OVER alarm occurs, the extra data may be discarded by the port.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The traffic threshold of the local port is very low. Cause 2: The opposite end transmits excessive data flow.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The traffic threshold of the local port is very low. 1. Increase the traffic threshold of the local port to a value that is lower than the rate of the local port.

Step 2 Cause 2: The opposite end transmits excessive data flow. 1. Configure the QoS policies at the opposite end to reduce the data flow that the opposite end transmits.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.84 HARD_BAD
Description
The HARD_BAD is an alarm indicating hardware errors.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

350

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 to Parameter 3 Meaning Indicate the internal faults detected by the board.

Impact on the System


The alarmed board fails to work. If the board is configured with the 1+1 protection, protection switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The board and the backplane are connected improperly. Cause 2: A certain board is faulty. Cause 3: The slot is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The board and backplane are connected improperly. 1. Remove and insert the alarmed board. For details, see 6.1 Removing a Board and 6.2 Inserting a Board. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared after the board is removed and inserted The alarm persists after the board is removed and inserted Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board, and then check whether the alarm is cleared. For details, see 6 Part Replacement. If... The alarm is cleared after the board is replaced
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Ensure that the board is normal.

Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling.


351

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The alarm persists after the board is replaced Step 3 Cause 3: The slot is faulty. 1.

Then... Ensure that the slot is normal.

Contact Huawei engineers to handle the faulty slot.


TIP

Generally, the slot becomes faulty due to the broken pin or bent pin. Remove the board, and use a torch to observe whether there is any broken pin or bent pin.

2.

If a vacant slot is available, insert the board in the vacant slot and add the board again. Then, the board can work normally.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.85 HP_CROSSTR
Description
The HP_CROSSTR is an alarm indicating that the higher order path error crosses the threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the performance event that the higher order path error crosses the preset threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the performance monitoring period: l 0x01: 15 minutes l 0x02: 24 hours

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

352

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 2, Parameter 3

Meaning Indicate the ID of a performance event that causes the alarm. l 0x30: HPBBE l 0x31: HPES l 0x32: HPSES l 0x33: HPFEBBE l 0x34: HPFEES l 0x35: HPFESES l 0x36: HPUAS l 0x37: HPCSES l 0x38: HPFECSES l 0x4c: HPFEUAS

Impact on the System


When the HP_CROSSTR alarm occurs, a large number of errors occur in the service, and the service may be interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The higher order path error crosses the preset threshold.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The higher order path error crosses the preset threshold. 1. Check the threshold crossing records to find out the performance event that the higher order path error crosses the preset threshold. For details, see 8.3.8 Browsing the Performance Event Threshold-Crossing Records. Handle the threshold-crossing performance event.

2.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.86 HP_LOM
Description
The HP_LOM is an alarm indicating the loss of the higher order path multiframe. This alarm occurs when the board detects that byte H4 is inconsistent with the expected multiframe sequence.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 353

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the HP_LOM alarm occurs, the service on the alarmed path is interrupted. If the services are configured with protection, protection switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The transmit unit of the opposite NE is faulty. Cause 2: The receive unit of the local NE is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The transmit unit of the opposite NE is faulty. 1. Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared. If... Then...

The alarm is cleared The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. The alarm persists Replace the system control, cross-connect, and timing board on the opposite NE.

Step 2 Cause 2: The receive unit of the local NE is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.87 HP_RDI
Description
The HP_RDI is an alarm indicating the higher order path remote receive failure. This alarm occurs when the board detects that bit 5 of byte G1 is 1.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

354

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the HP_RDI alarm occurs, the service on the local NE is not affected. The service received by the opposite NE, however, is interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates the higher order path remote receive failure.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates the higher order path remote receive failure. 1. Clear the alarms such as HP_LOM and B3_EXC that the AU-4 path reports on the opposite NE.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.88 HP_REI
Description
The HP_REI is an alarm indicating the higher order path remote error. This alarm occurs when the board detects that bits 1-4 of G1 take a value from 1 to 8.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Warning Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 355

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


The service on the local site is not affected. The service received by the opposite station, however, has errors.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates the higher order path remote errors.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates the higher order path remote receive failure. 1. Handle the HP_BBE performance event that the AU-4 path reports on the opposite NE.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.89 HP_SLM
Description
The HP_SLM is an alarm indicating the lower order path label mismatch. This alarm occurs when the board detects the C2 byte mismatch.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


None.

Possible Causes
l l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Cause 1: The C2 byte received by the local NE does not match with the C2 byte transmitted by the remote NE. Cause 2: Configuration data is incorrect.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 356

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The C2 byte received by the local NE does not match with the C2 byte transmitted by the remote NE. 1. Configure the same service type at the source and sink of the AU-4 path. For details, see Configuring Overhead Bytes.

Step 2 Cause 2: Configuration data is incorrect. 1. If the alarmed port is the SDH port that is interconnected with the ATM/Ethernet equipment, configure the service as VC-4 pass-through service. For details, see Creating CrossConnections of SNCP Services.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.90 HP_TIM
Description
The HP_TIM is an alarm indicating the higher order path trace identifier mismatch. This alarm occurs when the board detects the J1 byte mismatch.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


If the service is configured with the protection that considers the HP_TIM alarm as a trigger condition, the protection switching is triggered.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The receivable J1 byte on the local NE does not match with the J1 byte transmitted on the opposite NE. Cause 2: Configuration data is incorrect.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The receivable J1 byte on the local NE does not match with the J1 byte transmitted on the opposite NE.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 357

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Disable the receivable J1 byte on the local NE or set the receivable J1 byte on the local NE to the same as the transmitted J1 byte on the opposite NE. For details, see Configuring VC-4 POHs.

Step 2 Cause 2: Configuration data is incorrect. 1. If the alarmed port is the SDH port that is interconnected with the ATM/Ethernet equipment, configure the service as VC-4 pass-through service. For details, see Creating CrossConnections of SNCP Services or Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services. If... Then...

The alarm is cleared after the configuration The fault is rectified. End the alarm is changed handling. The alarm persists after the configuration is changed 2. Go to the next step.

Check whether the cross-connections are configured correctly at the intermediate nodes where the service travels. If not, reconfigure the cross-connections. For details, see Creating Cross-Connections of SNCP Services or Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.91 HP_UNEQ
Description
The HP_UNEQ is an alarm indicating the unequipped higher order path. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the C2 byte is 0.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the HP_UNEQ alarm occurs, the service in the alarmed AU-4 path is unavailable. If the service is configured with the protection that considers the alarm as a trigger condition, the protection switching is triggered.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 358

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The line port at the local NE is configured with services, but the corresponding line port at the opposite NE is not configured with services. Cause 2: Byte C2 is set to 0 at the opposite NE.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line port at the local NE is configured with services, but the corresponding line port at the opposite NE is not configured with services. 1. Configure line services on the opposite NE. For details, see Creating Cross-Connections of SNCP Services or Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services.

Step 2 Cause 2: Byte C2 is set to 0 at the opposite NE. 1. Change the setting of byte C2. For details, see Configuring VC-4 POHs.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.92 HPAD_CROSSTR
Description
The HPAD_CROSSTR is an alarm indicating that the higher order path adaptation performance crosses the threshold. This alarm occurs when a board detects that the performance event of TU pointer justification crosses the preset threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the performance monitoring period: l 0x01: 15 minutes l 0x02: 24 hours
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 359

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 2, Parameter 3

Meaning Indicate the ID of a performance event that causes the alarm. l 0xaa: TUPJCHIGH l 0xab: TUPJCLOW l 0xac: TUPJCNEW

Impact on the System


When the HPAD_CROSSTR alarm occurs, bit errors may occur in the service.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The performance event of TU pointer justification crosses the preset threshold.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The performance event of TU pointer justification crosses the preset threshold. 1. Check the threshold crossing records to find out the performance event of TU pointer justification that crosses the preset threshold. For details, see 8.3.8 Browsing the Performance Event Threshold-Crossing Records. Handle the threshold-crossing performance event.

2.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.93 IF_CABLE_OPEN
Description
The IF_CABLE_OPEN is an alarm indicating that the IF cable is open.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the IF_CABLE_OPEN alarm occurs, the service on the alarmed IF port is interrupted.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 360

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The IF cable is loose or faulty. Cause 2: The IF port on the IF board is damaged. Cause 3: The power module of the ODU is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The IF cable is loose or faulty. 1. Check whether the connector of the IF cable is loose or whether the connector is made properly. The connectors to be checked include the connector between the IF fiber jumper and the IF board, the connector between the IF fiber jumper and the IF cable, and the connector between the IF cable and the ODU. If... The connector is loose Then... Connect the connector tightly.

The connector is made improperly See the Installation Reference and make new connectors for the IF cable. None of the above 2. Go to the next step.

Check whether the surface of the IF fiber jumper and the IF cable is damaged. If... The cable does not meet the requirement The cable meets the requirement Then... Replace the cable with a qualified one. Go to Cause 2 or Cause 3.

Step 2 Cause 2: The IF port on the IF board is damaged. 1. 1. Replace the alarmed IF board. Replace the ODU connected to the alarmed IF board. Step 3 Cause 3: The power module of the ODU is faulty.

----End

Related Information
NOTE

When rectifying the faults of the IF cable, IF port, and ODU, you must turn off the ODU before the operation. You can turn on the ODU only after the operation is complete.

A.3.94 IF_INPWR_ABN
Description
The IF_INPWR_ABN is an alarm indicating that the power supplied by an IF board to an ODU is abnormal.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 361

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning l 0x01: Indicates that the input power of the ODU is too high. l 0x02: Indicates that the input power of the ODU is too low.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the services on the ODU are interrupted. If 1+1 protection is configured, this alarm also triggers 1+1 HSB switching.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The IF board is faulty. Cause 2: The IF cable is faulty. Cause 3: The ODU is faulty. Cause 4: The IF fiber jumper and the IF board are connected incorrectly.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The IF board is faulty. 1. Replace the IF board connected to the alarmed ODU. Step 2 Cause 2: The IF cable is faulty. 1. Check whether the connectors of the IF cable are loose or prepared incorrectly. The connectors to be checked include the connector between the IF fiber jumper and the IF board, the connector between the IF fiber jumper and the IF cable, and the connector between the IF cable and the ODU. If... Any of the connectors is loose Any of the connectors is prepared incorrectly All connectors are normal
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Then... Connect the connector tightly. See the Installation Reference and make new connectors for the IF cable. Go to the next step.
362

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

2.

Check whether the surface of the IF fiber jumper and the IF cable is damaged or deformed, and test the connectivity between the IF fiber jumper and the IF cable. For details, see Testing the Connectivity of the IF Cable. If... The IF cable is below standard The IF cable is up to standard Then... Replace the IF cable. The IF board or ODU may be faulty.

Step 3 Cause 3: The ODU is faulty. 1. 1. Replace the alarmed ODU. Connect the IF fiber jumper and the IF board correctly. Step 4 Cause 4: The IF fiber jumper and the IF board are connected incorrectly. ----End

Related Information
The logical slot ID of the ODU is obtained by adding 50 to the slot ID of the IF board connected to the ODU.

A.3.95 IF_MODE_UNSUPPORTED
Description
The IF_MODE_UNSUPPORTED is an alarm indicating that the configured IF working mode is not supported. This alarm occurs if the board is not loaded with the FPGA file that supports the configured IF working mode.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

363

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 1

Meaning Indicates the ID of the FPGA file that is loaded to the board. l 0x01 indicates that FPGA file 250 is loaded. l 0x02 indicates that FPGA file 002 is loaded.

Impact on the System


When the IF_MODE_UNSUPPORTED alarm occurs, the service on the alarmed IF port is interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The board is not loaded with the FPGA file that supports the configured IF working mode, or the FPGA file that supports the configured IF working mode is damaged.

Procedure
l Cause 1: The board is not loaded with the FPGA file that supports the configured IF working mode, or the FPGA file that supports the configured IF working mode is damaged. 1. ----End Contact Huawei engineers to upgrade the software and the FPGA file.

Related Information
None.

A.3.96 IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN
Description
The IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN is an alarm indicating that the IMA group at the local end fails. This alarm occurs when the IMA group is in non-Active state on the local NE or when the activated links of the IMA group on the local NE are less than the minimum number.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, all links of the alarmed IMA group are unavailable.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 364

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The IMA links on the local NE are faulty. Cause 2: The activated links of the IMA group on the local NE are less than the minimum number.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The IMA links on the local NE are faulty. 1. 2. Check whether the T_ALOS alarm is reported at the E1 port. If yes, clear this alarm. Check whether the IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN alarm is cleared. If the alarm persists, configure the related services at other ports or replace the related board.

Step 2 Cause 2: The activated links of the IMA group on the local NE are less than the minimum number. If... Then...

The ALM_IMA_LIF alarm occurs Clear the ALM_IMA_LIF alarm immediately. Activate the links of the IMA group on the local NE. No other alarm occurs Reconfigure the links of the IMA group on the local NE.

When the number of activated links of the IMA group reaches the minimum number, the alarm clears automatically. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.97 IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN
Description
The IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN is an alarm indicating that the IMA group at the remote end fails. This alarm occurs when the IMA group is in non-Active state on the remote NE or when the activated links of the IMA group on the remote NE are less than the minimum number.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the ports of the IMA group are congested and services have bit errors.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 365

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The IMA links on the remote NE are faulty. Cause 2: The activated links of the IMA group on the remote NE are less than the minimum number.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The IMA links on the remote NE are faulty. 1. 2. Check whether the T_ALOS alarm is reported at the E1 port. If yes, clear this alarm. Check whether the IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN alarm is cleared. If the alarm persists, configure the related services at other ports or replace the related board.

Step 2 Cause 2: The activated links of the IMA group on the remote NE are less than the minimum number. If... Then...

The ALM_IMA_LIF alarm occurs Clear the ALM_IMA_LIF alarm immediately. Activate the links of the IMA group on the opposite NE. No other alarm occurs Reconfigure the links of the IMA group on the remote NE.

When the number of activated links of the IMA group reaches the minimum number, the alarm clears automatically. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.98 IMA_TXCLK_MISMATCH
Description
The IMA_TXCLK_MISMATCH is an alarm indicating that the transmit clock modes of an IMA group are inconsistent at the two ends.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 366

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


The IMA_TXCLK_MISMATCH alarm may cause loss of ATM cells.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The transmit clock modes of an IMA group are inconsistent at the two ends.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The transmit clock modes of an IMA group are inconsistent at the two ends. 1. 2. Check the alarm information and determine the NE, board, and ATM trunk related to the alarm. Modify the Clock Mode parameter of the alarmed ATM trunk to the same value as that of the opposite end. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared.

----End

Related Information
The Clock Mode parameter can be set to two modes. l l CTC mode: Common transmit clock mode. In CTC mode, all transmit clocks of the links in an IMA group are from the same clock source. ITC mode: Independent transmit clock mode. In ITC mode, the transmit clocks of the links in an IMA group are from different clock sources. When the IMA group is set to the line clock mode, the ITC mode is recommended.

A.3.99 IN_PWR_ABN
Description
The IN_PWR_ABN is an alarm indicating that the input optical power is abnormal.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the IN_PWR_ABN alarm occurs, the service at the alarmed optical interface has errors and even becomes unavailable.

Possible Causes
l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Cause 1: The transmit power of the opposite NE is over high or over low.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 367

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

l l l

Cause 2: The model of the selected optical module is incorrect. Cause 3: The optical module at the receive end is faulty. Cause 4: The fiber performance degrades.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The transmit power of the opposite NE is over high or over low. 1. Browse current performance events, and query the performance event of the transmit optical power on the opposite NE. If... Then...

The transmit optical power does not meet Replace the optical module. the requirement The transmit optical power is over high Add a proper attenuator to reduce the receive optical power.

Step 2 Cause 2: The model of the selected optical module is incorrect. 1. Query the board manufacturing information report, and check whether the models of the SFP optical modules used at both ends are correct. If... The models are incorrect The models are correct Then... Replace the optical module. Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: The optical module at the receive end is faulty. 1. Use the optical power meter to test the receive optical power, and check whether the receive optical power meets the requirement. If yes, contact Huawei engineers to replace the optical module.

Step 4 Cause 4: The fiber performance degrades. If... Then...

The connector of the fiber jumper is dirty Clean fiber connectors. The connector or fiber is damaged Insert the connector properly or replace the damaged fiber jumper.

----End

Related Information
The following table describes the meanings of the parameters in the IN_PWR_ABN alarm reported by the EMS6. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the port number.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

368

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 2, Parameter 3

Meaning The value of Parameter 2 is always 0x00, and the value of Parameter 3 is always 0x01. The two parameters indicate the path ID. Reserved. The values are always 0xFF.

Parameter 4, Parameter 5

A.3.100 IN_PWR_HIGH
Description
The IN_PWR_HIGH is an alarm indicating that the input optical power is over high.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the IN_PWR_HIGH alarm occurs, the service at the alarmed optical interface has errors.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The transmit power of the opposite NE is over high. Cause 2: The model of the selected optical module is incorrect. Cause 3: The optical module at the receive end is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The transmit power of the opposite site is over high. 1. Browse current performance events, and query the performance event of the transmit optical power on the opposite NE. If... Then...

The transmit optical power does not meet Contact Huawei engineers to replace the the requirement optical module. The transmit optical power meets the requirement Add a proper attenuator to reduce the receive optical power.

Step 2 Cause 2: The model of the selected optical module is incorrect.


Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 369

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Query the board manufacturing information report, and check whether the models of the SFP optical modules used at both ends are correct. If... The models are incorrect The models are correct Then... Contact Huawei engineers to replace the optical module. Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: The optical module at the receive end is faulty. 1. Use the optical power meter to test the receive optical power, and check whether the receive optical power meets the requirement. If yes, contact Huawei engineers to replace the optical module.

----End

Related Information
The optical power threshold set for the IN_PWR_HIGH alarm is lower than the overload point. SDH Interface Performance.

A.3.101 IN_PWR_LOW
Description
The IN_PWR_LOW is an alarm indicating that the input optical power is over low.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the IN_PWR_LOW alarm occurs, the service at the alarmed optical interface has errors.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The transmit power of the opposite NE is over low. Cause 2: The model of the selected optical module is incorrect. Cause 3: The optical module at the receive end is faulty. Cause 4: The fiber performance degrades.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The transmit power of the opposite NE is over low.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 370

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Browse current performance events, and query the performance event of the transmit optical power on the opposite NE. If... Then...

The transmit optical power does not meet Contact Huawei engineers to replace the the requirement optical module. The transmit optical power meets the requirement Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The model of the selected optical module is incorrect. 1. Query the board manufacturing information report, and check whether the models of the SFP optical modules used at both ends are correct. If... The models are incorrect The models are correct Then... Contact Huawei engineers to replace the optical module. Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: The optical module at the receive end is faulty. 1. Use the optical power meter to test the receive optical power, and check whether the receive optical power meets the requirement. If... The receive optical power meets the requirement Then... Contact Huawei engineers to replace the optical module.

The receive optical power does not meet the Go to Cause 4. requirement Step 4 Cause 4: The fiber performance degrades. 1. If... The alarm is cleared after the connector is cleaned The alarm persists after the connector is cleaned ----End Clean fiber connectors and adapters. Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Replace the fiber.

Related Information
The optical power threshold set for the IN_PWR_LOW alarm is higher than the sensitivity point. SDH Interface Performance.

A.3.102 J0_MM
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 371

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Description
The J0_MM is an alarm indicating the trace identifier mismatch. This alarm occurs when the board detects the J0 byte mismatch.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


None.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The receivable J0 byte on the local NE does not match the transmitted J0 byte on the opposite NE.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The receivable J0 byte on the local NE does not match the transmitted J0 byte on the opposite NE. 1. Disable the receivable J0 byte on the local NE. For details, see Configuring RSOHs.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.103 K1_K2_M
Description
The K1_K2_M is an alarm indicating the K1/K2 byte mismatch. This alarm occurs when the board detects inconsistent channel numbers that the transmitted K1 byte (bits 5-8) and the received K2 byte (bits 1-4) indicate.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Alarm Type Communication alarm

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

372

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning l 0x01: linear MS protection. l 0x02: ring MS protection. Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1.

Parameter 1 Indicates the protection group type.

Impact on the System


When the K1_K2_M alarm occurs, the MSP protocol may fail and therefore the protection switching may fail.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The switching modes configured at both ends are single-ended switching and dualended switching separately. Cause 2: The fiber connection is incorrect. Cause 3: A certain board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The switching modes configured at both ends are single-ended switching and dualended switching separately. 1. Check whether the switching modes at both ends are the same. If... The switching modes are different The switching modes are the same Step 2 Cause 2: The fiber connection is incorrect. 1. Check whether the fiber connection is correct. For example, the fiber at the receive or transmit port may be incorrectly connected, or disconnected. If... The fiber connection is incorrect The connection is correct Step 3 Cause 3: A certain board is faulty. 1. Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 373

Then... Configure the switching modes as the same. Go to Cause 2.

Then... Connect the fiber properly. Go to Cause 3.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists ----End

Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Replace the alarmed board.

Related Information
None.

A.3.104 K2_M
Description
The K2_M is an alarm indicating the K2 byte mismatch. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the protection mode indicated by the received K2 (bit 5) is different from the protection mode of the NE.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning l 0x01: linear MS protection. l 0x02: ring MS protection. Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1.

Parameter 1 Indicates the protection group type.

Impact on the System


When the K2_M alarm occurs, the MSP protocol may fail and therefore the protection switching may fail.

Possible Causes
l Cause 1: Two NEs of the linear MSP group are configured with different protection modes (1+1 or 1:N).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 374

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

l l l

Cause 2: The MSP protocol is stopped when the protection switching occurs. Cause 3: The fiber connection is incorrect. Cause 4: A certain board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Two NEs of the linear MSP group are configured with different protection modes (1 +1 or 1:N). 1. Query the status of the linear MSP, and check whether two NEs of the linear MSP group are configured with different protection modes (1+1 or 1:N). If... The protection modes are different The protection modes are the same Then... Configure the protection modes as the same. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The MSP protocol is stopped when the protection switching occurs. 1. Query the status of the linear MSP, and check whether the MSP protocol is stopped on the opposite NE. If... Then...

The protocol is stopped Restart the MSP protocol on the opposite NE. For details, see Starting/Stopping the Linear MSP Protocol. The protocol is running Go to Cause 3. Step 3 Cause 3: The fiber connection is incorrect. 1. Check whether the fiber connection is correct. For example, the fiber at the receive or transmit port may be incorrectly connected, or disconnected. If... The connection is incorrect The connection is correct Step 4 Cause 4: A certain board is faulty. 1. Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists ----End Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Replace the alarmed board. Then... Connect the fiber properly Go to Cause 4.

Related Information
None.

A.3.105 LAG_BWMM
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 375

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Description
LAG_BWMM is an alarm indicating the bandwidth inconsistency in the LAG group.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


For a LAG group in load-sharing mode, data services may be lost.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: In the LAG group, the license capacities of the ports differ from each other.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: In the LAG group, the license capacities of the ports differ from each other. 1. 2. Query the license capacities of the ports of the LAG group by using the NMS. If the license capacities of the ports differ from each other, reload a license file of an appropriate capacity.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.106 LAG_DOWN
Description
The LAG_DOWN is an alarm indicating that the link aggregation group (LAG) is unavailable. This alarm occurs when the LAG does not have activated members.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 376

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


When the LAG_DOWN alarm occurs, the service at the member port of the LAG is interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: All the member ports of the aggregation group are invalid for the same causes as the LAG_MEMBER_DOWN alarm.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: All the member ports of the LAG are invalid for the same causes as the LAG_MEMBER_DOWN alarm. 1. Rectify the fault at each member port according to the description of LAG_MEMBER_DOWN.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.107 LAG_MEMBER_DOWN
Description
The LAG_MEMBER_DOWN is an alarm indicating that a member port of a link aggregation group (LAG) is unavailable. This alarm occurs when a member port of an LAG can neither be activated nor function as a protection port.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning

Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Indicates the slot ID of the alarmed board. Parameter 3 Indicates the ID of the alarmed subboard. The value is always 0xff.

Parameter 4, Parameter 5 Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.


Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 377

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 6

Meaning Indicates the cause that makes the port unavailable. l 0x01: The port link is faulty or disabled. l 0x02: The port fails to receive the LACP packets. l 0x03: The port works in half-duplex mode. l 0x04: The port is self-looped.

Impact on the System


The port in the LAG cannot share the service load, and the port does not transmit or receive any services.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The port link is faulty or disabled. Cause 2: The port receives no LACP packets. Cause 3: The port works in half-duplex mode or not in Auto-Negotiation mode. Cause 4: The port is self-looped.

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the alarmed port and the cause of the alarm according to the alarm parameters. If... The value of Parameter 4 is 0x01 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x02 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x03 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x04 Then... Perform the operations described in step Step 2. Perform the operations described in step Step 3. Perform the operations described in step Step 4. Perform the operations described in step Step 5.

Step 2 Cause 1: The port link is faulty or disabled. 1. On the NMS, check whether the port in the LAG is enabled. For details, see Querying the Protocol Information of the LAG. If... The port is not enabled The port is enabled 2. Then... Enable the port in the LAG. Go to the next step.

Check the link status of all ports and check whether the ETH_LOS alarm is reported. If... The alarm is reported Then... Clear the ETH_LOS alarm immediately and rectify the fault of the port link.

The alarm is not reported Go to Cause 2. Step 3 Cause 2: The port receives no LACP packets.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 378

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Check whether the local port and the remote port transmit the LACP packets. For details, see Querying the Protocol Information of the LAG. If the LACP packets are not transmitted, configure the ports at two ends to ensure that the packets can be normally transmitted.

Step 4 Cause 3: The port works in half-duplex mode or not in Auto-Negotiation mode. 1. On the NMS, check whether the port in the LAG works in half-duplex mode. For details, see Querying the Protocol Information of the LAG. If the port works in half-duplex mode, change the working mode of the port into full-duplex. On the NMS, change the working mode of the port into full-duplex and Auto-Negotiation.

2.

Step 5 Cause 4: The port is self-looped. 1. Check whether the port is self-looped. For details, see 8.16 Querying the Attributes of an Ethernet Port. If the port is self-looped, release the selfloop. For details, see 8.6.4 Setting a Loopback for the Packet-plane Ethernet Interface Board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.108 LAG_PORT_FAIL
Description
The LAG_PORT_FAIL is an alarm indicating that a port in the LAG fails. When a port in the LAG is unavailable, the LAG_PORT_FAIL alarm is reported.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Meaning Indicates the number of the IP port. The values are always 0x00 0x01.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

379

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 4

Meaning Indicates the cause of the protection failure. l 0x01: The link of the port is faulty or fails. l 0x02: The port is in half-duplex mode. l 0x03: The port fails to receive the LACP packets. l 0x04: The port detects the selfloop. l 0x05: Other unknown reasons.

Parameter 5

The value is always 0xff.

Impact on the System


The port in the LAG cannot share the service load, and the port does not transmit or receive any services.

Possible Causes
l l l l l Cause 1: The port is disabled or the link is faulty. Cause 2: The port is in the half-duplex mode. Cause 3: The port fails to receive the LCAP packets. Cause 4: The port detects a selfloop. Cause 5: other unknown reasons

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the port where the alarm occurs and the alarm cause according to the alarm parameter. If... The value of Parameter 4 is 0x01 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x02 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x03 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x04 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x05 Step 2 Cause 1: The port is disabled or the link is faulty. 1. On the NMS, check whether the port in the LAG is enabled. For details, see Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Ports. If... Then... Then... Go to Cause 1. Go to Cause 2. Go to Cause 3. Go to Cause 4. Go to Cause 5.

The port is not enabled Enable the port in the LAG group. The port is enabled Check the link state of each port. If any link is faulty, rectify the fault.

Step 3 Cause 2: The port is in the half-duplex mode.


Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 380

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

On the NMS, check the working mode of the port in the LAG group. If the port is in halfduplex mode, change the working mode of the port into full-duplex. For details, see Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Ports.

Step 4 Cause 3: The port fails to receive the LCAP packets. 1. On the NMS, check whether the LAG group is properly configured on the opposite end. For details, see Querying the Protocol Information of the LAG. If... The LAG group is not properly configured The LAG group is properly configured 2. Then... Reconfigure the LAG group. Go to the next step.

Check whether the local port and the remote port transmit the LACP packets. If the LACP packets are not transmitted, configure the ports at both ends to ensure that the packets can be normally transmitted. For details, see Querying the Protocol Information of the LAG.

Step 5 Cause 4: The port detects a selfloop. 1. Release the selfloop of the port with reference to Enabling Self-Loop Detection.

Step 6 Cause 5: other unknown reasons 1. Contact Huawei engineers.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.109 LAG_VC_PORT_FAIL
Description
The LAG_VC_PORT_FAIL is an alarm indicating that a VCG port in the LAG fails. When the VCTRUNK is unavailable, the alarm is reported.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 381

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 1

Meaning The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the number of the faulty VCG port in the LAG. Parameter 2 indicates the most significant bits and Parameter 3 indicates the least significant bits. Parameter 4 Indicates the cause of the protection failure. l 0x01: The link of the port is faulty or fails. l 0x03: The port fails to receive the LACP packets. l 0x04: The link of the port is configured into a loop. l 0x05: other unknown reasons. Parameter 5 The value is always 0xff.

Impact on the System


The port in the LAG cannot share the service load, and the port does not transmit or receive any services.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The link of the port is faulty or fails. Cause 2: The port fails to receive the LCAP packets. Cause 3: The port detects a selfloop. Cause 4: other unknown reasons

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the port where the alarm occurs and the alarm cause according to the alarm parameter. If... The value of Parameter 4 is 0x01 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x03 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x04 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x05 Step 2 Cause 1: The port is disabled or the link is faulty. 1. Check the link state of each VCG port. If any link is faulty, rectify the fault. Then... Go to Cause 1. Go to Cause 2. Go to Cause 3. Go to Cause 4.

Step 3 Cause 2: The port fails to receive the LCAP packets. 1. On the NMS, check whether the LAG group is properly configured on the opposite end.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

382

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The LAG group is not properly configured The LAG group is properly configured 2.

Then... Reconfigure the LAG group. Go to the next step.

Check whether the local port and the remote port transmit the LACP packets. If the LACP packets are not transmitted, configure the ports at both ends to ensure that the packets can be normally transmitted. Release the selfloop of the port. Contact Huawei engineers.

Step 4 Cause 3: The port detects a selfloop. 1. 1. Step 5 Cause 4: other unknown reasons

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.110 LAN_LOC
Description
The LAN_LOC is an alarm indicating the Ethernet communication failure.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the network port ID. For example, 0x01 indicates network port 1 and 0x02 indicates network port 2.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicates the number of the path on which the alarm is reported. Parameter 2 indicates the most significant bits and the value is always 0x00. Parameter 3 indicates the least significant bits and the value is always 0x01.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

383

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


When the alarm is reported, the communication of the network port is interrupted. As a result, the NE is out of control. The existing services of the NE, however, are not affected.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The cable is not connected to the network port, or the cable is faulty. Cause 2: The network port is faulty. Cause 3: The system control, switching, and timing board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 View the alarm on the NMS. Determine the network port ID according to the alarm parameter 1. Step 2 Cause 1: The cable is not connected to the network port, or the cable is faulty. 1. Check whether the cable of the network port is loose or no cable is connected. Properly connect the NMS to the network port. The LINK indicator is in green.

Step 3 Cause 2: The network port is faulty. 1. Replace the faulty board. For details, see 6.9 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board.

Step 4 Cause 3: The system control, switching, and timing board is faulty. 1. Replace the system control, switching, and timing board. For details, see 6.9 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.111 LASER_CLOSED
Description
The LASER_CLOSED is an alarm indicating that the laser is shut down. This alarm occurs when the laser is shut down by using the NMS.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 384

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


When the LASER_CLOSED alarm occurs, the optical interface fails to carry services.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The laser on the local NE is shut down by using the NMS.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The laser on the local NE is shut down by using the NMS. 1. Find out the cause of shutting down the laser and start up the laser as soon as possible.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.112 LASER_MOD_ERR
Description
The LASER_MOD_ERR is an alarm indicating that the type of the pluggable optical module on the board does not match the type of the optical interface.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the LASER_MOD_ERR alarm occurs, the performance of the optical interface degrades and serious degradation even causes service interruption.

Possible Causes
l l l l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Cause 1: The optical module installed at the optical interface does not match the rate of the optical interface. Cause 2: The small form-factor pluggable (SFP) module does not match the interface type. Cause 3: The optical module is faulty. Cause 4: A certain board is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 385

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The optical module installed at the optical interface does not match the rate of the optical interface. 1. Check whether the optical module installed at the optical interface matches the rate of the optical interface. For details, see 8.5.2 Querying the Board Manufacturing Information Report . If... The optical module does not match the rate of the optical interface The optical module matches the rate of the optical interface Then... Contact Huawei engineers to replace the optical module with one that matches the rate of the optical interface. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The SFP module does not match the interface type. 1. 1. Replace the existing SFP module with a proper SFP module. Replace the faulty optical module. If... The alarm is cleared after the optical module is replaced The alarm persists after the optical module is replaced Step 4 Cause 4: A certain board is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board. ----End Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 3. Step 3 Cause 3: The optical module is faulty.

Related Information
None.

A.3.113 LASER_MOD_ERR_EX
Description
The LASER_MOD_ERR is an alarm indicating that the type of the pluggable optical module on the board does not match the type of the optical interface.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 386

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


When the LASER_MOD_ERR_EX alarm occurs, the performance of the optical interface degrades and serious degradation even causes service interruption.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The optical module installed at the optical interface does not match the rate of the optical interface. Cause 2: The small form-factor pluggable (SFP) module does not match the interface type. Cause 3: The optical module is faulty. Cause 4: A certain board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The optical module installed at the optical interface does not match the rate of the optical interface. 1. Check whether the optical module installed at the optical interface matches the rate of the optical interface. For details, see 8.5.2 Querying the Board Manufacturing Information Report . If... The optical module does not match the rate of the optical interface The optical module matches the rate of the optical interface Then... Contact Huawei engineers to replace the optical module with one that matches the rate of the optical interface. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The SFP module does not match the interface type. 1. Replace the existing SFP module with a proper SFP module. Step 3 Cause 3: The optical module is faulty. 1. Replace the faulty optical module. If... The alarm is cleared after the optical module is replaced The alarm persists after the optical module is replaced Step 4 Cause 4: A certain board is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board. Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 3.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.114 LASER_SHUT
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 387

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Description
The LASER_SHUT is an alarm indicating that the laser is shut down. This alarm occurs when the laser is shut down by using the NMS.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the laser_shut alarm occurs, the optical interface fails to carry services.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The laser on the local NE is shut down by using the NMS.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The laser on the local NE is shut down by using the NMS. 1. Find out the cause of shutting down the laser and start up the laser as soon as possible. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.115 LCAS_FOPR
Description
The LCAS_FOPR is an alarm indicating that the LCAS protocol in the receive direction fails. This alarm occurs if the receive unit of the LCAS module of a board detects an abnormal state in which the LCAS might fail to negotiate or cannot negotiate correctly.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 388

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUNK 1.

Impact on the System


The Ethernet service is not normal.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: Configuration data of the LCAS protocol is incorrect. Cause 2: The link is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Configuration data of the LCAS protocol is incorrect. 1. Check whether the LCAS enabling state and the LCAS parameters are the same at both ends of the link. If... The settings of the LCAS protocols are not consistent The settings of the LCAS protocols at both ends are consistent 2. Then... Properly enable the LCAS protocols at both ends. Go to Cause 2.

Check whether configurations of the local and opposite NEs are correct. For example, check whether a VCG on one NE is connected to multiple VCGs on the opposite NE. If... Then...

The configurations of the local and opposite NEs are Correct the configuration data. incorrect The configurations of the local and opposite NEs are Go to Cause 2. correct Step 2 Cause 2: The link is faulty. 1. Check whether the link where the service travels has errors or becomes faulty. If... The link is faulty The link is normal 2.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Then... Rectify the fault. Go to the next step.

Restart the LCAS protocols at both ends. Then, check whether the alarm clears.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 389

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The alarm clears The alarm persists ----End

Then... End the alarm handling. Replace the alarmed board.

Related Information
None.

A.3.116 LCAS_FOPT
Description
The LCAS_FOPT is an alarm indicating that the LCAS protocol in the transmit direction fails. This alarm occurs if the transmit unit of the LCAS module of a board detects an abnormal state in which the LCAS might fail to negotiate or cannot negotiate correctly.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUNK 1.

Impact on the System


The Ethernet service is not normal.

Possible Causes
l l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Cause 1: Configuration data of the LCAS protocol is incorrect. Cause 2: The link is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 390

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Configuration data of the LCAS protocol is incorrect. 1. Check whether the LCAS enabling state and the LCAS parameters are the same at both ends of the link. If... The settings of the LCAS protocols are not consistent Then... Properly enable the LCAS protocols at both ends.

The settings of the LCAS protocol at both Go to Cause 2. ends are consistent 2. Check whether configurations of the local and opposite NEs are correct. For example, check whether a VCG on one NE is connected to multiple VCGs on the opposite NE. If... Then...

The configurations of the local and opposite NEs are Correct the configuration data. incorrect The configurations of the local and opposite NEs are Go to Cause 2. correct Step 2 Cause 2: The link is faulty. 1. Check whether the link where the service travels has errors or becomes faulty. If... The link is faulty The link is normal 2. Then... Rectify the fault. Go to the next step.

Restart the LCAS protocols at both ends. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm clears The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Replace the alarmed board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.117 LCAS_PLCR
Description
The LCAS_PLCR is an alarm indicating that a part of the LCAS bandwidth in the receive direction is lost. This alarm occurs when a board detects that the number of paths that carry the overloads in the receive direction of the VCTRUNK with the LCAS function enabled is less than the preset number but is not zero.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 391

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUNK 1.

Impact on the System


The available Ethernet service bandwidth is smaller than the configured bandwidth.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the remote site is different from that at the local site. Cause 2: Some paths in the transmit direction of the remote site are faulty. Cause 3: Some paths in the receive direction of the local site are faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the remote site is different from that at the local site. 1. Check whether the VCTRUNKs at the transmit and the receive directions at the local site are configured with the same number of physical paths and timeslots. If... Then...

The sink and source VCTRUNKs are Correct the configuration data. For details, bound with different number of physical see Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing the paths or bound with different timeslots VCTRUNK Bandwidth. If yes Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: Some paths in the transmit direction of the remote site are faulty. 1.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Check whether any path alarm exists in the transmit direction of the remote site.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 392

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... Any of the preceding alarms occurs No alarm occurs

Then... Clear the alarm immediately. Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: Some paths in the receive direction of the local site are faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.118 LCAS_PLCT
Description
The LCAS_PLCT is an alarm indicating that part of the LCAS bandwidth in the transmit direction is lost. This alarm occurs when a board detects that the number of paths that carry the overloads in the transmit direction of the VCTRUNK with the LCAS function enabled is less than the preset number but is not zero.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUN 1.

Impact on the System


The available transmit bandwidth of Ethernet services is less than the preset bandwidth. When the transmitted services are more than the available transmit bandwidth, packet loss occurs.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 393

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the remote site is different from that at the local site. Cause 2: Some paths in the receive direction of the remote site are faulty. Cause 3: Some paths in the transmit direction of the local site are faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the remote site is different from that at the local site. 1. Check whether the sink and source VCTRUNKs are bound with the same number of physical paths or the same timeslots. If... Then...

The sink and source VCTRUNKs are Correct the configuration data. For details, bound with different number of physical see Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing the paths or different timeslots VCTRUNK Bandwidth. The sink and source VCTRUNKs are Go to Cause 2. bound with the same number of physical paths or the same timeslots Step 2 Cause 2: Some paths in the receive direction of the remote site are faulty. 1. Check whether any path alarm exists in the receive direction of the remote site. If... Any of the preceding alarms occurs No alarm occurs Then... Clear the alarm immediately. Go to the next step.

Step 3 Cause 3: Some paths in the transmit direction of the local site are faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.119 LCAS_TLCR
Description
The LCAS_TLCR is an alarm indicating that all the LCAS bandwidth in the receive direction is lost. This alarm occurs when no path in the receive direction of the VCTRUNK with LCAS enabled carries the overload but paths are configured to carry the overload.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

394

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicates the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUN 1.

Impact on the System


There is no available bandwidth in the receive direction, and the Ethernet services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the remote site is different from that at the local site. Cause 2: Some paths in the transmit direction of the remote site are faulty. Cause 3: Some paths in the receive direction of the local site are faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the remote site is different from that at the local site. 1. Check whether the VCTRUNKs at the transmit and the receive directions at the local site are configured with the same number of physical paths and timeslots. If... Then...

The sink and source VCTRUNKs are Correct the configuration data. For details, bound with different number of physical see Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing the paths or bound with different timeslots VCTRUNK Bandwidth. The sink and source VCTRUNKs are Go to Cause 2. bound with the same number of physical paths or the same timeslots Step 2 Cause 2: Some paths in the transmit direction of the remote site are faulty. 1.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Check whether any path alarm exists in the transmit direction of the remote site.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 395

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... Any of the preceding alarms occurs No alarm occurs

Then... Clear the alarm immediately. Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: Some paths in the receive direction of the local site are faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.120 LCAS_TLCT
Description
The LCAS_TLCT is an alarm indicating that all the LCAS bandwidth in the transmit direction is lost. This alarm occurs when no path in the transmit direction of the VCTRUNK with LCAS enabled carries the overload but paths are configured to carry the overload.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUNK 1.

Impact on the System


There is no available bandwidth in the transmit direction, and the Ethernet services are interrupted.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 396

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the remote site is different from that at the local site. Cause 2: Some paths in the receive direction of the remote site are faulty. Cause 3: Some paths in the transmit direction of the local site are faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the remote site is different from that at the local site. 1. Check whether the sink and source VCTRUNKs are bound with the same number of physical paths or the same timeslots. If... Then...

The sink and source VCTRUNKs are Correct the configuration data. For details, bound with different number of physical see Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing the paths or bound with different timeslots VCTRUNK Bandwidth. The sink and source VCTRUNKs are Go to Cause 2. bound with the same number of physical paths or bound with the same timeslots Step 2 Cause 2: Some paths in the receive direction of the remote site are faulty. 1. Check whether any path alarm exists in the receive direction of the remote site. If... Any of the preceding alarms occurs No alarm occurs Then... Clear the alarm immediately. Go to the next step.

Step 3 Cause 3: Some paths in the transmit direction of the local site are faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.121 LCD
Description
The LCD is an alarm indicating loss of cell delimitation. This alarm occurs when the OCD alarm continuously occurs within the transmission period of N cells. The letter "N" indicates the LCD alarm threshold value. For different ports, the threshold value is different.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

397

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


l When the LCD alarm occurs, all the services in the receive direction of the port are interrupted and all the connections at the port insert segment or end AIS cells to the downstream.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The path connected to the ATM port receives signals in an incorrect manner. For example, the MS_AIS, AU_AIS or AU_LOP alarm occurs. Cause 2: A great number of bit errors occur in the receive path. The receive path reports alarms indicating excessive bit errors, such as B1_EXC, B2_EXC, and B3_EXC. Cause 3: The ATM processing chip of the board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The path connected to the ATM port receives signals in an incorrect manner. For example, the MS_AIS, AU_AIS or AU_LOP alarm occurs. 1. 2. Check whether the MS_AIS, AU_AIS, or AU_LOP alarm occurs in the path connected to the ATM port. If yes, clear these alarms first, and then check whether the LCD alarm is cleared.

Step 2 Cause 2: A great number of bit errors occur in the receive path. The receive path reports alarms indicating excessive bit errors, such as B1_EXC, B2_EXC, and B3_EXC. 1. 2. 1. 2. Check whether the B1_EXC, B2_EXC, or B3_EXC alarm occurs in the receive path. If yes, clear these alarms first, and then check whether the LCD alarm is cleared. Perform a cold reset on the board that reports the LCD alarm. For details, see 8.7.1 Cold Reset. If the LCD alarm persists, replace the alarmed board. For details, see 6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board.

Step 3 Cause 3: The ATM processing chip of the board is faulty.

----End

Related Information
End and segment The end point, used to monitor the entire virtual connection, is set at the end of the chain network. The segment point is used to monitor a segment of the entire link.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 398

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Thresholds of generating the LCD alarm at different ports l l l For the external ATM port, the threshold of generating the LCD alarm is seven cells. For a VC-4 VCTRUNK port, the threshold of generating the LCD alarm is 360 cells. For a VC-12 VCTRUNK port, the threshold of generating the ALM_IMA_LINK_LCD alarm in the bound E1 link is 104 cells. If only one E1 link is bound with the VCTRUNK, the LCD alarm is reported when the ALM_IMA_LINK_LCD alarm occurs. If the VCTRUNK is bound with multiple E1 links in the IMA group, and if the number of E1 links in which the ALM_IMA_LINK_LCD alarm occurs is greater than the value derived from the total number of bound E1 links subtracted by the minimum number of activated links in the receive direction of the IMA group, the LCD alarm is reported at the VCTRUNK port. Otherwise, the LCD alarm is not reported.

A.3.122 LCS_LIMITED
Description
The LCS_LIMITED alarm indicates that the configuration capacity of an NE exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

399

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name

Meaning

Parameter 1 Indicates the alarm cause. l 0x01: The E1 service capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. l 0x02: The AM license file is not loaded. l 0x03: For IF protection, the bandwidth at the standby port authorized by the license file is lower than the bandwidth at the main port authorized by the license file. l 0x05: The ATM/IMA capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. l 0x06: The air port LAG capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. l 0x07: The E1 priority capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. l 0x08: The synchronous Ethernet capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. l 0x09: The air port compression capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file l 0x10: The MPLS service license capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. l 0x11: The PLA license capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. l 0x12: The total service bandwidth (TDM service bandwidth and data service bandwidth) exceeds the bandwidth allowed by the Ethernet license file for the working and protection links.

Impact on the System


When the LCS_LIMITED alarm occurs, the change of radio service capacity cannot take effect on the NE.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The AM configuration on the NE exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. Cause 2: For IF protection, the bandwidth at the standby port authorized by the license file is lower than the bandwidth at the main port authorized by the license file. Cause 3: The services configured on the NE exceed the capacity authorized by the license file.

Procedure
Step 1 Query the capacity of the license by using the NMS. Step 2 Cause 1: The AM configuration on the NE exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

400

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Check the AM enabling status. If the license does not allow the AM to be enabled, set the AM function to disabled.

Step 3 Cause 2: For IF protection, the bandwidth at the standby port authorized by the license file is lower than the bandwidth at the main port authorized by the license file. 1. Check whether the capacities that are authorized by the license files for the main and standby IF boards in an IF protection group are consistent with the capacities specified in the contract. If not, contact Huawei technical support engineers to reload correct license files.

Step 4 Cause 3: The services configured on the NE exceed the capacity authorized by the license file. 1. when the alarm parameter is 0x01, check whether the radio service configuration exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. For details, see Setting the Hybrid/AM Attributes. If yes, reduce the number of E1 services. Purchase and load the corresponding service license.

2.

----End

Related Information
For TDM services, radio service capacities of NEs are calculated based on the service crossconnections on IF boards.

A.3.123 LFA
Description
The LFA is an alarm indicating that the E1 frame alignment at the local end of the inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) link in the receive direction is lost.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicates the path ID.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

401

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


l l l When this alarm occurs, the alarmed E1 link is unavailable, and the available links in the IMA group are reduced. If the VCTRUNK link binds only one member, the service is interrupted when the LFA alarm occurs. After this alarm clears, the E1 link in the IMA group will be recovered automatically.

Possible Causes
The possible causes of the LFA alarm are as follows: l Cause 1: The demultiplexing module of the E1 frame cannot perform the frame alignment function, and therefore the frame alignment loss alarms are reported. These alarms include TU_LOP, TU_AIS, and alarm indicating that the cross-connection is not configured. Cause 2: The alarmed board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Check for the TU_LOP and TU_AIS alarms on the NMS. If these alarms occur, handle these alarms first. Step 2 Cause 2: The alarmed board is faulty. 1. 2. Check whether the HARD_BAD alarm occurs on the board. If the alarm occurs, perform a cold reset on the board that reports the hardware failure alarm, and check whether the alarm clears.

CAUTION
If the service on the board is not protected, a cold reset on the board causes service interruptions. 3. If the alarm persists, replace the board. For details, see 6.6 Replacing the Ethernet Interface Board or 6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board.

----End

Related Information
Basic frame As defined in ITU-T G.704, a basic frame is an even frame with frame alignment sequence (FAS) or an odd frame with non frame alignment sequence (NFAS).

A.3.124 LICENSE_DIFF
Description
The LICENSE_DIFF is an alarm indicating that the license file on the IF board is different from the backup file on the system control board. After the IF board or system control board is
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 402

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

replaced, the license file on the IF board may be different from the backup file on the system control board.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Warning Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning

Parameter 1 Indicates the type of the license file. l 0x01: AM license. l 0x02: Hybrid license. l 0x03: TDM license.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

403

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name

Meaning

Parameter 2 Indicates the capacity of the license file on the IF board. When the value of Parameter 1 is 0x01: l 0x01: The AM function is disabled. l 0x02: The AM function is enabled. When the value of Parameter 1 is 0x02: l 0x01: The hybrid capacity is 10 Mbit/s. l 0x02: The hybrid capacity is 20 Mbit/s. l 0x03: The hybrid capacity is 50 Mbit/s. l 0x04: The hybrid capacity is 100 Mbit/s. l 0x05: The hybrid capacity is 150 Mbit/s. l 0x06: The hybrid capacity is 200 Mbit/s. l 0x07: The hybrid capacity is 300 Mbit/s. l 0x08: The hybrid capacity is 400 Mbit/s. l 0x09: The hybrid capacity is beyond the control of licenses. When the value of Parameter 1 is 0x03: l 0x01: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 8xE1. l 0x02: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 16xE1. l 0x03: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 32xE1. l 0x04: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 48xE1. l 0x05: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 64xE1. l 0x06: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 128xE1. l 0x07: The TDM radio transmission capacity is beyond the control of licenses.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

404

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name

Meaning

Parameter 3 Indicates the capacity of the license file on the system control board. When the value of Parameter 1 is 0x01: l 0x01: The AM function is disabled. l 0x02: The AM function is enabled. When the value of Parameter 1 is 0x02: l 0x01: The hybrid capacity is 10 Mbit/s. l 0x02: The hybrid capacity is 20 Mbit/s. l 0x03: The hybrid capacity is 50 Mbit/s. l 0x04: The hybrid capacity is 100 Mbit/s. l 0x05: The hybrid capacity is 150 Mbit/s. l 0x06: The hybrid capacity is 200 Mbit/s. l 0x07: The hybrid capacity is 300 Mbit/s. l 0x08: The hybrid capacity is 400 Mbit/s. l 0x09: The hybrid capacity is beyond the control of licenses. When the value of Parameter 1 is 0x03: l 0x01: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 8xE1. l 0x02: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 16xE1. l 0x03: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 32xE1. l 0x04: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 48xE1. l 0x05: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 64xE1. l 0x06: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 128xE1. l 0x07: The TDM radio transmission capacity is beyond the control of licenses.

Impact on the System


None.

Possible Causes
l Cause 1: After the IF board or system control board is replaced, the license file on the IF board may be different from the backup file on the system control board.

Procedure
Step 1 This alarm only warns the user of the different license capacities on the IF board and the system control board. No handling is required. Software patrol is performed automatically 48 hours later and synchronizes the license capacities. Then, the alarm clears. ----End

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

405

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.3.125 LICENSE_LOST
Description
The LICENSE_LOST is an alarm indicating that the NE fails to detect the license file.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the type of the license file. l 0x02: Hybrid license l 0x03: TDM license l 0x05: ATM/IMA license l 0x06: NE license

Impact on the System


When the LICENSE_LOST alarm occurs, the functions authorized by the license file cannot take effect.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The license file is lost or is not loaded.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The license file is lost or is not loaded. 1. Contact Huawei engineers to reload the license file to the NE.

----End
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 406

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.3.126 LINK_ERR
Description
The LINK_ERR alarm indicates that a data link is faulty.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the optical port. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by optical port 1.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported by path 1.

Impact on the System


Services in the alarmed path are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The optical fiber connected to the Ethernet optical port is faulty. Cause 2: The working modes of the ports at the local and opposite ends are different. Cause 3: The equipment at the local or opposite end is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The optical fiber connected to the Ethernet optical port is faulty. 1. Check whether the optical fiber connected to the Ethernet optical port is faulty. If... The optical fiber is faulty The optical fiber is not faulty
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Then... Replace the fiber. Go to Cause 2.


407

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Step 2 Cause 2: The working modes of the ports at the local and opposite ends are different. 1. Check whether the working modes of the ports at the local and opposite ends are different. If... The working modes of the ports at the local and opposite ends are different The working modes of the ports at the local and opposite ends are the same Then... Set the working modes of the ports to the same. Go to the next step.

Step 3 Cause 3: The equipment at the local or opposite end is faulty. 1. Use an optical fiber to perform a loopback at the the alarmed port. For details, see 8.1 Hardware Loopback. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists ----End Then... Replace the Ethernet board at the opposite end. Replace the Ethernet board at the local end.

Related Information
None.

A.3.127 LMFA
Description
The LMFA is an alarm indicating the E1 multiframe alignment is lost when the E1 frame is a CRC-4 multiframe.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicates the path ID.


Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 408

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the alarmed E1 links become unavailable. As a result, fewer links of the IMA group are available. If the IMA group is comprised of only one link, services will be interrupted.

Possible Causes
The possible cause of the LMFA alarm is as follows: l l Cause 1: The alarmed board is faulty. Cause 2: The frame format is incorrect.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The alarmed board is faulty. 1. 2. Check whether the HARD_BAD alarm occurs on the board. If the alarm occurs, perform a cold reset on the board that reports the hardware failure alarm, and check whether the alarm clears.

CAUTION
If the service on the board is not protected, a cold reset on the board causes service interruptions. 3. 1. 2. If the alarm persists, replace the board. Check the frame format of the opposite port. For details, see Setting Advanced Attributes of Smart E1 Ports. Set the frame format to CRC-4 Multiframe if it is incorrect.

Step 2 Cause 2: The frame format is incorrect.

----End

Related Information
Basic frame As defined in ITU-T G.704, a basic frame is an even frame with frame alignment sequence (FAS) or an odd frame with non frame alignment sequence (NFAS). Multiframe A multiframe is composed of sixteen PCM frames, and can implement cyclic redundancy check (CRC).

A.3.128 LOOP_ALM
Description
The LOOP_ALM is an alarm indicating that a loop occurs.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 409

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the type of loopback. l 0x00: optical/electrical port inloop. l 0x01: optical/electrical port outloop. l 0x02: path inloop. l 0x03: path outloop. l 0x04: loopback on the user side. l 0x05: loopback on the multiplexing side. l 0x08: ATM layer inloop. l 0x09: ATM layer outloop. l 0x0A: PHY layer inloop. l 0x0B: PHY layer outloop. l 0x0C: MAC layer inloop. l 0x0D: MAC layer outloop. l 0x0E: VC-4 timeslot inloop. l 0x0F: VC-4 timeslot outloop. l 0x10: VC-3 timeslot inloop. l 0x11: VC-3 timeslot outloop. l 0x12: VC-12 timeslot inloop. l 0x13: VC-12 timeslot outloop. l 0x14: IF outloop. l 0x15: IF inloop. l 0x16: RF inloop. l 0xFF: any of the preceding loopback modes.

Impact on the System


When the LOOP_ALM alarm occurs, the looped port or path cannot carry services.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 410

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
Cause 1: A loop is performed on the local NE.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: A loop is performed on the local NE. 1. 2. Determine the type of loopback according to the alarm parameter. Find out the cause of the loopback, and set the loopback status of the alarmed port to NonLoopback. For details, see 8.6 Software Loopback. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.129 LP_CROSSTR
Description
The LP_CROSSTR is an alarm indicating that the lower order path error crosses the threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the performance event that the lower order path error crosses the preset threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the performance monitoring period: l 0x01: 15 minutes l 0x02: 24 hours

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

411

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 2, Parameter 3

Meaning Indicate the ID of a performance event that causes the alarm. l 0x90: LPBBE l 0x91: LPES l 0x92: LPSES l 0x93: LPFEBBE l 0x94: LPFEES l 0x95: LPFESES l 0x96: LPUAS l 0x8e: LPFEUAS l 0x97: LPCSES l 0x98: LPFECSES

Impact on the System


When the LP_CROSSTR alarm occurs, a large number of errors occur in the service, and the service may even be interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The lower order path error crosses the preset threshold.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The lower order path error crosses the preset threshold. 1. 2. Check the threshold crossing records to find out the performance event that the lower order path error crosses the preset threshold. Handle the threshold-crossing performance event.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.130 LP_R_FIFO
Description
The LP_R_FIFO is an alarm indicating that the FIFO overflows on the transmit side of the lower order path.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

412

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the LP_R_FIFO alarm occurs, the service has errors.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The clock of the local NE is not synchronized with the clock of the opposite NE. Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The clock of the local NE is not synchronized with the clock of the opposite NE. 1. Browse current performance events, and check whether the performance event of TU pointer justification occurs on the local NE and the opposite NE. If... The TU pointer justification occurs Then... Handle the performance event. For details, see C.3.2 TUPJCHIGH, TUPJCLOW, and TUPJCNEW. Go to Cause 2.

The TU pointer justification does not occur Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.131 LP_RDI
Description
The LP_RDI is an alarm indicating the lower order path remote receive failure. This alarm occurs when the board detects that bit 8 of byte V5 is 1.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 413

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the LP_RDI alarm occurs, the service on the local NE is not affected. The service received by the opposite NE, however, is interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates the lower order path remote receive failure.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates the lower order path remote receive failure. 1. Handle the lower order path alarm on the opposite NE.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.132 LP_RDI_VC12
Description
The LP_RDI_VC12 is an alarm indicating that data reception fails at the remote end of VC-12 lower order path. This alarm occurs when the board detects that bit 8 of byte V5 is 1.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 414

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the service on the local NE is not affected. The service received by the opposite NE, however, is interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The local site receives a message from the remote site, and the message says that data reception fails at the remote end of a lower order path.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local site receives a message from the remote site, and the message says that data reception fails at the remote end of a lower order path. 1. Handle the alarm of the lower order path on the remote site.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.133 LP_RDI_VC3
Description
The LP_RDI_VC3 alarm indicates that data reception at the remote end of a lower order (VC-3) path fails. A board reports this alarm when detecting that bit 5 in byte G1 is 1.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 415

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 1

Meaning Has a fixed value of 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.

Impact on the System


When the LP_RDI_VC3 alarm occurs, the services at the local site are not affected, but the opposite site cannot receive services.

Possible Causes
The local site receives a message from the opposite site, and the message says that data reception fails at the remote end of a lower order (VC-3) path.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause: The local site receives a message from the opposite site, and the message says that data reception fails at the remote end of a lower order (VC-3) path. 1. Handle the alarm in the lower order (VC-3) path at the opposite site.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.134 LP_REI
Description
The LP_REI is an alarm indicating the lower order path remote error. This alarm occurs when the board detects that bit 3 of V5 is 1.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the LP_REI alarm occurs, the service on the local NE is not affected. The service received by the opposite NE, however, has errors.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 416

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates the lower order path remote errors.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates the lower order path remote errors. 1. Handle the LP_BBE performance event on the opposite NE.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.135 LP_REI_VC12
Description
The LP_REI_VC12 is an alarm indicating that there are bit errors at the remote end of a VC-12 lower order path. This alarm occurs when the board detects that bit 3 of byte V5 is 1.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path.

Impact on the System


Bit errors exist in the service in the receive direction of the remote site.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The local site receives a message from the remote site, and the message says that there are bit errors in the lower order path.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 417

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local site receives a message from the remote site, and the message says that there are bit errors in the lower order path. 1. Handle the LPBBE performance event of the remote site.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.136 LP_REI_VC3
Description
The LP_REI_VC3 alarm indicates that there are bit errors at the remote end of a lower order (VC-3) path. A board reports this alarm when detecting that any one of bits 1 to 4 in byte G1 is 1.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Has a fixed value of 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.

Impact on the System


Bit errors exist in received services at the opposite site.

Possible Causes
The local site receives a message from the opposite site, and the message says that there are bit errors at the remote end of a lower order (VC-3) path.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 418

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause: The local site receives a message from the opposite site, and the message says that there are bit errors at the remote end of a lower order (VC-3) path. 1. Handle the alarm in the lower order (VC-3) path at the opposite site.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.137 LP_RFI
Description
The LP_RFI is an alarm indicating the lower order path remote failure. This alarm occurs when the board detects that bit 4 of V5 is 1.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the LP_RFI alarm occurs, the service on the local NE is not affected. The alarm only indicates that the lower order paths on the opposite NE cannot carry services.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates the lower order path remote failure.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates the lower order path remote failure. 1. Handle the lower order path alarm on the opposite NE.

----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 419

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.138 LP_SLM
Description
The LP_SLM is an alarm indicating that a mismatched signal label is detected in the lower order path. This alarm is reported when the board detects a signal label mismatch between the V5 bytes.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The services in the lower order path are unavailable.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The signal label contained in the V5 byte that is received by the local site does not match with the signal label contained in the V5 byte that is transmitted by the remote site.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The signal label contained in the V5 byte that is received by the local site does not match with the signal label contained in the V5 byte that is transmitted by the remote site. 1. Modify the signal label contained in the V5 byte that is to be received by the local site or is to be transmitted by the remote site. Ensure that the signal labels at both ends match with each other. For details, see Configuring VC-12 POHs.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.139 LP_SLM_VC12
Description
The LP_SLM_VC12 is an alarm indicating that a mismatched signal label is detected in the lower order path. This alarm is reported when the board detects a signal label mismatch between the V5 bytes.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 420

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path.

Impact on the System


The service in this lower order path is unavailable.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The signal label contained in the V5 byte that is received by the local site does not match with the signal label contained in the V5 byte that is transmitted by the remote site.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The signal label contained in the V5 byte that is received by the local site does not match with the signal label contained in the V5 byte that is transmitted by the remote site. 1. Modify the signal label contained in the V5 byte that is to be received by the local site or is to be transmitted by the remote site. Ensure that the signal labels at both ends match with each other. For details, see Configuring VC-12 POHs.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.140 LP_SLM_VC3
Description
The LP_SLM_VC3 alarm indicates that a mismatched signal label is detected in a lower order (VC-3) path. A board reports this alarm when detecting a mismatched signal label in byte C2.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 421

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Has a fixed value of 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.

Impact on the System


The services in the lower order (VC-3) path are unavailable.

Possible Causes
The signal label in byte C2 that is received at the local site does not match with the signal label in byte C2 that is transmitted at the opposite site.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The signal label in byte C2 that is received at the local site does not match with the signal label in byte C2 that is transmitted at the opposite site. 1. Reset the signal label in byte C2 that is received at the local site or the signal label in byte C2 that is transmitted at the local site. Ensure that the signal labels are the same at both sites. For details, see Configuring VC-4 POHs.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.141 LP_T_FIFO
Description
The LP_T_FIFO is an alarm indicating that the FIFO overflows on the transmit side of the lower order path.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 422

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


Bit errors occur in the services.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The frequency offset of the input signal is very large. Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The frequency offset of the input signal is very large. 1. Use an SDH analyzer to check whether the frequency offset of the input signal is within 50 ppm. If... The frequency offset is very large The frequency offset is within 50 ppm Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board. Then... Troubleshoot the remote site. Go to Cause 2.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.142 LP_TIM
Description
The LP_TIM is an alarm indicating a mismatched trace identifier is detected in the lower order path. This alarm is reported when the board detects a mismatch between the J2 bytes at both ends.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

423

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


None.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The J2 byte to be received by the local site does not match with the J2 byte to be transmitted by the remote site. Cause 2: The data configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The J2 byte to be received by the local site does not match with the J2 byte to be transmitted by the remote site. 1. Set the byte mode of the J2 byte to be received by the local site to the disable mode. Alternatively, set the J2 byte to be received by the local site to match with the J2 byte to be transmitted by the remote site. For details, see Configuring VC-12 POHs.

Step 2 Cause 2: The data configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect. 1. Check whether the cross-connections of the intermediate nodes where the service travels are configured correctly. If not, reconfigure the cross-connections. For details, see Querying TDM Services.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.143 LP_TIM_VC12
Description
The LP_TIM_VC12 is an alarm indicating a mismatched trace identifier is detected in the lower order path. This alarm is reported when the board detects a mismatch between the J2 bytes at both ends.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

424

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path.

Impact on the System


None.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The J2 byte to be received by the local site does not match with the J2 byte to be transmitted by the remote site. Cause 2: The data configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The J2 byte to be received by the local site does not match with the J2 byte to be transmitted by the remote site. 1. Set the byte mode of the J2 byte to be received by the local site to the disable mode. Alternatively, set the J2 byte to be received by the local site to match with the J2 byte to be transmitted by the remote site. For details, see Configuring VC-12 POHs.

Step 2 Cause 2: The data configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect. 1. Check whether the cross-connections of the intermediate nodes where the service travels are configured correctly. If not, reconfigure the cross-connections. For details, see Querying TDM Services.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.144 LP_TIM_VC3
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 425

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Description
The LP_TIM_VC3 alarm indicates that a mismatched trace identifier is detected in a lower order (VC-3) path. A board reports this alarm when detecting a mismatched trace identifier in byte J1.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Has a fixed value of 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.

Impact on the System


None.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: Byte J1 to be received at the local site does not match with byte J1 to be transmitted at the opposite site. Cause 2: The data configuration at intermediate sites is incorrect.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Byte J1 to be received at the local site does not match with byte J1 to be transmitted at the opposite site. 1. Set byte J1 to be received at the local site to the disable mode or the same as byte J1 to be transmitted at the opposite site. For details, see Configuring VC-4 POHs. Check whether the cross-connections of intermediate sites where the services travel are configured correctly. If not, reconfigure the cross-connections. For details, see Querying TDM Services.

Step 2 Cause 2: The data configuration at intermediate sites is incorrect. 1.

----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 426

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.145 LP_UNEQ
Description
The LP_UNEQ is an alarm indicating that the lower order path is unequipped. This alarm is reported when the board detects that the V5 byte signal label is 0.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The services in the path are unavailable. If the services are configured with protection, protection switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
The data configuration is incorrect. l l Cause 1: The tributary path at the local site is configured with services, but the tributary path at the remote site is not configured with services. Cause 2: The cross-connection configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The tributary path at the local site is configured with services, but the tributary path at the remote site is not configured with services. 1. Check whether the tributary path at the remote site is configured with services. For details, see Querying TDM Services. If... Then...

The tributary path at the remote site is not Configure services for the tributary path at configured with services the remote site. The tributary path at the remote site is configured with services Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The cross-connection configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect. 1. Check whether the cross-connection configuration at the intermediate nodes is correct. If not, reconfigure the cross-connections. For details, see Querying TDM Services.

----End
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 427

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.3.146 LP_UNEQ_VC12
Description
The LP_UNEQ_VC12 is an alarm indicating that the VC-12 path is unequipped. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the V5 byte signal label is 0.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path.

Impact on the System


If the alarm is generated due to incorrect service configurations, the services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
The data configuration is incorrect. l l Cause 1: The tributary path at the local site is configured with services, but the tributary path at the remote site is not configured with services. Cause 2: The cross-connection configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The tributary path at the local site is configured with services, but the tributary path at the remote site is not configured with services. 1. Check whether the tributary path at the remote site is configured with services. For details, see Querying TDM Services.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 428

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The tributary path at the remote site is not configured with services

Then... Configure services.

The tributary path at the remote site is configured with services Go to Cause 2. Step 2 Cause 2: The cross-connection configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect. 1. Check whether the cross-connection configuration at the intermediate nodes is correct. If not, reconfigure the cross-connections. For details, see Querying TDM Services.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.147 LP_UNEQ_VC3
Description
The LP_UNEQ_VC3 alarm indicates that a lower order (VC-3) path is unequipped. A board reports this alarm when detecting that the C2 byte signal label is 0.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Has a fixed value of 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.

Impact on the System


The services in the path are unavailable. If the services are configured with protection, protection switching is triggered.

Possible Causes
The data configuration is incorrect.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 429

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

l l

Cause 1: The tributary path at the local site is configured with services, but the tributary path at the opposite site is not. Cause 2: The cross-connection configuration at the intermediate sites is incorrect.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The tributary path at the local site is configured with services, but the tributary path at the opposite site is not. 1. Check whether the tributary path at the opposite site is configured with services. For details, see Querying TDM Services. If... The tributary path at the opposite site is not configured with services The tributary path at the opposite site is configured with services Then... Configure services. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The cross-connection configuration at the intermediate sites is incorrect. 1. Check whether the cross-connection configuration at the intermediate sites is correct. If not, reconfigure the cross-connections. For details, see Querying TDM Services.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.148 LPS_UNI_BI_M
Description
The LPS_UNI_BI_M is an alarm indicating that switching modes (single-ended or dual-ended) at both ends of the linear MSP do not match with each other.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 430

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name

Meaning

Parameter 1 Indicates the type of the protection group. 0x01: linear MS protection. Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1.

Impact on the System


The system performs protection switching in single-ended mode.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The linear MSP is configured incorrectly. The LPS_UNI_BI_M alarm is generated only when the following conditions are met: l l l The switching modes (single-ended or dual-ended) at the local and remote sites are different. The last three bits of the K2 byte are set to the indicated mode. The type of the protocol is set to a restructure protocol.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The linear MSP is configured incorrectly. 1. Change the MSP switching modes at both ends, and ensure that they are the same. For details, see Querying the Status of the Linear MSP.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.149 LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT
Description
The LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT is an alarm indicating that the LPT closes the access port of the local NE. Upon detecting that the convergence port of the local NE or the access port of the remote NE is faulty, the LPT automatically closes the access port of the local NE. Then, the LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT alarm is reported.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

431

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4, Parameter 5 Meaning Indicates the board ID. Indicates the ID of the sub-board. Indicate the port ID.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, services are switched to the backup network and the LPT closes the access port of the remote NE at the same time.

Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The convergence port of the local NE or the access port of the remote NE is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The convergence port of the local NE or the access port of the remote NE is faulty. 1. Check whether the convergence port of the local NE, the access port and the convergence port of the remote NE report the ETH_LOS alarm or other alarms related to boards and optical modules. If yes, clear these alarms. Then, check whether the LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT alarm is cleared.

2.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.150 LPT_INEFFECT
Description
The LPT_INEFFECT is an alarm indicating that the LPT function fails. If the user configures the LPT function but the board does not support the LPT function, the LPT_INEFFECT alarm is reported.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

432

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Meaning Indicates the ID of the IP port. Indicate the port ID. The values are always 0x00 0x01. Parameter 4, Parameter 5 The values are always 0xff 0xff.

Impact on the System


When the alarm is generated, the services are not affected. If the board hardware is of a very early version, the board software automatically prevents the LPT protocol state machine from running, but reserves the LPT configuration.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The board hardware is of a very early version, and the user configures the LPT function.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The board hardware is of a very early version, and the user configures the LPT function. 1. Check whether the LPT function is required. If... The LPT function is required Then... Replace the board with a board of the proper version. For details, see 6 Part Replacement.

The LPT function is not required Delete the configuration of the LPT. For details, see LPT Configuration. ----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 433

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.151 LPT_RFI
Description
The LPT_RFI is a remote failure indication of the link path through (LPT) function. This alarm occurs when the LPT function detects the failure of the remote port or the LPT service network.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the IP port.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the optical interface. The values are always 0x00 0x01. Parameter 4 The value is always 0xff.

Impact on the System


During the data transmission, the links are unavailable and the services are interrupted when the LPT function detects the failure of the remote port or the service network. At the same time, the backup links are enabled. If the backup links are available, the services can be restored on the backup links.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The remote port fails due to the alarms such as ETH_LOS and LSR_NO_FITED, or the remote port is disabled. Cause 2: The LPT service network is faulty. The communication link is interrupted. There are the bit error threshold-crossing alarms BIP_EXC and B3_EXC. There are the alarms such as TU_LOP, TU_AIS, VCAT_LOA, VCAT_LOM_VC12, and LP_UNEQ_VC12.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

434

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Check the alarms on the NMS, determine the board that reports the LPT_RFI alarm, and then determine the ID of the alarmed port on the board according to Parameter 1. Step 2 Cause 1: The remote port fails due to the alarms such as ETH_LOS and LSR_NO_FITED, or the remote port is disabled. 1. Check whether the corresponding opposite port is enabled. If... The opposite port is disabled The opposite port is enabled 2. Then... Enable the opposite port. Go to the next step.

Check whether any link fault alarm occurs on the line board. If... Then...

Any link fault alarm occurs Handle the link fault alarms. Focus on the R_LOS and MW_LOF alarms and handle them first. No link fault alarm occurs Go to Cause 2.

Step 3 Cause 2: The LPT service network is faulty. 1. Check whether the following alarms occur on the Ethernet boards of the MEPs at both ends. Then, handle the alarms. l ETH_LOS l LSR_NO_FITED l BIP_EXC and B3_EXC l TU_LOP, TU_AIS, VCAT_LOA, VCAT_LOM_VC12, and LP_UNEQ_VC12 ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.152 LSR_NO_FITED
Description
The LSR_NO_FITED is an alarm indicating that the SFP optical module is not installed.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 435

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


The optical interface fails to carry services.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The laser of the local site is not installed. Cause 2: The optical module is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The SFP optical module of the local site is not installed. 1. Find out why the SFP optical module is not installed, and contact Huawei technical support engineers for the installation.

Step 2 Cause 2: The optical module is faulty. 1. 6.13 Replacing the SFP.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.153 LTI
Description
The LTI is an alarm indicating that the synchronization sources are lost. This alarm is reported when all the synchronization sources for the NE are lost.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning 0x01: system priority list 0x02: external clock priority list

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

436

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


The clock enters the free-run mode and loses synchronization with other NE clocks.

Possible Causes
l l l l l l Cause 1: The clock configuration is incorrect. Cause 2: All the clock sources in the clock source priority table fail. Cause 3: A fiber cut or a cable cut occurs. Cause 4: The synchronization source is set to the manual reversion mode. Cause 5: No input is available from the external clock source. Cause 6: The board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The clock configuration is incorrect. 1. Check whether the data in the clock source priority table meets the network planning requirement. For details, see Querying the Clock Synchronization Status. If... The configuration is incorrect The configuration is correct Then... Correct the configuration. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: All the clock sources in the clock source priority table fail. 1. Troubleshoot the synchronization sources based on the clock source priority table. If... The synchronization source is an external clock The synchronization source is a line clock The synchronization source is an IF clock The synchronization source is a tributary clock The synchronization source is an Ethernet clock Step 3 Cause 3: A fiber cut or a cable cut occurs. 1. 1. Connect the fiber or cable properly. See Modifying the Recovery Parameter of the Clock Source, and set the clock source to the automatic reversion mode. Step 4 Cause 4: The synchronization source is set to the manual reversion mode. Then... Handle the EXT_SYNC_LOS alarm. Handle the alarm that occurs on the line board. Handle the alarm that occurs on the IF board. Handle the alarm that occurs on the tributary board. Handle the alarm that occurs on the Ethernet board.

Step 5 Cause 5: No input is available from the external clock source. 1. See Configuring Clock Sources for External Clock Output, and configure the clock source that provides external clock signals.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 437

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Step 6 Cause 6: The board is faulty. 1. Replace the board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.154 MAC_EXT_EXC
Description
The MAC_EXT_EXC alarm indicates that the number of bit errors at the MAC layer crosses the threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the threshold crossing type. l 0x01: ETHDROP threshold crossing l 0x02: ETHEXCCOL threshold crossing l 0x03: RXBBAD threshold crossing

Impact on the System


When the MAC_EXT_EXC alarm occurs, the performance of services degrades.

Possible Causes
l Cause 1: ETHDROP threshold crossing. The number of packet loss events crosses the upper threshold.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 438

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

l l

Cause 2: ETHEXCCOL threshold crossing. The number of frames unsuccessfully transmitted after successive collisions crosses the upper threshold. Cause 3: RXBBAD threshold crossing. The number of bytes in received bad packets crosses the upper threshold.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the working modes of the ports at the transmit and receive ends are the same. 1. On the NMS, query the working modes of the ports at the transmit and receive ends. If... Then...

The ports at the transmit and receive Set the working modes of the ports at the ends work in different modes or in half- transmit and receive ends to full-duplex or duplex mode auto-negotiation. Ensure that the working modes of the ports at the transmit and receive ends are the same. For details, see Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Ports. The ports at the transmit and receive Go to the next step. ends work in the same mode and neither port works in half-duplex mode. Step 2 Handle the problem that the opposite site transmits packets abnormally. Step 3 Handle the quality problem with the transmission line. Check whether the local end reports alarms such as ETH_LOS as the external line is damaged or over attenuated. If yes, see the related handling method to clear the alarms. Step 4 Replace the faulty board. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.155 MAC_FCS_EXC
Description
The MAC_FCS_EXC alarm indicates that the software detects that the number of bit errors at the MAC layer crosses the threshold. The software periodically detects the number of bytes received by the MAC chip and the number of bytes that have bit errors. The MAC_FCS_EXC alarm is reported when the number of bit errors crosses the threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Alarm Type Communication alarm

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

439

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the MAC_FCS_EXC alarm occurs, the performance of services degrades.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The performance of the line signals degrades. Cause 2: The input optical power is abnormal. Cause 3: A fiber connector is dirty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The performance of the line signals degrades. 1. 2. On the NMS, check for a LOOP_ALM alarm. If there is any, clear it. For details, see 8.6 Software Loopback. If the LOOP_ALM alarm persists, check whether the NMS is under a denial-of-service (DOS) attack. If yes, eliminate the source that transmits a large amount of invalid data, and then check whether the LOOP_ALM alarm is cleared. If the LOOP_ALM alarm persists, check whether a cable or fiber is faulty. Replace the faulty cable or fiber, and then check whether the LOOP_ALM alarm is cleared. Check whether the alarmed port reports an IN_PWR_ABN alarm as well. If there is any, clear the IN_PWR_ABN alarm. Clean the fiber connector and the optical receive port. For details, see 8.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters.

3.

Step 2 Cause 2: The input optical power is abnormal. 1. 2. 1.

Step 3 Cause 3: A fiber connector is dirty.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.156 MOD_COM_FAIL
Description
The MOD_COM_FAIL is an alarm indicating that Module communicates abnormally.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

440

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning

Parameter 1 0x11 indicates that the communication between the system control unit and packet switching unit is failed.

Impact on the System


The related operations cannot be performed by using the NMS and the performance information of each module cannot be queried.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The software processing of the related modules of the board is faulty. Cause 2: The board hardware is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The software processing of the related modules of the board is faulty. 1. 2. Perform a cold reset on the faulty board by using the NMS. For details, refer to 8.7.1 Cold Reset. remove the faulty board and insert it again.

Step 2 Cause 2: The board hardware is faulty. 1. Replace the faulty board. For details, refer to 6.9 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.157 MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH
Description
The MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH alarm indicates that a mismatched port module is detected.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

441

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Maloperation

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning

Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by port 1.

Impact on the System


The services at the alarmed port are interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The preset type of the SFP module is different from the actual type of the SFP module.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The preset type of the SFP module is different from the actual type of the SFP module. 1. 2. Find out the port that reports the alarm according to the alarm parameters. Check whether the preset type of the SFP module is the same as the actual type of the SFP module. If... Then...

The preset type of the SFP module is the Replace the optical/electrical SFP same as the actual type of the SFP module module. Ensure that the new SFP module is of the correct type. The preset type of the SFP module is Reset the type of the SFP module. different from the actual type of the SFP module ----End

Related Information
None.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

442

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.158 MPLS_PW_BDI
Description
The MPLS_PW_BDI is an alarm of PW backward defect indication. This alarm occurs when the local NE receives the BDI packet, notifying that the remote NE detects that the PW is faulty.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The services on the transmit side of the local NE are faulty.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The remote NE detects that the PW is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The remote NE detects that the PW is faulty. If... A board on the remote NE is reset or faulty The physical link between the local NE and the remote NE is faulty The bandwidth allocated to the PW is fully occupied. ----End Then... Rectify the fault on the remote NE. Rectify the fault on the physical link. Increase the bandwidth of the PW.

Related Information
None.

A.3.159 MPLS_PW_Excess
Description
The MPLS_PW_Excess is an alarm indicating that excessive trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) are received on the PW. This alarm occurs when five or more correct CV/FFD packets are received within three consecutive CV/FFD periods.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 443

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


Services may be interrupted if excessive redundant packets are received.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: Multiple PWs are configured with the same label and PW ID. Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Multiple PWs are configured with the same label and PW ID. 1. 2. 3. Check whether multiple PWs are configured with the same label and PW ID. If yes, delete the redundant PWs or change the PW ID and label of each PW to unique values. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm clears The alarm persists Step 2 Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected. 1. 2. Check whether any fiber or cable is misconnected. If yes, rectify the fault. Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 2.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.160 MPLS_PW_LOCV
Description
The MPLS_PW_LOCV is an alarm of PW connectivity loss. This alarm occurs when no expected CV/FFD packets are received within three consecutive CV/FFD periods.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 444

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l l l l Cause 1: The remote NE of the PW stops transmitting CV/FFD packets. Cause 2: The OAM is different between the ends of the PW. Cause 3: The PW that carries services is faulty. Cause 4: The remote NE of the PW is faulty. Cause 5: The service interface is configured incorrectly. Cause 6: Serious congestion occurs on the network.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The remote NE of the PW stops transmitting CV/FFD packets. 1. Check whether the remote NE of the PW stops transmitting CV/FFD packets. If... The remote NE of the PW stops transmitting CV/FFD packets The remote NE of the PW keeps transmitting CV/FFD packets Then... Enable the CV/FFD detection and then check whether the alarm clears. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The OAM is different between the ends of the PW. 1. Check whether the OAM is different between the ends of the PW. If no, Setting PW OAM Parameters according to the plan. If yes, go to cause 3. Check whether the local NE and remote NE of the PW report any alarm related to boards. If yes, clear the alarm. Then, check whether the MPLS_PW_LOCV alarm is cleared. Check whether any link-related alarm is reported. If yes, clear the alarm. Then, check whether the MPLS_PW_LOCV alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Step 3 Cause 3: The PW that carries services is faulty. 1. 2.

Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 4.


445

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Step 4 Cause 4: The remote NE of the PW is faulty. 1. Check whether the interconnected board of the remote NE reports the COMMUN_FAIL alarm. If yes, the board is being reset. Clear the COMMUN_FAIL alarm and then check whether the MPLS_PW_LOCV alarm is cleared. If the interconnected board of the remote NE reports other alarms, clear these alarms. Then, check whether the MPLS_PW_LOCV alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 5.

2.

Step 5 Cause 5: The service interface is configured incorrectly. 1. 2. Check whether the service interface is configured correctly according to service planning. If not, reconfigure the service interface. Then, check whether the MPLS_PW_LOCV alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 6.

Step 6 Cause 6: Serious congestion occurs on the network. 1. 2. Check whether the bandwidth allocated to the faulty tunnel is fully occupied. If yes, increase the bandwidth of the PW or eliminate the sources that transmit a large amount of invalid data.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.161 MPLS_PW_MISMATCH
Description
The MPLS_PW_MISMATCH is an alarm indicating that the trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) on the PW do not match with the specified one. This alarm occurs when only the packets with wrong TTSIs are received within three consecutive CV/FFD periods.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 446

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


Services are interrupted or the packets from other PWs are received.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The ingress node or egress node of the faulty PW is configured incorrectly. Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The ingress node or egress node of the faulty PW is configured incorrectly. 1. 2. Check whether the ingress node and egress node of the faulty PW are configured correctly according to NE planning. If the ingress node or egress node is configured incorrectly, correct the configuration and then check whether the alarm clears.

Step 2 Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected. 1. 2. Check whether any fiber or cable is misconnected. If yes, rectify the fault.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.162 MPLS_PW_MISMERGE
Description
The MPLS_PW_MISMERGE is an alarm indicating that the trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) are mismerged on the PW. This alarm is reported if the CV/FFD packets with correct TTSIs and those with wrong TTSIs are received in three consecutive CV/FFD periods.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


Services are interrupted or the packets from other PWs are received.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 447

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The PW is configured incorrectly. Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The PW is configured incorrectly. 1. 2. Check whether the PW are configured correctly according to NE planning. If the PW is configured incorrectly, correct the configuration and then check whether the alarm clears.

Step 2 Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected. 1. 2. Check whether any fiber or cable is misconnected. If yes, rectify the fault.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.163 MPLS_PW_SD
Description
The MPLS_PW_SD is an alarm of signal degrade on the PW. This alarm is reported when the packet loss rate of the connectivity check (CC) crosses the SD threshold but is lower than the SF threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


Services degrade and moderate packet loss occurs.

Possible Causes
l l l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Cause 1: The bandwidth of the PW is fully occupied. Cause 2: The physical port has bit errors or packet loss. Cause 3: The fiber connector or the optical module is dirty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 448

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The bandwidth of the PW is fully occupied. 1. 2. Check whether the bandwidth allocated to the faulty PW is fully occupied. If yes, increase the bandwidth of the PW or eliminate the sources that transmit a large amount of invalid data. Then, check whether the MPLS_PW_SD alarm is cleared. Check whether the fiber connector is loose. If yes, insert the fiber connector securely. Clean the fiber connector or the optical module. For details, see Checking and cleaning fiber connectors.

Step 2 Cause 2: The physical port has bit errors or packet loss. 1. 1. Step 3 Cause 3: The fiber connector or the optical module is dirty.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.164 MPLS_PW_SF
Description
The MPLS_PW_SF is an alarm of signal failure on the PW. This alarm occurs when the number of received connectivity check (CC) packets is less than the signal failure (SF) threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


Services fail and severe packet loss occurs.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The bandwidth of the PW is fully occupied. Cause 2: The physical port has bit errors or packet loss. Cause 3: The fiber connector or the optical module is dirty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The bandwidth of the PW is fully occupied.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 449

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1. 2.

Check whether the bandwidth allocated to the faulty PW is fully occupied. If yes, increase the bandwidth of the PW or eliminate the sources that transmit a large amount of invalid data. Then, check whether the MPLS_PW_SF alarm is cleared.

Step 2 Cause 2: The physical port has bit errors or packet loss. 1. Check whether the fiber connector is loose. If yes, insert the fiber connector securely.

Step 3 Cause 3: The fiber connector or the optical module is dirty. 1. Clean the fiber connector or the optical module. For details, see Checking and cleaning fiber connectors.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.165 MPLS_PW_UNKNOWN
Description
The MPLS_PW_UNKNOWN is an alarm of unknown defects on the PW. This alarm occurs when the connectivity check (CC) packets of unexpected types, periods, and values are received within three consecutive periods.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


PW OAM fails.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The PW OAM configuration at the two ends is different.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The PW OAM configuration at the two ends is different. 1. Change the PW OAM configuration to the same at the two ends.

----End
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 450

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.3.166 MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI
Description
The MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI is an alarm of tunnel backward defect indication. This alarm occurs when the port of the local NE receives the backward defect indication (BDI) packet, notifying that the opposite NE detects that the tunnel is faulty.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the services on the local NE is normal.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The opposite NE detects MPLS alarms.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite NE detects MPLS alarms. 1. Clear the MPLS alarms reported on the opposite NE.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.167 MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess
Description
The MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess is an alarm indicating that excessive trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) are received in the tunnel. This alarm occurs when the Ethernet port of the local NE receives five or more correct CV/FFD packets within three consecutive CV/FFD periods.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 451

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


Services may be interrupted if excessive redundant packets are received.

Possible Causes
l Cause 1: Physical links are misconnected.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Physical links are misconnected. 1. Check whether any fiber or cable is misconnected between the two ends. If yes, reconnect the fiber or cable.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.168 MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI
Description
The MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI is an alarm of tunnel forward defect indication. This alarm is reported when the local NE receives the forward defect indication (FDI) packet, notifying that the upstream tunnel at the physical layer is faulty.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, services may be interrupted.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 452

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The upstream NE detects that the physical link that carries the tunnel is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The upstream NE detects that the physical link that carries the tunnel is faulty. If... The link-related alarms, such as MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR and MW_LOF, are reported The transmit board of the local NE reports hardware-related alarms (alarms on the optical modules or boards), such as HARD_BAD and LSR_NO_FITED ----End Then... Clear these alarms first.

Clear these alarms first.

Related Information
None.

A.3.169 MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV
Description
The MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV is an alarm of tunnel connectivity loss. This alarm occurs when the port of the local NE fails to receive expected CV/FFD packets within three CV/FFD periods. (The expected CV/FFD packets must carry correct TTSIs and have the correct type, period, and value.)

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the services that the faulty tunnel carries are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Cause 1: In detection mode of manual, the MPLS OAM settings, such as detection packet type and detection packet period, differ at the two ends. Cause 2: Severe congestion occurs on the network.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 453

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

l l

Cause 3: A certain board is faulty. Cause 4: The physical link between the two ends is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: In detection mode of manual, the MPLS OAM settings, such as detection packet type and detection packet period, differ at the two ends. 1. 2. Check whether the MPLS OAM settings are the same at the two ends. If the MPLS OAM settings are different at the two ends, change them to the same. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: Severe congestion occurs on the network. 1. If the alarm persists, check whether the bandwidth allocated to the faulty tunnel is fully used. If the bandwidth of the faulty tunnel is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or eliminate the sources that transmit a large amount of invalid data. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Step 3 Cause 3: A certain board is faulty. 1. Check whether the remote NE reports the COMMUN_FAIL alarm. If yes, you can infer that the remote NE is being reset. Wait until the COMMUN_FAIL alarm clears. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists 2. 3. Then... End the alarm handling. Go to the next step. Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 3.

Check whether the local NE and the remote NE report alarms related to optical modules or boards, such as HARD_BAD and LSR_NO_FITED. If yes, clear these alarms first. Then, check whether the MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV alarm clears. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 4.

Step 4 Cause 4: The physical link between the two ends is faulty. 1. Check whether any fiber or cable is damaged. If yes, replace the damaged fiber or cable.

----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 454

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.170 MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH
Description
The MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH is an alarm indicating that the trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) on the tunnel do not match with the specified one. This alarm is reported if no CV/FFD packets with correct TTSIs are received in three consecutive CV/FFD periods.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, services are interrupted or packets from other tunnels are received.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The tunnel settings are incorrect. For example, the LSR IDs or tunnel IDs differ at the two ends of the tunnel. Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The tunnel settings are incorrect. For example, the LSR IDs or tunnel IDs differ at the two ends of the tunnel. 1. Check whether the tunnel settings are the same at the two ends. l If the source NE is an ingress node, Sink Node is the LSR ID of the sink NE. If the sink NE is an egress node, Source Node is the LSR ID of the source NE. l Tunnel IDs of the source NE and sink NE of a tunnel must be set to the same. 2. If the tunnel IDs are different, change them to the same.

Step 2 Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected. 1. Check whether any fiber or cable is misconnected between the two ends. If yes, connect the fiber or cable properly.

----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 455

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.171 MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE
Description
The MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE is an alarm indicating that the trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) are mismerged in the tunnel. This alarm is reported if the CV/FFD packets with correct TTSIs and those with wrong TTSIs are received in three consecutive CV/FFD periods.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the packets from other tunnels are received.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: Multiple tunnels are configured with the same label. Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Multiple tunnels are configured with the same label. 1. 2. Check whether multiple tunnels are configured with the same label. If multiple tunnels are configured with the same label, delete the redundant labels or change the label of each tunnel to a unique value.

Step 2 Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected. 1. Check whether any fiber or cable is misconnected between the two ends. If yes, connect the fiber or cable properly.

----End

Related Information
On the NE, the label of each MPLS tunnel is unique.

A.3.172 MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 456

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Description
The MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL is an alarm indicating that the OAM protocol negotiation between the two ends of the tunnel fails.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, services are switched to the backup network and the LPT closes the access port of the remote NE at the same time.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The OAM function is enabled and the detection mode is auto-sensing on one end and is disabled on the other end. Cause 2: The tunnel is unavailable when the OAM function is enabled and the detection mode is auto-sensing.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The OAM function is enabled and the detection mode is auto-sensing on one end and is disabled on the other end. 1. Enable the OAM function. Step 2 Cause 2: The tunnel is unavailable when the OAM function is enabled and the detection mode is auto-sensing. 1. 2. Check whether the sink node of the alarmed tunnel reports the HARD_BAD, ETH_LOS, or R_LOS alarm. If yes, clear the alarm. After the OAM protocol negotiation succeeds, the MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL alarm clears.

----End

Related Information
None.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

457

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.173 MPLS_TUNNEL_SD
Description
The MPLS_TUNNEL_SD is an alarm of signal degrade on the tunnel. This alarm is reported when the packet loss rate of the CV/FFD crosses the SD threshold but is lower than the SF threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


Services degrade and moderate packet loss occurs.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: Excessive bit errors occur. Cause 2: The bandwidth of the tunnel is fully used.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Excessive bit errors occur. 1. 2. 1. Clear bit errors. If the alarm persists, proceed to cause 2. Check whether the bandwidth allocated to the tunnel is fully used. If the bandwidth of the faulty tunnel is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or eliminate the sources that transmit a large amount of invalid data. Check whether the alarm clears.

Step 2 Cause 2: The bandwidth of the tunnel is fully used.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.174 MPLS_TUNNEL_SF
Description
The MPLS_TUNNEL_SF is an alarm indicating that the tunnel signal degrades severely. This alarm is reported if the loss ratio of the CV/FFD packets is higher than the SF threshold and CV/ FFD packets are received in three consecutive periods.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 458

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the quality of service degrades severely and a large number of packets are lost.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: Excessive bit errors occur. Cause 2: The bandwidth of the tunnel is fully used.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Excessive bit errors occur. 1. 2. Clear bit errors. If the MPLS_TUNNEL_SF persists, go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The bandwidth of the tunnel is fully used. 1. On the NMS, check whether the bandwidth of the tunnel is fully used. If the bandwidth of the tunnel is fully used, increase the bandwidth allocated to the tunnel or eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data. Check whether the alarm is cleared.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.175 MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN
Description
The MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN is an alarm indicating that certain unknown defects exist on the tunnel. This alarm is reported when the port receives the CV packets and the FFD packets.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

459

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the OAM function is affected.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The OAM settings differ at the two ends. Cause 2: The NE receives packets from an unknown source.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The OAM settings differ at the two ends. 1. 2. If the MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN alarm is reported transiently, check whether Tunnel OAM configuration is changed on the local NE and the opposite NE. If the local NE and the opposite NE have different Tunnel OAM configuration, the MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN alarm is reported transiently and then the MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV alarm is reported. Ensure that both ends have the same Tunnel OAM configuration. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared. Check whether there is any service configured between the NE and an unknown source, or whether the NE is connected to an unknown source. If yes, modify the incorrect configuration or reconnect the fibers.

Step 2 Cause 2: The NE receives packets from an unknown source. 1. 2.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.176 MS_AIS
Description
The MS_AIS is an alarm indicating multiplex section alarms. This alarm is reported when the board detects that bits 6-8 of the K2 byte in the three consecutive frames are 111.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 460

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


The services on the line port are interrupted. If the services are configured with protection, protection switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty. Cause 2: The receive unit of the local site is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty. 1. Replace the line board at the opposite site based on the type of the alarmed board. If... The line board reports the alarm The IF board reports the alarm 2. Then... Replace the line board at the opposite end. Replace the IF board at the opposite end.

Replace the board and then check whether the alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared after the board replacement The alarm persists after the board replacement Then... End the fault handling. Go to the next step.

3.

Replace the system control, cross-connect, and timing board at the opposite end. If... The alarm is cleared after the board replacement The alarm persists after the board replacement Then... End the fault handling. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The receive unit of the local site is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.177 MS_CROSSTR
Description
The MS_CROSSTR is an alarm indicating that a performance indicator of the multiplex section crosses the threshold. This alarm is reported when the board detects that the MS BER performance indicator crosses the preset threshold.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 461

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the performance monitoring period: l 0x01: 15 minutes l 0x02: 24 hours Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Parameter 2 is always 0x00. Parameter 3 indicate the ID of a performance event that causes the alarm and has the following meanings: l 0x10: MSBBE l 0x11: MSES l 0x12: MSSES l 0x13: MSFEBBE l 0x14: MSFEES l 0x15: MSFESES l 0x16: MSUAS l 0x17: MSCSES l 0x18: MSFECSES l 0x21: MSFEUAS

Impact on the System


A large number of bit errors occur in the services, and the services may be interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: Services are interrupted for a long time. Cause 2: The MS BER performance indicator crosses the preset threshold.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Services are interrupted for a long time.
NOTE

Handle the alarm as follows if the value of parameter 3 is 0x16:

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

462

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1. 2.

Check whether fibers are properly connected. If not, connect the fibers again according to planning information. Check whether cross-connections are configured for service ports. If not, configure crossconnections again according to planning information. Check the threshold crossing records of MS BER performance events to find out the performance event that crosses the preset threshold. For details, see 8.3.8 Browsing the Performance Event Threshold-Crossing Records. Handle the performance event that crosses the threshold.

Step 2 Cause 2: The MS BER performance indicator crosses the preset threshold. 1.

2.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.178 MS_RDI
Description
The MS_RDI is an alarm indicating that data reception at the remote end of the multiplex section fails. This alarm is reported when the board detects that bits 6-8 of the K2 byte are 110.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The services on the local site are not affected. The services received by the opposite station, however, are interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The local site receives a message from the opposite station, and the message indicates that data reception at the remote end of the multiplex section fails.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local site receives a message from the opposite station, and the message indicates that data reception at the remote end of the multiplex section fails. 1. Rectify the fault that occurs on the opposite station. The possible alarms are as follows:
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 463

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

l MS_AIS l R_LOS l R_LOF l B2_EXC l B2_SD ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.179 MS_REI
Description
The MS_REI is an alarm indicating that bit errors occur on the remote end of the multiplex section. This alarm is reported when the board detects that the M1 byte is non-zero.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Warning Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The services on the local site are not affected. The services received by the opposite station, however, has bit errors.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The local site receives a message from the opposite station, and the message indicates that bit errors occur on the remote end of the multiplex section.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local site receives a message from the opposite station, and the message indicates that bit errors occur on the remote end of the multiplex section. 1. Handle the MS_BBE performance event on the port of the opposite station.

----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 464

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.180 MSAD_CROSSTR
Description
The MSAD_CROSSTR is an alarm indicating that the adaptation performance indicator of the multiplex section crosses the threshold. This alarm is reported when the board detects that an AU pointer adaptation performance indicator crosses the preset threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the performance monitoring period: l 0x01: 15 minutes l 0x02: 24 hours Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of a performance event that causes the alarm. l 0x2a: AUPJCHIGH l 0x2b: AUPJCLOW l 0x2c: AUPJCNEW

Impact on the System


Bit errors may occur in the services.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: An AU pointer adaptation performance indicator crosses the preset threshold.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: An AU pointer adaptation performance indicator crosses the preset threshold. 1. Check the threshold crossing records of the AU pointer adaptation performance events to find out the performance event that crosses the preset threshold. For details, see 8.3.8 Browsing the Performance Event Threshold-Crossing Records.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 465

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

2.

Handle the performance event that crosses the threshold.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.181 MULTI_RPL_OWNER
Description
The MULTI_RPL_OWNER is an alarm indicating that the ring network contains several RPL_OWNER nodes.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Meaning Indicate the ID of the ERPS instance.

Impact on the System


The ERPS protection fails and the services configured on the Ethernet ring are interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The related data is configured incorrectly.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The related data is configured incorrectly. 1. Reconfigure the ERPS protection. For details, see Creating Ethernet Ring Protection Instances.

----End
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 466

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
The following table describes the meanings of the parameters in the MULTI_RPL_OWNER alarm reported by the EMS6. Name Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Parameter 5, Parameter 6 Meaning Indicates the port ID. Indicate the ID of the ERPS instance.

A.3.182 MW_AM_TEST
Description
The MW_AM_TEST is an alarm indicating that the IF port is in the AM testing state.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Other alarms

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The transmission capacity is reduced during the AM test.

Possible Causes
l Cause: The AM testing is enabled.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause: The AM testing is enabled. 1. After the AM testing ends, disable the AM testing.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.183 MW_BER_EXC
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 467

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Description
The MW_BER_EXC is an alarm indicating that excessive bit errors occur on the radio link. This alarm is reported when the bit errors on the radio link exceed the specified threshold (10-3 by default).

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the MW_BER_EXC alarm occurs, the service on the port is interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: Signal attenuation on the radio link is very heavy. Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty. Cause 3: The receive unit of the local site is faulty. Cause 4: An interference event occurs.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Signal attenuation on the radio link is very heavy. 1. At the local end, check whether the receive power of the ODU is normal. If yes, determine the abnormality and take proper measures. For details, see Querying the Historical Transmit Power and Receive Power

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

468

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The RSL is lower than the receiver sensitivity

Then... Follow the steps: 1. Check the installation of the antenna to ensure that the azimuth of the antenna meets the requirement. 2. Check the antenna direction. Check whether the received signal is from the main lobe. If the antenna direction does not meet the requirement, adjust the antenna in a wide range. 3. Check whether the setting of the polarization direction of the antenna is correct. Adjust the incorrect polarization direction. 4. Check whether the antenna gain at both the transmit and receive ends meets the specifications. Replace the antennas that do not meet the requirement. 5. Check whether any mountain or building obstacle exists in the transmit direction. If yes, contact the network planning department for proper modification of the planning design, hence preventing the block of the mountain or building obstacle.

The RSL is higher than the specified RSL of the network. The offset value is tens of decibels. The duration is from tens of seconds to several hours.

Slow up fading occurs. Follow the steps: 1. Check whether any co-channel interference occurs. a. Mute the ODU at the opposite end. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. b. Check the RSL at the local end. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. If the RSL exceeds -90 dBm, it indicates that there is co-channel interference that may affect the long-term availability and errored-second performance of the system. 2. Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze the interference source. 3. Contact the spectrum management department to clear the interference spectrum or change plans to minimize the interference.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

469

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The RSL is lower than the specified RSL of the network. The offset value is tens of decibels. The duration is from tens of seconds to several hours.

Then... Slow down fading occurs. Generally, the radio link may be faulty in both directions, because slow fading is imposed by the transmission path. Contact the network planning department to make the following changes: l Increase the installation height of the antenna. l Reduce the transmission distance. l Increase the antenna gain. l Increase the transmit power.

If the RSL is lower than or higher than Fast fading occurs. Contact the network planning the specified RSL of the network and if department to make the following changes: the duration is from several milliseconds l Adjust the position of the antenna to block the to tens of seconds. reflected wave or make the reflection point fall on the ground that has a small reflection coefficient, therefore reducing the multipath fading. l Adjust the RF configuration to make the links in the 1+1 SD configuration. l If the links are configured with the 1+1 SD protection, adjust the height offset between two antennas to make the receive power of one antenna stronger than the receive power of the other antenna. l Increase the fading margin. Step 2 Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty. Locate the fault by looping back the opposite station and excluding the position one by one. Follow the steps: 1. Perform an inloop on the IF port at the opposite end. For details, see 8.6.6 Setting Loopback for the IF Board. Check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified after the loopback. If... The fault at the opposite end is not rectified The fault at the opposite end is rectified 2. 3. 4. Then... Replace the IF board. Go to the next step.

Check whether the cable connector is prepared according to the requirement. If any cable connector does not meet the requirement, make a new connector. Check whether the IF cable is wet, broken, or pressed. Replace the cable that does not meet the requirement. Then, check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified. If... Then...

The fault at the opposite end is not rectified Replace the ODU at the opposite end.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 470

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The fault at the opposite end is rectified Step 3 Cause 3: The receive unit of the local site is faulty.

Then... End the alarm handling.

Locate the fault by looping back the opposite station and excluding the position one by one. Follow the steps: 1. Perform an inloop on the IF port at the local end. For details, see 8.6.6 Setting Loopback for the IF Board. Check whether the fault at the local end is rectified after the loopback. If... The fault at the opposite end is not rectified The fault at the opposite end is rectified 2. 3. 4. Then... Replace the IF board. Go to the next step.

Check whether the cable connector is prepared according to the requirement. If any cable connector does not meet the requirement, make a new connector. Check whether the IF cable is wet, broken, or pressed. Replace the cable that does not meet the requirement. Then, check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified. If... The fault at the opposite end is not rectified The fault at the opposite end is rectified Then... Replace the ODU at the local end. End the alarm handling.

Step 4 Cause 4: An interference event occurs. 1. Check whether any co-channel interference occurs. a. b. Mute the ODU at the opposite end. Check the RSL at the local end. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. If the RSL exceeds -90 dBm, it indicates that there is co-channel interference that may affect the long-term availability and errored-second performance of the system.

2.

Check whether any adjacent channel interference occurs. a. b. c. d. e. Mute the ODU at the opposite end. Adjust the radio working mode at the local end and use the minimum channel spacing. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. Decrease the received frequency at the local end by a half of the channel spacing. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. Test and record the RSL. Increase the received frequency at the local end, with a step length of 0.5 MHz or 1 MHz, and record the RSL accordingly until the received frequency is equal to the original received frequency plus a half of the channel spacing. Compare the recorded RSLs, and check whether the RSL in a certain spectrum is abnormal if the received frequency is within the permitted range.

f. 3.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze the interference source.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 471

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

4.

Contact the spectrum management department to clear the interference spectrum or change plans to minimize the interference.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.184 MW_BER_SD
Description
The MW_BER_SD is an alarm indicating that signal deteriorates on the radio link. This alarm is reported when the bit errors on the radio link exceed the specified threshold (10-6 by default) but does not reach the MW_BER_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default).

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The service performance on the port deteriorates. If the equipment is configured with 1+1 FD/ SD protection, switching on the channel side may be triggered.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: Signal attenuation on the radio link is very heavy. Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty. Cause 3: The receive unit of the local site is faulty. Cause 4: An interference event occurs.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Signal attenuation on the radio link is very heavy. 1. At the local end, check whether the receive power of the ODU is normal. If yes, determine the abnormality and take proper measures. For details, see Querying the Historical Transmit Power and Receive Power

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

472

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The RSL is lower than the receiver sensitivity

Then... Follow the steps: 1. Check the installation of the antenna to ensure that the azimuth of the antenna meets the requirement. 2. Check the antenna direction. Check whether the received signal is from the main lobe. If the antenna direction does not meet the requirement, adjust the antenna in a wide range. 3. Check whether the setting of the polarization direction of the antenna is correct. Adjust the incorrect polarization direction. 4. Check whether the antenna gain at both the transmit and receive ends meets the specifications. Replace the antennas that do not meet the requirement. 5. Check whether any mountain or building obstacle exists in the transmit direction. If yes, contact the network planning department for proper modification of the planning design, hence preventing the block of the mountain or building obstacle.

The RSL is higher than the specified RSL of the network. The offset value is tens of decibels. The duration is from tens of seconds to several hours.

Slow up fading occurs. Follow the steps: 1. Check whether any co-channel interference occurs. a. Mute the ODU at the opposite end. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. b. Check the RSL at the local end. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. If the RSL exceeds -90 dBm, it indicates that there is co-channel interference that may affect the long-term availability and errored-second performance of the system. 2. Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze the interference source. 3. Contact the spectrum management department to clear the interference spectrum or change plans to minimize the interference.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

473

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The RSL is lower than the specified RSL of the network. The offset value is tens of decibels. The duration is from tens of seconds to several hours.

Then... Slow down fading occurs. Generally, the radio link may be faulty in both directions, because slow fading is imposed by the transmission path. Contact the network planning department to make the following changes: l Increase the installation height of the antenna. l Reduce the transmission distance. l Increase the antenna gain. l Increase the transmit power.

If the RSL is lower than or higher than Fast fading occurs. Contact the network planning the specified RSL of the network and if department to make the following changes: the duration is from several milliseconds l Adjust the position of the antenna to block the to tens of seconds. reflected wave or make the reflection point fall on the ground that has a small reflection coefficient, therefore reducing the multipath fading. l Adjust the RF configuration to make the links in the 1+1 SD configuration. l If the links are configured with the 1+1 SD protection, adjust the height offset between two antennas to make the receive power of one antenna stronger than the receive power of the other antenna. l Increase the fading margin. Step 2 Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty. Locate the fault by looping back the opposite station and excluding the position one by one. Follow the steps: 1. Perform an inloop on the IF port at the opposite end. For details, see 8.6.6 Setting Loopback for the IF Board. Check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified after the loopback. If... The fault at the opposite end is not rectified The fault at the opposite end is rectified 2. 3. 4. Then... Replace the IF board. Go to the next step.

Check whether the cable connector is prepared according to the requirement. If any cable connector does not meet the requirement, make a new connector. Check whether the IF cable is wet, broken, or pressed. Replace the cable that does not meet the requirement. Then, check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified. If... Then...

The fault at the opposite end is not rectified Replace the ODU at the opposite end.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 474

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The fault at the opposite end is rectified Step 3 Cause 3: The receive unit of the local site is faulty.

Then... End the alarm handling.

Locate the fault by looping back the opposite station and excluding the position one by one. Follow the steps: 1. Perform an inloop on the IF port at the local end. For details, see 8.6.6 Setting Loopback for the IF Board. Check whether the fault at the local end is rectified after the loopback. If... The fault at the opposite end is not rectified The fault at the opposite end is rectified 2. 3. 4. Then... Replace the IF board. Go to the next step.

Check whether the cable connector is prepared according to the requirement. If any cable connector does not meet the requirement, make a new connector. Check whether the IF cable is wet, broken, or pressed. Replace the cable that does not meet the requirement. Then, check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified. If... The fault at the opposite end is not rectified The fault at the opposite end is rectified Then... Replace the ODU at the local end. End the alarm handling.

Step 4 Cause 4: An interference event occurs. 1. Check whether any co-channel interference occurs. a. b. Mute the ODU at the opposite end. Check the RSL at the local end. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. If the RSL exceeds -90 dBm, it indicates that there is co-channel interference that may affect the long-term availability and errored-second performance of the system.

2.

Check whether any adjacent channel interference occurs. a. b. c. d. e. Mute the ODU at the opposite end. Adjust the radio working mode at the local end and use the minimum channel spacing. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. Decrease the received frequency at the local end by a half of the channel spacing. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. Test and record the RSL. Increase the received frequency at the local end, with a step length of 0.5 MHz or 1 MHz, and record the RSL accordingly until the received frequency is equal to the original received frequency plus a half of the channel spacing. Compare the recorded RSLs, and check whether the RSL in a certain spectrum is abnormal if the received frequency is within the permitted range.

f. 3.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze the interference source.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 475

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

4.

Contact the spectrum management department to clear the interference spectrum or change plans to minimize the interference.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.185 MW_CFG_MISMATCH
Description
The MW_CFG_MISMATCH is an alarm of configuration mismatch on radio links. This alarm occurs when an NE detects configuration mismatch on both ends of a radio link. For example, the number of E1 signals, the number of STM-1 signals, AM enabling, 1588 overhead enabling, modulation mode may be configured differently on both ends of a radio link.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the cause of the fault. l 0x01: The number of E1 signals is different. l 0x02: The AM enabling is different. l 0x03: The 1588 overhead enabling is different. l 0x04: The modulation mode is different. l 0x05: The service mode is different. l 0x06: The number of STM-1 signals is different. l 0x09: The IP header compression enabling is different. Parameter 2 When the value of Parameter 1 is 0x09: l 0x01: The air interface compression at L2 is different. l 0x02: The air interface compression at L3 is different. When Parameter 1 takes another value, Parameter 2 is reserved.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

476

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the service configuration cannot take effect or services are interrupted. After the NE is power cycled or reset, this alarm may still affect services.

Possible Causes
l l l l l l l l Cause 1: The number of E1 signals is different on both ends of a radio link. Cause 2: The AM enabling is different on both ends of a radio link. Cause 3: The 1588 overhead enabling is different on both ends of a radio link. Cause 4: The modulation mode is different on both ends of a radio link. Cause 5: The service mode is different on both ends of a radio link. Cause 6: The IP header compression is different on both ends of a radio link. Cause 7: The air interface compression at L2 or L3 is different. Cause 8: The number of STM-1 signals is different on both ends of a radio link.

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the possible cause of the alarm according to the alarm parameters. Step 2 Check the configuration on both ends of the radio link. Ensure that the configuration is the same on both ends of the radio link. For details, see Managing Radio Links. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.186 MW_CONT_WAVE
Description
The MW_CONT_WAVE is an alarm of continuous wave. This alarm occurs if the continuous wave function is enabled on the IF board and clears after the continuous wave function is disabled.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


If the continuous wave function is enabled, radio links cannot transmit services.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 477

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The continuous wave function is enabled.

Procedure
Step 1 Disable the continuous wave function. 1. 2. 3. 4. In NE Explorer, select the IF board. Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Select the alarmed port from IF Attribution. Set 350MHz Consecutive Wave Status to Stop.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.187 MW_E1_LOST
Description
The MW_E1_LOST is an alarm indicating that E1 services are lost. This alarm occurs when the AM downshifts the modulation scheme or E1 bandwidth decreases in the current modulation scheme.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the timeslots of E1 services.

Impact on the System


Some E1 services are lost.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 478

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The AM downshifts the modulation scheme. Cause 2: E1 bandwidth decreases in the current modulation scheme.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The AM downshifts the modulation scheme. 1. Handle the alarm according to AM_DOWNSHIFT.

Step 2 Cause 2: E1 bandwidth decreases in the current modulation scheme. 1. Check whether the decrease of E1 bandwidth is caused by incorrect operations. If yes, restore E1 bandwidth to an appropriate value; if not, ignore the alarm.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.188 MW_FEC_UNCOR
Description
The MW_FEC_UNCOR is an alarm indicating that radio frames forward error correction (FEC) encoding cannot be corrected.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


Bit errors occur in the services. If the equipment is configured with 1+1 FD/SD protection, HSM channel protection switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
l l l l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Cause 1: Signal attenuation on the radio link is very heavy. Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty. Cause 3: The receive unit of the local site is faulty. Cause 4: An interference event occurs.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 479

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Signal attenuation on the radio link is very heavy. 1. At the local end, check whether the receive power of the ODU is normal. If yes, determine the abnormality and take proper measures. For details, see Querying the Historical Transmit Power and Receive Power Then... Follow the steps: 1. Check the installation of the antenna to ensure that the azimuth of the antenna meets the requirement. 2. Check the antenna direction. Check whether the received signal is from the main lobe. If the antenna direction does not meet the requirement, adjust the antenna in a wide range. 3. Check whether the setting of the polarization direction of the antenna is correct. Adjust the incorrect polarization direction. 4. Check whether the antenna gain at both the transmit and receive ends meets the specifications. Replace the antennas that do not meet the requirement. 5. Check whether any mountain or building obstacle exists in the transmit direction. If yes, contact the network planning department for proper modification of the planning design, hence preventing the block of the mountain or building obstacle.

If... The RSL is lower than the receiver sensitivity

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

480

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The RSL is higher than the specified RSL of the network. The offset value is tens of decibels. The duration is from tens of seconds to several hours.

Then... Slow up fading occurs. Follow the steps: 1. Check whether any co-channel interference occurs. a. Mute the ODU at the opposite end. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. b. Check the RSL at the local end. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. If the RSL exceeds -90 dBm, it indicates that there is co-channel interference that may affect the long-term availability and errored-second performance of the system. 2. Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze the interference source. 3. Contact the spectrum management department to clear the interference spectrum or change plans to minimize the interference.

The RSL is lower than the specified RSL of the network. The offset value is tens of decibels. The duration is from tens of seconds to several hours.

Slow down fading occurs. Generally, the radio link may be faulty in both directions, because slow fading is imposed by the transmission path. Contact the network planning department to make the following changes: l Increase the installation height of the antenna. l Reduce the transmission distance. l Increase the antenna gain. l Increase the transmit power.

If the RSL is lower than or higher than Fast fading occurs. Contact the network planning the specified RSL of the network and if department to make the following changes: the duration is from several milliseconds l Adjust the position of the antenna to block the to tens of seconds. reflected wave or make the reflection point fall on the ground that has a small reflection coefficient, therefore reducing the multipath fading. l Adjust the RF configuration to make the links in the 1+1 SD configuration. l If the links are configured with the 1+1 SD protection, adjust the height offset between two antennas to make the receive power of one antenna stronger than the receive power of the other antenna. l Increase the fading margin.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

481

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Step 2 Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty. Locate the fault by looping back the opposite station and excluding the position one by one. Follow the steps: 1. Perform an inloop on the IF port at the opposite end. For details, see 8.6.6 Setting Loopback for the IF Board. Check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified after the loopback. If... The fault at the opposite end is not rectified The fault at the opposite end is rectified 2. 3. 4. Then... Replace the IF board. Go to the next step.

Check whether the cable connector is prepared according to the requirement. If any cable connector does not meet the requirement, make a new connector. Check whether the IF cable is wet, broken, or pressed. Replace the cable that does not meet the requirement. Then, check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified. If... Then...

The fault at the opposite end is not rectified Replace the ODU at the opposite end. The fault at the opposite end is rectified Step 3 Cause 3: The receive unit of the local site is faulty. Locate the fault by looping back the opposite station and excluding the position one by one. Follow the steps: 1. Perform an inloop on the IF port at the local end. For details, see 8.6.6 Setting Loopback for the IF Board. Check whether the fault at the local end is rectified after the loopback. If... The fault at the opposite end is not rectified The fault at the opposite end is rectified 2. 3. 4. Then... Replace the IF board. Go to the next step. End the alarm handling.

Check whether the cable connector is prepared according to the requirement. If any cable connector does not meet the requirement, make a new connector. Check whether the IF cable is wet, broken, or pressed. Replace the cable that does not meet the requirement. Then, check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified. If... The fault at the opposite end is not rectified The fault at the opposite end is rectified Then... Replace the ODU at the local end. End the alarm handling.

Step 4 Cause 4: An interference event occurs. 1. Check whether any co-channel interference occurs. a. b. Mute the ODU at the opposite end. Check the RSL at the local end. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. If the RSL exceeds -90 dBm, it indicates that there is co-channel
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 482

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

interference that may affect the long-term availability and errored-second performance of the system. 2. Check whether any adjacent channel interference occurs. a. b. c. d. e. Mute the ODU at the opposite end. Adjust the radio working mode at the local end and use the minimum channel spacing. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. Decrease the received frequency at the local end by a half of the channel spacing. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. Test and record the RSL. Increase the received frequency at the local end, with a step length of 0.5 MHz or 1 MHz, and record the RSL accordingly until the received frequency is equal to the original received frequency plus a half of the channel spacing. Compare the recorded RSLs, and check whether the RSL in a certain spectrum is abnormal if the received frequency is within the permitted range.

f. 3. 4.

Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze the interference source. Contact the spectrum management department to clear the interference spectrum or change plans to minimize the interference.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.189 MW_LIM
Description
The MW_LIM is an alarm indicating that a mismatched radio link identifier is detected. This alarm is reported if an IF board detects that the link ID in the radio frame overheads is inconsistent with the specified link ID.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


After the IDU IF board reports the MW_LIM alarm, the IF board inserts the AIS alarm into the received signal. Then, the services on the radio link are interrupted. If the services are configured with SNCP, protection switching may be triggered.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 483

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The link ID of the local site does not match with the link ID of the opposite station. Cause 2: The services on other radio links are received due to the incorrect configuration of the radio link receive frequency at the local or opposite station. Cause 3: The antenna receives the radio from the other stations, because the direction of the antenna is set incorrectly. Cause 4: The polarization direction of the XPIC is incorrect.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The link ID of the local site does not match with the link ID of the opposite station. 1. Check whether the link ID of the local site matches with the link ID of the opposite station. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. If not, set the link IDs of the two stations to the same value according to the requirements of the networking planning.

Step 2 Cause 2: The services on other radio links are received due to the incorrect configuration of the radio link receive frequency at the local or opposite station. 1. Check whether the receive and transmit frequencies of the local site are consistent with the receive and transmit frequencies of the opposite station. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. If not, set the receive and transmit frequencies of the two stations again.

Step 3 Cause 3: The antenna receives radio signals from the other stations, because the direction of the antenna is set incorrectly. 1. Adjust the direction of the antenna and ensure that the antennas at both ends are aligned.

Step 4 Cause 4: The polarization direction of the XPIC is incorrect. 1. If XPIC protection groups are configured, check whether the XPIC configuration is correct. For details, see Creating an XPIC Workgroup. a. Check whether the settings of XPIC IF board in polarization direction-V and polarization direction-H meet the requirement of the planning. If... The polarization direction does not meet the requirement of the planning The polarization direction meets the requirement of the planning Then... Delete the working XPIC group that is configured incorrectly and create the other working XPIC group again. Go to the next step.

b.

Check whether Link ID-V and Link ID-H meet the requirement of the planning. If... The link ID does not meet the requirement of the planning Then... Reset the ID of the radio link of the XPIC IF board according to the planning. For details, see Creating an XPIC Working Group.
484

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The link ID meets the requirement of the planning 2.

Then... Go to the next step.

Check and modify the XPIC IF board and ODU, and the mapping relationship between the ODU and the feed bottom. Ensure that the XPIC IF boards in the polarization direction V of the two ends are interconnected with each other through the radio link in the polarization direction V, and the XPIC IF boards in the polarization direction H of the two ends are interconnected with each other through the radio link in the polarization direction H.

----End

Related Information
The MW_LIM alarm is generated due to the inconsistency between the specified link ID and the received link ID. When the MW_LOF alarm is generated on the link, the received link ID is a random value. In this case, the link ID is invalid. The MW_LIM alarm is also suppressed by the MW_LOF alarm.

A.3.190 MW_LOF
Description
The MW_LOF is an alarm indicating that the radio frame is lost.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The services are interrupted. If the system is configured with protection, protection switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The other alarms are generated. Cause 2: In the case of TDM radio services, the IF working modes at the local site and the opposite station are different. In the case of Integrated IP radio services, the channel bandwidth and modulation modes at the local site and the opposite station are different. Cause 3: The operating frequency of the ODU at the local site is inconsistent with the operating frequency of the ODU at the opposite station. Cause 4: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 485

l l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

l l l

Cause 5: The receive unit of the local site is faulty. Cause 6: The receive power of the ODU is abnormal. Cause 7: An interference event occurs.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The other alarms are generated. 1. Check whether any alarms are generated in the equipment of the local site. If yes, take priority to clear them. The relevant alarms are as follows: l HARD_BAD l VOLT_LOS l IF_CABLE_OPEN l BD_STATUS l RADIO_RSL_LOW l CONFIG_NOSUPPORT l TEMP_ALARM Step 2 Cause 2: In the case of TDM radio services, the IF working modes at the local site and the opposite station are different. In the case of Integrated IP radio services, the channel bandwidth and modulation modes at the local site and the opposite station are different. 1. In the case of TDM radio services, check whether the working mode of the IF board at the local site is consistent with the working mode of the IF board at the opposite station. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. If not, reset the working mode of the IF board according to the network planning. In the case of Hybrid radio services, check whether the channel bandwidth and modulation modes are the same at both ends. If not, change the channel bandwidth and modulation modes according to the network planning. For details, see Setting the Hybrid/AM Attributes. Step 3 Cause 3: The operating frequency of the ODU at the local site is inconsistent with the operating frequency of the ODU at the opposite station. 1. 2. Ensure that the type of the ODU at the local site is consistent with the type of the ODU at the opposite station. Reset the operating frequency of the ODU according to the network planning. For details, see Setting ODU Transmit Frequency Attributes. Set the transmit frequency of the local site to the same as the receive frequency of the opposite station. Then, set the receive frequency of the local site to the same as the transmit frequency of the opposite station. Step 4 Cause 4: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty. 1. Check whether any alarms are generated in the equipment of the local site. If yes, take priority to clear them. The relevant alarms are as follows: l HARD_BAD l BD_STATUS l VOLT_LOS
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 486

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

l IF_CABLE_OPEN l RADIO_MUTE l RADIO_TSL_HIGH l RADIO_TSL_LOW l TEMP_ALARM 2. Locate the fault by looping back the opposite station. Follow the steps: a. Perform an inloop on the IF port at the opposite end. For details, see 8.6.6 Setting Loopback for the IF Board. Check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified after the loopback. If... The fault at the opposite end is not rectified The fault at the opposite end is rectified b. c. d. Then... Replace the IF board. Go to the next step.

Check whether the cable connector is prepared according to the requirement. If any cable connector does not meet the requirement, make a new connector. Check whether the IF cable is wet, broken, or pressed. Replace the cable that does not meet the requirement. Then, check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified. If... The fault at the opposite end is not rectified Then... Replace the ODU at the opposite end.

The fault at the opposite end is rectified End the alarm handling. Step 5 Cause 5: The receive unit of the local site is faulty. 1. Locate the fault by looping back the opposite station. Follow the steps: a. Perform an inloop on the IF port at the local end. For details, see 8.6.6 Setting Loopback for the IF Board. Check whether the fault at the local end is rectified after the loopback. If... The fault at the opposite end is not rectified The fault at the opposite end is rectified b. c. d. Then... Replace the IF board. Go to the next step.

Check whether the cable connector is prepared according to the requirement. If any cable connector does not meet the requirement, make a new connector. Check whether the IF cable is wet, broken, or pressed. Replace the cable that does not meet the requirement. Check whether the fault at the local end is rectified.

Step 6 Cause 6: The receive power of the ODU is abnormal.


Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 487

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

At the local site, check whether the receive power of the ODU is abnormal. For details, see Browse history performance events. If yes, determine the abnormality and take proper measures. Then... Follow the steps: 1. Check the installation of the antenna to ensure that the azimuth of the antenna meets the requirement. 2. Check the antenna direction. Check whether the received signal is from the main lobe. If the antenna direction does not meet the requirement, adjust the antenna in a wide range. 3. Check whether the setting of the polarization direction of the antenna is correct. Adjust the incorrect polarization direction. 4. Check whether the antenna gain at both the transmit and receive ends meets the specifications. Replace the antennas that do not meet the requirement. 5. Check whether any mountain or building obstacle exists in the transmit direction. If yes, contact the network planning department for proper modification of the planning design, hence preventing the block of the mountain or building obstacle.

If... The RSL is lower than the receiver sensitivity

The RSL is higher than the specified RSL of the network. The offset value is tens of decibels. The duration is from tens of seconds to several hours.

Slow up fading occurs. Follow the steps: 1. Check whether any co-channel interference occurs. a. Mute the ODU at the opposite end. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. b. Check the RSL at the local end. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. If the RSL exceeds -90 dBm, it indicates that there is co-channel interference that may affect the long-term availability and errored-second performance of the system. 2. Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze the interference source. 3. Contact the spectrum management department to clear the interference spectrum or change plans to minimize the interference.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

488

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The RSL is lower than the specified RSL of the network. The offset value is tens of decibels. The duration is from tens of seconds to several hours.

Then... Slow down fading occurs. Generally, the radio link may be faulty in both directions, because slow fading is imposed by the transmission path. Contact the network planning department to make the following changes: l Increase the installation height of the antenna. l Reduce the transmission distance. l Increase the antenna gain. l Increase the transmit power.

If the RSL is lower than or higher than Fast fading occurs. Contact the network planning the specified RSL of the network and if department to make the following changes: the duration is from several milliseconds l Adjust the position of the antenna to block the to tens of seconds. reflected wave or make the reflection point fall on the ground that has a small reflection coefficient, therefore reducing the multipath fading. l Adjust the RF configuration to make the links in the 1+1 SD configuration. l If the links are configured with the 1+1 SD protection, adjust the height offset between two antennas to make the receive power of one antenna stronger than the receive power of the other antenna. l Increase the fading margin. Step 7 Cause 7: An interference event occurs. Follow the steps: 1. Check whether any co-channel interference occurs. a. b. Mute the ODU at the opposite end. Check the RSL at the local end. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. If the RSL exceeds -90 dBm, it indicates that there is co-channel interference that may affect the long-term availability and errored-second performance of the system. Mute the ODU at the opposite end. Adjust the radio working mode at the local end and use the minimum channel spacing. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. Decrease the received frequency at the local end by a half of the channel spacing. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. Test and record the RSL.

2.

Check whether any adjacent channel interference occurs. a. b. c. d.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

489

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

e.

Increase the received frequency at the local end, with a step length of 0.5 MHz or 1 MHz, and record the RSL accordingly until the received frequency is equal to the original received frequency plus a half of the channel spacing. Compare the recorded RSLs, and check whether the RSL in a certain spectrum is abnormal if the received frequency is within the permitted range.

f. 3. 4.

Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze the interference source. Contact the spectrum management department to clear the interference spectrum or change plans to minimize the interference.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.191 MW_RDI
Description
The MW_RDI is an alarm indicating that there are defects at the remote end of the radio link. This alarm is reported when the IF board detects an RDI in the radio frame overheads.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


If the local site is configured with the reverse switching function, the 1+1 switching is triggered on the IF board when the working and protection IF boards receive the MW_RDI alarm at the same time. This alarm also indicates that the services received by the opposite station are interrupted.

Possible Causes
After detecting a service alarm that is caused by the fault in a radio link, the receive station returns a radio link fault indication to the transmit station.

Procedure
Step 1 Clear the radio alarms that occur at the opposite station. The possible alarms are as follows: l MW_LOF l R_LOF
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 490

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

l R_LOC l MW_FEC_UNCOR l XPIC_LOS ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.192 NESF_LOST
Description
The NESF_LOST is an alarm indicating that the NE software is lost. This alarm is reported when the system control, cross-connect, and timing board detects that the NE software is lost.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning The value is always 0x01.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

491

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name

Meaning

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the routine inspection object. l 0x01: FPGA of the system control board in ofs1 l 0x02: FPGA of the system control board in ofs2 l 0x03: ofs1/hwx/nesoft.hwx l 0x04: ofs2/hwx/nesoft.hwx l 0x05: ofs1/hwx/ne.ini l 0x06: ofs2/hwx/ne.ini l 0x07: ofs1/hwx/ocp.ini l 0x08: ofs2/hwx/ocp.ini l 0x09: ofs1/fpga/if1_002.pga l 0x0a: ofs2/fpga/if1_002.pga l 0x0b: ofs1/fpga/if1_250.pga l 0x0c: ofs2/fpga/if1_250.pga l 0x0d: ofs1/fpga/sl1d.pga l 0x0e: ofs2/fpga/sl1d.pga l 0x0f: ofs1/fpga/sl91ifu2.pga l 0x10: ofs2/fpga/sl91ifu2.pga l 0x11: ofs1/fpga/sl91ifx2.pga l 0x12: ofs2/fpga/sl91ifx2.pga l 0x13: ofs1/fpga/sl91aux.pga l 0x14: ofs2/fpga/sl91aux.pga l 0x15: ofs1/hwx/lusoft.hwx l 0x16: ofs2/hwx/lusoft.hwx l 0x17: ofs1/hwx/lusoft.ini l 0x18: ofs2/hwx/lusoft.ini l 0x19: ofs1/fpga/sl91em6t.pga l 0x1a: ofs2/fpga/sl91em6t.pga l 0x1b: ofs1/fpga/pvg610.pga l 0x1c: ofs2/fpga/pvg610.pga l 0x1d: ofs1/fpga/pvg610x.pga l 0x1e: ofs2/fpga/pvg610x.pga l 0x1f: ofs1/hwx/extbios.hwx l 0x20: ofs2/hwx/extbios.hwx l 0x21: ofs1/hwx/luexbios.hwx l 0x22: ofs2/hwx/luexbios.hwx

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

492

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 4

Meaning Indicates the specific alarm cause when a different bit is 1. l 0x01: If the first bit is 1, it indicates that the file does not exist. l 0x02: If the second bit is 1, it indicates that verification of the file fails.

Impact on the System


If the NE software does not exist in the active and standby areas, an NE cannot be restarted after it is powered off or reset.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: No new NE software is loaded after the existing NE software is erased. Cause 2: Loading the NE software is unsuccessful. Cause 3: A certain board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: No new NE software is loaded after the existing NE software is erased. Cause 2: Loading the NE software is unsuccessful. 1. Check whether the alarm is caused by the loading operation. If... The alarm is caused by the loading operation The alarm is not caused by the loading operation Step 2 Cause 3: A certain board is faulty. 1. For details, see 6.9 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board. Then... Contact the Huawei technical support engineers to reload the software. Go to the next step.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.193 NESOFT_MM
Description
The NESOFT_MM is an alarm indicating that the first software system is different from the second software system. This alarm is reported when the NE detects that the first software system and the second software system of the system control, cross-connect, and timing board mismatch with each other.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 493

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the location of the file. l 0x01: the files in the flash memory l 0x02: the software that is currently running l 0x03: the software in the CF card

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

494

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name

Meaning

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the IDs of the inconsistent files in the flash memory of the system control board if the value of Parameter 1 is 0x01, l 0x01: FPGA of the system control board in ofs1 l 0x02: FPGA of the system control board in ofs2 l 0x03: ofs1/hwx/nesoft.hwx l 0x04: ofs2/hwx/nesoft.hwx l 0x05: ofs1/hwx/ne.ini l 0x06: ofs2/hwx/ne.ini l 0x07: ofs1/hwx/ocp.ini l 0x08: ofs2/hwx/ocp.ini l 0x09: ofs1/fpga/if1_002.pga l 0x0a: ofs2/fpga/if1_002.pga l 0x0b: ofs1/fpga/if1_250.pga l 0x0c: ofs2/fpga/if1_250.pga l 0x0d: ofs1/fpga/sl1d.pga l 0x0e: ofs2/fpga/sl1d.pga l 0x0f: ofs1/fpga/sl91ifu2.pga l 0x10: ofs2/fpga/sl91ifu2.pga l 0x11: ofs1/fpga/sl91ifx2.pga l 0x12: ofs2/fpga/sl91ifx2.pga l 0x13: ofs1/fpga/sl91aux.pga l 0x14: ofs2/fpga/sl91aux.pga l 0x15: ofs1/hwx/lusoft.hwx l 0x16: ofs2/hwx/lusoft.hwx l 0x17: ofs1/hwx/lusoft.ini l 0x18: ofs2/hwx/lusoft.ini l 0x19: ofs1/fpga/sl91em6t.pga l 0x1a: ofs2/fpga/sl91em6t.pga l 0x1b: ofs1/fpga/pvg610.pga l 0x1c: ofs2/fpga/pvg610.pga l 0x1d: ofs1/fpga/pvg610x.pga l 0x1e: ofs2/fpga/pvg610x.pga l 0x1f: ofs1/hwx/luexbios.hwx l 0x20: ofs2/hwx/luexbios.hwx l 0x21: ofs1/fpga/plc034.pga l 0x22: ofs2/fpga/plc034.pga Indicate the IDs of the inconsistent files in the currently running software if the value of Parameter 1 is 0x02. l 0x01: NeSoft(D)
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 495

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name

Meaning l 0x02: Platform(D) l 0x04: ExtBios l 0x05: Logic l 0x06: Dsp

Parameter 4

Indicate the cause of the alarm. l 0x04: The file versions in the master and slave areas of a single system control board are inconsistent. l 0x08: The file versions in the active and standby system control boards are inconsistent. l 0x0c: The file versions in the master and slave areas of a single system control board are inconsistent and the file versions on the active and standby system control boards are also inconsistent.

Impact on the System


l l This alarm affects active/standby switching of system control boards if the active and standby system control boards have different NE software versions. If no NE software exists in the flash memory, the system is unable to restart after poweroff or reset.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The software running on the active and standby SCC boards has different versions. Cause 2: The software stored in the ofs1 and ofs2 areas of the active SCC board has different versions. Cause 3: The software stored in the mapping directories of active and standby SCC boards has different versions.

Procedure
Step 1 Contact Huawei technical support engineers for reloading the software. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.194 NESTATE_INSTALL
Description
The NESTATE_INSTALL is an alarm indicating that the NE is in the install state.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 496

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The NE fails to work.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The NE database check fails.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The NE database check fails. 1. Restore the data from the backup database on the CF card.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.195 NO_BD_SOFT
Description
The NO_BD_SOFT is an alarm indicating that the board software is lost.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 497

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2, Parameter 3

Meaning The value is always 0x01. Indicates the number of the lost file.

Impact on the System


l l If the board software is lost, the board fails to work normally. If the FPGA is lost, the FPGA does not have a backup copy.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The software fails to be loaded.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The software fails to be loaded. 1. Contact the Huawei technical support engineers to reload the software.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.196 NP1_MANUAL_STOP
Description
The NP1_MANUAL_STOP is an alarm indicating that the N+1 protection protocol is disabled manually.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning

Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 498

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


The N+1 protection may fail, or the protection switching may fail.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The N+1 protection protocol is disabled manually.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The N+1 protection protocol is disabled manually. 1. Start the N+1 protection protocol.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.197 NP1_SW_FAIL
Description
The NP1_SW_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the N+1 protection switching fails.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning

Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1.

Impact on the System


The services cannot be switched. If the current paths are unavailable, the services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Cause 1: The parameters of the N+1 protection for the alarmed node are set incorrectly.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 499

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Cause 2: The network-wide N+1 protection protocol runs abnormally.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The parameters of the N+1 protection for the alarmed node are set incorrectly. 1. Check whether the parameters of the N+1 protection are set correctly according to the planning. For details, see Creating an N+1 Protection Group. If... Then...

The parameters of the N+1 protection are Set the parameters of the N+1 protection set incorrectly correctly. The parameters of the N+1 protection are Go to Cause 2. set correctly Step 2 Cause 2: The network-wide N+1 protection protocol runs abnormally. 1. Stop and restart the protocol manually. For details, see Starting/Stopping the N+1 Protection Protocol. If... Then...

The alarm is cleared after the protocol is End the alarm handling. restarted. The alarm persists after the protocol is restarted ----End Contact the Huawei technical support engineers to handle the alarm.

Related Information
None.

A.3.198 NP1_SW_INDI
Description
The NP1_SW_INDI is an alarm indicating that the N+1 protection switching is detected.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 500

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name

Meaning

Parameter1, Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1.

Impact on the System


During the N+1 protection switching, the services are interrupted. After the N+1 switching is complete, the services are restored to normal. After the switching starts and before the switching is complete, the extra services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The N+1 protection switching is performed.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The N+1 protection switching is performed. 1. Find out the cause of switching, and take appropriate measures.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.199 NTP_SYNC_FAIL
Description
The NTP_SYNC_FAIL is an alarm indicating that NTP time synchronization fails.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


Time on the alarmed NE is different from time on the NTP server. The records on the NE, such as performance events, alarms, and operations, cannot be kept with exact time.

Possible Causes
l l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Cause 1: The NTP server is not configured or is configured incorrectly. Cause 2: The NTP server cannot communicate with the NE.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 501

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Cause 3: The NTP server fails.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The NTP server is not configured or is configured incorrectly. 1. 2. 1. 2. Configure the NTP server correctly. Re-configure the NTP parameters for the NE. Check whether the cable connecting the gateway NE to the NTP server is normal. If not, rectify the connection fault. Check whether the DCN communication between the NTP server and the NE is normal. If not, configure the DCN communication correctly. Troubleshoot the NTP server.

Step 2 Cause 2: The NTP server cannot communicate with the NE.

Step 3 Cause 3: The NTP server fails. 1.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.200 OCD
Description
The OCD is an alarm indicating out-of-cell delimitation. This alarm occurs when the cell delimitation state machine is in the HUNT or PRESYN state.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the OCD alarm occurs, all the services in the receive direction of the alarmed ATM port lose cells.

Possible Causes
l l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Cause 1: A great number of bit errors occur in the receive path. The receive path reports the alarms indicating excessive bit errors, such as B1_EXC, B2_EXC, and B3_EXC. Cause 2: The ATM processing chip of the board is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 502

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: A great number of bit errors occur in the receive path. The receive path reports the alarms indicating excessive bit errors, such as B1_EXC, B2_EXC, and B3_EXC. 1. 2. 1. 2. Check whether the B1_EXC, B2_EXC, or B3_EXC alarm occurs in the receive path. If yes, clear these alarms first, and then check whether the OCD alarm is cleared. Perform a cold reset on the board that reports the OCD alarm. For details, see 8.7.1 Cold Reset. If the OCD alarm persists, replace the alarmed board. For details, see 6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board.

Step 2 Cause 2: The ATM processing chip of the board is faulty.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.201 OUT_PWR_ABN
Description
The OUT_PWR_ABN alarm indicates that the output optical power is abnormal.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the port ID.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the path ID. The parameters have a fixed value of 0x00 0x01. Parameter 4, Parameter 5 Are reserved. The value is always 0xFF.

Impact on the System


The OUT_PWR_ABN alarm affects the transmission performance of services, and may even result in service interruption.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 503

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The output optical power is too high or low. Cause 2: A board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The output optical power is too high or low. 1. Browse optical power performance events. If... Then...

The output optical power does not meet the Replace the optical module. requirement The output optical power is too high Add a proper attenuator to reduce the input optical power.

Step 2 Cause 2: A board is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.202 PATCH_ACT_TIMEOUT
Description
The PATCH_ACT_TIMEOUT is an alarm indicating that activating the patch package times out. This alarm occurs when the patch package is in the active state for a period longer than the specified period of time. In this case, the user needs to process the patch package.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the PATCH_ACT_TIMEOUT alarm occurs, it does not affect services.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 504

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
Cause: The patch package is in the active state for a period longer than the specified period of time.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause: The patch package is in the active state for a period longer than the specified period of time. 1. 2. Check whether the activated patch package is normal. If yes, run the patch package to make the it valid. If not, delete the patch package. Then, the alarm is cleared automatically.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.203 PATCH_DEACT_TIMEOUT
Description
The PATCH_DEACT_TIMEOUT is an alarm indicating that deactivating the patch package times out. This alarm occurs when the patch package is in the inactive state for a period longer than the specified period of time. In this case, the user needs to process the patch package.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the PATCH_DEACT_TIMEOUT alarm occurs, it does not affect services.

Possible Causes
Cause: The patch package is in the inactive state for a period longer than the specified period of time.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause: The patch package is in the inactive state for a period longer than the specified period of time.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 505

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1. 2.

To make the patch package valid, activate the patch package. Otherwise, delete the patch package. Then, the alarm is cleared automatically.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.204 PATCH_PKGERR
Description
The PATCH_PKGERR alarm indicates that a patch package is incorrect or has been damaged or deleted.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor alarm Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


If a patch package is incorrect or has been damaged or deleted, the patch package cannot be successfully loaded, activated, or run.
NOTE

When this alarm is reported, services are not interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: A patch package is incorrect. Cause 2: A patch package has been damaged. Cause 3: A patch package has been deleted.

Procedure
Step 1 Load a correct patch package. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.205 PG_LINK_FAIL
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 506

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Description
The PG_LINK_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the links in a 1+1 protection group fail.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The services on the radio links are interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause: Service alarms occur on the main and standby boards.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the Alarm Report Mode to Protection group and board alarms. For details, see Querying the IF 1+1 Protection Status.
NOTE

When alarms with different priorities occur on a board at the same time, the board reports only the alarms with the highest priority. Alarms can be arranged in descending order by priority: hardware alarms > configuration alarms > service alarms.

Step 2 Handle the queried alarms. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.206 PG_PRT_DEGRADED
Description
The PG_PRT_DEGRADED is an alarm indicating that the main link or standby link in a 1+1 protection group is faulty.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Alarm Type Service alarm

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

507

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the board ID.

Impact on the System


The services at the NE are not affected, but radio link protection fails.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: Service alarms occur on the main board. Cause 2: Service alarms occur on the standby board.

Procedure
Step 1 Locate the faulty board according to the alarm parameter. Step 2 Set the Alarm Report Mode to Protection group and board alarms. For details, see Querying the IF 1+1 Protection Status.
NOTE

When service alarms with different priorities occur on a board at the same time, the board reports only the alarms with the highest priority. Alarms can be arranged in descending order by priority: hardware alarms > configuration alarms > service alarms.

Step 3 Handle the queried alarms. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.207 PLA_CFG_MISMATCH
Description
The PLA_CFG_MISMATCH alarm indicates that the PLA configuration data is inconsistent between two ends of a radio link.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Alarm Type Service alarm

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

508

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning

Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Indicate the ID of a PLA group. Parameter 3, Parameter 4 Indicate the error type. l 0x00: indicates that no PLA group is configured at the opposite end of a radio link. l 0x01: indicates that the enabled status of Layer 2 header compression function at the local end of a radio link is different from that at the opposite end.

Impact on the System


Services at both ends of a radio link are unavailable.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: A PLA group is configured at the local end but no PLA group is configured at the opposite end. Cause 2: The enabled status of the Layer 2 header compression function at the local end of a radio link is different from that at the opposite end.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: A PLA group is configured at the local end but no PLA group is configured at the opposite end. 1. Follow instructions in Creating a PLA Group to configure a PLA group at the opposite end of the radio link.

Step 2 Cause 2: The enabled status of the Layer 2 header compression function at the local end of a radio link is different from that at the opposite end. 1. 2. Follow instructions in Querying the PLA Group Status to determine the ports whose configuration data needs to be changed according to planning information. Follow instructions in Setting the Advanced Attributes of IF_ETH Ports to change the enabled status of the Layer 2 header compression function for PLA member ports.

----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 509

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.208 PORTMODE_MISMATCH
Description
The PORTMODE_MISMATCH is an alarm indicating that the working mode of the remote FE port does not match with that of the local FE port. This alarm is reported when the local FE port works in auto-negotiation mode and the opposite FE port works in non-auto-negotiation mode.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Meaning Indicate the working mode of the FE port.

Impact on the System


When the PORTMODE_MISMATCH alarm occurs, the service on the local NE is not affected. .

Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The local FE port works in auto-negotiation mode and the opposite FE port works in non-auto-negotiation mode.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local FE port works in auto-negotiation mode and the opposite FE port works in non-auto-negotiation mode. 1. 2. Disable the opposite FE port. For details, refer to Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Ports. Enable the opposite FE port and set work mode of the port to auto-negotiation. For details, refer to Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Ports.

----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 510

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.209 PORT_EXC_TRAFFIC
Description
The PORT_EXC_TRAFFIC alarm indicates that the traffic over a port exceeds its threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Warning Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning

Parameter 1 Indicates the traffic in the receive or transmit direction exceeds its threshold. l 0x00: indicates the receive direction. l 0x01: indicates the transmit direction.

Impact on the System


Services are congested.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The configured bandwidth limit is too low. Cause 2: The port traffic is too high.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The configured bandwidth limit is too low. 1. 2. Follow instructions in Configuring Traffic Shaping for Egress Queues to check the configured bandwidth limit. If the configured bandwidth limit is too low, follow instructions in Configuring Traffic Shaping for Egress Queues to increase the bandwidth limit value or perform network expansion.

Step 2 Cause 2: The configured port traffic is too high. 1. Follow instruction in 8.18 Querying Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet Ports to query the bandwidth utilization over a port.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 511

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

2.

If the port bandwidth utilization is higher than its threshold, check whether a network storm occurs. If a network storm occurs, eliminate the source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.210 PORT_MODULE_OFFLINE
Description
The PORT_MODULE_OFFLINE alarm indicates that a port is offline.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Parameter 4, Parameter 5 Meaning Indicates the ID of the port that reports the alarm. Have a fixed value of 0x00 0x01. Are reserved and have a fixed value of 0xff.

Impact on the System


The services over the alarmed port are interrupted.

Possible Causes
The alarmed port is enabled but house no SFP module.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause: The alarmed port is enabled but house no SFP module. 1.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Check whether the alarmed port needs to receive/transmit a service.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 512

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The alarmed port needs to receive/ transmit a service

Then... Go to the next step.

The alarm port does not need to receive/ Follow instructions in Setting the General transmit a service Attributes of Ethernet Ports to disable the alarmed port. 2. Check whether the alarmed port houses an SFP module. If... The alarmed port houses no SFP module The alarmed port houses an SFP module 3. Re-install the SFP module. If... The alarm clears Then... No further action is required. Then... Follow instructions in Installing an SFP Module to add an SFP module. Go to the next step.

The alarm persists Follow instructions in Replacing an SFP Module to replace the SFP module. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.211 POWER_ABNORMAL
Description
The POWER_ABNORMAL is an alarm indicating that the input power supply is abnormal.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 513

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 1

Meaning Indicates the number of the voltage channel. l 0x01: the first channel of voltage l 0x02: the second channel of voltage

Parameter 2

Indicates the type of the alarm. l 0x00: voltage loss l 0x01: undervoltage l 0x02: overvoltage

Impact on the System


When the POWER_ABNORMAL alarm occurs, the power supply is abnormal, and therefore the board may fail to work normally.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The power cable is cut, damaged, or incorrectly connected. Cause 2: The input power is abnormal.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The power cable is cut, damaged, or incorrectly connected. 1. Check whether the power cable is cut, damaged, or incorrectly connected. If the power cable is cut or damaged, replace it with a proper power cable. If the power cable is incorrectly connected, reconnect the power cable. Contact the engineers for power supply to rectify the fault.

Step 2 Cause 2: The input power is abnormal. 1.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.212 POWER_ALM
Description
The POWER_ALM is an alarm indicating that the power module is abnormal.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

514

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning

Parameter 1 If the POWER_ALM alarm is reported on a board on the IDU, this parameter indicates the ID of the alarmed power module. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by power module 1 of the board. If the POWER_ALM is reported on the ODU, this parameter indicates the type of the power fault. l 0x01: The -5 V power supply is faulty. l 0x02: The power supply for the power amplifier is faulty. Parameter 2 l 0x01: under-voltage l 0x02: over-voltage

Impact on the System


The power modules are configured with protection. If only one power module reports the POWER_ALM alarm, the system is not affected.

Possible Causes
If the alarm is reported by a board of the IDU, the possible causes are as follows: l l Cause 1: The input power or the PIU is abnormal. Cause 2: The power module is abnormal.

If the alarm is reported on the ODU, the cause is as follows: l Cause 1: The power module of the ODU is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 (POWER_ALM reported by a board of the IDU) Cause 1: The input power or the PIU is abnormal. 1. Check whether alarms are reported on the PIU, If yes, clear these alarms immediately.

Step 2 (POWER_ALM reported by a board of the IDU) Cause 2: The power module is abnormal. 1. Replace the alarmed board. For details, see 6 Part Replacement.

Step 3 (POWER_ALM reported on the ODU) Cause 1: The power module of the ODU is faulty. 1. Replace the ODU. For details, see 6.14 Replacing the ODU.

----End
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 515

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.3.213 PW_DROPPKT_EXC
Description
The PW_DROPPKT_EXC alarm indicates that the packet loss ratio on a PW exceeds its threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Warning Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning

Parameter 1 Has a fixed value of 0x00, indicating that the traffic in the ingress or egress direction crosses its threshold.

Impact on the System


A small number of packets are lost, affecting service real-time performance.

Possible Causes
Cause: A small number of packets are lost on the alarmed PW.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause: A small number of packets are lost on the alarmed PW. 1. Follow instructions in Querying Information and Running Status of PWs to check the bandwidth utilization of the alarmed PW. If the PW bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.

----End
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 516

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.3.214 PWAPS_LOST
Description
The PWAPS_LOST is an alarm indicating that the APS frame is lost. This alarm occurs when no APS frame is received from the protection channel.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the service protection fails.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The remote NE of the PW is not configured with any protection group. Cause 2: The service on the protection channel is interrupted.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The remote NE of the PW is not configured with any protection group. 1. Check whether the remote NE of the PW is configured with a protection group. If yes, ensure that the configuration is the same at the two ends. Check whether the protection channel is faulty. If yes, rectify the fault.

Step 2 Cause 2: The service on the protection channel is interrupted. 1. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.215 PWAPS_PATH_MISMATCH
Description
The PWAPS_PATH_MISMATCH is an alarm indicating that the working and protection paths of the APS protection group differ between the two ends. This alarm is reported when the
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 517

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

working and protection paths of one APS protection group at one end are different from those at the other end.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the service protection fails.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The configured working and protection paths differ between the two ends. Cause 2: Certain physical links are incorrectly connected.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The configured working and protection paths differ between the two ends. 1. 2. Check whether the APS settings at the two ends are the same. If the APS settings are different, change the settings to the same.

Step 2 Cause 2: Certain physical links are incorrectly connected. 1. Connect the fibers or cables properly.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.216 PWAPS_SWITCH_FAIL
Description
The PWAPS_SWITCH_FAIL is an alarm indicating a switching failure of the PW APS protection group. This alarm is reported when the request signal in the transmitted Automatic Protection Switching (APS) frame is different from the bridge signal in the received APS frame and this symptom lasts for 50 ms.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

518

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the service protection fails.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The configured working and protection paths differ between the two ends. Cause 2: Certain physical links are incorrectly connected.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The configured working and protection paths differ between the two ends. 1. 2. Check whether the APS settings at the two ends are the same. If the APS settings are different, change the settings to the same.

Step 2 Cause 2: Certain physical links are incorrectly connected. 1. Connect the fibers or cables properly.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.217 PWAPS_TYPE_MISMATCH
Description
The PWAPS_TYPE_MISMATCH is an alarm indicating that the local NE and the opposite NE are configured with different PW protection types. This alarm occurs when the information in the received APS frames is inconsistent with the APS protection scheme configured at the local end.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

519

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the service protection fails.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The configured protection modes (1+1 protection or 1:1 protection) differ at the two ends of the PW. Cause 2: The configured switching modes (single-ended or dual-ended) differ at the two ends of the PW. Cause 3: The configured revertive modes (revertive or non-revertive) differ at the two ends of the PW.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the APS protection settings, such as protection mode, switching mode, and revertive mode, are the same at the local and remote ends. Step 2 If the APS protection settings are different, change the settings to the same. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.218 R_F_RST
Description
The R_F_RST is an alarm indicating that the receive FIFO is reset.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The services are interrupted.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 520

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The clocks at both stations are not synchronous. Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The clocks at both stations are not synchronous. 1. Query whether a TU pointer adaptation performance event is reported at both ends. For details, see 8.3.5 Browsing Current Performance Events. If... Then...

An AU pointer adaptation performance Handle the performance event. For details, event is reported see C.3.2 TUPJCHIGH, TUPJCLOW, and TUPJCNEW. An AU pointer adaptation performance Go to Cause 2. event is not reported Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.219 R_LOC
Description
The R_LOC is an alarm indicating that the clock is lost on the receive line side. This alarm is reported when the line board fails to extract clock signal from the line signal or the IF board fails to extract clock signal from the IF signal.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The services on the line port or the IF port are interrupted. If the system is configured with protection, protection switching may be triggered.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 521

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The receive unit of the local site is faulty. Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The receive unit of the local site is faulty. 1. At the local end, perform an inloop on the port of the alarmed board. For details, see 8.6 Software Loopback. If... The alarm persists after the loopback The alarm is cleared after the loopback Then... Replace the alarmed local board. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed opposite board. If... Then...

The alarm is cleared after the board is The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. replaced The alarm persists after the board is Replace the system control, switch&timing replaced board at the opposite end. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.220 R_LOF
Description
The R_LOF is an alarm indicating that frames are lost on the receive side. This alarm is reported when the OOF state lasts for three milliseconds.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 522

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


The services are interrupted. If the system is configured with protection, protection switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: Certain alarms are generated (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Cause 3: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty. Cause 4: The receive unit of the local site is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Certain high-level alarms are generated (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). 1. If the alarm is reported by the IF board, check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is generated. If... The alarm is generated Then... Take priority to clear the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm. Go to the next step.

The alarm is not generated

2.

Set the inloop on the alarmed IF port. If... The alarm persists after the inloop is performed The alarm is cleared after the inloop is performed Then... Go to Cause 4. Go to Cause 3.

Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). 1. If the alarm is reported by an optical interface board, exchange the transmit and receive fiber jumpers at both ends. If... The alarm persists after the exchange The line port of the opposite station reports the R_LOF alarm Then... Go to Cause 3 or 4 Troubleshoot the optical fibers.

Step 3 Cause 3: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty.


Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 523

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Replace the opposite board where the line unit is or the opposite IF board. If... The alarm is cleared after the board replacement The alarm persists after the board replacement Then... The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling is complete. Go to the next step.

2.

Replace the system control and cross-connect board at the opposite end. If... The alarm is cleared after the board replacement The alarm persists after the board replacement Then... The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling is complete. Go to Cause 4.

Step 4 Cause 4: The receive unit of the local site is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board. ----End

Related Information
The handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port.

A.3.221 R_LOS
Description
In the case of SDH boards, the R_LOS is an alarm indicating that the signals on the receive line side are lost. In the case of IF boards, the R_LOS is an alarm indicating that the radio frames on the receive line side are lost.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The services are interrupted. If the system is configured with protection, protection switching may be triggered.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 524

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: Certain alarms are generated (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH line board). Cause 3: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty. Cause 4: The receive unit of the local site is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Certain alarms are generated (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). 1. If the alarm is reported by the IF board, check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is generated. If... The alarm is generated Then... Take priority to clear the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm. Go to the next step.

The alarm is not generated

2.

Set the inloop on the alarmed IF port. If... The alarm persists after the inloop is performed The alarm is cleared after the inloop is performed Then... Go to Cause 4. Go to Cause 3.

Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH line board). 1. If the alarm is reported by an optical interface board, exchange the transmit and receive fiber jumpers at both ends. If... The alarm persists after the exchange The line port of the opposite station reports the R_LOF alarm Then... Go to Cause 3 or 4 Troubleshoot the optical fibers.

Step 3 Cause 3: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty. 1. Replace the opposite board where the line unit is or the opposite IF board. If... The alarm is cleared after the board replacement Then... The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling is complete.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

525

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The alarm persists after the board replacement

Then... Proceed to the next step.

2.

Replace the system control and cross-connect board at the opposite end. If... The alarm is cleared after the board replacement The alarm persists after the board replacement Then... The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling is complete. Go to Cause 4.

Step 4 Cause 4: The receive unit of the local site is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board.

----End

Related Information
The handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port.

A.3.222 R_S_ERR
Description
The R_S_ERR is an alarm indicating that the received signal has errors.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Cause 1: The frequency offset of the input signal is very large. Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 526

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The frequency offset of the input signal is very large. 1. Check whether the tributary board supports the type of the input signal. If... Then...

The tributary board does not support the Change the type of the output signal of the type of the input signal. remote site. The tributary board supports the type of Go to the next step. the input signal. 2. Test the frequency offset of the input signal. If... The frequency offset is very large The frequency offset meets the requirement Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board. Then... Troubleshoot the remote site. Go to Cause 2.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.223 RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF
Description
The RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF is an alarm indicating that the mean receive power of the ODUs are lower than the threshold of the receive power (the threshold value is about the receiver sensitivity + 14 dB). When the receive power of the ODUs in consecutive six hours is lower than the threshold, the system reports the alarm. When the mean receive power of the ODUs becomes normal and lasts for three minutes after the alarm is reported, the alarm is cleared.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

527

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


If the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_LOF or MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is not generated, the service is not affected.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The ODU fault of the transmit end causes the abnormal transmit power. Cause 2: The direction of the antenna is deflected. Cause 3: The transmission environment changes. Cause 4: The fade margin in the case of rain and fog in the network planning is insufficient.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The ODU fault of the transmit end causes the abnormal transmit power. 1. If... The ODU at the transmit end reports the RADIO_TSL_LOW alarm Check whether the ODU at the transmit end reports the RADIO_TSL_LOW alarm. Then... Handle the RADIO_TSL_LOW alarm.

The ODU at the transmit end does not report the Go to Cause 2. RADIO_TSL_LOW alarm Step 2 Cause 2: The direction of the antenna is deflected. 1. Check whether the direction of the antenna is deflected. If... The direction of the antenna is deflected The direction of the antenna is not deflected Step 3 Cause 3: The transmission environment changes. 1. If... The transmission environment changes The transmission environment does not change Check whether the transmission environment changes. For example, check whether any building blocks the transmission and increases the link fading significantly. Then... Contact the network planning department for re-planning the transmission trail. Go to Cause 4. Then... Adjust the direction of the antenna. Go to Cause 3.

Step 4 Cause 4: The fade margin in the case of rain and fog in the network planning is insufficient. 1. If the alarm is reported frequently, contact the network planning department to increase the fade margin by re-planning the transmission trail.

----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 528

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.224 RADIO_MUTE
Description
The RADIO_MUTE is an alarm indicating that radio transmitter is muted.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Warning Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The transmitter does not transmit services.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The other alarms are generated. Cause 2: The transmitter of the local site is muted manually. Cause 3: The IF board is faulty, causing abnormal IF output. Cause 4: The data output is abnormal because the ODU is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The other alarms are generated. 1. Check whether the CONFIG_NOSUPPORT or IF_INPWR_ABN alarm is generated. If yes, take priority to clear the alarm. Check whether the transmitter of the ODU is muted. For details, see Configuring the IF/ ODU Information of a Radio Link. If yes, cancel the muting operation. Then, set the transmitting status of the ODU to unmute. Replace the IF board. Replace the ODU.

Step 2 Cause 2: The transmitter of the local site is muted manually. 1.

Step 3 Cause 3: The IF board is faulty, causing abnormal IF output. 1. 1. Step 4 Cause 4: The data output is abnormal because the ODU is faulty.

----End

Related Information
The logical slot ID of the ODU is obtained by adding 20 to the slot ID of the IF board connected to the ODU.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 529

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.225 RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH
Description
The RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH is an alarm indicating that the antennas are not aligned. When the receive power is set on the NE, the NE enables the antenna alignment indication function. If the actual receive power of the ODU is lower than the power to be received 3 dB, the RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH alarm is reported. Then, if the antennas are aligned for continuous 30 minutes, the antenna alignment indication function is disabled automatically. Afterwards, the RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH alarm is reported only when the RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF alarm is reported.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


If the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_LOF or MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is not generated, the service is not affected.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: Antennas are not aligned during the equipment commissioning. Cause 2: The RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF is reported when the NE is running.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Antennas are not aligned during the equipment commissioning. 1. Align the antennas, and ensure that the actual receive power is within the range of preset receive power +/-3 dB. Handle the RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF alarm. When the RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF alarm is cleared, the RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH alarm is cleared.

Step 2 Cause 2: The RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF is reported when the NE is running. 1.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.226 RADIO_RSL_HIGH
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 530

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Description
The RADIO_RSL_HIGH is an alarm indicating that the radio receive power is very high. This alarm is reported if the detected receive power is equal to or higher than the upper threshold of the ODU (-20 dBm).

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The service transmission is affected. If the system is configured with 1+1 protection, protection switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The local ODU is faulty. Cause 2: There is a strong interference source nearby. Cause 3: The transmit power of the opposite ODU is very high.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local ODU is faulty. 1. 6.14 Replacing the ODU.

Step 2 Cause 2: There is a strong interference source nearby. 1. Check whether any nearby signal source transmits signals whose frequency is close to the specified range. If yes, check whether the signal source can be shut down or removed. If not, contact the network planning department for replanning the frequency.

Step 3 Cause 3: The transmit power of the opposite ODU is very high 1. Reset the transmit power of the ODU at the opposite end. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.227 RADIO_RSL_LOW
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 531

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Description
The RADIO_RSL_LOW is an alarm indicating that the radio receive power is very low. This alarm is reported if the detected receive power is equal to or lower than the upper threshold of the ODU (-90 dBm).

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


If no MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_LOF or MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is generated, the services are not affected.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: Other alarms occur at the opposite station. Cause 2: The transmit power of the opposite station is very low. Cause 3: The local ODU is faulty. Cause 4: Signal attenuation on the radio link is very heavy.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Other alarms occur at the opposite station. Check whether any of the following alarms is generated in the equipment of the opposite station. If yes, take priority to clear the alarm. l RADIO_MUTE l CONFIG_NOSUPPORT l RADIO_TSL_LOW l BD_STATUS Step 2 Cause 2: The transmit power of the opposite station is very low. 1. See Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. Check whether the transmit power of the opposite station is normal. If not, replace the ODU of the opposite station.

Step 3 Cause 3: The local ODU is faulty. 1. Replace the ODU at the local end. Step 4 Cause 4: Signal attenuation on the radio link is very heavy. 1. Browse history alarms and check whether the alarm is generated continuously. If the alarm is generated occasionally, contact the network planning department to change the design to increase the anti-fading performance.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 532

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

2. 3.

Check whether the antennas at both ends are adjusted properly. If not, align the antennas again. Check whether any mountain or building obstacle exists in the transmit direction. If yes, contact the network planning department for proper modification of the planning design, hence preventing the block of the mountain or building obstacle.

4.

Check whether the polarization direction of the antenna, ODU, and hybrid coupler is set correctly. If not, correct the polarization direction. Check whether the outdoor units such as antennas, combiner, ODU, and flexible waveguide are wet, damp, or damaged. If yes, replace the unit that is wet, damp, or damaged. For the operations, see 6 Part Replacement

5.

6.

Check whether the antenna gain at both the transmit and receive ends meets the requirement. If not, replace the antenna.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.228 RADIO_TSL_HIGH
Description
The RADIO_TSL_HIGH is an alarm indicating that the radio transmit power is too high. This alarm is reported when the detected transmit power is higher than the upper power threshold of the ODU.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The service transmission is affected. If the system is configured with 1+1 protection, protection switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The local ODU is faulty.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 533

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local ODU is faulty. 1. Replace the ODU.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.229 RADIO_TSL_LOW
Description
The RADIO_TSL_LOW is an alarm indicating that the radio transmit power is very low. This alarm is reported when the detected transmit power is less than the lower power threshold of the ODU.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The service transmission is affected. If the system is configured with 1+1 protection, protection switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The local ODU is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local ODU is faulty. 1. Replace the ODU.

----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 534

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.230 RELAY_ALARM_CRITICAL
Description
The RELAY_ALARM_CRITICAL is an alarm indicating the critical alarm inputs. This alarm occurs when the user sets the severity of an available alarm input to critical and there is such an alarm input.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the RELAY_ALARM_CRITICAL alarm occurs, it does not affect the operation of the board or the services on the NE.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: There is a critical alarm input.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: There is a critical alarm input. 1. Clear the alarms of the external equipment according to the defined meanings of the alarms. Then, the RELAY_ALARM_CRITICAL alarm is cleared.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.231 RELAY_ALARM_IGNORE
Description
The RELAY_ALARM_IGNORE is an alarm indicating the warning alarm inputs. This alarm occurs when the user sets the severity of an available alarm input to warning and there is such an alarm input.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

535

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Warning Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the RELAY_ALARM_IGNORE alarm occurs, it does not affect the operation of the board or the services on the NE.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: There is a warning alarm input.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: There is a warning alarm input. 1. Clear the alarms of the external equipment according to the defined meanings of the alarms. Then, the RELAY_ALARM_IGNORE alarm is cleared.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.232 RELAY_ALARM_MAJOR
Description
The RELAY_ALARM_MAJOR is an alarm indicating the major alarm inputs. This alarm occurs when the user sets the severity of an available alarm input to major and there is such an alarm input.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 536

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


When the RELAY_ALARM_MAJOR alarm occurs, it does not affect the operation of the board or the services on the NE.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: There is a major alarm input.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: There is a major alarm input. 1. Clear the alarms of the external equipment according to the defined meanings of the alarms. Then, the RELAY_ALARM_MAJOR alarm is cleared.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.233 RELAY_ALARM_MINOR
Description
The RELAY_ALARM_MINOR is an alarm indicating the minor alarm inputs. This alarm occurs when the user sets the severity of an available alarm input to minor and there is such an alarm input.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the RELAY_ALARM_MINOR alarm occurs, it does not affect the operation of the board or the services on the NE.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: There is a minor alarm input.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: There is a minor alarm input.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 537

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Clear the alarms of the external equipment according to the defined meanings of the alarms. Then, the RELAY_ALARM_MINOR alarm is cleared.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.234 RMFA
Description
The RMFA is an alarm indicating the loss of multiframe alignment at the remote end. This alarm occurs when the local end detects all 1s of the remote indication bits in Z consecutive CAS multiframes (Z = 1-5) of the framed E1/T1 input.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the path ID.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the services at the local site are not affected. The alarm indicates that the LMFA alarm occurs at the opposite end.

Possible Causes
The LMFA alarm occurs at the opposite end.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the opposite end of the alarmed path reports the LMFA alarm. If yes, clear the LMFA alarm. Then, the RMFA alarm at the local end clears. ----End
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 538

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.3.235 RPS_INDI
Description
The RPS_INDI is an alarm indicating that the radio protection switching is detected.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Meaning Indicates the ID of the protection group. Indicates the type of protection switching. 0x01: HSB protection switching 0x02: HSM protection switching

Impact on the System


l l During the HSB protection switching, services are interrupted. After the HSB switching is complete, the services are restored to normal. During the HSM protection switching, no bit errors occur and the services are not affected.

Possible Causes
l The possible causes of the HSB protection switching are as follows: Cause 1: An external switching event occurs Cause 2: An automatic switching event occurs. Cause 3: A reverse switching event occurs. l The possible causes of HSM protection switching are as follows: The quality of the main channel degrades. In the case of Hybrid radio, the automatic switching condition of the HSM is that the quality of the main channel degrades.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 539

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

In the case of SDH/PDH radio, an alarm that triggers the HSM switching is reported on the radio link.

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the type of the protection switching based on the alarm parameters. Step 2 Cause 1 of HSB switching: An external switching event occurs. That is, the NMS issues a command to trigger the switching. 1. Check whether the switching is the forced switching or manual switching. For details, see Querying the IF 1+1 Protection Status. If... Then...

The switching is the forced switching or Find the cause and release the switching manual switching immediately. The switching is not the forced switching or manual switching Go to Cause 2 of HSB switching.

Step 3 Cause 2 of HSB switching: An automatic switching event occurs. That is, the equipment is faulty, or the service is defective. 1. Check whether the following faults or alarms occur. If yes, rectify the faults or clear the alarms. l The hardware of the IF board or the ODU is faulty. l VOLT_LOS l RADIO_TSL_HIGH, RADIO_TSL_LOW, or RADIO_RSL_HIGH l IF_INPWR_ABN or CONFIG_NOSUPPORT l R_LOC, R_LOF, R_LOS, or MW_LOF
NOTE

l If the switching is non-revertive, the services are not automatically switched to the working path when the working path is restored to normal, and the RPS_INDI alarm persists. In this case, you need to manually switch the services from the protection path to the working path. The RPS_INDI alarm is cleared only when the switching is successful. l If the switching is revertive, the services are automatically switched to the working path only when the specified wait-to-restore (WTR) time expires after the working path is restored to normal. The RPS_INDI alarm is cleared only when the switching is successful.

Step 4 Cause 3 of HSB switching: A reverse switching event occurs. 1. Query whether the active and standby IF boards report the MW_RDI alarm. If yes, take priority to clear the MW_RDI alarm. Check whether the AM_DOWNSHIFT alarm is reported by an IF board. If the alarm is reported by an IF board, refer to AM_DOWNSHIFT to rectify the fault that causes the quality of the main channel to degrade. If the alarm is not reported by an IF board, the quality of the main channel degrades possibly due to the weather. In this case, you do not need to handle the problem, because this is a normal situation.

Step 5 Cause 1 of HSM switching: In the case of Hybrid radio, the quality of the main channel degrades. 1.

Step 6 Cause 2 of HSM switching: In the case of SDH/PDH radio, an alarm that triggers the HSM switching is reported on the radio link. 1. Check whether any alarm that triggers the HSM switching is reported by an IF board of the IF 1+1 protection group. If yes, take priority to clear the alarm.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 540

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

HSM switching may be triggered by any of the following alarms: l R_LOC, R_LOF, R_LOS, or MW_LOF l MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR l B1_SD or B2_SD ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.236 RS_CROSSTR
Description
The RS_CROSSTR is an alarm indicating that a regenerator section performance indicator crosses the threshold. This alarm is reported if a board detects that a regenerator section bit error performance event crosses the preset threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the performance monitoring period: l 0x01: 15 minutes l 0x02: 24 hours

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

541

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name

Meaning

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Parameter 2 is always 0x00. Parameter 3 indicate the ID of a performance event that causes the alarm and has the following meanings: l 0x01: RSBBE l 0x02: RSES l 0x03: RSSES l 0x04: RSOOF l 0x05: RSOFS l 0x06: RSUAS l 0x07: RSCSES

Impact on the System


A large number of bit errors occur in the services, and the services may be interrupted. l l Cause 1: Services are interrupted for a long time. Cause 2: The regenerator section bit error performance indicator crosses the preset threshold.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Services are interrupted for a long time.
NOTE

Handle the alarm as follows if the value of parameter 3 is 0x06:

1. 2.

Check whether fibers are properly connected. If not, connect the fibers again according to planning information. Check whether cross-connections are configured for service ports. If not, configure crossconnections again according to planning information. Find out the performance event that crosses the preset threshold. For details, see 8.3.8 Browsing the Performance Event Threshold-Crossing Records. Handle the performance event that crosses the threshold.

Step 2 Cause 2: The regenerator section bit error performance indicator crosses the preset threshold. 1. 2.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.237 RTC_FAIL
Description
The RTC_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the real-time clock (RTC) on the system control board fails.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 542

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The service is not affected.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The RTC on the system control board is abnormal. Cause 2: The board temperature is too high.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The RTC on the system control board is abnormal. 1. 1. Replace the system control, switching, and timing board. 8.3.3 Browsing Current Alarms, and if the board reports the TEMP_ALARM alarm, clear this alarm first. Step 2 Cause 2: The board temperature is too high.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.238 S1_SYN_CHANGE
Description
The S1_SYN_CHANGE is an alarm indicating that the clock source is switched in S1 byte mode.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 543

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning 0x01: system priority list 0x02: external clock priority list

Impact on the System


If the new clock source has a lower quality, pointer justifications and bit errors are generated after the switching of clock source. As a result, the quality of services is affected.

Possible Causes
When the SSM protocol or extended SSM protocol is enabled. l l l l Cause 1: The original clock source is lost. Cause 2: The fiber is cut off. Cause 3: The external BITS is interrupted. Cause 4: The S1_SYN_CHANGE alarm occurs at the upstream station.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The original clock source is lost. 1. Handle the SYNC_C_LOS alarm that is related to the original clock source. Step 2 Cause 2: The fiber is cut off. 1. Replace the faulty fiber. Step 3 Cause 3: The external BITS is interrupted. 1. Check whether the cable connect NE to BITS is normal. If not, replace the faulty cable. Step 4 Cause 4: The S1_SYN_CHANGE alarm reported at the upstream station. 1. Handle the S1_SYN_CHANGE alarm reported at the upstream station.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.239 SCCDATA_BACKUP_FAIL
Description
The SCCDATA_BACKUP_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the batch backup on SCC boards fails.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 544

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning

Parameter 1 Indicates the cause of the failure. l 0x31: The database backup fails. l 0x32: Software version verification fails on the main and standby SCC boards. l 0x33: Communication between the main and standby SCC boards fails. l 0x34: The main and standby SCC boards have different data after an upgrade.

Impact on the System


Data synchronization between the main and standby SCC boards fails, and the switching between the two boards is unavailable.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The main and standby SCC boards have different versions of software. Cause 2: Communication between the main and standby SCC boards fails. Cause 3: Databases on the main and standby SCC boards are damaged. Cause 4: The main and standby SCC boards have different data after an upgrade.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The main and standby SCC boards have different versions of software. 1. 2. Query and record the software versions of the main and standby SCC boards according to 8.5.1 Querying the Board Information Report . If the software versions are different, determine the correct version based on the version mapping table and replace the SCC board with an incorrect version. For details, see 6.9 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board.

Step 2 Cause 2: Communication between the main and standby SCC boards fails. 1. 2. Check whether the system reports the COMMUN_FAIL alarm. If yes, clear the COMMUN_FAIL alarm. The system will start batch backup automatically.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 545

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Step 3 Cause 3: Databases on the main and standby SCC boards are damaged. 1. 2. Check whether the system reports the DBMS_ERROR alarm. For details, see 8.3.3 Browsing Current Alarms. If yes, clear the DBMS_ERROR alarm. Then, check whether the SYNC_FAIL alarm is cleared. Re-install the standby SCC board.

Step 4 Cause 4: The main and standby SCC boards have different data after an upgrade. 1. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.240 SEC_RADIUS_FAIL
Description
The SEC_RADIUS_FAIL is an alarm indicating that RADIUS authentication fails overmany times. This alarm is reported when the RADIUS authentication fails for five consecutive times.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 to Parameter 5 Meaning Indicates the most significant five characters of username.

Impact on the System


A user cannot log in to an NE.

Possible Causes
l l l l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Cause 1: The active period of the account expires. Cause 2: Configurations on the RADIUS server are incorrect, such as passwords and access policies. Cause 3: There are unauthenticated login attempts. Cause 4: The shared key for the NE and the RADIUS server is configured incorrectly.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 546

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The active period of the account expires. 1. Use an active account. Step 2 Cause 2: Configurations on the RADIUS server are incorrect, such as passwords and access policies. 1. 2. 1. 1. Enter the correct password. Set correct access policies. Eliminate the source that initiates the unauthenticated login attempts. Set the shared key correctly.

Step 3 Cause 3: There are unauthenticated login attempts. Step 4 Cause 4: The shared key for the NE and the RADIUS server is configured incorrectly.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.241 SECU_ALM
Description
The SECU_ALM is an alarm indicating that an illegal user fails to log in to the NE.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The SECU_ALM alarm is ended soon after it is reported, and the alarm does not affect the system and services.

Possible Causes
An illegal user tries to log in to the NE.

Procedure
Step 1 An illegal user tries to log in to the NE.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 547

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Query the NE log to check the user name that is used for the login.

----End

Related Information
After a user fails to log in to an NE for five consecutive times (if the interval between two logins is less than 3 minutes, the two logins are consecutive logins), the SECU_ALM alarm is reported upon each subsequent login failure and meanwhile the user is locked for 60 seconds. During the 60 seconds, the user cannot log in to the NE.

A.3.242 SRV_SHUTDOWN_LD
Description
The SRV_SHUTDOWN_LD alarm indicates that an Ethernet service is deactivated. This alarm is reported when an Ethernet service is deactivated due to a service loop. This alarm is cleared after the Ethernet service is reactivated.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Warning Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The loop of the alarmed Ethernet service is released, and the Ethernet service is restored.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: A loop occurs in an Ethernet service and therefore the Ethernet service is deactivated.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: A loop occurs in an Ethernet service and therefore the Ethernet service is deactivated. 1. 2. Check whether a service is looped back on the path of the alarmed Ethernet service. Re-configure the preceding service based on the network plan.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.243 SWDL_ACTIVATED_TIMEOUT
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 548

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Description
The SWDL_ACTIVATED_TIMEOUT is an alarm indicating the activation timeout of the software package. During the package loading, the system reports the alarm if no data is submitted within 30 minutes after activation of the NE software or board software.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The NE does not perform the submit operation. As a result, the software in the two areas of the double-area boards on the NE is inconsistent.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The radio link is faulty. As a result, the NE involved in the package loading fails to receive the submit command.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The radio link is faulty. As a result, the NE involved in the package loading fails to receive the submit command. 1. Check whether the radio link is faulty. If... The radio link is faulty Then... Troubleshoot the radio link to ensure that the link between the nodes to be loaded is normal.

The radio link is normal Perform the package loading to the NE again. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.244 SWDL_AUTOMATCH_INH
Description
The SWDL_AUTOMATCH_INH is an alarm indicating that the automatic match function is disabled. When the automatic match function of the board is disabled, the system reports the alarm if the board cannot match the software from the system control board.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 549

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When a board whose version is not consistent with the software version of the NE is installed, the software versions of the whole NE are not consistent if the board cannot automatically match the software from the system control board. As a result, certain functions of the NE cannot run normally.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The automatic match function is disabled.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The automatic match function is disabled. 1. Contact the Huawei technical support engineers for troubleshooting.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.245 SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH
Description
The SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH is an alarm of software inconsistency. After an NE is power recycled and the boards on the NE become online, if the system detects that the system control board and the CF card are inconsistent in software packages, the system reports the SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH alarm.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 550

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


When the SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH alarm is reported, certain functions of the NE may be affected.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: After a system control board is replaced, the software package in the new system control board is inconsistent with that in the CF card.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: After a system control board is replaced, the software package in the new system control board is inconsistent with that in the CF card. 1. Perform the package diffusion again on the NE where the SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH alarm is reported.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.246 SWDL_COMMIT_FAIL
Description
The SWDL_COMMIT_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the commission operation on the NE fails. This alarm is reported when the commission operation fails in the package diffusion.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the SWDL_COMMIT_FAIL alarm occurs, the software versions in the two areas of the double-area board are inconsistent.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: File backup fails.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 551

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: File backup fails. 1. 2. Check whether the loaded package is correct. Perform the package diffusion again on the NE where the alarm is reported.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.247 SWDL_INPROCESS
Description
The SWDL_INPROCESS is an alarm indicating that the package diffusion is in process on the NE.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Warning Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the SWDL_INPROCESS alarm is reported, the operations, such as modifying configuration, uploading/downloading files, and backing up the database, are not allowed, because the software package is being loaded to the NE.

Possible Causes
The package diffusion is being performed on the NE.

Procedure
Step 1 The SWDL_INPROCESS alarm is cleared automatically after the loading or rollback is complete. Hence, this alarm can be neglected. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.248 SWDL_NEPKGCHECK
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 552

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Description
The SWDL_NEPKGCHECK is an alarm of software inconsistency. This alarm is reported in the following two situations: the CF card and flash memory are inconsistent in software package and the flash memory has a software package; in a routine check (the check is not initiated by issuing commands), the system detects that some files are missing from the software package stored in the CF card or from the software package stored in the flash memory.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


l l If this alarm occurs during package loading, package loading fails. If this alarm occurs in other conditions, automatic file matching fails.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: Certain files of the package are missing and cannot be recovered.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Certain files of the package are missing and cannot be recovered. 1. Ensure that the loaded software package is correct. Perform the package diffusion again on the NE where the SWDL_NEPKGCHECK alarm is reported.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.249 SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
Description
The SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT is an alarm indicating that certain board software is missing from the software package. This alarm is reported when the required software is missing from the software package during the automatic match of the board.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

553

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The board cannot perform automatic match, because the board software is missing from the software package. Therefore, the board software version is inconsistent with the NE software version, and certain functions of the NE may be affected.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: Certain board software is uninstalled during the software package loading.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Certain board software is uninstalled during the software package loading. 1. Add the required board software to the software package. Alternatively, perform the software package loading again.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.250 SWDL_PKGVER_MM
Description
The SWDL_PKGVER_MM is an alarm indicating that the consistency check on the software package version fails. This alarm is reported when the consistency check on the software package version fails.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 554

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


The software version of the software package is inconsistent with the software version described in the software package. As a result, certain functions of the NE may be affected.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The software version information in the description file of the software package is inconsistent with the actual software version information.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The software version information in the description file of the software package is inconsistent with the actual software version information. 1. Ensure that the loaded software package is correct. Perform the package diffusion again on the NE where the alarm is reported.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.251 SWDL_ROLLBACK_FAIL
Description
The SWDL_ROLLBACK_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the rollback on the NE fails. This alarm is reported when the rollback fails for any board on the NE.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The board software version and the NE software version may mismatch, and certain functions of the NE may be affected.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: Certain board software is uninstalled during the software package loading.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 555

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Certain board software is uninstalled during the software package loading. 1. Add the required board software to the software package. Alternatively, perform the software package loading again.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.252 SYN_BAD
Description
The SYN_BAD is an alarm indicating that the quality of the synchronization source declines.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The NE clock fails to be locked.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The quality of the synchronization source declines. Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The quality of the synchronization source declines. 1. Take different measures based on the traced synchronization source. If... Then...

The traced synchronization source is an Perform Steps Step 1.2 to Step 1.4. external clock The traced synchronization source is a line clock 2.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Replace the system control, switching&timing board of the upstream NE.

Check whether the configuration of the external clock is correct.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 556

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The configuration is incorrect The configuration is correct 3.

Then... Change the configuration data. Go to the next step.

Check whether the opposite equipment that provides the clock source is faulty. If... The equipment is faulty The equipment functions normally Then... Rectify the fault. Go to the next step.

4.

Check whether the cable that is connected to the external clock source is in normal status. If... The cable is not in normal status The cable is in normal status Then... Replace the cable. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty. 1. 6.9 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.253 SYNC_C_LOS
Description
The SYNC_C_LOS is an alarm indicating that the synchronization source is lost.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Warning Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The NE clock degrades or enters the free-run mode.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The clock source is lost.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 557

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The clock source is lost. 1. Troubleshoot the synchronization sources of the lost clock source based on the clock source priority table. If... The synchronization source is an external clock The synchronization source is an IF clock The synchronization source is a line clock The synchronization source is a tributary clock ----End Then... Handle the EXT_SYNC_LOS alarm. Handle the alarm that occurs on the IF board. Handle the alarm that occurs on the line board. Handle the alarm that occurs on the tributary board.

Related Information
None.

A.3.254 T_ALOS
Description
The T_ALOS is an alarm indicating that the 2 Mbit/s analog signal is lost at the specific port.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The 2Mbit/s services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Cause 1: No 2 Mbit/s services are received on the port. Cause 2: The opposite NE is faulty. Cause 3: The IF cable is faulty. Cause 4: The alarmed board is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 558

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: No 2 Mbit/s services are received on the port. 1. Check whether the alarmed port receives the 2 Mbit/s service. If... Then...

The services are not received Transmit the services to the port or delete the unnecessary service configuration. The services are received Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The equipment at the opposite end is faulty. 1. Check whether the equipment at the opposite end is faulty. If... The equipment is faulty The equipment is normal Step 3 Cause 3: The IF cable is faulty. 1. Check whether the IF cable is faulty. If... The IF cable is faulty The IF cable is not faulty Step 4 Cause 4: The alarmed board is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board. ----End Then... Rectify the fault. Go to Cause 4. Then... Rectify the fault. Go to Cause 3.

Related Information
None.

A.3.255 T_F_RST
Description
The T_F_RST is an alarm indicating that the transmit FIFO is reset.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 559

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


The services in the PDH path are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The frequency offset of the input signal is very large. Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The frequency offset of the input signal is very large. 1. Measure the frequency offset of the input signal. If... The frequency offset is very large The frequency offset is within 50 ppm Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board. Then... Troubleshoot the remote site. Go to Cause 2.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.256 T_LOC
Description
The T_LOC is an alarm indicating that the clock is lost on the transmit line side.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The services in the alarmed AU-4 path are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Cause 1: The cross-connect and timing board is faulty.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 560

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Cause 2: The line board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The cross-connect and timing board is faulty. 1. Replace the cross-connect and timing board at the local site. If... The alarm is cleared after the board is replaced The alarm persists after the board is replaced Step 2 Cause 2: The line board is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board. ----End Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 2.

Related Information
None.

A.3.257 TEMP_ALARM
Description
The TEMP_ALARM is an alarm indicating that the board temperature crosses the threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Environmental alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning l 0x01: The temperature crosses the upper threshold. l 0x02: The temperature crosses the lower threshold.

Impact on the System


The board fails to work normally.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 561

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The board temperature crosses the threshold. Cause 2: The temperature detection circuit of the board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The board temperature crosses the threshold. 1. 2. If the alarm is reported by the ODU, take appropriate measures (for example, installing a sunshade) to control the temperature. If the alarm is reported by the board on the IDU, check whether the temperature control devices, such as air-conditioners, work normally. If... The temperature control devices work abnormally The temperature control devices work normally 3. Then... Adjust the temperature control devices. Go to the next step.

Check whether the heat dissipation hole on the IDU is covered or blocked. If... The heat dissipation hole is covered or blocked Then... Clear or remove the covering materials or obstacles.

The heat dissipation hole is not covered or Go to Cause 2. blocked Step 2 Cause 2: The temperature detection circuit of the board is faulty. 1. If the ambient temperature is normal and no other heat dissipation problems exist, replace the alarmed board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.258 THUNDERALM
Description
The THUNDERALM is an alarm indicating the surge protection failure. If the system detects the surge protection circuit fails, the THUNDERALM occurs.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Alarm Type Environment alarm

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

562

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the THUNDERALM occurs, the system operation and services are not affected, but the surge protection function fails.

Possible Causes
The possible causes of the THUNDERALM alarm are as follows: l l Cause 1: The fuse tube of the surge protection circuit is interrupted. Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The fuse tube of the surge protection circuit is interrupted. 1. Replace the fuse tube, and then check whether the alarm is cleared.

Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty. 1. Replace the board that reports the THUNDERALM alarm.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.259 TR_LOC
Description
The TR_LOC is an alarm indicating that the clock is faulty. This alarm is reported when a board detects that the clock signal transmitted from the clock unit to the board is lost.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 563

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 1

Meaning Indicates the slot ID of the board that loses the clock. l 0x01: board with a smaller slot ID. l 0x02: board with a larger slot ID. l 0x03: two boards.

Impact on the System


l l If the protection cross-connect board is faulty, the services are not affected. If the working cross-connect board is faulty, the services are switched, therefore causing transient service interruption.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: If one board reports this alarm, the board hardware is faulty. Cause 2: If multiple boards report this alarm, the clock cable of the cross-connect board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Locate the alarmed board according to the alarm parameter. Step 2 Cause 1: If one board reports this alarm, the board hardware is faulty. 1. Perform a warm reset on the alarmed board, and then check whether the alarm is cleared. If the alarm persists, perform a cold reset on the alarmed board. For details, see Resetting a Boards. If the alarm persists, remove the alarmed board and check whether certain pins on the backplane are bent. Insert the board again, and then check whether the alarm is cleared. If the alarm persists, replace the alarmed board. For details, see Replacing a Board.

2. 3.

Step 3 Cause 2: If multiple boards report this alarm, the clock cable of the cross-connect board is faulty. 1. 2. 3. 4. If the working cross-connect board is faulty, perform 1+1 protection switching on the crossconnect board. For details, see Performing 1+1 Protection Switching. Perform a cold reset on the protection cross-connect board, and then check whether the alarm is cleared. If the alarm persists, remove and insert the protection cross-connect board, and then check whether the alarm is cleared. If the alarm persists, replace the protection cross-connect board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.260 TU_AIS
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 564

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Description
The AU_AIS is an alarm indicating that the TU has errors. This alarm is reported if a board detects that the signal in the TU path is all 1s.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The service in the alarmed TU path is interrupted. If the services are configured with protection, protection switching is also triggered.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: Configuration data is incorrect. Cause 2: The line is faulty. Cause 3: The board at the opposite end is faulty. Cause 4: The board at the local end is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Configuration data is incorrect. 1. See Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services to check whether the SDH service data is incorrect. If... The SDH service data is incorrect The SDH service data is correct Step 2 Cause 2: The line is faulty. 1. Check whether a line alarm that causes AIS insertion is reported on the service trail.
NOTE

Then... Change the configuration data. Go to Cause 2.

For details about the line alarms that cause AIS insertion, see E.2.6 AIS Insertion.

If... The line alarm is reported No line alarms are reported 2.

Then... Clear the line alarms that cause AIS insertion. Go to the next step.

See 8.6 Software Loopback to locate whether the board at the local end or at the opposite end is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 565

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The board at the opposite end is faulty The board at the local end is faulty Step 3 Cause 3: The board at the opposite end is faulty. 1. 1. Replace the faulty board at the opposite end. Replace the board where the local line unit resides. If... The alarm is cleared after the board is replaced The alarm persists after the board is replaced 2. Then... Step 4 Cause 4: The board at the local end is faulty.

Then... Go to Cause 3. Go to Cause 4.

The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Go to the next step.

Replace the system control, cross-connect, and timing board at the local end. If... The alarm is cleared after the board is replaced The alarm persists after the board is replaced Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Go to the next step.

3.

Replace the alarmed board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.261 TU_AIS_VC12
Description
The TU_AIS_VC12 is an indication of TU alarms at VC-12 level. This alarm occurs when a board detects TU pointers of all 1s.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 566

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the services in the alarmed VC-12 path are interrupted. If the services are configured with protection, protection switching is also triggered.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: Configuration data is incorrect. Cause 2: The line is faulty. Cause 3: The board at the opposite site is faulty. Cause 4: The board at the local site is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Configuration data is incorrect. 1. Check whether the SDH service data is correct. For details, see Creating the CrossConnections of Point-to-Point Services. If... The SDH service data is incorrect The SDH service data is correct Step 2 Cause 2: The line is faulty. 1. Check whether a line alarm that causes AIS insertion is reported on the service trail.
NOTE

Then... Change the configuration data. Go to Cause 2.

For details about the line alarms that cause AIS insertion, see E.2.6 AIS Insertion.

If... The line alarm is reported No line alarms are reported

Then... Change the configuration data. Go to Step 3.

Step 3 Check whether the fault occurs at the local site or at the opposite site. For details, see 8.6.5 Setting Loopbacks for the EOS/EoPDH-Plane Ethernet Interface Board. If... The board at the opposite site is faulty The board at the local site is faulty Step 4 Cause 3: The board at the opposite site is faulty.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 567

Then... Go to Cause 3. Go to Cause 4.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1. 1.

Replace the faulty board at the opposite site. Replace the line board at the local site. For details, see 6.3 Replacing the SDH Optical Interface Board. If... The alarm clears after the board is replaced The alarm persists after the board is replaced Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Go to the next step.

Step 5 Cause 4: The board at the local site is faulty.

2.

Replace the alarmed board at the local site.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.262 TU_AIS_VC3
Description
The TU_AIS_VC3 is a TU-3 alarm indication. The alarm is reported when a board detects TU pointers of all "1"s.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Has a fixed value of 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.

Impact on the System


The services in the alarmed TU-3 paths are interrupted. If the services are configured with protection, protection switching is triggered.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 568

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: SDH service configuration data is incorrect. Cause 2: The service path is faulty. Cause 3: The board at the opposite end is faulty. Cause 4: The board at the local end is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: SDH service configuration data is incorrect. 1. Follow instructions in Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services to check whether the SDH service configuration data is incorrect. If... The SDH service configuration data is incorrect The SDH service configuration data is correct Step 2 Cause 2: The service path is faulty. 1. Check whether a line alarm that will cause AIS insertion is reported on the service path.
NOTE

Then... Rectify the SDH service configuration data. Go to cause 2.

For the line alarms that will cause AIS insertion, see E.2.6 AIS Insertion.

If... A line alarm that will cause AIS insertion is reported No line alarm is reported

Then... Rectify the SDH service configuration data. Go to step 3.

Step 3 Follow instructions in 8.6.4 Setting a Loopback for the Packet-plane Ethernet Interface Board to identify whether the board at the local end or at the opposite end is faulty. If... The board at the opposite end is faulty The board at the local end is faulty Step 4 Cause 3: The board at the opposite end is faulty. 1. 1. Replace the faulty board at the opposite end. Follow instructions in 6.3 Replacing the SDH Optical Interface Board to replace the line board at the local end. If... The alarm clears The alarm persists 2. Then... No further action is required. Go to the next step. Step 5 Cause 4: The board at the local end is faulty. Then... Go to cause 3. Go to cause 4.

Follow instructions in 6.9 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board to replace the system control, switching, and timing board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 569

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The alarm clears

Then... No further action is required.

The alarm persists Follow instructions in Replacing an Alarmed Board to replace the board that reports the alarm. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.263 TU_LOP
Description
The TU_LOP is an alarm indicating that the TU pointer is lost. This alarm is reported if a board detects that the TU-PTR value is an invalid pointer or NDF reversion in eight consecutive frames.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The service in the alarmed TU path is interrupted. If the services are configured with protection, protection switching is also triggered.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The system control, cross-connect, and timing board is faulty. Cause 2: The tributary board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The system control, cross-connect, and timing board is faulty. 1. Replace the system control, cross-connect, and timing board at the local end. If... The alarm is cleared after the board is replaced The alarm persists after the board is replaced
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 2.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

570

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Step 2 Cause 2: The tributary board is faulty. 1. Replace the board where the tributary unit resides.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.264 TU_LOP_VC12
Description
The TU_LOP_VC12 is an alarm indicating that the VC-12 TU pointer is lost. This alarm is reported when a board receives invalid pointers or new data flags (NDFs) in eight consecutive VC-12 frames.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path.

Impact on the System


Services in the alarmed TU path are interrupted. If the services are configured with protection, protection switching is also triggered.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: Configuration data is incorrect. Cause 2: The board at the opposite site is faulty. Cause 3: The board at the local site is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Configuration data is incorrect.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 571

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Check whether the SDH service data is correct. For details, see Creating the CrossConnections of Point-to-Point Services. If... The SDH service data is incorrect The SDH service data is correct Then... Change the configuration data. Go to Step 2.

Step 2 Check whether the fault occurs at the local site or at the opposite site. For details, see 8.6.5 Setting Loopbacks for the EOS/EoPDH-Plane Ethernet Interface Board. If... The board at the opposite site is faulty The board at the local site is faulty Step 3 Cause 2: The board at the opposite site is faulty. 1. In this case, replace the faulty board at the opposite site. Then... Go to Cause 2. Go to Cause 3.

Step 4 Cause 3: The board at the local site is faulty. 1. Replace the line board at the local site. For details, see 6.3 Replacing the SDH Optical Interface Board. If... The alarm clears after the board is replaced The alarm persists after the board is replaced 2. Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Go to the next step.

Replace the alarmed board at the local site.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.265 TU_LOP_VC3
Description
The TU_LOP_VC3 alarm indicates that a TU-3 pointer is lost. This alarm is reported if a board detects that eight consecutive VC-3 TU-PTR values are invalid or the NDF field in eight consecutive VC-3 TU-PTR values are reversed.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Alarm Type Communication alarm

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

572

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Has a fixed value of 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.

Impact on the System


The services in the alarmed TU-3 path are interrupted. If the services are configured with protection, protection switching is triggered.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: SDH service configuration data is incorrect. Cause 2: The board at the opposite end is faulty. Cause 3: The board at the local end is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: SDH service configuration data is incorrect. 1. Follow instructions in Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services to check whether the SDH service configuration data is incorrect. If... The SDH service configuration data is incorrect The SDH service configuration data is correct Then... Rectify the SDH service configuration data. Go to step 2.

Step 2 Follow instructions in 8.6.4 Setting a Loopback for the Packet-plane Ethernet Interface Board to identify whether the board at the local end or at the opposite end is faulty. If... The board at the opposite end is faulty The board at the local end is faulty Step 3 Cause 2: The board at the opposite end is faulty. 1. 1. Replace the faulty board at the opposite end. Follow instructions in 6.3 Replacing the SDH Optical Interface Board to replace the line board at the local end.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 573

Then... Go to cause 2. Go to cause 3.

Step 4 Cause 3: The board at the local end is faulty.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The alarm clears The alarm persists 2.

Then... No further action is required. Go to the next step.

Follow instructions in 6.9 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board to replace the system control, switching, and timing board. If... The alarm clears The alarm persists Then... No further action is required. Go to the next step.

3.

Follow instructions in Replacing an Alarmed Board to replace the board that reports the alarm.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.266 TUNNEL_APS_DEGRADED
Description
The TUNNEL_APS_DEGRADED is an alarm indicating that a tunnel protection group degrades.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The protection tunnel is faulty and the protection group fails.

Possible Causes
Cause: The protection tunnel in the tunnel protection group is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause: The protection tunnel in the tunnel protection group is faulty. 1. Check the status of the tunnel protection group and confirm that the protection tunnel is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 574

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

2.

8.3.3 Browsing Current Alarms and clear the alarms in the protection tunnel.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.267 UHCS
Description
The UHCS is an alarm of uncorrected header check sequence. This alarm occurs when multiple uncorrectable bit errors exist in the cell headers.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the UHCS alarm occurs, some cells with multiple bit errors are detected during cell delimitation at the ATM port. Consequently, the user cells are lost.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: A few bit errors occur in the receive path related to the ATM port which reports the UHCS alarm. Cause 2: The ATM physical-layer processing chip of the board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: A few bit errors occur in the receive path connected to the ATM port which reports the UHCS alarm. 1. 2. 3. On the NMS, check whether the related receive path reports any alarms indicating excessive bit errors, such as B1_SD, B2_SD, and B3_SD. On the NMS, check whether the service is looped. If yes, modify the service configuration to release the loop, and then check whether the alarm is cleared.

Step 2 Cause 2: The ATM physical-layer processing chip of the board is faulty. 1. Perform a cold reset on the board that reports the UHCS alarm and check whether the alarm is cleared. For details, see 8.7.1 Cold Reset.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 575

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

2.

Optional: If the UHCS alarm persists after the cold reset, replace the alarmed board and check whether the alarm is cleared. For details, see 6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.268 UP_E1_AIS
Description
The UP_E1_AIS is an alarm indication of the 2 Mbit/s uplink signal. This alarm is reported when the tributary board detects that the 2 Mbit/s uplink signal is all 1s.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


E1 signals are unavailable.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The opposite equipment transmits the AIS signal. Cause 2: The receive unit of the tributary board on the local equipment is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite equipment transmits the AIS signal. 1. Check whether the opposite equipment transmits the AIS signal. If... The opposite equipment transmits the AIS signal The opposite equipment does not transmit the AIS signal Then... Rectify the fault on the opposite equipment. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The receive unit of the tributary board on the local equipment is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board.

----End
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 576

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.3.269 VC_AIS
Description
The VC_AIS is an alarm indication of the virtual channel (VC) connection. This alarm occurs when the VC connection that is set with the segment end point attribute receives the AIS cells, indicating that the upstream ATM services are abnormal.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the direction of ATM connection. l 0x01: forward l 0x02: backward Parameter 2 Indicates the status of ATM connection. l 0x01: working connection l 0x00: protection connection Parameter 3 Indicates the segment and end attribute of ATM connection. l 0x01: segment l 0x02: end

Impact on the System


l If the continuity check (CC) sink is enabled on an upstream NE but the upstream NE does not receive any CC cells, the local NE reports the VP_AIS. Then, the connection, though not interrupted, is not loaded with any user service. In other cases, when the local NE detects that the VC connection is interrupted, the AIS cells are inserted in the downstream direction and the RDI cells are returned to the upstream NE.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 577

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: An upstream NE reports the VC_LOC, and the AIS cells are inserted to the downstream. Cause 2: On the local NE, the ATM port connected to a faulty upstream SDH path is abnormal in the receive direction and therefore inserts AIS cells to the downstream. Cause 3: The board on the local NE is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: An upstream NE reports the VC_LOC, and the AIS cells are inserted to the downstream. 1. 2. On the NMS, check whether the VC_LOC occurs and the ATM connections that report the VC_LOC have the same ID. If the VC_LOC occurs, clear the VC_LOC and then the AIS insertion stops.

Step 2 Cause 2: On the local NE, the ATM port connected to a faulty upstream SDH path is abnormal in the receive direction and therefore inserts AIS cells to the downstream. 1. 2. Check whether any alarm, such as the R_LOS, R_LOF, MS_AIS, AU_AIS, AU_LOP, TU_AIS or TU_LOP occurs in the upstream SDH path. If yes, clear these alarms and then the AIS insertion stops.

Step 3 Cause 3: The board on the local NE is faulty. 1. 2. Perform a cold reset on the alarmed board. If the alarm persists, replace the alarmed board.

----End

Related Information
Unidirectional Connection A complete bidirectional connection consists of two unidirectional connections: a forward connection and a backward connection. The direction of the forward and backward connections is based on the same node. End and Segment The end point refers to the termination point in the chain network, and it is used to monitor the whole virtual connection. The segment point is, generally, used to monitor a segment of the whole link. Segment End Point This is one of the segment end attributes. The segment end attributes include: segment point, end point, segment and end point, non segment and end point. l l l If an NE is set with the segment end point attribute, it can retrieve the alarms that are generated at the segment and end. If an NE is set with the segment point attribute, it can retrieve the alarms that are generated at a segment. If an NE is set with the end point attribute, it can retrieve the alarms that are generated at an end.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 578

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If an NE is set with the non segment end point attribute, it fails to retrieve the alarms that are generated at the segment and end.

A.3.270 VC_LOC
Description
The VC_LOC is an alarm indicating loss of connectivity on the virtual channel (VC). This alarm is reported when the CC is enabled but no cell is received within 3.5s (0.5s).

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the direction of ATM connection. l 0x01: forward l 0x02: backward Parameter 2 Indicates the status of ATM connection. l 0x01: working connection l 0x00: protection connection Parameter 3 Indicates the segment and end attribute of ATM connection. l 0x01: segment l 0x02: end l 0x03: segment and end

Impact on the System


l l l If the CC sink is enabled on the local NE but the local NE does not receive any CC cells, the service connection, though not interrupted, is not loaded with any user service. In other cases, the service is interrupted when the alarm occurs. When this alarm occurs, the system automatically inserts AIS cells to the downstream.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

579

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The CC sink is enabled on the local NE, but no CC source is enabled on the upstream NE. Cause 2: No bandwidth is available on the local NE. Cause 3: On the local NE, the ATM port connected to a faulty upstream SDH path is abnormal in the receive direction. Cause 4: The board on the local NE is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The CC sink is enabled on the local NE, but no CC source is enabled on the upstream NE. 1. 2. 1. 2. Check whether the CC function on the local NE is activated. If yes, Deactivate the CC function on the local NE. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared. On the NMS, check whether the bandwidth allocated to the tunnel is fully used. If yes, increase the bandwidth or eliminate the sources that transmit a large amount of invalid data.

Step 2 Cause 2: No bandwidth is available on the local NE.

Step 3 Cause 3: On the local NE, the ATM port connected to a faulty upstream SDH path is abnormal in the receive direction. 1. 2. 1. 2. Check whether any alarm, such as the R_LOS, R_LOF, MS_AIS, AU_AIS, AU_LOP, TU_AIS or TU_LOP, occurs in an upstream SDH path. If yes, clear these alarms and check whether the VC_LOC is cleared. Perform a cold reset on the alarmed board. If the alarm persists, replace the alarmed board.

Step 4 Cause 4: The board on the local NE is faulty.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.271 VC_RDI
Description
The VC_RDI is an alarm indicating that defects occur at the remote end of the virtual channel (VC) connection. This alarm occurs when a forward or backward VC connection that is set with the segment end point attribute receives the RDI cells, indicating that the downstream services are abnormal.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

580

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the direction of ATM connection. l 0x01: forward l 0x02: backward Parameter 2 Indicates the status of ATM connection. l 0x01: working connection l 0x00: protection connection Parameter 3 Indicates the segment and end attribute of ATM connection. l 0x01: segment l 0x02: end

Impact on the System


l When this alarm occurs, it indicates that a segment end point at the remote end of the VC connection receives AIS cells and returns RDI cells to the local end, but the services at the local end are not affected.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The VC_AIS occurs in the receive direction of the downstream VC connection. Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The VC_AIS occurs in the receive direction of the downstream VC connection. 1. 2. Check whether the VC_AIS occurs in the receive direction of the downstream VC connection. If yes, clear the VC_AIS and then check whether the VC_RDI is cleared.

Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty. 1.


Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Perform a cold reset on the alarmed board.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 581

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

2.

If the alarm persists, replace the alarmed board.

----End

Related Information
Unidirectional Connection A complete bidirectional connection consists of two unidirectional connections: a forward connection and a backward connection. The direction of the forward and backward connections is based on the same node. End and Segment The end point refers to the termination point in the chain network, and it is used to monitor the whole virtual connection. The segment point is, generally, used to monitor a segment of the whole link. Segment End Point This is one of the segment end attributes. The segment end attributes include: segment point, end point, segment and end point, non segment and end point. l l l l If an NE is set with the segment end point attribute, it can retrieve the alarms that are generated at the segment and end. If an NE is set with the segment point attribute, it can retrieve the alarms that are generated at a segment. If an NE is set with the end point attribute, it can retrieve the alarms that are generated at an end. If an NE is set with the non segment end point attribute, it fails to retrieve the alarms that are generated at the segment and end.

A.3.272 VCAT_LOA
Description
The VCAT_LOA is an alarm indicating alignment loss of virtual concatenations. This alarm is reported if a board detects that the time delays between the timeslots bound to a VCTRUNK exceed the permissible limit.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 582

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2, Parameter 3

Meaning The value is always 0x01. Indicate the ID of the VCTRUNK path.

Impact on the System


The virtually concatenated services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The timeslots bound to a VCTRUNK travel through different physical links, so the delays between the virtually concatenated links are long.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The timeslots bound to a VCTRUNK travel through different physical links, so the delays between the virtually concatenated links are long. 1. 2. Determine the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK path based on the alarm parameters. Check whether the transmission routes of the paths bound to a VCTRUNK are the same. If not, adjust their routes to the same.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.273 VCAT_LOM_VC12
Description
The VCAT_LOM_VC12 is an alarm indicating the loss of virtual concatenation multiframes in the VC-12 path. This alarm is reported if the board detects that the K4 byte of the VC-12 path does not match the expected multiframe sequence.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 583

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 1

Meaning Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path.

Impact on the System


The alarmed path is unavailable. If the LCAS function is disabled, the services in the path are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: Bit errors occur on the line. Cause 2: The MFI field in the K4 byte sent from the opposite site is incorrect. Cause 3: The delays between virtual concatenations are over long.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Bit errors occur on the line. 1. Check whether any bit error alarm such as BIP_EXC and BIP_SD occurs. If... A bit error alarm occurs No bit error alarm occurs Then... Handle the alarm immediately. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The MFI field in the K4 byte sent from the opposite site is incorrect. 1. 2. Replace the board at the opposite site. For details, see 6.6 Replacing the Ethernet Interface Board. Replace the board and then check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm clears The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: The delays between virtual concatenations are over long. 1. Check whether the VCAT_LOA alarm is reported in this path. If... The VCAT_LOA alarm is reported Then... Handle the VCAT_LOA alarm immediately.

The VCAT_LOA alarm is not reported Go to Cause 2. 2. Check whether the VCAT_LOM_VC12 alarm clears after handling the VCAT_LOA alarm. If... The alarm clears
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Then... End the alarm handling.


584

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If...

Then...

The alarm persists Replace the alarmed board at the local site. For details, see Replace the alarmed board. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.274 VCAT_LOM_VC3
Description
The VCAT_LOM_VC3 alarm indicates the loss of virtually concatenated multiframes in a VC-3 path. A board reports this alarm when detecting that byte H4 in the VC-3 path does not match the expected multiframe sequence.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Has a fixed value of 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.

Impact on the System


The path that reports the alarm is unavailable. If the LCAS function is disabled, services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Cause 1: Bit errors occur in the line. Cause 2: The MFI field in byte K4 sent from the opposite site is incorrect. Cause 3: The delays between virtual concatenations are too long.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 585

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Bit errors occur in the line. 1. Check for the bit error alarms such as BIP_EXC or BIP_SD. If... The bit error alarms exist The bit error alarms do not exist Then... Handle the alarms immediately. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The MFI field in byte K4 sent from the opposite site is incorrect. 1. 2. Follow instructions in 6.6 Replacing the Ethernet Interface Board to replace the board at the opposite site. Replace the alarmed board and then check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm clears The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: The delays between virtual concatenations are too long. 1. Check whether a VCAT_LOA alarm is reported in this path. If... Then...

A VCAT_LOA alarm is reported in this Handle the VCAT_LOA alarm path immediately. No VCAT_LOA alarm is reported in this Go to Cause 2. path 2. Check whether the VCAT_LOM_VC3 alarm clears after handling the VCAT_LOA alarm. If... The VCAT_LOM_VC3 alarm clears Then... End the alarm handling.

The VCAT_LOM_VC3 alarm persists Follow instructions in 6.6 Replacing the Ethernet Interface Board to replace the alarmed board at the local site. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.275 VCAT_SQM_VC12
Description
The VCAT_SQM_VC12 is an alarm indicating the SQ number mismatch of a virtual concatenation in the VC-12 path. This alarm is reported if the board detects that the SQ of a virtual concatenation does not match the expected value.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 586

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path.

Impact on the System


The alarmed path is unavailable. If the LCAS function is disabled, services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: Bit errors occur on certain links or certain links are faulty. Cause 2: The SQ number sent from the opposite site is incorrect.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Bit errors occur on certain links or certain links are faulty. 1. Check whether bit errors or line alarms occur. Focus on the bit error alarm BIP_EXC or BIP_SD. If... Bit errors or line alarms occur No bit errors or line alarms occur 2. 1. Replace the alarmed board. Replace the corresponding board at the opposite site. If... The alarm clears after the board is replaced The alarm persists after the board is replaced ----End
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 587

Then... Clear these alarms. Go to the next step.

Step 2 Cause 2: The SQ number sent from the opposite site is incorrect.

Then... End the alarm handling. Contact Huawei technical support engineers for handling the alarm.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.3.276 VCAT_SQM_VC3
Description
The VCAT_SQM_VC3 alarm indicates that the sequence (SQ) number mismatch of a virtual concatenation in a VC-3 path. A board reports this alarm when detecting that the SQ of a virtual concatenation does not match the expected value.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Has a fixed value of 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.

Impact on the System


The path that reports the alarm is unavailable. If the LCAS function is disabled, services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: Bit errors occur on a link or a link is faulty. Cause 2: The SQ number sent from the opposite site is incorrect.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Bit errors occur on a link or a link is faulty. 1. Check for bit error alarms or line alarms, especially BIP_EXC and BIP_SD. If... Bit error alarms or line alarms occur
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Then... Clear these alarms.


588

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... No bit error alarms or line alarms occur 2. Replace the alarmed board.

Then... Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The SQ number sent from the opposite site is incorrect. 1. Replace the related board at the opposite site. If... Then...

The VCAT_SQM_VC3 alarm clears after the End the alarm handling. board is replaced The VCAT_SQM_VC3 alarm persists after the board is replaced ----End Contact Huawei technical support engineers.

Related Information
None.

A.3.277 VOLT_LOS
Description
The VOLT_LOS is an alarm indicating that the power voltage is unavailable.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning The value is always 0x01.

Impact on the System


The ODU that is connected to the IF board that reports this alarm fails to work.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 589

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The output power is abnormal. Cause 2: The input power is abnormal.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The output power is abnormal. 1. Check the power switch of the ODU. If... The power switch is turned off The power switch is turned on Then... Turn on the power switch. Go to the next step.

2.

Use the multimeter to check the IF fiber jumper, IF cable, or ODU section by section for a short circuit. If... A short circuit exists No short circuits exist Then... Replace the short-circuited component, and then replace the alarmed IF board. Replace the alarmed IF board.

CAUTION
If the alarm is reported due to a short circuit, replace the short-circuited cable or ODU, and then replace the IF board. Otherwise, the new IF board may be damaged again. Step 2 Cause 2: The input power is abnormal. 1. Replace the alarmed IF board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.278 VP_AIS
Description
The VP_AIS is an alarm indication of the virtual path (VP) connection. When a forward or backward VP connection that is set with the segment end point attribute receives the AIS cells, the alarm is reported, indicating that the upstream services are abnormal.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 590

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the direction of ATM connection. l 0x01: forward l 0x02: backward Parameter 2 Indicates the status of ATM connection. l 0x01: working connection l 0x00: protection connection Parameter 3 Indicates the segment and end attribute of ATM connection. l 0x01: segment l 0x02: end

Impact on the System


l If the continuity check (CC) sink is enabled on an upstream NE but the upstream NE does not receive any CC cells, the local NE reports the alarm. In this case, the connection, though not interrupted, is not loaded with any user service. In other cases, when the local NE detects that the VP connection is interrupted, the AIS cells are inserted to the downstream and the RDI cells are returned to the upstream NE.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: An upstream NE reports the VP_LOC, and the AIS cells are inserted to the downstream. Cause 2: On the local NE, the ATM port connected to a faulty upstream SDH path is abnormal in the receive direction and inserts AIS cells to the downstream. Cause 3: The board on the local NE is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: An upstream NE reports the VP_LOC, and the AIS cells are inserted to the downstream.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 591

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1. 2.

On the NMS, check whether the VP_LOC occurs and the ATM connections that report the VP_LOC have the same ID. If the VP_LOC occurs, clear the VP_LOC and then the AIS insertion stops.

Step 2 Cause 2: On the local NE, the ATM port connected to a faulty upstream SDH path is abnormal in the receive direction and therefore inserts AIS cells to the downstream. 1. 2. Check whether any alarm, such as the R_LOS, R_LOF, MS_AIS, TU_AIS, TU_LOP, AU_AIS or AU_LOP, occurs in an upstream SDH path. If yes, clear these alarms and then the AIS insertion stops.

Step 3 Cause 3: The board on the local NE is faulty. 1. 2. Perform a cold reset on the alarmed board. If the alarm persists, replace the alarmed board.

----End

Related Information
Unidirectional Connection A complete bidirectional connection consists of two unidirectional connections: a forward connection and a backward connection. The direction of the forward and backward connections is based on the same node. End and Segment The end point refers to the termination point in the chain network, and it is used to monitor the whole virtual connection. The segment point is, generally, used to monitor a segment of the whole link. Segment End Point This is one of the segment end attributes. The segment end attributes include: segment point, end point, segment and end point, non segment and end point. l l l l If an NE is set with the segment end point attribute, it can retrieve the alarms that are generated at the segment and end. If an NE is set with the segment point attribute, it can retrieve the alarms that are generated at a segment. If an NE is set with the end point attribute, it can retrieve the alarms that are generated at an end. If an NE is set with the non segment end point attribute, it fails to retrieve the alarms that are generated at the segment and end.

A.3.279 VP_LOC
Description
The VP_LOC is an alarm indicating loss of connectivity on the virtual path (VP). This alarm is reported when the CC is enabled but no cell is received within 3.5s (0.5s). When any cell is received, the alarm is cleared automatically.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 592

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the direction of ATM connection. l 0x01: forward l 0x02: backward Parameter 2 Indicates the status of ATM connection. l 0x01: working connection l 0x00: protection connection Parameter 3 Indicates the segment and end attribute of ATM connection. l 0x01: segment l 0x02: end l 0x03: segment and end

Impact on the System


l l l l If the CC sink is enabled on the local NE but the local NE does not receive any CC cells, the service connection, though not interrupted, is not loaded with any user service. In other cases, the service is interrupted when the alarm occurs. When this alarm occurs, the system automatically inserts AIS cells to the downstream. The VP_LOC is suppressed when the VP_AIS occurs.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The CC sink is enabled on the local NE, but no CC source is enabled on the upstream NE. Cause 2: No bandwidth is available on the local NE. Cause 3: On the local NE, the ATM port connected to a faulty upstream SDH path is abnormal in the receive direction. Cause 4: A certain board is faulty.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

593

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The CC sink is enabled on the local NE, but no CC source is enabled on the upstream NE. 1. Deactivate the CC function on the local NE.

Step 2 Cause 2: No bandwidth is available on the local NE. 1. 2. On the NMS, check whether the bandwidth allocated to the tunnel is fully used. If yes, increase the bandwidth or eliminate the sources that transmit a large amount of invalid data.

Step 3 Cause 3: On the local NE, the ATM port connected to a faulty upstream SDH path is abnormal in the receive direction. 1. 2. Check whether any alarm, such as the R_LOS, R_LOF, MS_AIS, TU_AIS, TU_LOP, AU_AIS or AU_LOP, occurs in an upstream SDH path. If yes, clear these alarms.

Step 4 Cause 4: A certain board is faulty. 1. 2. Perform a cold reset on the alarmed board. Check whether the alarm is cleared. If not, replace the alarmed board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.280 VP_RDI
Description
The VP_RDI is an alarm indicating that defects occur at the remote end of the virtual path (VP) connection. This alarm occurs when a forward or backward VP connection that is set with the segment end point attribute receives the RDI cells, indicating that the downstream services are abnormal.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 594

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 1

Meaning Indicates the direction of ATM connection. l 0x01: forward l 0x02: backward

Parameter 2

Indicates the status of ATM connection. l 0x01: working connection l 0x00: protection connection

Parameter 3

Indicates the segment and end attribute of ATM connection. l 0x01: segment l 0x02: end

Impact on the System


l When this alarm occurs, the services are not affected. This alarm just indicates that the services in the receive direction of the downstream VP connection are abnormal. The AIS cells are received in a segment point of the connection, and the RDI cells are returned to the upstream VP connection.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The VP_AIS occurs in the receive direction of the downstream VP connection. Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.

Procedure
l Cause 1: The VP_AIS occurs in the receive direction of the downstream VP connection. 1. 2. l 1. 2. ----End Check whether the VP_AIS occurs in the receive direction of the downstream VP connection. If yes, clear the VP_AIS and then check whether the VP_RDI is cleared. Perform a cold reset on the alarmed board. For details, see 8.7.1 Cold Reset. If the alarm persists, replace the alarmed board. For details, see 6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board.

Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.

Related Information
Unidirectional Connection A complete bidirectional connection consists of two unidirectional connections: a forward connection and a backward connection. The direction of the forward and backward connections is based on the same node. End and Segment
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 595

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

The end point refers to the termination point in the chain network, and it is used to monitor the whole virtual connection. The segment point is, generally, used to monitor a segment of the whole link. Segment End Point This is one of the segment end attributes. The segment end attributes include: segment point, end point, segment and end point, non segment and end point. l l l l If an NE is set with the segment end point attribute, it can retrieve the alarms that are generated at the segment and end. If an NE is set with the segment point attribute, it can retrieve the alarms that are generated at a segment. If an NE is set with the end point attribute, it can retrieve the alarms that are generated at an end. If an NE is set with the non segment end point attribute, it fails to retrieve the alarms that are generated at the segment and end.

A.3.281 WRG_BD_TYPE
Description
The WRG_BD_TYPE is an alarm indicating that the type of the board is incorrect.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The board fails to work.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: Configuration data is incorrect. Cause 2: The board of an incorrect type is installed.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Configuration data is incorrect. 1. See Configuring the Logical Board to check whether the board type complies with the planning requirement.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 596

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The board type does not meet the planning requirement The board type meets the planning requirement Step 2 Cause 2: The board of an incorrect type is installed. 1. Replace the board of an incorrect type.

Then... Change the configuration data. Go to Cause 2.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.282 XPIC_LOS
Description
The XPIC_LOS is an alarm indicating that the XPIC compensation signals are lost.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


Bit errors may occur in the service at the port, and the service may even be interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: Configuration data is incorrect. Cause 2: The radio link is faulty. Cause 3: The XPIC cable is faulty. Cause 4: The IF board or ODU is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Configuration data is incorrect. 1. Check whether the XPIC function needs to be enabled. If not, see Setting IF Attributes to disable the XPIC function, and then perform a self-loop at the XPIC port on the board by using the XPIC cable.

Step 2 Cause 2: The radio link is faulty.


Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 597

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Check whether the paired board that is connected to the XPIC IF board through the XPIC cable reports the MW_LOF alarm. If yes, first clear the MW_LOF alarm. Check the connection of the XPIC cable. If... The cable is improperly connected The cable is properly connected Then... Connect the XPIC cable properly. Go to the next step.

Step 3 Cause 3: The XPIC cable is faulty. 1.

2.

Test the make and break of the XPIC cable by using the multimeter. If the XPIC cable is damaged, replace it.

Step 4 Cause 4: The IF board or ODU is faulty. Locate the fault by replacing the IF board or ODU. 1. Replace the paired board of the XPIC IF board. The paired board of the XPIC IF board refers to the other XPIC IF board connected to the alarmed XPIC IF board through the XPIC cable. If... The alarm is cleared after the board is replaced The alarm persists after the board is replaced 2. Then... End the alarm handling. Go to the next step.

Replace the ODU that is connected to the paired XPIC IF board. If... The alarm is cleared after the ODU is replaced The alarm persists after the ODU is replaced Then... End the alarm handling. Replace the alarmed XPIC IF board.

----End

Related Information
None.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

598

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

B Abnormal Event Reference

Abnormal Event Reference

Abnormal events are important indicators when abnormalities occur on the equipment. This chapter describes all the possible important abnormal events on the OptiX RTN 980 and how to handle these events. B.1 Major Abnormal Performance Event List Abnormal events are important indicators when abnormalities occur on the equipment. This chapter describes all the possible important abnormal events on the OptiX RTN 980 and how to handle these events.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

599

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

B Abnormal Event Reference

B.1 Major Abnormal Performance Event List


Abnormal events are important indicators when abnormalities occur on the equipment. This chapter describes all the possible important abnormal events on the OptiX RTN 980 and how to handle these events. Table B-1 Major performance event list Event Name B.2.1 IF 1+1 Protection Switching B.2.2 N+1 Protection Switching B.2.3 SNCP Switching B.2.4 Linear MSP Switching B.2.6 Status Change of an APS Protection Group B.2.7 Reporting of PW APS Switching Events B.2.5 Ring MSP Switching B.2.8 System Control Board Switching B.2.9 RMON Performance Value Below the Lower Limit B.2.10 RMON Performance Value Above the Upper Limit EM6FA, EM6TA, EFP8, EMS6, EM6F, EG2D, and EM6T Source CSHN

B.2 Abnormal Performance Events and Handling Procedures


This chapter describes all the important abnormal performance events on the OptiX RTN 980 in an alphabetical order and how to handle these abnormal performance events.

B.2.1 IF 1+1 Protection Switching


Description
This abnormal event indicates that the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD switching occurs on the equipment.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

600

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

B Abnormal Event Reference

Attribute
Severity Major Type Service

Parameters
Name Protection Group ID Current Working Board Slot Current Working Board Sub Slot Meaning Indicates the ID of the protection group where the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs. Indicates the slot ID of the current working board. Indicates the sub slot ID of the current working board. The value is always 0xff. Current Working Port No. Current Active Board Indicates the ID of the working port. Indicates the current working board. l Active on working board l Active on protection board Active Board Status Indicates the current state of the working board. l Normal l Failed l MW_RDI l Unknown Standby Board Status Indicates the current status of the protection board. l Normal l Failed l MW_RDI l Unknown

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

601

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

B Abnormal Event Reference

Name Switching Request

Meaning Indicates the type of an IF 1+1 protection switching request. l No request l Automatic switching l Manual switching l Forced switching l Lockout of switching l Wait-to-restore l RDI switching

NOTE

The parameter names and parameter values may vary with the version of the NMS.

Impact on System
l l During the HSB protection switching, services are interrupted. After the HSB switching is complete, the services are restored to normal. During the HSM protection switching, no bit errors occur and the services are not affected.

Related Alarms
When the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs, the RPS_INDI alarm is reported.

Possible Causes
l The possible causes of the HSB protection switching are as follows: The hardware of the ODU or IF unit at the local end is faulty. The working channel of the local end receives the MW_RDI alarm. The external switching, which is triggered by the switching command issued from the NMS software, occurs. The external switching includes lockout of switching, forced switching, and manual switching. l The possible causes of the HSM protection switching are as follows: The quality of the main channel degrades. In the case of Hybrid radio, the quality of the main channel degrades. In the case of SDH/PDH radio, an alarm that triggers the HSM switching is reported on the radio link. These alarms include R_LOC, R_LOF, R_LOS, MW_LOF, MW_FEC_UNCOR, B1_SD(IF1).

Procedure
Step 1 Rectify the fault according to the switching request type indicated by the parameter and the description in RPS_INDI. ----End
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 602

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

B Abnormal Event Reference

B.2.2 N+1 Protection Switching


Description
This abnormal event indicates that the N+1 protection switching occurs on the equipment.

Attribute
Severity Major Type Service

Parameters
Name Protection Group ID Path Name ID Switching Request Meaning Indicates the ID of the protection group where the IF N+1 protection switching occurs. Indicates the ID of the path where the IF N+1 protection switching occurs. Indicates the type of an IF N+1 protection switching request. l Lockout of protection channel l Forced switching l SF switching l SD switching l Manual switching l Wait-to-restore l Exercise l Reverse request l No request Switching Status Indicates the state of an N+1 protection group. l Protocol unstarted l Idle status l Switching status l Protocol starting Protected Unit Indicates the ID of the protected channel. The ID is 0xff if no switching is performed. Switching Local/Remote End Indication Indicates the local or remote switching. l Local end l Remote end
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 603

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

B Abnormal Event Reference

Name The switching status reason is changed

Meaning Indicates the cause of the IF N+1 protection switching. l Local request l External command l K-byte request l Timer expiry

NOTE

The parameter names and parameter values may vary with the version of the NMS.

Impact on System
During the N+1 protection switching (not more than 50 ms), the services are interrupted. After the N+1 switching is complete, the services are restored to normal. After the switching starts and before the switching is complete, the extra services are interrupted.
NOTE

If the IF N+1 protection switching is caused by exercise switching, service signals are not switched actually because the exercise switching is used to check whether the NE can run the N+1 protocol normally.

Related Alarms
When the IF N+1 protection switching occurs, the NP1_SW_INDI alarm is reported.

Possible Causes
l The external switching occurs. Lockout of protection channel Forced switching Manual switching l An automatic switching occurs. The hardware of the IDU or IF board is faulty. Focus on checking whether the HARD_BAD or BD_STATUS alarm is reported. The MW_LOF, R_LOC, R_LOF, R_LOS, MS_AIS, or B2_EXC alarm is reported on the working path.

Procedure
Step 1 Rectify the fault according to the switching request type and the switching cause indicated by the parameters. If... The switching is caused by the external switching Then... Find the cause of the external switching, and then release the external switching immediately.
604

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

B Abnormal Event Reference

If...

Then...

The switching is caused by the automatic Clear the alarm that triggers the automatic switching switching. ----End

B.2.3 SNCP Switching


Description
This abnormal event indicates that the SDH SNCP switching occurs in the service that is configured with the SNCP.

Attribute
Severity Major Type Service

Parameters
Name Source Sink Status Meaning Indicates the service source of the SNCP protection group. Indicates the service sink of the SNCP protection group. Indicates the current working path. l Working at protection channel l Working at working channel Switching Status Indicates the switching status. l Manual to standby l Force to active l Force to standby l Lockout switching l SF switching l SD switching l Wait-to-restore l Idle

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

605

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

B Abnormal Event Reference

Name Working Channel Current Status

Meaning Indicates the current status of the SNCP working path. l Normal l SD l SF

Protection Channel Current Status

Indicates the current status of the SNCP protection path. l Normal l SD l SF

NOTE

The parameter names and parameter values may vary with the version of the NMS.

Impact on System
When the SNCP switching occurs, you must find the cause. If the related link is faulty, recover the link immediately. Ensure that the states of the SNCP working path and the SNCP protection path are normal.

Possible Causes
l The SDH SNCP switching is automatically triggered. The hardware of the line board is faulty. The R_LOS, R_LOF, R_LOC, MS_AIS, B2_EXC, AU_LOP, AU_AIS, HP_LOM, MW_LOF (only when the IF board functions as the line board), MW_LIM (only when the IF board functions as the line board), B3_EXC, B3_SD, HP_TIM (in the case of VC-4 services), HP_UNEQ (in the case of VC-4 services), TU_AIS (in the case of VC-12 services) or TU_LOP (in the case of VC-12 services), LP_UNEQ (Optional condition), LP_TIM (Optional condition), BIP_SD (Optional condition), BIP_EXC (Optional condition), or MW_BER_EXC. l The SDH SNCP switching is manually triggered. Forced switching Manual switching

Procedure
Step 1 On the NMS, query the type of the SDH SNCP switching request. Step 2 Rectify the fault according to the switching request type.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

606

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

B Abnormal Event Reference

If... The SDH SNCP switching is automatically triggered The SDH SNCP switching is manually triggered ----End

Then... Rectify the fault according to the related alarm, and eliminate the conditions of the automatic switching. Find the cause of the manual switching, and then release the manual switching immediately.

B.2.4 Linear MSP Switching


Abnormal Event Description
This abnormal event indicates that a linear MSP switching occurs in the service that is configured with the MSP.

Abnormal Event Attributes


Level Major Type Service

Abnormal Event Parameters


Parameter Name Indicates the ID of the protection group. Current working path Definition Indicates the ID of the protection group where a linear MSP switching occurs. Indicates the current working path of the linear MSP group. l Working unit l Protection unit

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

607

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

B Abnormal Event Reference

Parameter Name Switching request type

Definition Indicates the type of a linear MSP switching request. l Locked switching l Forced switching l SF switching l SD switching l Manual switching l Wait-to-restore l Exercise l Reverse request l Non-revertive request l No request

Switching status

Indicates the switching status. l Protocol not started l Idle l Switching l Protocol being started

Remote/local end indication

Indicates the remote or local end. l No remote/local end l Local end l Remote end

Cause of switching status change

Indicates the cause of switching status change. l Local request l External command l K-byte request l Timer expiry

NOTE

The parameter names and parameter values may vary with the version of the NMS.

Impact on System
l During the switching time (not more than 50 ms), the services are interrupted. After the switching is complete, the services are restored to normal. After the switching starts and before the switching is complete, the extra services are interrupted. Troubleshooting measures need to be taken immediately when an MSP switching occurs because the possible causes are fiber cuts and failures of terminal nodes.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

608

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

B Abnormal Event Reference

Relevant Alarms
When a linear MSP switching occurs, the APS_INDI alarm may be reported.

Possible Causes
l l An external switching command is issued to trigger manual, forced, or exercise switching. An automatic switching occurs. After the R_LOS, R_LOF, MS_AIS, B2_EXC, B2_SD, B3_EXC, B3_SD, HP_TIM (in the case of VC-4 services), HP_UNEQ (in the case of VC-4 services), TU_AIS (in the case of VC-12 services), or TU_LOP (in the case of VC-12 services) alarm is reported, the MSP protection group changes to the switching status, and an automatic switching alarm is reported. l The hardware or line is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 On the NMS, query the switching type and the protection group ID. Step 2 Rectify the fault according to the switching request type. If... The switching is caused by external switching The switching is an automatic switching Then... Find out the cause and clear the switching immediately. Clear the relevant alarm, and rectify the hardware or line fault first.

----End

B.2.5 Ring MSP Switching


Description
This abnormal event indicates that a ring MSP switching occurs on the equipment that is configured with services.

Attribute
Severity Major Type Service

Parameters
Name Indicates the ID of the protection group. Meaning Indicates the ID of the protection group where a ring MSP switching occurs.
609

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

B Abnormal Event Reference

Name West switching request

Meaning Current switching request in the west direction of the MSP ring: l Lock in the section where fiber cuts occur l Lock in the protected section l Forced section switching l Forced ring switching l SF section switching l SF ring switching l SD section lock l SD section switching l SD ring switching l Manual section switching l Manual ring switching l Wait-to-restore l Exercise section switching l Exercise ring switching l No request

West switching status

Current switching status in the west direction of the MSP ring: l Protocol not started l Idle l Switching l Protocol being started l Pass-through

West service switching flag

Current service switching flag in the west direction of the MSP ring: l Full pass-through l No service switching l Service switching

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

610

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

B Abnormal Event Reference

Name East and west switching request

Meaning Current switching request in the east direction of the MSP ring: l Lock in the section where fiber cuts occur l Lock in the protected section l Forced section switching l Forced ring switching l SF section switching l SF ring switching l SD section lock l SD section switching l SD ring switching l Manual section switching l Manual ring switching l Wait-to-restore l Exercise section switching l Exercise ring switching l No request

East switching status

Current switching status in the east direction of the MSP ring: l Protocol unstarted l Idle l Switching l Protocol being started l Pass-through

East service switching flag

Current service switching flag in the east direction of the MSP ring: l Full pass-through l No service switching l Service switching

West remote/local end indication

Trigger condition of the status change in the west direction: l Remote end l Local end

East remote/local end indication

Trigger condition of the status change in the east direction: l Remote end l Local end

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

611

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

B Abnormal Event Reference

Name Cause of switching

Meaning Cause of the current switching: l Request indicated by K bytes l External command

Reserved parameter

0xff

NOTE

The parameter names and parameter values may vary according to the version of the NMS.

Impact on the System


l During the switching time (not more than 50 ms), the services are interrupted. After the switching is complete, the services are restored. After the switching starts and before the switching is complete, the extra services are interrupted. When a ring MSP switching occurs, a fiber cut may occur or the terminal node may be faulty. In this case, you must rectify the fault immediately.

Related Alarms
When a ring MSP switching occurs, the APS_INDI alarm may be reported.

Possible Causes
l l An external switching command such as manual, forced, or excise switching command is issued. An automatic switching occurs. After the R_LOS, R_LOF, MS_AIS, B2_EXC, or B2_SD alarm is reported, the MSP group changes to the switching state, and an automatic switching alarm is reported. l The hardware or line is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 On the NMS, query the switching type and the protection group ID. Step 2 Rectify the fault according to the switching request type. If... The switching is an external switching Then... Find the cause of the external switching, and then clear manual switching immediately.

The switching is an automatic switching Clear the relevant alarm, and rectify the hardware or line fault immediately. ----End

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

612

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

B Abnormal Event Reference

B.2.6 Status Change of an APS Protection Group


Description
This abnormal event indicates that an APS protection group switches.

Attribute
Severity Major Type Service

Parameters
Name Protection Group ID APS Protection Group Switching Status Meaning ID of the protection group whose APS status is changed Current working status of the APS protection group l Working path l Protection path APS Protection Group Protocol Status Working Path Status of the APS Protection Group APS protection group protocol status Working path status of the APS protection group: l Valid l Invalid Protection Path Status of the APS Protection Group Protection path status of the APS protection group: l Valid l Invalid

NOTE

The parameter names and parameter values may vary according to the version of the NMS.

Impact on the System


During the switching, the services are interrupted. After the switching is complete, the services are restored. After the switching starts and before the switching is complete, the extra services are interrupted.

Related Alarms
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 613

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

B Abnormal Event Reference

Possible Causes
l l An external switching command (for example, manual switching) is issued. An automatic switching occurs. When an MPLS link is faulty, the MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV, MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI, MPLS_TUNNEL_SD, MPLS_TUNNEL_SF, MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH, MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE, MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess, or MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN alarm occurs on the working path.

Procedure
Step 1 On the NMS, query the switching type and the protection group ID. Step 2 Rectify the fault according to the switching request type and the switching cause indicated by the parameters. If... The switching is an external switching Then... Find the cause of the external switching, and then clear manual switching immediately.

The switching is an automatic switching Handle the relevant alarms first. ----End

B.2.7 Reporting of PW APS Switching Events


Description
This abnormal event indicates that a PW APS protection group switches.

Attribute
Severity Major Type Service

Parameters
Name Protection Group ID APS Protection Group Switching Status Meaning ID of the protection group whose APS status is changed Current working status of the APS protection group l Working path l Protection path APS Protection Group Protocol Status
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

APS protection group protocol status


614

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

B Abnormal Event Reference

Name Working Path Status of the APS Protection Group

Meaning Working path status of the APS protection group: l Valid l Invalid

Protection Path Status of the APS Protection Group

Protection path status of the APS protection group: l Valid l Invalid

NOTE

The parameter names and parameter values may vary according to the version of the NMS.

Impact on the System


During the switching, the services are interrupted. After the switching is complete, the services are restored. After the switching starts and before the switching is complete, the extra services are interrupted.

Related Alarms
None.

Possible Causes
l l An external switching command (for example, manual switching) is issued. An automatic switching occurs. When an MPLS link is faulty, the MPLS_PW_LOCV, MPLS_PW_MISMATCH, MPLS_PW_SD, MPLS_PW_SF, MPLS_PW_MISMERGE, MPLS_PW_Excess, or MPLS_PW_UNKNOWN alarm occurs on the working path.

Procedure
Step 1 On the NMS, query the switching type and the protection group ID. Step 2 Rectify the fault according to the switching request type and the switching cause indicated by the parameters. If... The switching is an external switching Then... Find the cause of the external switching, and then clear manual switching immediately.

The switching is an automatic switching Handle the relevant alarms first. ----End
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 615

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

B Abnormal Event Reference

B.2.8 System Control Board Switching


Description
This abnormal event indicates that the system control boards are switched when the working system control board on the equipment that is configured with the 1+1 protection becomes faulty.

Attribute
Severity Major Type Equipment

Parameters
Name Group ID Protection Type Working Unit Protection Unit Current Working Unit Meaning Indicates the group ID. Cross-connect board protection. Indicates the slot ID of the current working board. Indicates the slot ID of the current protection board. Indicates the current status of the board. l Work at protection unit l Work at working unit Switching Type Indicates the switching type. Manual Switching

NOTE

The parameter names and parameter values may vary with the version of the NMS.

Impact on System
If the system control boards are switched because the original working system control board is faulty, rectify the fault on the original working system control board immediately. Otherwise, the services are interrupted if the current working system control board becomes faulty.

Possible Causes
l l The switching is manually triggered. The switching is automatically triggered.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

616

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

B Abnormal Event Reference

Generally, the switching is automatically triggered when the hardware of the board becomes faulty. Hence, focus on the following alarms reported on the original working system control board: HARD_BAD.

Procedure
Step 1 On the NMS, check whether the manual switching operation is performed. If... The manual switching operation is performed on the NMS No manual switching operations are performed on the NMS Then... Find the cause of the manual switching, and then release the manual switching immediately. Go to the next step.

Step 2 On the NMS, check whether any alarms indicating the board hardware fault are reported. If yes, clear the alarms and rectify the fault. ----End

B.2.9 RMON Performance Value Below the Lower Limit


Description
This abnormal event indicates that the current RMON performance value is lower than the preset lower limit.

Attribute
Severity Minor Type Communication

Parameters
Name Performance ID Current Performance Value Lower Limit Meaning Indicates the ID of the current RMON performance event. Indicates the value of the current RMON performance event. Indicates the lower limit of the current RMON performance event.

Impact on System
Different abnormal performance events have different impacts on the system. For details, see D.4 RMON Events and Handling Procedures.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 617

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

B Abnormal Event Reference

Related Alarms
Different alarms are reported when different RMON performance values are lower than the lower limits. For details, see D.4 RMON Events and Handling Procedures.

Possible Causes
The lower limit of a performance event is set to a non-zero value.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the lower limit of the performance event to 0. ----End

B.2.10 RMON Performance Value Above the Upper Limit


Description
This abnormal event indicates that the current RMON performance value is higher than the preset upper limit.

Attribute
Severity Minor Type Communication

Parameters
Name Performance ID Current Performance Value Upper Limit Meaning Indicates the ID of the current RMON performance event. Indicates the value of the current RMON performance event. Indicates the upper limit of the current RMON performance event.

Impact on System
Different abnormal performance events have different impacts on the system. For details, see D.4 RMON Events and Handling Procedures.

Related Alarms
Different alarms are reported when different RMON performance values are higher than the upper limits. For details, see D.4 RMON Events and Handling Procedures.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 618

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

B Abnormal Event Reference

Possible Causes
When the performance values of different abnormal RMON performance events are higher than the upper limits, the causes are different. For details, see D.4 RMON Events and Handling Procedures.

Procedure
Step 1 See D.4 RMON Events and Handling Procedures to handle different abnormal performance events. ----End

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

619

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Performance Event Reference

Performance events are important indicators when the equipment performance changes. This chapter describes all the possible performance events on the OptiX RTN 980 and how to handle these performance events. C.1 Performance Events (by Event Type) The list is categorized based on the performance event type, and includes all the events of the OptiX RTN 980. C.2 Performance Events (by Logical Board) This part lists all the performance events that are reported by each board. C.3 Performance Events and Handling Procedures Based on the type of a performance event, this chapter describes all the performance events on the OptiX RTN 980 and how to handle these performance events.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

620

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

C.1 Performance Events (by Event Type)


The list is categorized based on the performance event type, and includes all the events of the OptiX RTN 980.

C.1.1 SDH/PDH Performance Event List


SDH/PDH performance events are classified into six categories: pointer justification, regenerator section error, multiplex section error, higher order path error, lower order path error, and E1 line side code violation. Table C-1 Pointer Justification Performance Events Event Name AUPJCHIGH AUPJCLOW AUPJCNEW TUPJCHIGH TUPJCLOW TUPJCNEW Description Indicates the count of positive AU pointer justifications. Indicates the count of negative AU pointer justifications. Indicates the count of new AU pointer justifications. Indicates the count of positive TU pointer justifications. Indicates the count of negative TU pointer justifications. Indicates the count of new TU pointer justifications.

Table C-2 Regenerator Section Error Performance Events Event Name RSBBE RSES RSSES RSUAS RSCSES Description Indicates the regenerator section background block error. Indicates the regenerator section errored second. Indicates the regenerator section severely errored second. Indicates the regenerator section unavailable second. Indicates the regenerator section consecutive severely errored second.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 621

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Event Name RSOFS RSOOF

Description Indicates the regenerator section out-offrame second. Indicates the count of regenerator section outof-frame events.

NOTE

In the case of PDH radio, regenerator section bit error performance events also exist and they are detected according to the overheads used for detecting frame alignment and bit errors in the PDH microwave frames.

Table C-3 Multiplex Section Error Performance Events Event Name MSBBE MSES MSSES MSCSES MSUAS MSFEBBE MSFEES MSFESES MSFECSES MSFEUAS Description Indicates the multiplex section background block error. Indicates the multiplex section errored second. Indicates the multiplex section severely errored second. Indicates the multiplex section consecutive severely errored second. Indicates the multiplex section unavailable second. Indicates the multiplex section far end background block error. Indicates the multiplex section far end errored second. Indicates the multiplex section far end severely errored second. Indicates the multiplex section far end consecutive severely errored second. Indicates the multiplex section far end unavailable second.

Table C-4 Higher Order Path Error Performance Events Event Name HPBBE Description Indicates the higher order path background block error.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 622

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Event Name HPES HPSES HPCSES HPUAS HPFEBBE HPFEES HPFESES HPFECSES HPFEUAS

Description Indicates the higher order path errored second. Indicates the higher order path severely errored second. Indicates the higher order path consecutive severely errored second. Indicates the higher order path unavailable second. Indicates the higher order path far end background block error. Indicates the higher order path far end errored second. Indicates the higher order path far end severely errored second. Indicates the higher order path far end consecutive severely errored second. Indicates the higher order path far end unavailable second.

Table C-5 Lower Order Path Error Performance Events Event Name LPBBE LPES LPSES LPCSES LPUAS LPFEBBE LPFEES LPFESES Description Indicates the lower order path background block error. Indicates the lower order path errored second. Indicates the lower order path severely errored second. Indicates the lower order path consecutive severely errored second. Indicates the lower order path unavailable second. Indicates the lower order path far end background block error. Indicates the lower order path far end errored second. Indicates the lower order path far end severely errored second.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

623

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Event Name LPFECSES LPFEUAS

Description Indicates the lower order path far end consecutive severely errored second. Indicates the lower order far end unavailable second.

Table C-6 E1 Line Side Code Violation Performance Events Event Name E1_LCV_SDH E1_LLOSS_SDH E1_LES_SDH E1_LSES_SDH Description Indicates the count of E1 line side code violations. Indicates the E1 line side loss-of-signal second. Indicates the E1 line side code violation errored second. Indicates the E1 line side code violation severely errored second.

Table C-7 E1 Error Performance Events Event Name E1_BBE E1_ES E1_SES E1_CSES E1_UAS Description Indicates the E1 background block error. Indicates the E1 errored second. Indicates the E1 severely errored second. Indicates the E1 consecutive severely errored second. Indicates the E1 unavailable second.

C.1.2 Radio Performance Events


The radio performance events are performance events of the radio link bit errors, ATPC, AM, and power. Table C-8 Radio power performance events Event Name TSL_MAX
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Description Maximum value of radio transmit signal level


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 624

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Event Name TSL_MIN TSL_CUR TSL_AVG RSL_MAX RSL_MIN RSL_CUR RSL_AVG TLHTT

Description Minimum value of radio transmit signal level Current value of radio transmit signal level Average value of radio transmit signal level Maximum value of radio receive signal level Minimum value of radio receive signal level Current value of radio receive signal level Average value of radio receive signal level The duration when the ODU at the local end has a transit power higher than the upper threshold The duration when the ODU at the local end has a transit power higher than the lower threshold The duration when the ODU at the local end has a receive power lower than the upper threshold The duration when the ODU at the local end has a receive power lower than the lower threshold

TLLTT

RLHTT

RLLTT

Table C-9 FEC performance events Event Name FEC_BEF_COR_ER FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT FEC_COR_BYTE_CNT Description FEC bit error rate before correction FEC uncorrected block count The number of bytes that are corrected through the FEC

Table C-10 Radio link error performance events Event Name IF_BBE IF_ES IF_SES IF_UAS
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Description Radio link background block errors Radio link errored seconds Radio link severely errored seconds Radio link unavailable second
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 625

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Event Name IF_CSES

Description Radio link consecutive severely errored seconds

Table C-11 ATPC performance events Event Name ATPC_P_ADJUST ATPC_N_ADJUST Description Positive ATPC adjustment Negative ATPC adjustment

Table C-12 AM performance events Event Name QPSKWS QAMWS16 QAMWS32 QAMWS64 QAMWS128 QAMWS256 FB_AMDCNT FB_AMUCNT Description Working time of the QPSK mode Working time of the 16QAM mode Working time of the 32QAM mode Working time of the 64QAM mode Working time of the 128QAM mode Working time of the 256QAM mode Count of the downshift of the AM scheme Count of the upshift of the AM scheme

Table C-13 XPIC performance events Event Name XPIC_XPD_VALUE Description XPIC XPD value

Table C-14 IF 1+1 protection group error performance events Event Name PG_IF_BBE PG_IF_ES Description IF 1+1 protection group background block errors IF 1+1 protection group errored seconds

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

626

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Event Name PG_IF_SES PG_IF_UAS PG_IF_CSES

Description IF 1+1 protection group severely errored seconds IF 1+1 protection group unavailable second IF 1+1 protection group consecutive severely errored seconds

Table C-15 IF port error performance events Event Name IF_SNR_MAX IF_SNR_MIN IF_SNR_AVG Description Maximum signal to noise ratio Minimum signal to noise ratio Average signal to noise ratio

C.1.3 Other Performance Events


In addition to the SDH and radio performance events, the OptiX RTN 980 supports performance events of the optical power and the temperature. Table C-16 Optical power performance events Event Name TPLMAX TPLMIN TPLCUR RPLMAX RPLMIN RPLCUR Description Maximum value of transmit optical power Minimum value of transmit optical power Current value of transmit optical power Maximum value of receive optical power Minimum value of receive optical power Current value of receive optical power

Table C-17 Board temperature performance events Event Name BDTEMPMAX BDTEMPMIN BDTEMPCUR Description Maximum value of board temperature Minimum value of board temperature Current value of board temperature

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

627

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Table C-18 Laser temperature performance events Event Name OSPITMPMAX OSPITMPMIN OSPITMPCUR Description Maximum temperature of a laser core Minimum temperature of a laser core Current temperature of a laser core

C.2 Performance Events (by Logical Board)


This part lists all the performance events that are reported by each board.
NOTE

The NE software consider a physical board as one or more logical boards when managing the physical board. The NMS also considers a physical board as one or more logical boards when managing the physical board. For OptiX RTN 980, all physical boards, except the system control, switching, and timing board, correspond to logical boards of the same names. Table C-19 shows the logical boards corresponding to the system control, switching, and timing board.

Table C-19 Logical boards corresponding to the system control, switching, and timing board Physical Board CSHN Logical Board l CSHN in slot 15 + SL4D in slot 16 + EG2D in slot 17 l CSHN in slot 20 + SL4D in slot 21 + EG2D in slot 22

C.2.1 CSHN
The CSHN board reports optical power performance events and board temperature performance events. Table C-20 Board Temperature Performance Events Event Name BDTEMPMAX BDTEMPMIN BDTEMPCUR Description Indicates the maximum board temperature. Indicates the minimum board temperature. Indicates the current board temperature.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

628

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Table C-21 Optical Power Performance Events Event Name TPLMAX TPLMIN TPLCUR RPLMAX RPLMIN RPLCUR Description Indicates the maximum transmit optical power at an optical interface. Indicates the minimum transmit optical power at an optical interface. Indicates the current transmit power at an optical interface. Indicates the maximum receive optical power at an optical interface. Indicates the minimum receive optical power at an optical interface. Indicates the current receive power at an optical interface.

Table C-22 IF 1+1 protection group error performance events Event Name PG_IF_BBE PG_IF_ES PG_IF_SES PG_IF_UAS PG_IF_CSES Description IF 1+1 protection group background block errors IF 1+1 protection group errored seconds IF 1+1 protection group severely errored seconds IF 1+1 protection group unavailable second IF 1+1 protection group consecutive severely errored seconds

C.2.2 IF1
The IF1 board reports three types of performance events: SDH/PDH performance events, microwave performance events, and temperature performance events.

SDH/PDH Performance Events


Table C-23 Pointer justification performance events Event Name AUPJCHIGH
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Description Count of positive AU pointer justification


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 629

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Event Name AUPJCLOW AUPJCNEW

Description Count of negative AU pointer justification Count of new AU pointer justifications

Table C-24 Regenerator section error performance events Event Name RSBBE RSES RSSES RSUAS RSCSES RSOFS RSOOF Description Regenerator section block of background error Regenerator section errored second Regenerator section severely errored second Regenerator section unavailable second Regenerator section consecutive severely errored second Regenerator section out-of-frame second Regenerator section out of frame

NOTE

The regenerator section error performance events also occur in the case of the PDH radio. The PDH radio frame is detected through the overheads that are used for frame location and bit error detection.

Table C-25 Multiplex section error performance events Event Name MSBBE MSES MSSES MSCSES MSUAS MSFEBBE MSFEES MSFESES Description Multiplex section block of background error Multiplex section errored second Multiplex section severely errored second Multiplex section consecutive severely errored second Multiplex section unavailable second Multiplex section far end block of background error Multiplex section far end errored second Multiplex section far end severely errored second

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

630

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Event Name MSFECSES MSFEUAS

Description Multiplex section far end consecutive severely errored second Multiplex section far end unavailable second

Table C-26 Higher order path error performance events Event Name HPBBE HPES HPSES HPCSES HPUAS HPFEBBE HPFEES HPFESES HPFECSES HPFEUAS Description Higher order path background block error Higher order path errored second Higher order path severely errored second Higher order path consecutive severely errored second Higher order path unavailable second Higher order path far end background block error Higher order path far end errored second Higher order path far end severely errored second Higher order path far end consecutive severely errored second Higher order path far end unavailable second

Radio Performance Events


Table C-27 FEC performance events Event Name FEC_BEF_COR_ER FEC_COR_BYTE_CNT Description FEC bit error rate before correction Frame count incorrect by FEC

Table C-28 IF port error performance events Event Name IF_SNR_MAX


Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Description Maximum signal to noise ratio


631

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Event Name IF_SNR_MIN IF_SNR_AVG

Description Minimum signal to noise ratio Average signal to noise ratio

Other Performance Events


Table C-29 Board temperature performance events Event Name BDTEMPMAX BDTEMPMIN BDTEMPCUR Description Maximum value of board temperature Minimum value of board temperature Current value of board temperature

C.2.3 IFU2/ISU2
The IFU2/ISU2 board reports three types of performance events: PDH performance events, radio performance events, and board temperature performance events.

SDH Performance Events (Only reported by ISU2)


Table C-30 Pointer justification performance events Event Name AUPJCHIGH AUPJCLOW AUPJCNEW Description Count of positive AU pointer justification Count of negative AU pointer justification Count of new AU pointer justifications

Table C-31 Regenerator section error performance events Event Name RSBBE RSES RSSES RSUAS Description Regenerator section block of background error Regenerator section errored second Regenerator section severely errored second Regenerator section unavailable second

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

632

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Event Name RSCSES RSOFS RSOOF

Description Regenerator section consecutive severely errored second Regenerator section out-of-frame second Regenerator section out of frame

Table C-32 Multiplex section error performance events Event Name MSBBE MSES MSSES MSCSES MSUAS MSFEBBE MSFEES MSFESES MSFECSES MSFEUAS Description Multiplex section block of background error Multiplex section errored second Multiplex section severely errored second Multiplex section consecutive severely errored second Multiplex section unavailable second Multiplex section far end block of background error Multiplex section far end errored second Multiplex section far end severely errored second Multiplex section far end consecutive severely errored second Multiplex section far end unavailable second

Table C-33 Higher order path error performance events Event Name HPBBE HPES HPSES HPCSES HPUAS HPFEBBE Description Higher order path background errored block Higher order path errored second Higher order path severely errored second Higher order path consecutive severely errored second Higher order path unavailable second Higher order path far end background errored block

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

633

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Event Name HPFEES HPFESES HPFECSES HPFEUAS

Description Higher order path far end errored second Higher order path far end severely errored second Higher order path far end consecutive severely errored second Higher order path far end unavailable second

PDH Performance Events


Table C-34 Lower order path error performance events Event Name LPBBE LPES LPSES LPCSES LPUAS LPFEBBE LPFEES LPFESES LPFECSES LPFEUAS Description Lower order path block of background error Lower order path errored second Lower order path severely errored second Lower order path continuous severe bit error second Lower order path unavailable second Lower order path far end block of background error Lower order path far end errored second Lower order path far end severely errored second Lower order path far end consecutive severely errored second Lower order far end unavailable second

Radio Performance Events


Table C-35 FEC performance events Event Name FEC_BEF_COR_ER FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT Description FEC bit error rate before correction FEC uncorrected block count

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

634

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Table C-36 Radio link error performance events Event Name IF_BBE IF_ES IF_SES IF_UAS IF_CSES Description Radio link background block errors Radio link errored seconds Radio link severely errored seconds Radio link unavailable second Radio link consecutive severely errored seconds

Table C-37 AM performance events Event Name QPSKWS QAMWS16 QAMWS32 QAMWS64 QAMWS128 QAMWS256 FB_AMDCNT FB_AMUCNT Description Working time of the QPSK mode Working time of the 16QAM mode Working time of the 32QAM mode Working time of the 64QAM mode Working time of the 128QAM mode Working time of the 256QAM mode Count of the downshift of the AM scheme Count of the upshift of the AM scheme

Table C-38 IF port error performance events Event Name IF_SNR_MAX IF_SNR_MIN IF_SNR_AVG Description Maximum signal to noise ratio Minimum signal to noise ratio Average signal to noise ratio

Other Performance Events


Table C-39 Board temperature performance events Event Name BDTEMPMAX
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Description Maximum value of board temperature


635

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Event Name BDTEMPMIN BDTEMPCUR

Description Minimum value of board temperature Current value of board temperature

C.2.4 IFX2/ISX2
The IFX2/ISX2 board reports three types of performance events: PDH performance events, radio performance events, and board temperature performance events.

SDH Performance Events (Only reported by ISX2)


Table C-40 Pointer justification performance events Event Name AUPJCHIGH AUPJCLOW AUPJCNEW Description Count of positive AU pointer justification Count of negative AU pointer justification Count of new AU pointer justifications

Table C-41 Regenerator section error performance events Event Name RSBBE RSES RSSES RSUAS RSCSES RSOFS RSOOF Description Regenerator section block of background error Regenerator section errored second Regenerator section severely errored second Regenerator section unavailable second Regenerator section consecutive severely errored second Regenerator section out-of-frame second Regenerator section out of frame

Table C-42 Multiplex section error performance events Event Name MSBBE MSES
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Description Multiplex section block of background error Multiplex section errored second
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 636

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Event Name MSSES MSCSES MSUAS MSFEBBE MSFEES MSFESES MSFECSES MSFEUAS

Description Multiplex section severely errored second Multiplex section consecutive severely errored second Multiplex section unavailable second Multiplex section far end block of background error Multiplex section far end errored second Multiplex section far end severely errored second Multiplex section far end consecutive severely errored second Multiplex section far end unavailable second

Table C-43 Higher order path error performance events Event Name HPBBE HPES HPSES HPCSES HPUAS HPFEBBE HPFEES HPFESES HPFECSES HPFEUAS Description Higher order path background errored block Higher order path errored second Higher order path severely errored second Higher order path consecutive severely errored second Higher order path unavailable second Higher order path far end background errored block Higher order path far end errored second Higher order path far end severely errored second Higher order path far end consecutive severely errored second Higher order path far end unavailable second

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

637

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

PDH Performance Events


Table C-44 Lower order path error performance events Event Name LPBBE LPES LPSES LPCSES LPUAS LPFEBBE LPFEES LPFESES LPFECSES LPFEUAS Description Lower order path block of background error Lower order path errored second Lower order path severely errored second Lower order path continuous severe bit error second Lower order path unavailable second Lower order path far end block of background error Lower order path far end errored second Lower order path far end severely errored second Lower order path far end consecutive severely errored second Lower order far end unavailable second

Radio Performance Events


Table C-45 FEC performance events Event Name FEC_BEF_COR_ER FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT Description FEC bit error rate before correction FEC uncorrected block count

Table C-46 Radio link error performance events Event Name IF_BBE IF_ES IF_SES IF_UAS Description Radio link background block errors Radio link errored seconds Radio link severely errored seconds Radio link unavailable second

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

638

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Event Name IF_CSES

Description Radio link consecutive severely errored seconds

Table C-47 AM performance events Event Name QPSKWS QAMWS16 QAMWS32 QAMWS64 QAMWS128 QAMWS256 FB_AMDCNT FB_AMUCNT Description Working time of the QPSK mode Working time of the 16QAM mode Working time of the 32QAM mode Working time of the 64QAM mode Working time of the 128QAM mode Working time of the 256QAM mode Count of the downshift of the AM scheme Count of the upshift of the AM scheme

Table C-48 IF port error performance events Event Name IF_SNR_MAX IF_SNR_MIN IF_SNR_AVG Description Maximum signal to noise ratio Minimum signal to noise ratio Average signal to noise ratio

Table C-49 XPIC performance events Event Name XPIC_XPD_VALUE Description XPIC XPD value

Other Performance Events


Table C-50 Board temperature performance events Event Name BDTEMPMAX
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Description Maximum value of board temperature


639

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Event Name BDTEMPMIN BDTEMPCUR

Description Minimum value of board temperature Current value of board temperature

C.2.5 SL4D
The SL4D board reports SDH performance events and optical power performance events.

SDH Performance Events


Table C-51 Pointer Justification Performance Events Event Name AUPJCHIGH AUPJCLOW AUPJCNEW Description Indicates the count of positive AU pointer justifications. Indicates the count of negative AU pointer justifications. Indicates the count of new AU pointer justifications.

Table C-52 Regenerator Section Error Performance Events Event Name RSBBE RSES RSSES RSUAS RSCSES RSOFS RSOOF Description Indicates the regenerator section background block error. Indicates the regenerator section errored second. Indicates the regenerator section severely errored second. Indicates the regenerator section unavailable second. Indicates the regenerator section consecutive severely errored second. Indicates the regenerator section out-offrame second. Indicates the count of regenerator section outof-frame events.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

640

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Table C-53 Multiplex Section Error Performance Events Event Name MSBBE MSES MSSES MSCSES MSUAS MSFEBBE MSFEES MSFESES MSFECSES MSFEUAS Description Indicates the multiplex section background block error. Indicates the multiplex section errored second. Indicates the multiplex section severely errored second. Indicates the multiplex section consecutive severely errored second. Indicates the multiplex section unavailable second. Indicates the multiplex section far end background block error. Indicates the multiplex section far end errored second. Indicates the multiplex section far end severely errored second. Indicates the multiplex section far end consecutive severely errored second. Indicates the multiplex section far end unavailable second.

Table C-54 Higher Order Path Error Performance Events Event Name HPBBE HPES HPSES HPCSES HPUAS HPFEBBE Description Indicates the higher order path background block error. Indicates the higher order path errored second. Indicates the higher order path severely errored second. Indicates the higher order path consecutive severely errored second. Indicates the higher order path unavailable second. Indicates the higher order path far end background block error.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

641

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Event Name HPFEES HPFESES HPFECSES HPFEUAS

Description Indicates the higher order path far end errored second. Indicates the higher order path far end severely errored second. Indicates the higher order path far end consecutive severely errored second. Indicates the higher order path far end unavailable second.

Other Performance Events


Table C-55 Optical Power Performance Events Event Name TPLMAX TPLMIN TPLCUR RPLMAX RPLMIN RPLCUR Description Indicates the maximum transmit optical power at an optical interface. Indicates the minimum transmit optical power at an optical interface. Indicates the current transmit power at an optical interface. Indicates the maximum receive optical power at an optical interface. Indicates the minimum receive optical power at an optical interface. Indicates the current receive power at an optical interface.

C.2.6 SL1D/SL1DA
The SL1D/SL1DA board reports three types of performance events: SDH performance events, and optical power performance events.

SDH Performance Events


Table C-56 Pointer justification performance events Event Name AUPJCHIGH
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Description Count of positive AU pointer justification


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 642

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Event Name AUPJCLOW AUPJCNEW

Description Count of negative AU pointer justification Count of new AU pointer justifications

Table C-57 Regenerator section error performance events Event Name RSBBE RSES RSSES RSUAS RSCSES RSOFS RSOOF Description Regenerator section block of background error Regenerator section errored second Regenerator section severely errored second Regenerator section unavailable second Regenerator section consecutive severely errored second Regenerator section out-of-frame second Regenerator section out of frame

Table C-58 Multiplex section error performance events Event Name MSBBE MSES MSSES MSCSES MSUAS MSFEBBE MSFEES MSFESES MSFECSES MSFEUAS Description Multiplex section block of background error Multiplex section errored second Multiplex section severely errored second Multiplex section consecutive severely errored second Multiplex section unavailable second Multiplex section far end block of background error Multiplex section far end errored second Multiplex section far end severely errored second Multiplex section far end consecutive severely errored second Multiplex section far end unavailable second

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

643

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Table C-59 Higher order path error performance events Event Name HPBBE HPES HPSES HPCSES HPUAS HPFEBBE HPFEES HPFESES HPFECSES HPFEUAS Description Higher order path background errored block Higher order path errored second Higher order path severely errored second Higher order path consecutive severely errored second Higher order path unavailable second Higher order path far end background errored block Higher order path far end errored second Higher order path far end severely errored second Higher order path far end consecutive severely errored second Higher order path far end unavailable second

Other Performance Events


Table C-60 Optical power performance events Event Name TPLMAX TPLMIN TPLCUR RPLMAX RPLMIN RPLCUR Description Maximum value of transmit optical power Minimum value of transmit optical power Current value of transmit optical power Maximum value of receive optical power Minimum value of receive optical power Current value of receive optical power

C.2.7 EM6T
The EM6T board reports only the board temperature performance events.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

644

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Table C-61 Board temperature performance events Event Name BDTEMPMAX BDTEMPMIN BDTEMPCUR Description Maximum value of board temperature Minimum value of board temperature Current value of board temperature

C.2.8 EM6TA
The EM6TA board reports only the board temperature performance events. Table C-62 Board temperature performance events Event Name BDTEMPMAX BDTEMPMIN BDTEMPCUR Description Maximum value of board temperature Minimum value of board temperature Current value of board temperature

C.2.9 EM6F
The EM6F board reports optical power performance events and board temperature performance events. Table C-63 Optical power performance events Event Name TPLMAX TPLMIN TPLCUR RPLMAX RPLMIN RPLCUR Description Maximum value of transmit optical power Minimum value of transmit optical power Current value of transmit optical power Maximum value of receive optical power Minimum value of receive optical power Current value of receive optical power

Table C-64 Board temperature performance events Event Name BDTEMPMAX


Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Description Maximum value of board temperature


645

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Event Name BDTEMPMIN BDTEMPCUR

Description Minimum value of board temperature Current value of board temperature

C.2.10 EM6FA
The EM6FA board reports optical power performance events and board temperature performance events. Table C-65 Optical power performance events Event Name TPLMAX TPLMIN TPLCUR RPLMAX RPLMIN RPLCUR Description Maximum value of transmit optical power Minimum value of transmit optical power Current value of transmit optical power Maximum value of receive optical power Minimum value of receive optical power Current value of receive optical power

Table C-66 Board temperature performance events Event Name BDTEMPMAX BDTEMPMIN BDTEMPCUR Description Maximum value of board temperature Minimum value of board temperature Current value of board temperature

C.2.11 EFP8
The EFP8 board reports the temperature and PDH performance events. Table C-67 Board temperature performance events Event Name BDTEMPMAX BDTEMPMIN BDTEMPCUR
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Description Maximum value of board temperature Minimum value of board temperature Current value of board temperature
646

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Table C-68 Lower order path error performance events Event Name LPBBE LPES LPSES LPCSES LPUAS LPFEBBE LPFEES LPFESES LPFECSES LPFEUAS Description Lower order path block of background error Lower order path errored second Lower order path severely errored second Lower order path continuous severe bit error second Lower order path unavailable second Lower order path far end block of background error Lower order path far end errored second Lower order path far end severely errored second Lower order path far end consecutive severely errored second Lower order far end unavailable second

C.2.12 EMS6
The EMS6 board reports the SDH performance events, board temperature performance events, laser temperature performance events, and optical power performance events. Table C-69 Lower order path error performance events Event Name LPBBE LPES LPSES LPCSES LPUAS LPFEBBE LPFEES Description Lower order path block of background error Lower order path errored second Lower order path severely errored second Lower order path continuous severe bit error second Lower order path unavailable second Lower order path far end block of background error Lower order path far end errored second

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

647

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Event Name LPFESES LPFECSES

Description Lower order path far end severely errored second Lower order path far end consecutive severely errored second

Table C-70 Higher order path error performance events Event Name HPBBE HPES HPSES HPCSES HPUAS HPFEBBE HPFEES HPFESES HPFECSES Description Higher order path background errored block Higher order path errored second Higher order path severely errored second Higher order path consecutive severely errored second Higher order path unavailable second Higher order path far end background errored block Higher order path far end errored second Higher order path far end severely errored second Higher order path far end consecutive severely errored second

Table C-71 Board temperature performance events Event Name BDTEMPMAX BDTEMPMIN BDTEMPCUR Description Maximum value of board temperature Minimum value of board temperature Current value of board temperature

Table C-72 Laser temperature performance events Event Name OSPITMPMAX OSPITMPMIN Description Maximum temperature of a laser core Minimum temperature of a laser core

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

648

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Event Name OSPITMPCUR

Description Current temperature of a laser core

Table C-73 Optical power performance events Event Name TPLMAX TPLMIN TPLCUR RPLMAX RPLMIN RPLCUR Description Maximum value of transmit optical power Minimum value of transmit optical power Current value of transmit optical power Maximum value of receive optical power Minimum value of receive optical power Current value of receive optical power

C.2.13 SP3S/SP3D
The SP3S/SP3D board reports only the PDH performance events. Table C-74 Pointer justification performance events Event Name TUPJCHIGH TUPJCLOW TUPJCNEW Description Count of positive TU pointer justifications Count of negative TU pointer justifications Count of new TU pointer justifications

Table C-75 Lower order path error performance events Event Name LPBBE LPES LPSES LPCSES LPUAS LPFEBBE Description Lower order path block of background error Lower order path errored second Lower order path severely errored second Lower order path continuous severe bit error second Lower order path unavailable second Lower order path far end block of background error
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 649

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Event Name LPFEES LPFESES LPFECSES LPFEUAS

Description Lower order path far end errored second Lower order path far end severely errored second Lower order path far end consecutive severely errored second Lower order far end unavailable second

Table C-76 E1 Error Performance Events Event Name E1_BBE E1_ES E1_SES E1_CSES E1_UAS Description Indicates the E1 background block error. Indicates the E1 errored second. Indicates the E1 severely errored second. Indicates the E1 consecutive severely errored second. Indicates the E1 unavailable second.

C.2.14 EG2D
The EG2D board reports only the optical power performance events. Table C-77 Optical power performance events Event Name TPLMAX TPLMIN TPLCUR RPLMAX RPLMIN RPLCUR Description Maximum value of transmit optical power Minimum value of transmit optical power Current value of transmit optical power Maximum value of receive optical power Minimum value of receive optical power Current value of receive optical power

C.2.15 ML1/MD1
The ML1/MD1 board reports E1 performance events and board temperature performance events.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 650

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

E1 Performance Events
Table C-78 E1 Performance Event List Event Name E1_LCV_SDH E1_LLOSS_SDH E1_LES_SDH E1_LSES_SDH Description Indicates the count of E1 line side code violations. Indicates the E1 line side loss-of-signal second. Indicates the E1 line side code violation errored second. Indicates the E1 line side code violation severely errored second.

Other Performance Events


Table C-79 Board Temperature Performance Events Event Name BDTEMPMAX BDTEMPMIN BDTEMPCUR Description Indicates the maximum board temperature. Indicates the minimum board temperature. Indicates the current board temperature.

C.2.16 ODU
The ODU reports radio performance events and board temperature performance events. Table C-80 Radio power performance events Event Name TSL_MAX TSL_MIN TSL_CUR TSL_AVG RSL_MAX RSL_MIN
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Description Maximum value of radio transmit signal level Minimum value of radio transmit signal level Current value of radio transmit signal level Average value of radio transmit signal level Maximum value of radio receive signal level Minimum value of radio receive signal level
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 651

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Event Name RSL_CUR RSL_AVG TLHTT

Description Current value of radio receive signal level Average value of radio receive signal level The duration when the ODU at the local end has a transit power higher than the upper threshold The duration when the ODU at the local end has a transit power higher than the lower threshold The duration when the ODU at the local end has a receive power lower than the upper threshold The duration when the ODU at the local end has a receive power lower than the lower threshold

TLLTT

RLHTT

RLLTT

Table C-81 ATPC performance events Event Name ATPC_P_ADJUST ATPC_N_ADJUST Description Positive ATPC adjustment Negative ATPC adjustment

Table C-82 Board Temperature Performance Events Event Name BDTEMPMAX BDTEMPMIN BDTEMPCUR Description Indicates the maximum board temperature. Indicates the minimum board temperature. Indicates the current board temperature.

C.3 Performance Events and Handling Procedures


Based on the type of a performance event, this chapter describes all the performance events on the OptiX RTN 980 and how to handle these performance events.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

652

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

C.3.1 AUPJCHIGH, AUPJCLOW, and AUPJCNEW


Description
l l l AUPJCHIGH indicates the count of positive AU pointer justifications. AUPJCLOW indicates the count of negative AU pointer justifications. AUPJCNEW indicates the count of new AU pointer justifications.

Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Description PPJE (AUPJCHIGH) NPJE (AUPJCLOW) NDF (AUPJCNEW) Unit Block

Impact on System
Less than six AUPJCHIGH and AUPJCLOW events do not affect the system. If the pointer is justified for many times, or the AUPJCNEW event occurs, bit errors may occur in the service.

Related Alarms
When the AUPJCHIGH, AUPJCLOW, or AUPJCNEW performance event crosses the preset threshold, the MSAD_CROSSTR alarm is reported. Performance Event AUPJCHIGH AUPJCLOW AUPJCNEW Default 15-Minute Threshold 1500 1500 1500 Default 24-Hour Threshold 30000 30000 30000

Possible Causes
The NE clock is out-of-synchronization.

Procedure
Step 1 See 5.5 Troubleshooting Pointer Justifications for handling. ----End

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

653

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

C.3.2 TUPJCHIGH, TUPJCLOW, and TUPJCNEW


Description
l l l TUPJCHIGH indicates the count of positive TU pointer justifications. TUPJCLOW indicates the count of negative TU pointer justifications. TUPJCNEW indicates the count of new TU pointer justifications.

Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Description TUPPJE (TUPJCHIGH) TUNPJE (TUPJCLOW) TUNDF (TUPJCNEW) Unit Block

Impact on System
Less than six TUPJCHIGH and TUPJCLOW events on each port do not affect the system. If the pointer is justified for many times, or the TUPJCNEW event occurs, bit errors may occur in the service.

Related Alarms
When the TUPJCHIGH, TUPJCLOW, or TUPJCNEW performance event crosses the preset threshold, the HPAD_CROSSTR alarm is reported. Performance Event TUPJCHIGH TUPJCLOW TUPJCNEW Default 15-Minute Threshold 1500 1500 1500 Default 24-Hour Threshold 30000 30000 30000

Possible Causes
The NE clock is out-of-synchronization.

Procedure
Step 1 See 5.5 Troubleshooting Pointer Justifications for handling. ----End
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 654

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

C.3.3 RSBBE, RSES, RSSES, RSCSES, and RSUAS


Description
l RSBBE indicates the regenerator section background block error. Background block error (BBE) refers to the errored blocks excluding the errored blocks in the unavailable and severely errored seconds. l l RSES indicates the regenerator section errored second. Errored second (ES) refers to a second in which one or more errored blocks are detected. RSSES indicates the regenerator section severely errored second. Severely errored second (SES) refers to a second in which 30% or more than 30% errored blocks exist or at least one severely disturbed period (SDP) exists. SDP is the period in which the BER of all the consecutive blocks in a period of less than four consecutive blocks or 1 ms (the longer period is applied) is equal to or higher than 10-2 or the signal is lost. l RSCSES indicates the regenerator section consecutive severely errored second. Consecutive severely errored second (CSES) refers to a second in which the SES occurs continuously for less than 10 seconds. l RSUAS indicates the regenerator section unavailable second. The unavailable time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive SESs, with the 10 SESs included. When SESs disappear for 10 consecutive seconds, the available time begins from the eleventh second, with the previous 10 seconds included.
NOTE

When the IF board works in PDH mode, these performance events may also be reported. These events are detected through the self-defined overhead byte B1 in the PDH radio frame.

Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Unit Description B1CNT Block (RSBBE) Second (RSES, RSSES, RSCSES, and RSUAS)

Impact on System
Excessive bit errors interrupt the service (the BER should be less than 10-3 for the voice service, and 10-6 for the data service).

Related Alarms
When the RSBBE, RSES, RSSES, RSCSES, or RSUAS performance event crosses the preset threshold, the RS_CROSSTR alarm is reported.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

655

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Performance Event RSBBE RSES RSSES RSUAS RSCSES

Default 15-Minute Threshold 1500 50 20 20

Default 24-Hour Threshold 15000 100 50 50

4 (number of consecutive SESs)

Possible Causes
The system detects the regenerator section bit errors through the B1 byte.

Procedure
Step 1 See 5.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors in TDM Services for handling. Step 2 When an RSUAS performance event is reported, check whether cross-connections are configured and whether fibers are properly connected at service ports. If cross-connections are not configured, configure cross-connections again according to planning information; if fibers are incorrectly connected, connect the fibers again according to planning information. ----End

C.3.4 RSOOF and RSOFS


Description
l RSOOF indicates the regenerator section out of frame. The out-of-frame (OOF) block refers to a data block in which incorrect A1 and A2 bytes are detected. l RSOFS indicates the regenerator section out-of-frame second. The out-of-frame second (OFS) refers to a second in which one or more OOF blocks are detected.

Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Unit Description OOF Block (RSOOF) Second (RSOFS)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

656

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Impact on System
The system discards OOF data blocks. Therefore, an RSOOF event is equivalent to a big error (if one RSOOF exists in a second, the BER is not less than 1.25 x 10-5).

Related Alarms
If RSOOF is received in five consecutive frames, the equipment changes to the OOF state. If the OOF state lasts for 3 ms, the R_LOF alarm is reported and all the services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
The system detects incorrect A1 and A2 bytes.

Procedure
Step 1 If the R_LOF alarm, as well as the performance event, is reported, eliminate the errors according to the alarm. Otherwise, see 5.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors in TDM Services for handling. ----End

C.3.5 MSBBE, MSES, MSSES, MSCSES, and MSUAS


Description
l MSBBE indicates the multiplex section background block error. BBE refers to the errored blocks excluding the errored blocks in the unavailable and severely errored seconds. l l MSES indicates the multiplex section errored second. ES refers to a second in which one or more errored blocks are detected. MSSES indicates the multiplex section severely errored second. SES refers to a second in which 15% or more than 15% errored blocks exist or at least one SDP exists. SDP is the period in which the BER of all the consecutive blocks in a period of less than four consecutive blocks or 1 ms (the longer period is applied) is equal to or higher than 10-2 or the signal is lost. l l MSCSES indicates the multiplex section consecutive severely errored second. CSES refers to a second in which the SES occurs continuously for less than 10 seconds. MSUAS indicates the multiplex section unavailable second. The unavailable time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive SESs, with the 10 SESs included. When SESs disappear for 10 consecutive seconds, the available time begins from the eleventh second, with the previous 10 seconds included.

Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Description B2CNT
657

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Attribute Unit

Description Block (MSBBE) Second (MSES, MSSES, MSCSES, and MSUAS)

Impact on System
Excessive bit errors interrupt the service (the BER should be less than 10-3 for the voice service, and 10-6 for the data service).

Related Alarms
When the MSBBE, MSES, MSSES, MSCSES, or MSUAS performance event crosses the preset threshold, the MS_CROSSTR alarm is reported. Performance Event MSBBE MSES MSES MSUAS MSCSES Default 15-Minute Threshold 1500 50 20 20 Default 24-Hour Threshold 15000 100 50 50

4 (number of consecutive SESs)

Possible Causes
The system detects multiplex section bit errors through the B2 byte.

Procedure
Step 1 See 5.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors in TDM Services for handling. Step 2 When an MSUAS performance event is reported, check whether cross-connections are configured and whether fibers are properly connected at service ports. If cross-connections are not configured, configure cross-connections again according to planning information; if fibers are incorrectly connected, connect the fibers again according to planning information. ----End

C.3.6 MSFEBBE, MSFEES, MSFESES, MSFECSES, and MSFEUAS


Description
l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

MSFEBBE indicates the multiplex section far end background block error.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 658

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Far end background block error (FEBBE) indicates that the BBE occurs at the opposite end. l l l MSFEES indicates the multiplex section far end errored second. Far end errored second (FEES) indicates that the ES occurs at the opposite end. MSFESES indicates the multiplex section far end severely errored second. Far end severely errored second (FESES) indicates that the SES occurs at the opposite end. MSFECSES indicates the multiplex section far end consecutive severely errored second. Far end consecutive severely errored second (FECSES) indicates that the CSES occurs at the opposite end. l MSFEUAS indicates the multiplex section far end unavailable second. Far end unavailable second (FEUAS) indicates that the UAS occurs at the opposite end.

Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Unit Description LFEBE Block (MSFEBBE) Second (MSFEES, MSFESES, MSFECSES, and MSFEUAS)

Impact on the System


Excessive bit errors interrupt the service (the BER should be less than 10-3 for the voice service, and 10-6 for the data service).

Related Alarms
The MS_REI alarm is reported at the local end.

Possible Causes
The system detects multiplex section far end bit errors through the M1 byte.

Procedure
Step 1 Clear the corresponding performance event at the opposite end. ----End

C.3.7 HPBBE, HPES, HPSES, HPCSES, and HPUAS


Description
l HPBBE indicates the higher order path background block error. BBE refers to the errored blocks excluding the errored blocks in the unavailable and severely errored seconds.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 659

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

l l

HPES indicates the higher order path errored second. ES refers to a second in which one or more errored blocks are detected. HPSES indicates the higher order path severely errored second. SES refers to a second in which 30% or more than 30% errored blocks exist or at least one SDP exists. SDP is the period in which the BER of all the consecutive blocks in a period of less than four consecutive blocks or 1 ms (the longer period is applied) is equal to or higher than 10-2 or the signal is lost.

l l

HPCSES indicates the higher order path consecutive severely errored second. CSES refers to a second in which the SES occurs continuously for less than 10 seconds. HPUAS indicates the higher order path unavailable second. The unavailable time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive SESs, with the 10 SESs included. When SESs disappear for 10 consecutive seconds, the available time begins from the eleventh second, with the previous 10 seconds included.

Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Unit Description B3CNT Block (HPBBE) Second (HPES, HPSES, HPCSES, and HPUAS)

Impact on System
Excessive bit errors interrupt the service (the BER should be less than 10-3 for the voice service, and 10-6 for the data service).

Related Alarms
When the HPBBE, HPES, HPSES, HPCSES, or HPUAS performance event crosses the preset threshold, the HP_CROSSTR alarm is reported. Performance Event HPBBE HPES HPSES HPUAS HPCSES Default 15-Minute Threshold 1500 50 20 20 Default 24-Hour Threshold 15000 100 50 50

4 (number of consecutive SESs)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

660

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Possible Causes
The system detects higher order path bit errors through the B3 byte.

Procedure
Step 1 See 5.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors in TDM Services for handling. ----End

C.3.8 HPFEBBE, HPFEES, HPFESES, HPFECSES, and HPFEUAS


Description
l HPFEBBE indicates the higher order path far end background block error. Far end background block error (FEBBE) indicates that the BBE occurs at the opposite end. l l l l HPFEES indicates the higher order path far end errored second. FEES indicates that the ES occurs at the opposite end. HPFESES indicates the higher order path far end severely errored second. FESES indicates that the SES occurs at the opposite end. HPFECSES indicates the higher order path far end consecutive severely errored second. FECSES indicates that the CSES occurs at the opposite end. HPFEUAS indicates the higher order path far end unavailable second. FEUAS indicates that the UAS occurs at the opposite end.

Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Unit Description PFEBE Block (HPFEBBE) Second (HPFEES, HPFESES, HPFECSES, and HPFEUAS)

Impact on System
Excessive bit errors interrupt the service (the BER should be less than 10-3 for the voice service, and 10-6 for the data service).

Related Alarms
The HP_REI alarm is reported at the local end.

Possible Causes
The system detects the higher order path far end bit errors through bits 1 to 4 in the G1 byte.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 661

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Clear the corresponding performance event at the opposite end. ----End

C.3.9 IF_BBE, IF_ES, IF_SES, IF_CSES, and IF_UAS


Description
l IF_BBE indicates the radio link background block error. BBE refers to the errored blocks excluding the errored blocks in the unavailable and severely errored seconds. l l IF_ES indicates the radio link errored second. ES refers to a second in which one or more errored blocks are detected. IF_SES indicates the radio link severely errored second. SES refers to a second in which 30% or more than 30% errored blocks exist or at least one SDP exists. SDP is the period in which the BER of all the consecutive blocks in a period of less than four consecutive blocks or 1 ms (the longer period is applied) is equal to or higher than 10-2 or the signal is lost. l l IF_CSES indicates the radio link consecutively severely errored second. CSES refers to a second in which the SES occurs continuously for less than 10 seconds. IF_UAS indicates the radio link unavailable second. The unavailable time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive SESs, with the 10 SESs included. When SESs disappear for 10 consecutive seconds, the available time begins from the eleventh second, with the previous 10 seconds included.

Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Unit Description IF_BIP8 -

Impact on System
Excessive bit errors interrupt the service (the BER should be less than 10-3 for the voice service, and 10-6 for the data service).

Related Alarms
The MW_BER_SD or MW_BER_EXC alarm is reported when the BER crosses the specific threshold.

Possible Causes
The system detects bit errors on the radio link through the bit error detection overheads in a radio frame.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 662

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Procedure
Step 1 See 5.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors in TDM Services for handling. ----End

C.3.10 LPBBE, LPES, LPSES, LPCSES, and LPUAS


Description
l LPBBE indicates the lower order path background block error. BBE refers to the errored blocks excluding the errored blocks in the unavailable and severely errored seconds. l l LPES indicates the lower order path errored second. ES refers to a second in which one or more errored blocks are detected. LPSES indicates the lower order path severely errored second. SES refers to a second in which 30% or more than 30% errored blocks exist or at least one SDP exists. SDP is the period in which the BER of all the consecutive blocks in a period of less than four consecutive blocks or 1 ms (the longer period is applied) is equal to or higher than 10-2 or the signal is lost. l l LPCSES indicates the lower order path consecutive severely errored second. CSES refers to a second in which the SES occurs continuously for less than 10 seconds. LPUAS indicates the lower order path unavailable second. The unavailable time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive SESs, with the 10 SESs included. When SESs disappear for 10 consecutive seconds, the available time begins from the eleventh second, with the previous 10 seconds included.

Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Unit Description LPBIP2CNT Block (LPBBE) Second (LPES, LPSES, LPCSES, and LPUAS)

Impact on System
Excessive bit errors interrupt the service (the BER should be less than 10-3 for the voice service, and 10-6 for the data service).

Related Alarms
When the LPBBE, LPES, LPSES, LPCSES, or LPUAS performance event crosses the preset threshold, the LP_CROSSTR alarm is reported.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 663

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Performance Event LPBBE LPES LPSES LPUAS LPCSES

Default 15-Minute Threshold 1500 50 20 20

Default 24-Hour Threshold 15000 100 50 50

4 (number of consecutive SESs)

Possible Causes
The system detects lower order path bit errors through the BIP2 in the V5 byte (E1 interface board or Hybrid IF board).

Procedure
Step 1 See 5.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors in TDM Services for handling. ----End

C.3.11 LPFEBBE, LPFEES, LPFESES, LPFECSES, and LPFEUAS


Description
l l l l l LPFEBBE indicates the lower order path far end background block error. FEBBE indicates that the BBE occurs at the opposite end. LPFEES indicates the lower order path far end errored second. FEES indicates that the ES occurs at the opposite end. LPFESES indicates the lower order path far end severely errored second. FESES indicates that the SES occurs at the opposite end. LPFECSES indicates the lower order path far end consecutive severely errored second. FECSES indicates that the CSES occurs at the opposite end. LPFEUAS indicates the lower order path far end unavailable second. FEUAS indicates that the UAS occurs at the opposite end.

Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Unit Description LPFEBE Block (LPFEBBE) Second (LPFEES, LPFESES, LPFECSES, and LPFEUAS)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

664

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Impact on System
Excessive bit errors interrupt the service (the BER should be less than 10-3 for the voice service, and 10-6 for the data service).

Related Alarms
The LP_REI alarm is reported at the local end.

Possible Causes
The system detects the lower order path far end bit errors through bit 3 in the V5 byte.

Procedure
Step 1 Clear the corresponding performance event at the opposite end. ----End

C.3.12 E1_LCV_SDH, E1_LLOSS_SDH, E1_LES_SDH, and E1_LSES_SDH


Description
l l l The E1_LCV_SDH is a performance event indicating the E1 line side code violation count. The E1_LLOSS_SDH is a performance event indicating the E1 line side loss-of-signal seconds. The E1_LES_SDH is a performance event indicating the E1 line side code violation errored second. ES refers to a second in which one or more errored blocks are detected. l The E1_LSES_SDH is a performance event indicating the E1 line side code violation severely errored second. An SES refers to a certain second in which 30% or more errored blocks are detected or at least one serious disturbance period (SDP) exists. The SDP refers to a period of at least four consecutive blocks or 1 ms (taking the longer one) in which the BER of all the consecutive blocks is equal to or higher than 10-2 or the signal is lost.

Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Unit Description LCV_BPVCNT None Second

Impact on the System


If bit errors occur in the services, you need to find out the causes and troubleshoot the problem in a timely manner. Otherwise, the signal transmission quality will be affected.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 665

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Related Alarms
None.

Possible Causes
l External causes: The fiber performance is degraded, and the fiber has extremely high attenuation. The fiber connector is dirty or incorrect. The equipment is improperly grounded. A strong interference source is present near the equipment. The working temperature is extremely high or extremely low, and the opposite equipment cannot tolerate such temperature. l Equipment problems: The service code types are incorrect. The board becomes faulty, or the performance of the board is degraded.

Procedure
Step 1 First eliminate external causes, such as poor grounding, too high operating temperature, too low or too high the receiving optical power of the line board. Step 2 Check whether the correct E1 service code is selected. If not, modify the code of the services received by a board by setting the code type of the board. ----End

C.3.13 TSL_MAX, TSL_MIN, TSL_CUR, and TSL_AVG


Description
l l l l TSL_MAX indicates the maximum radio transmitted signal level. TSL_MIN indicates the minimum radio transmitted signal level. TSL_CUR indicates the current radio transmitted signal level. TSL_AVG indicates the average radio transmitted signal level.

Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Unit Description TSL 0.1dBm

Impact on System
When the radio transmitted signal level is very low or very high, the radio received signal level at the opposite site is very low or very high. As a result, bit errors occur and even services are interrupted.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 666

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Related Alarms
If the radio transmitted signal level is not within the range supported by the ODU, the RADIO_TSL_HIGH or RADIO_TSL_LOW alarm is reported.

C.3.14 RSL_MAX, RSL_MIN, RSL_CUR, and RSL_AVG


Description
l l l l RSL_MAX indicates the maximum radio received signal level. RSL_MIN indicates the minimum radio received signal level. RSL_CUR indicates the current radio received signal level. RSL_AVG indicates the average radio received signal level.

Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Unit Description RSL 0.1dBm

Impact on System
When the radio received signal level is very low or very high, bit errors occur and even services are interrupted.

Related Alarms
If the radio received signal level crosses the specific threshold, the RADIO_RSL_HIGH or RADIO_RSL_LOW alarm is reported.

C.3.15 FEC_BEF_COR_ER, FEC_COR_BYTE_CNT and FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT


Description
l l l FEC_BEF_COR_ER indicates the BER before the FEC is performed. This event indicates the impact of the external environment on the transmission. FEC_COR_BYTE_CNT indicates the number of bytes corrected through the FEC. This event indicates the impact of the FEC. FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT indicates the number of frames that cannot be corrected through the FEC. This event indicates the number of blocks that cannot be corrected through the FEC.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

667

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Description FECBEFCORER (FEC_BEF_COR_ER) FECCORBYTECNT (FEC_COR_BYTE_CNT) FECUNCORBLOCKCNT (FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT) Unit None (FEC_BEF_COR_ER) None (FEC_COR_BYTE_CNT) Block (FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT)

Impact on System
If the value of FEC_BEF_COR_ER is very high, residual bit errors exist in the service after the FEC is performed. If the value of FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT is not zero, it can be inferred that bit errors that cannot be corrected exist on a radio link. Bit errors exist in the service accordingly.

Related Alarms
If a byte cannot be corrected, the MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is reported.

C.3.16 QPSKWS, QAMWS16, QAMWS32, QAMWS64, QAMWS128, and QAMWS256


Description
l l l l l l QPSKWS indicates the working duration of the QPSK modulation scheme. QAMWS16 indicates the working duration of the 16QAM modulation scheme. QAMWS32 indicates the working duration of the 32QAM modulation scheme. QAMWS64 indicates the working duration of the 64QAM modulation scheme. QAMWS128 indicates the working duration of the 128QAM modulation scheme. QAMWS256 indicates the working duration of the 256QAM modulation scheme.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

668

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Description QPSKWSSECOND (QPSKWS) QAMWS16SECOND (16QAMWS) QAMWS32SECOND (32QAMWS) QAMWS64SECOND (64QAMWS) QAMWS128SECOND (128QAMWS) QAMWS256SECOND (256QAMWS) Unit Second

Impact on System
When the AM function is disabled, the performance event does not affect the system. When the AM function is enabled, in normal cases, the seconds of the modulation scheme for maximum capacity should account for a larger percentage. In the duration set for good weather, if the seconds of the low-efficiency modulation scheme account for a larger percentage, the performance of the radio link is abnormal.

Related Alarms
None.

C.3.17 ATPC_P_ADJUST and ATPC_N_ADJUST


Description
l ATPC_P_ADJUST indicates the positive ATPC adjustment event. This performance event indicates that the quality of a communication link declines. Therefore, you must increase the transmit power of the ODU to maintain the communication quality. l ATPC_N_ADJUST indicates the negative ATPC adjustment event. This performance event indicates that the quality of a communication link becomes well or the transmit power of the ODU is very large. Therefore, you can decrease the transmit power of the ODU.

Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Unit Description ATPCPADJUST (ATPC_P_ADJUST) and ATPCNADJUST (ATPC_N_ADJUST) times

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

669

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Impact on the System


The ATPC adjustment indicates only the stability of a communication link and it does not affect services. When the value of the performance event is larger, more adjustments are made. When the factors that affect a communication link, such as sudden change of the weather, do not exist, and when the ATPC adjustment count is very large, the communication link may be faulty. You must check the communication link to prevent it from failure.

Related Alarms
None.

C.3.18 FB_AMDCNT and FB_AMUCNT


Description
l l FB_AMDCNT indicates the count of the AM downshifts on a board in the current performance statistics period. FB_AMUCNT indicates the count of the AM upshifts on a board in the current performance statistics period.

Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Unit Description ACMDCNT(FB_AMDCNT) and ACMUCNT(FB_AMUCNT) times

Impact on System
l l When the value of the performance event is larger, more AM scheme are made. When the factors that affect a communication link, such as sudden change of the weather, do not exist, and when the AM scheme count is very large, the communication link may be faulty. You must check the communication link to prevent it from failure.

Related Alarms
AM_DOWNSHIFT

Possible Causes
When the AM function is enabled, the transmission modulation scheme that the IF port on the IF board uses varies according to the quality of the link. Accordingly, the system counts the performance events of the modulation scheme shift. When the low-efficiency modulation scheme is shifted to the high-efficiency modulation scheme, an upshift is recorded and one FB_AMUCNT event is counted. Similarly, when the high-efficiency modulation scheme is shifted to the low-efficiency modulation scheme, a downshift is recorded and one FB_AMDCNT event is counted.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 670

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

C.3.19 RLHTT, RLLTT, TLHTT, TLLTT


Description
l l l l The RLHTT indicates the duration when the ODU at the local end has a receive power lower than the upper threshold. The RLLTT indicates the duration when the ODU at the local end has a receive power lower than the lower threshold. The TLHTT indicates the duration when the ODU at the local end has a transit power higher than the upper threshold. The TLLTT indicates the duration when the ODU at the local end has a transit power higher than the lower threshold.

Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Unit Description RLHTS(RLHTT), RLLTS(RLLTT), TLHTS (TLHTT), and TLLTS(TLLTT) Second

Impact on System
None.

Related Alarms
None.

C.3.20 TPLMAX, TPLMIN, and TPLCUR


Description
l l l TPLMAX indicates the maximum transmit optical power at an optical interface. TPLMIN indicates the minimum transmit optical power at an optical interface. TPLCUR indicates the current transmit optical power at an optical interface.

Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Unit Description OPM 0.1dBm

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

671

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Impact on System
In normal cases, the receive optical power should be 3 dB higher than the receiver sensitivity, and 5 dB lower than the overload power. If the transmit optical power is very low or very high, the receive optical power at the opposite site is accordingly very low or very high. As a result, bit errors occur and even services are interrupted.

Related Alarms
l l If the transmit optical power at the opposite site is lower than the receiver sensitivity, the IN_PWR_LOW alarm is reported. If the receive optical power at the opposite site is higher than the overload power, the IN_PWR_HIGH alarm is reported.

C.3.21 RPLMAX, RPLMIN, and RPLCUR


Description
l l l RPLMAX indicates the maximum receive optical power at an optical interface. RPLMIN indicates the minimum receive optical power at an optical interface. RPLCUR indicates the current receive optical power at an optical interface.

Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Unit Description IPM 0.1dBm

Impact on System
In normal cases, the receive optical power should be 3 dB higher than the receiver sensitivity, and 5 dB lower than the overload power. If the receive optical power is very low or very high, bit errors occur and even services are interrupted.

Related Alarms
l l If the transmit optical power is lower than the receiver sensitivity, the IN_PWR_LOW alarm is reported. If the receive optical power is higher than the overload power, the IN_PWR_HIGH alarm is reported.

C.3.22 BDTEMPMAX, BDTEMPMIN, and BDTEMPCUR


Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 672

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Description
l l l BDTEMPMAX indicates the maximum temperature of a board. BDTEMPMIN indicates the minimum temperature of a board. BDTEMPCUR indicates the current temperature of a board.

Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Unit Description XCS_TEMP 0.1C

Impact on System
If the temperature of a board is very high or very low, the performance of the board declines, and bit errors or other faults occur.

Related Alarms
If the temperature of a board crosses the specific threshold, the TEMP_ALARM alarm is reported.

C.3.23 XPIC_XPD_VALUE
Description
The XPIC_XPD_VALUE indicates the XPD value after the XPIC function is enabled.

Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Unit Description XPD dB

Impact on System
l l When the XPIC function is disabled, the performance event does not affect the system. When the XPIC function is enabled, a greater XPD value indicates less interference between H and V polarization directions and better signaling environment; a smaller XPD value indicates more interference and worse signaling environment. If the XPD value is smaller than a specific threshold, errors and even interruptions occur on the radio link.

Related Alarms
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 673

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

C.3.24 PG_IF_BBE, PG_IF_ES, PG_IF_SES, PG_IF_CSES, and PG_IF_UAS


Description
l PG_IF_BBE indicates the protection group background block error. Background block error (BBE) refers to the errored blocks excluding the errored blocks in the unavailable and severely errored seconds. l l PG_IF_ES indicates the protection group errored second. Errored second (ES) refers to a second in which one or more errored blocks are detected. PG_IF_SES indicates the protection group severely errored second. Severely errored second (SES) refers to a second in which 30% or more than 30% errored blocks exist or at least one severely disturbed period (SDP) exists. SDP is the period in which the BER of all the consecutive blocks in a period of less than four consecutive blocks or 1 ms (the longer period is applied) is equal to or higher than 10-2 or the signal is lost. l PG_IF_CSES indicates the protection group consecutive severely errored second. Consecutive severely errored second (CSES) refers to a second in which the SES occurs continuously for less than 10 seconds. l PG_IF_UAS indicates the protection group unavailable second. The unavailable time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive SESs, with the 10 SESs included. When SESs disappear for 10 consecutive seconds, the available time begins from the eleventh second, with the previous 10 seconds included.

Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Unit Description IF_BIP8 Block (PG_IF_BBE) Second (PG_IF_ES, PG_IF_SES, PG_IF_CSES, and PG_IF_UAS)

Impact on System
Excessive bit errors interrupt the service (the BER should be less than -3 for the voice service, and 10-6 for the data service).

Related Alarms
None. Performance Event PG_IF_BBE
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Default 15-Minute Threshold 1500

Default 24-Hour Threshold 15000


674

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Performance Event PG_IF_ES PG_IF_SES PG_IF_UAS PG_IF_CSES

Default 15-Minute Threshold 50 20 20

Default 24-Hour Threshold 100 50 50

4 (number of consecutive SESs)

Possible Causes
The system detects the protection group bit errors.

Related Alarms
PG_LINK_FAIL, PG_PRT_DEGRADED

Procedure
Step 1 See PG_LINK_FAIL, PG_PRT_DEGRADED. ----End

C.3.25 E1_BBE, E1_ES, E1_SES, E1_CSES, and E1_UAS


Description
l E1_BBE indicates the E1 background block error. Background block error (BBE) refers to the errored blocks excluding the errored blocks in the unavailable and severely errored seconds. This performance event can be detected only when the E1 frame format is CRC-4. l l E1_ES indicates the E1 errored second. Errored second (ES) refers to a second in which one or more errored blocks are detected. E1_SES indicates the E1 severely errored second. Severely errored second (SES) refers to a second in which 30% or more than 30% errored blocks exist or at least one severely disturbed period (SDP) exists. SDP is the period in which the BER of all the consecutive blocks in a period of less than four consecutive blocks or 1 ms (the longer period is applied) is equal to or higher than 10-2 or the signal is lost. l E1_CSES indicates the E1 consecutive severely errored second. Consecutive severely errored second (CSES) refers to a second in which the SES occurs continuously for less than 10 seconds. l E1_UAS indicates the E1 unavailable second. The unavailable time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive SESs, with the 10 SESs included. When SESs disappear for 10 consecutive seconds, the available time begins from the eleventh second, with the previous 10 seconds included.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 675

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Unit Description E1CRC_ERR_CNT Block (E1_BBE) Second (E1_ES, E1_SES, E1_CSES, and E1_UAS)

Impact on System
Excessive bit errors interrupt the service (the BER should be less than -3 for the voice service, and 10-6 for the data service).

Related Alarms
None. Performance Event E1_BBE E1_ES E1_SES E1_UAS E1_CSES Default 15-Minute Threshold 1500 50 20 20 Default 24-Hour Threshold 15000 100 50 50

4 (number of consecutive SESs)

Possible Causes
The system detects the E1 bit errors.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the frame format of the local E1 port is the same as that of the opposite port. Step 2 Check whether the E1 cable is intact. If it is damaged, replace it. Step 3 Use another E1 port. Step 4 Troubleshoot the interconnected equipment. ----End

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

676

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

C.3.26 IF_SNR_MAX, IF_SNR_MIN, and IF_SNR_AVG


Description
l l l IF_SNR_MAX indicates the maximum signal to noise ratio. IF_SNR_MIN indicates the minimum signal to noise ratio. IF_SNR_AVG indicates the average signal to noise ratio.

Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Description IF_SNR(IF_SNR_MAX, IF_SNR_MIN) IF_SNR_AVG_15M, and IF_SNR_AVG_24H(IF_SNR_AVG) Unit dB

Impact on System
A greater SNR value indicates a steady radio link; a smaller SNR value indicates a worse radio link, errors and even interruptions occur on the radio link.

Related Alarms
None.

C.3.27 OSPITMPMAX, OSPITMPMIN, and OSPITMPCUR


Description
l l l OSPITMPMAX indicates the maximum temperature of a laser core. OSPITMPMIN indicates the minimum temperature of a laser core. OSPITMPCUR indicates the current temperature of a laser core.

Attribute
Attribute Performance event cell Unit Description TMP C

Impact on System
If the temperature of a laser core is very high or very low, the performance of the laser degrades, and bit errors or other faults occur.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 677

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

C Performance Event Reference

Relevant Alarms
None.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

678

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

RMON Event Reference

RMON events reflect the running of the Ethernet services. This chapter describes the possible RMON events on the OptiX RTN 980 and how to handle these events. D.1 List of RMON Alarm Entries The RMON alarm entries refer to the table entries in the RMON alarm group. D.2 List of RMON Performance Entries on the Packet-Plane The RMON performance entries on the packet plane refer to the table entries in the RMON statistics group or history group. D.3 List of RMON Performance Entries on the EoS/EoPDH Plane The ports that report RMON performance events on the EoPDH plane include PORT1 to PORT9, and VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK16 on the EFP8 board. The ports that report RMON performance events on the EoPDH plane include PORT1 to PORT8, and VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK8 on the EMS6 board. D.4 RMON Events and Handling Procedures This chapter describes the RMON events that indicate Ethernet service abnormalities and how to handle these events.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

679

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

D.1 List of RMON Alarm Entries


The RMON alarm entries refer to the table entries in the RMON alarm group. Table D-1 List of RMON alarm entries Alarm Name ETHDROP RXBBAD ETHFCS Description The number of packet loss events crosses the threshold. The number of bytes in received bad packets crosses the threshold. The number of frames that have FCS check errors crosses the threshold. Source ISU2, ISX2, IFU2 and IFX2

Table D-2 List of RMON alarm entries Alarm Name ETHDROP ETHEXCCO L ETHLATECO L RXBBAD TXDEFFRM Description The number of packet loss events crosses the threshold. The number of frames that fail to be transmitted after continuous collisions crosses the threshold. The number of collisions that are detected after a timeslot period elapses crosses the threshold. The number of bytes in received bad packets crosses the threshold. The number of frames whose transmission is delayed crosses the threshold. The number of received undersized packets crosses the threshold. The number of received oversized packets crosses the threshold. The number of received fragmented packets crosses the threshold. The number of received errored oversized packets crosses the threshold.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 680

Source EM6T, EM6F, EG2D, EM6FA, EM6TA

ETHUNDER ETHOVER ETHFRG ETHJAB

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

Alarm Name ETHFCS PORT_RX_B W_UTILIZA TION PORT_TX_B W_UTILIZA TION

Description The number of frames that have FCS check errors crosses the threshold. Indicates the bandwidth utilization at a port in the receive direction. Indicates the bandwidth utilization at a port in the transmit direction.

Source

ISU2, ISX2, EM6T, EM6F, EG2D, EM6FA, EM6TA, IFU2 and IFX2

Table D-3 List of EMS6\EFP8 RMON alarm entries Alarm Name ETHDROP RXBBAD ETHUNDER ETHOVER ETHFRG ETHJAB Description The number of packet loss events crosses the threshold. The number of bytes in received bad packets crosses the threshold. The number of received undersized packets crosses the threshold. The number of received oversized packets crosses the threshold. The number of received fragmented packets crosses the threshold. The number of received errored oversized packets crosses the threshold. The number of frames that have FCS check errors crosses the threshold. The number of alignment error frames EMS6, EFP8 Source

ETHFCS ETHALI

D.2 List of RMON Performance Entries on the Packet-Plane


The RMON performance entries on the packet plane refer to the table entries in the RMON statistics group or history group.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

681

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

Table D-4 Packet-Plane RMON Performance Entry List Perfor manc e Type Basic perfor mance Performance Name Description Source

RXPKTS ETHDROP RXOCTETS RXMULCAST

Indicates the packets received (packets). Indicates the packet loss events (times). Indicates the bytes received (bytes). Indicates the multicast packets received (packets). Indicates the broadcast packets received (packets). Indicates the oversized packets received (packets). Indicates the oversized error packets received (packets). Indicates the undersized packets received (packets). Indicates the fragments received (packets). Indicates the collisions (times). Indicates the bandwidth utilization at a port in the receive direction. Indicates the bandwidth utilization at a port in the transmit direction. Packets received (64 bytes in length) (packets) Packets received (65-127 bytes in length) (packets)

EM6T, EM6F, EFP8, IFU2, IFX2, ISU2, ISX2, EG2D, EM6FA, EM6TA, EMS6

RXBRDCAST

ETHOVER

EM6T, EM6F, EFP8, EG2D, EM6FA, EM6TA, EMS6

ETHJAB

ETHUNDER

EM6T, EM6F, EG2D, EM6FA, EM6TA

ETHFRG ETHCOL PORT_RX_BW_UTILIZATION PORT_TX_BW_UTILIZATION RXPKT64 RXPKT65

EM6T, EM6F, EG2D, EM6FA, EM6TA, ISU2, ISX2, IFU2, IFX2

ISU2, ISX2

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

682

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

Perfor manc e Type

Performance Name

Description

Source

RXPKT128

Packets received (128-255 bytes in length) (packets) Packets received (256-511 bytes in length) (packets) Packets received (512-1023 bytes in length) (packets) Packets received (1024-1518 bytes in length) (packets) Indicates the FCS errored frames (frames). Indicates the bytes in received good packets (bytes). Indicates the bytes in transmitted good packets (bytes). Indicates the bytes in received bad packets (bytes). Indicates the unicast packets transmitted (packets). Indicates the unicast packets received (packets). Indicates the multicast packets transmitted (packets). Indicates the broadcast packets transmitted (packets). Indicates the rate of good full-frame bytes received (bytes/second). EM6T, EM6F, EFP8, IFU2, IFX2, ISU2, ISX2, EG2D, EM6FA, EM6TA, EMS6

RXPKT256

RXPKT512

RXPKT1024

Extend ed perfor mance

ETHFCS RXBGOOD

TXBGOOD

RXBBAD

TXUNICAST

RXUNICAST

TXMULCAST

TXBRDCAST

RXGOODFULLFRAME SPEED

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

683

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

Perfor manc e Type

Performance Name

Description

Source

TXGOODFULLFRAME SPEED

Indicates the rate of good full-frame bytes transmitted (bytes/ second). Indicates the good fullframe bytes received (bytes). Indicates the good fullframe bytes transmitted (bytes). Indicates the pause frames received (frames). Indicates the pause frames transmitted (frames). Indicates the late collisions (times). Indicates the frames unsuccessfully transmitted after consecutive collisions (frames). Indicates the frames that are deferred in transmission (frames). Indicates the count of received packets with a length of 1519 to MTU bytes (errored packets included) Indicates the count of transmitted 64-byte packets (errored packets included) Indicates the count of transmitted packets with a length of 65 to 127 bytes (errored packets included) ISU2, ISX2 EM6T, EM6F, EFP8, EG2D, EM6FA, EM6TA, EMS6

RXFULLBGOOD

TXFULLBGOOD

RXPAUSE TXPAUSE

ETHLATECOL ETHEXCCOL

EM6T, EM6F, EG2D, EM6FA, EM6TA

TXDEFFRM

RXPKT1519

TXPKT64

TXPKT65

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

684

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

Perfor manc e Type

Performance Name

Description

Source

TXPKT128

Indicates the count of transmitted packets with a length of 128 to 255 bytes (errored packets included) Indicates the count of transmitted packets with a length of 256 to 511 bytes (errored packets included) Indicates the count of transmitted packets with a length of 512 to 1023 bytes (errored packets included) Indicates the count of transmitted packets with a length of 1024 to 1518 bytes (errored packets included) Indicates the count of transmitted packets with a length of 1519 to MTU bytes (errored packets included) Indicates the count of transmitted cells. Indicates the count of received cells. Indicates the count of unknown cells. Indicates the bandwidth utilization at a port in the receive direction. Indicates the bandwidth utilization at a port in the transmit direction. Indicates the number of correctable HCS error cells received. ML1, MD1

TXPKT256

TXPKT512

TXPKT1024

TXPKT1519

ATM PWE3 perfor mance

ATMPW_SNDCELLS ATMPW_RCVCELLS ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELLS

ATM/ IMA perfor mance events on the access side

PORT_RX_BW_UTILIZATION PORT_TX_BW_UTILIZATION ATM_CORRECTED_H CSERR

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

685

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

Perfor manc e Type

Performance Name

Description

Source

ATM_UNCORRECTED _HCSERR ATM_RCVCELLS ATM_RCVIDLECELLS ATM_SNDCELLS ATM_IF_INRATE_MA X ATM_IF_INRATE_MIN

Indicates the number of uncorrectable HCS error cells received. Indicates the total number of received cells. Indicates the total number of received idle cells. Indicates the total number of transmitted cells. Indicates the maximum rate of normal cells received on the port. Indicates the minimum rate of normal cells received on the port. Indicates the average rate of normal cells received on the port. Indicates the maximum rate of normal cells transmitted on the port. Indicates the minimum rate of normal cells transmitted on the port. Indicates the average rate of normal cells transmitted on the port. Indicates the percentage of valid cells. Indicates the bandwidth utilization rate (0.01%) of the port in the receive direction. Indicates the bandwidth utilization rate (0.01%) of the port in the transmit direction.

ATM_IF_INRATE_AV G ATM_IF_OUTRATE_M AX ATM_IF_OUTRATE_M IN ATM_IF_OUTRATE_A VG ATM_CELL_AVAILABILITY PORT_RX_BW_UTILIZATION

PORT_TX_BW_UTILIZATION

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

686

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

Perfor manc e Type

Performance Name

Description

Source

ATM_UNI1_INRATE_ MAX

Indicates the maximum rate of receiving correct cells on the UNI1 side of ATM connections. Indicates the minimum rate of receiving correct cells on the UNI1 side of ATM connections. Indicates the average rate of receiving correct cells on the UNI1 side of ATM connections. Indicates the maximum rate of transmitting correct cells on the UNI1 side of ATM connections. Indicates the minimum rate of transmitting correct cells on the UNI1 side of ATM connections. Indicates the average rate of transmitting correct cells on the UNI1 side of ATM connections. Indicates the maximum rate of receiving correct cells on the UNI2 side of ATM connections. Indicates the minimum rate of receiving correct cells on the UNI2 side of ATM connections. Indicates the average rate of receiving correct cells on the UNI2 side of ATM connections. Indicates the maximum rate of transmitting correct cells on the UNI2 side of ATM connections.

ATM_UNI1_INRATE_ MIN

ATM_UNI1_INRATE_ AVG

ATM_UNI1_OUTRATE _MAX

ATM_UNI1_OUTRATE _MIN

ATM_UNI1_OUTRATE _AVG

ATM_UNI2_INRATE_ MAX

ATM_UNI2_INRATE_ MIN

ATM_UNI2_INRATE_ AVG

ATM_UNI2_OUTRATE _MAX

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

687

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

Perfor manc e Type

Performance Name

Description

Source

ATM_UNI2_OUTRATE _MIN

Indicates the minimum rate of transmitting correct cells on the UNI2 side of ATM connections. Indicates the average rate of transmitting correct cells on the UNI2 side of ATM connections. Indicates the total number of receiving correct cells on the UNI1 side of ATM connections. Indicates the total number of transmitting correct cells on the UNI1 side of ATM connections. Indicates the total number of receiving correct cells on the UNI2 side of ATM connections. Indicates the total number of transmitting correct cells on the UNI2 side of ATM connections. Indicates the number of lost disordered packets. Indicates the number of mis-connected packets. Indicates the number of deformed frames. Indicates the number of jitter buffer underflows. Indicates the number of jitter buffer overflows. Indicates the number of lost packets. Indicates the number of received packets.

ATM_UNI2_OUTRATE _AVG

ATM_UNI1_INCELLS

ATM_UNI1_OUTCELLS

ATM_UNI2_INCELLS

ATM_UNI2_OUTCELLS

CES perfor mance event

CES_MISORDERPKTS CES_STRAYPKTS CES_MALPKTS CES_JTRUDR CES_JTROVR CES_LOSPKTS CES_RX_PKTS

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

688

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

Perfor manc e Type PW perfor mance of ATM/ CES L2VP Na perfor mance

Performance Name

Description

Source

PW_RCVPKTS

Indicates the number of packets received from PWs. Indicates the number of bytes received from PWs. Indicates the number of packets received at the VUNI VLAN. Indicates the number of bytes in the packets received at the V-UNI VLAN. Indicates the number of packets received on the V-UNI. Indicates the number of bytes received on the VUNI. Indicates the number of packets received in the reverse tunnel. Indicates the number of bytes received in the reverse tunnel. Indicates the number of packets received in the tunnel. Indicates the number of bytes received in the tunnel. Indicates the number of packets received on the PW. Indicates the number of bytes received on the PW. Indicates the number of packets discarded on the PW. CSHN

PW_RCVBYTES VLAN_RCVPKTS

VLAN_RCVBYTES

VUNI_RCVPKTS

VUNI_RCVBYTES

Tunnel perfor mance

TUNNEL_REVERSE_R CVPKTS TUNNEL_REVERSE_R CVBYTES TUNNEL_RCVPKTS

TUNNEL_RCVBYTES

PW perfor mance of L2VP N

PW_RCVPKTS

PW_RCVBYTES PW_DROPPKTS

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

689

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

Perfor manc e Type ETHO AM 802.1a g

Performance Name

Description

Source

ETH_CFM_FLR ETH_CFM_FL

Indicates the E_Line service packet loss ratio. Indicates the number of discarded E_Line service packets. Indicates the E_Line service delay. Indicates the E_Line service delay variation. Indicates the number of red packets after traffic monitoring is enabled. Indicates the number of yellow packets after traffic monitoring is enabled. Indicates the number of green packets after traffic monitoring is enabled. Indicates the number of packets received in the matched flow. Indicates the number of packets transmitted in the matched flow. Indicates the number of packets discarded due to network congestion when the traffic shaping function is enabled in the egress direction. Indicates the ratio of packet loss due to network congestion when the traffic shaping function is enabled in the egress direction. EM6T, EM6F, IFU2, IFX2, ISU2, ISX2, EG2D, EM6FA, EM6TA

ETH_CFM_FD ETH_CFM_FDV Port traffic classifi cation QOS_PORTCAR_MarkedRedPKTS QOS_PORTCAR_MarkedYellowPKTS

QOS_PORTCAR_MarkedGreenPKTS QOS_PORTSTRM_RC VMATCHPKTS QOS_PORTSTRM_SN DMATCHPKTS PORTSTRM_SHAPING _DROPPKTS

PORTSTRM_SHAPING _DROPRATIO

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

690

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

Perfor manc e Type

Performance Name

Description

Source

QOS_PORTCAR_MarkedRedRATIO

Indicates the proportion of packets marked in red when the traffic policing function is enabled. Indicates the ratio of packet loss due to congestion in egress queues with different priorities. Indicates the number of packets discarded in the services with different priorities. Indicates the number of bytes discarded in the services with different priorities. Indicates the number of packets transmitted in egress queues with different priorities. Indicates the number of bytes in the packets transmitted in egress queues with different priorities. Indicates the number of packets with matched CVLAN priorities in the DS domain Indicates the number of bytes in the packets with matched C-VLAN priorities in the DS domain. Indicates the number of packets with matched SVLAN priorities in the DS domain.

Port priorit y

QOS_PORTQUEUE_D ROPRATIO

QOS_PRI_DROPPKTS

QOS_PRI_DROPBYTES

PORT_PRI_SNDPKTS

PORT_PRI_SNDBYTE S

Port DS domai n

DS_CVLANPRI_PKTS

DS_CVLANPRI_BYTE S

DS_SVLANPRI_PKTS

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

691

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

Perfor manc e Type

Performance Name

Description

Source

DS_SVLANPRI_BYTE S

Indicates the number of bytes in the packets with matched S-VLAN priorities in the DS domain. Indicates the number of packets with matched IP DSCP priorities in the DS domain. Indicates the number of bytes in the packets with matched IP DSCP priorities in the DS domain.

DS_DSCP_PKTS

DS_DSCP_BYTES

NOTE

l a: L2VPN services include a variety of E-Line and E-LAN services supported by the equipment. l VUNI represents virtual UNI, represents the sink or source of services on the UNI side. l The E-LAN services transmitted by the OptiX RTN 980 do not support the VUNI-based RMON performance statistics. l Integrated IP radio ports support this parameter.

D.3 List of RMON Performance Entries on the EoS/EoPDH Plane


The ports that report RMON performance events on the EoPDH plane include PORT1 to PORT9, and VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK16 on the EFP8 board. The ports that report RMON performance events on the EoPDH plane include PORT1 to PORT8, and VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK8 on the EMS6 board. Table D-5 List of RMON performance entries on the EoS/EoPDH plane Categ ory of Perfor manc e Entrie s Basic perfor mance
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Brief Name of a Performance Entry

Full Name of a Performance Entry

Source Port

ETHUNDER

Undersized packets received (packets)

PORT1 to PORT8 on the EFP8 board

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

692

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

Categ ory of Perfor manc e Entrie s

Brief Name of a Performance Entry

Full Name of a Performance Entry

Source Port

ETHFRG RXPKT64 RXPKT65 RXPKT128

Fragments received (packets) Packets received (64 bytes in length) (packets) Packets received (65-127 bytes in length) (packets) Packets received (128-255 bytes in length) (packets) Packets received (256-511 bytes in length) (packets) Packets received (512-1023 bytes in length) (packets) Packets received (1024-1518 bytes in length) (packets) Control frames received (frames) Bytes transmitted (bytes) Packets transmitted (packets) Control frames transmitted (frame) Packets transmitted (64 bytes in length) (packets) Packets transmitted (65-127 bytes in length) (packets) Packets transmitted (128-255 bytes in length) (packets)

PORT1 to PORT6 on the EMS6 board PORT1 to PORT9 on the EFP8 board PORT1 to PORT7 on the EMS6 board

RXPKT256

RXPKT512

RXPKT1024

Extend ed perfor mance

RXCTLPKTS TXOCTETS TXPKTS TXCTLPKTS TXPKT64 TXPKT65

PORT1 to PORT9 on the EFP8 board PORT1 to PORT7 on the EMS6 board

TXPKT128

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

693

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

Categ ory of Perfor manc e Entrie s

Brief Name of a Performance Entry

Full Name of a Performance Entry

Source Port

TXPKT256

Packets transmitted (256-511 bytes in length) (packets) Packets transmitted (512-1023 bytes in length) (packets) Packets transmitted (1024-1518 bytes in length) (packets) Alignment error frames (frames) Packets received and transmitted (64 bytes in length) (packets) Packets received and transmitted (65-127 bytes in length) (packets) Packets received and transmitted (128-255 bytes in length) (packets) Packets received and transmitted (256-511 bytes in length) (packets) Packets received and transmitted (512-1023 bytes in length) (packets) Packets received and transmitted (1024-1518 bytes in length) (packets) Good packets transmitted (packets) Packets transmitted (packets) Bytes transmitted (bytes) VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK16 on the EFP8 board VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK8 on the EMS6 board

TXPKT512

TXPKT1024

ETHALI PKT64

PKT65

PKT128

PKT256

PKT512

PKT1024

VCG perfor mance

VCG_TXGOODPACKETS VCG_TXPACKETS VCG_TXOCTETS

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

694

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

Categ ory of Perfor manc e Entrie s

Brief Name of a Performance Entry

Full Name of a Performance Entry

Source Port

VCG_RXGOODPACKETS VCG_RXPACKETS VCG_RXOCTETS VCG_TXSPEED VCG_RXSPEED

Good packets received (packets) Packets received (packets) Bytes received (bytes) Speed of bytes transmitted (bytes) Speed of bytes received (bytes)

D.4 RMON Events and Handling Procedures


This chapter describes the RMON events that indicate Ethernet service abnormalities and how to handle these events.

D.4.1 ETHDROP
Description
ETHDROP indicates the number of events in which packet loss occurs due to resource deficiency of Ethernet chips. An RMON threshold-crossing event is reported when the number of packet loss events is higher than the upper threshold or lower than the lower threshold.
NOTE

ETHDROP counts only the packets that are lost due to resource deficiency of Ethernet chips.

Impact on System
When packet loss occurs frequently, services are affected and the system is affected seriously. Hence, you must rectify the fault immediately.

Possible Causes
This performance event indicates packet loss due to the full MAC buffer, FIFO overflow, or backward pressure. l l
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

The lower threshold is not set to a non-zero value. The hardware at the local end is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 695

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Handle this alarm according to the specific performance event. If... The number is lower than the lower threshold The number is higher than the upper threshold Then... Change the lower threshold to 0. Manually decrease the traffic transmitted from the opposite end. If the problem persists, go to the next step.

Step 2 Replace the involved part. ----End

Reference
None.

D.4.2 ETHEXCCOL
Description
ETHEXCCOL indicates the number of frames that fail to be transmitted due to continuous port collisions. An RMON threshold-crossing event is reported when the number of frames that fail to be transmitted is higher than the upper threshold or lower than the lower threshold. Generally, the value indicates that 16 port collisions occur continuously when the same frame is transmitted.

Impact on System
The opposite equipment fails to normally receive services.

Possible Causes
Generally, this event is caused when the local port is connected to a large number of devices that work in half-duplex mode.

Procedure
Step 1 Handle this alarm according to the specific performance event. If... The number is lower than the lower threshold The number is higher than the upper threshold Then... Change the lower threshold to 0. Go to the next step.

Step 2 On the NMS, query the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

696

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

If... The ports on the equipment at both ends work in inconsistent modes, or any port works in half-duplex mode

Then... Set the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends to full-duplex or autonegotiation, so that these ports work in consistent modes.

The ports on the equipment at both ends Go to the next step. work in consistent modes and no ports work in half-duplex mode Step 3 Replace the involved part. ----End

Reference
None.

D.4.3 ETHLATECOL
Description
ETHLATECOL indicates the number of collisions detected within a timeslot period after a packet is transmitted. An RMON threshold-crossing event is reported when the number of collisions is higher than the upper threshold or lower than the lower threshold.

Impact on System
The opposite equipment fails to normally receive services.

Possible Causes
Generally, this performance event is caused by a large network diameter.

Procedure
Step 1 Handle this alarm according to the specific performance event. If... The number is lower than the lower threshold The number is higher than the upper threshold Then... Change the lower threshold to 0. Go to the next step.

Step 2 On the NMS, query the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends. If... The ports on the equipment at both ends work in inconsistent modes, or any port works in half-duplex mode Then... Set the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends to full-duplex or autonegotiation, so that these ports work in consistent modes.
697

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

If...

Then...

The ports on the equipment at both ends Go to the next step. work in consistent modes and no ports work in half-duplex mode Step 3 Check whether the network diameter of the LAN is very large according to the networking planning information. If... The network diameter is very large Then... Divide the network and deploy equipment to different buses or physically shared devices (such as hubs).
NOTE In the case of the 10 Mbit/s port rate, the maximum Ethernet diameter is 2000 m. In the case of the 100 Mbit/s port rate, the maximum Ethernet diameter is 200 m.

The network diameter is appropriate Go to the next step. Step 4 Replace the involved part. ----End

Reference
None.

D.4.4 RXBBAD
Description
RXBBAD indicates the total number of bytes in received bad packets, excluding the framing bit but including the FCS byte. An RMON threshold-crossing event is reported when the total number of bytes in received bad packets is higher than the upper threshold or lower than the lower threshold.

Impact on System
A port discards bad packets. This may even interrupt system services.

Possible Causes
1. 2. 3. Errors occur when the opposite end transmits packets. The transmission line is of the poor quality and bit errors exist. The hardware at the local end is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Handle this alarm according to the specific performance event.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 698

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

If... The number is lower than the lower threshold The number is higher than the upper threshold

Then... Change the lower threshold to 0. Go to the next step.

Step 2 Correct the errors that occur when the opposite end transmits packets. Step 3 Handle the problem of poor quality of the transmission line. Check whether the ETH_LOS alarm is reported at the local end because the external line is damaged or over attenuated. If yes, see the related handling method to clear the alarm. Step 4 Replace the involved part. ----End

Reference
None.

D.4.5 TXDEFFRM
Description
TXDEFFRM indicates the number of frames the first transmission of which is delayed due to the congestion on the transmission media, excluding the number of frames the first transmission of which is delayed due to collisions. An RMON threshold-crossing event is reported when the number of frames that fail to be transmitted is higher than the upper threshold and lower than the lower threshold.

Impact on System
The rate of frame transmission decreases, and therefore packets are congested at a port and the throughput of the port decreases.

Possible Causes
Generally, this event is caused when the external port at the local end is connected to a large number of devices that work in half-duplex mode.

Procedure
Step 1 Handle this alarm according to the specific performance event. If... The number is lower than the lower threshold The number is higher than the upper threshold Then... Change the lower threshold to 0. Go to the next step.

Step 2 On the NMS, query the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

699

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

If... The ports on the equipment at both ends work in inconsistent modes, or any port works in half-duplex mode

Then... Set the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends to full-duplex or autonegotiation, so that these ports work in consistent modes.

The ports on the equipment at both ends Go to the next step. work in consistent modes and no ports work in half-duplex mode Step 3 Replace the involved part. ----End

Reference
None.

D.4.6 ETHUNDER
Description
ETHUNDER indicates that an RMON threshold-crossing event is reported when the number of packets that are shorter than 64 bytes and are received on the line side crosses the preset threshold.

Impact on System
The data frames whose length is not within the specific range are discarded. As a result, the system services are affected.

Possible Causes
1. 2. The length of a data frame that is received at a port is shorter than 64 bytes. The hardware at the local end is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the opposite equipment transmits the packet that is shorter than 64 bytes. If... Then...

The opposite equipment transmits the packet Rectify the fault on the opposite equipment. that is shorter than 64 bytes The opposite end does not transmit the packet that is shorter than 64 bytes Step 2 Replace the involved part. ----End Go to the next step.

Reference
None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 700

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

D.4.7 ETHOVER
Description
ETHOVER indicates that an RMON threshold-crossing event is reported when the number of packets that are longer than 1518 bytes and are received at a port crosses the preset threshold.

Impact on System
If the length of the data frame received at a port is more than the preset maximum frame length, the data frame is discarded and therefore the system services are affected.

Possible Causes
1. 2. The preset maximum frame length is less than the length of the frame that is received at a port. The hardware at the local end is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the opposite equipment transmits the packet that is longer than the maximum frame length set for the local equipment. If... The opposite equipment transmits the packet that is longer than the maximum frame length set for the local equipment Then... Notify the opposite equipment that the length of transmitted frames should be changed.

The opposite equipment does not transmit Go to the next step. the packet that is longer than the maximum frame length set for the local equipment Step 2 Replace the involved part. ----End

Reference
None.

D.4.8 ETHFRG
Description
ETHFRG indicates that an RMON threshold-crossing event is reported when the number of received packets that are shorter than 64 bytes and have FCS or alignment errors exceeds the preset upper threshold.

Impact on System
Data transmission is delayed or packet loss occurs.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 701

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

Possible Causes
l l l The working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends are not consistent. The hardware at the local end is faulty. The ports on the equipment at both ends work in half-duplex mode, and the data traffic is very heavy.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends are consistent. If... The working modes are consistent Then... Go to the next step.

The working modes are not consistent Change the working mode of the local port so that the ports on the equipment at both ends work in consistent modes. Step 2 Check whether the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends are set to the halfduplex mode. If... Then...

The working modes are not set to the half- Go to the next step. duplex mode The working modes are set to the halfduplex mode Change the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends to the full-duplex mode or adaptive mode.

Step 3 Replace the involved part. ----End

D.4.9 ETHJAB
Description
ETHJAB indicates that an RMON threshold-crossing alarm is reported when the number of received packets that are longer than 1518 bytes and have FCS or alignment errors is higher than the upper threshold.

Impact on the System


Data transmission is delayed or packet loss occurs.

Possible Causes
l l The working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends are not consistent. The hardware at the local end is faulty.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

702

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends are consistent. If... The working modes are consistent Then... Go to the next step.

The working modes are not consistent Change the working mode of the local port so that the ports on the equipment at both ends work in consistent modes. Step 2 Replace the involved part. ----End

D.4.10 ETHCOL
Description
ETHCOL indicates the number of detected packet collisions. An RMON threshold-crossing event is reported when the number of collisions is higher than the upper threshold or lower than the lower threshold.

Impact on System
The opposite equipment fails to normally receive services.

Possible Causes
Generally, this event is caused when the local port is connected to a large number of devices that work in half-duplex mode.

Procedure
Step 1 Handle this alarm according to the specific performance event. If... The number is lower than the lower threshold The number is higher than the upper threshold Then... Change the lower threshold to 0. Go to the next step.

Step 2 On the NMS, query the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends. If... The ports on the equipment at both ends work in inconsistent modes, or any port works in half-duplex mode Then... Set the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends to full-duplex or autonegotiation, so that these ports work in consistent modes.

The ports on the equipment at both ends Go to the next step. work in consistent modes and no ports work in half-duplex mode
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 703

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

Step 3 Replace the involved part. ----End

Reference
None.

D.4.11 ETHFCS
Description
ETHFCS indicates the number of received Ethernet data frames with FCS check errors at the local end (excluding the oversized and undersized frames). An RMON threshold-crossing event is reported when the number is higher than the upper threshold or lower than the lower threshold.

Impact on System
Most ports discard the packets with FCS check errors. The system services are interrupted in the worst case.

Possible Causes
1. 2. 3. The local port and opposite port work in inconsistent modes. For example, one port works in full-duplex mode, and the opposite port works in half-duplex mode. The transmission line is of the poor quality and bit errors exist. The hardware at the local end is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Therefore, handle the alarm according to the specific performance event. If... The number is lower than the lower threshold The number is higher than the upper threshold Then... Change the lower threshold to 0. Go to the next step.

Step 2 On the NMS, query the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends. If... The ports on the equipment at both ends work in inconsistent modes The ports on the equipment at both ends work in consistent modes Step 3 Replace the involved part. ----End
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 704

Then... Change the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends so that they can work in consistent modes Go to the next step.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

Reference
None.

D.4.12 ATMPW_LOSPKTS
Description
The ATMPW_LOSPKTS is a performance event indicating the number of lost ATM PW packets.

Impact on the System


None.

Possible Causes
1. 2. 3. 4. Signals on the radio link deteriorate. A strong interference source is present near the equipment. A board at the transmit or receive end is faulty. The operating temperature of the equipment is very high.

Procedure
Step 1 Handle the fault on the radio link. For details, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link. Step 2 Remove the interference source near the equipment and then check whether the performance event is cleared. Step 3 On the NMS, query the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends. Step 4 Replace the faulty board and then check whether the performance event is cleared. Step 5 Rectify the fault in the fan so that the fan lowers the operating temperature of the equipment. ----End

Related Information
None.

D.4.13 ATMPW_MISORDERPKTS
Description
The ATMPW_MISORDERPKTS is a performance event indicating the number of disordered ATM PW packets.

Impact on the System


None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 705

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

Possible Causes
1. 2. 3. 4. Signals on the radio link deteriorate. A strong interference source is present near the equipment. A board at the transmit or receive end is faulty. The operating temperature of the equipment is very high.

Procedure
Step 1 Handle the fault on the radio link. For details, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link. Step 2 Remove the interference source near the equipment and then check whether the performance event is cleared. Step 3 On the NMS, query the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends. Step 4 Replace the faulty board and then check whether the performance event is cleared. Step 5 Rectify the fault in the fan so that the fan lowers the operating temperature of the equipment. ----End

Related Information
None.

D.4.14 ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELLS
Description
The ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELLS a performance event indicating the number of unknown cells in an ATM PW service.

Impact on the System


None.

Possible Causes
1. 2. 3. 4. Signals on the radio link deteriorate. A strong interference source is present near the equipment. A board at the transmit or receive end is faulty. The operating temperature of the equipment is very high.

Procedure
Step 1 Handle the fault on the radio link. For details, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link. Step 2 Remove the interference source near the equipment and then check whether the performance event is cleared. Step 3 On the NMS, query the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 706

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

Step 4 Replace the faulty board and then check whether the performance event is cleared. Step 5 Rectify the fault in the fan so that the fan lowers the operating temperature of the equipment. ----End

Related Information
None.

D.4.15 ATM_CORRECTED_HCSERR
Description
The ATM_CORRECTED_HCSERR is a performance event indicating the number of cells that are received by an ATM port and contain correctable header check sequence (HCS) errors.

Impact on the System


None.

Possible Causes
1. 2. 3. A strong interference source is present near the equipment. A board at the transmit or receive end is faulty. The operating temperature of the equipment is very high.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the interference source near the equipment and then check whether the performance event is cleared. Step 2 On the NMS, query the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends. Step 3 Replace the faulty board and then check whether the performance event is cleared. Step 4 Rectify the fault in the fan so that the fan lowers the operating temperature of the equipment. ----End

Related Information
None.

D.4.16 ATM_UNCORRECTED_HCSERR
Description
The ATM_UNCORRECTED_HCSERR is a performance event indicating the number of cells that are received by an ATM port and contain uncorrectable header check sequence (HCS) errors.

Impact on the System


None.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 707

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

Possible Causes
1. 2. 3. 4. Signals on the radio link deteriorate. A strong interference source is present near the equipment. A board at the transmit or receive end is faulty. The operating temperature of the equipment is very high.

Procedure
Step 1 Refer to 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link and handle the fault on the radio link. Step 2 Remove the interference source near the equipment and then check whether the performance event is cleared. Step 3 Replace the faulty board and then check whether the performance event is cleared. Step 4 Rectify the fault in the fan so that the fan lowers the operating temperature of the equipment. ----End

Related Information
None.

D.4.17 CES_MISORDERPKTS
Description
The CES_MISORDERPKTS is a performance event indicating the count of lost disordered CES PW packets.

Impact on the System


The packets are disordered. As a result, the packet loss rate increases and services are affected.

Possible Causes
1. 2. 3. Signals degrade on the link. The link is looped. The link is congested.

Related Alarms
CES_MISORDERPKT_EXC

Procedure
Step 1 See 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link. Step 2 Release the loop.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 708

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

Step 3 Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data. ----End

Related Information
None.

D.4.18 CES_STRAYPKTS
Description
The CES_STRAYPKTS is a performance event indicating the number of misconnected packets in a period.

Impact on the System


The packets are discarded. As a result, the packet loss rate increases and services are affected.

Possible Causes
1. Links are misconnected.

Related Alarms
CES_STRAYPKT_EXC

Procedure
Step 1 Check the link configuration and rectify the fault. ----End

Related Information
None.

D.4.19 CES_MALPKTS
Description
The CES_MALPKTS is a performance event indicating the number of deformed CES packets in a period.

Impact on the System


The packets are discarded. As a result, the packet loss rate increases and services are affected.

Possible Causes
1.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

The RTP head enabling status is different between the two ends of the PW.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 709

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

2.

Bit errors occur on the link.

Related Alarms
CES_MALPKT_EXC

Procedure
Step 1 Set the RTP head enabling status to the same on the two ends of the PW. For details, see Modifying CES Service Parameters. ----End

Related Information
None.

D.4.20 CES_JTRUDR
Description
The CES_JTRUDR is a performance event indicating the number of jitter buffer underflows.

Impact on the System


When no packets are transmitted from the jitter buffer, the buffer underflows.

Possible Causes
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Signals degrade on the link. The PSN network clocks used for the transmission of CES services are not synchronized. The link is looped. The link is congested. The size of buffer area is set to a low value.

Related Alarms
CES_JTRUDR_EXC

Procedure
Step 1 Troubleshoot the link. For details, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link. Step 2 Synchronize the PSN network clock by setting clock synchronization, reducing transmission nodes, and optimizing transmission routes. Step 3 Release the loop. Step 4 Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data. Step 5 Query the size of buffer area. For details, see Querying CES Service Information.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 710

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

Step 6 Determine whether the size can be increased according to network planning. If yes, change the size to a greater value. For details, see Managing CES Services. ----End

Related Information
None.

D.4.21 CES_JTROVR
Description
The CES_JTROVR is a performance event indicating the number of jitter buffer overflows.

Impact on the System


The jitter buffer is insufficient. As a result, the buffer overflows.

Possible Causes
1. 2. 3. 4. The jitter buffer area is too small. The clocks are not synchronous. Link quality deteriorates, causing more jitters. There are too many hops of radio link on the network side, causing a large number of jitters.

Related Alarms
CES_JTROVR_EXC

Procedure
Step 1 Allocate a larger jitter buffer area. Step 2 Check whether the LTI and other clock-related alarms are reported. Step 3 Handle the fault on the radio link. For details, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link. Step 4 Determine whether the hops can be reduced according to network planning. If yes, reduce the hops of radio link on the network side. ----End

Related Information
None.

D.4.22 CES_LOSPKTS
Description
The CES_LOSPKTS is a performance event indicating the number of CES packets lost in a period.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 711

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

D RMON Event Reference

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, all 1s are inserted and services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
1. 2. 3. The link transmission quality is poor. The link is configured as a loop. Link congestion occurs.

Related Alarms
CES_LOSPKT_EXC

Procedure
Step 1 Handle the fault on the radio link. For details, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link. Step 2 Release the loop. Step 3 Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data. ----End

Related Information
None.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

712

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

E Alarm Management

Alarm Management

The alarm management on the OptiX RTN 980 is classified into the NE alarm management and board alarm management. E.1 NE Alarm Management The NE alarm management function set by user is applicable to all the boards on the NE. E.2 Board Alarm Management The board alarm management function is only applicable to the board on which users have configured this function.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

713

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

E Alarm Management

E.1 NE Alarm Management


The NE alarm management function set by user is applicable to all the boards on the NE. The equipment supports the following NE alarm management functions: l l l Settings of the alarm storage mode Setting of the alarm delay Setting of the alarm reversion mode

For details about these functions, see the manuals or online Help of the NMS.

E.2 Board Alarm Management


The board alarm management function is only applicable to the board on which users have configured this function.

E.2.1 Setting the Alarm Severity


Alarms are classified into four levels: critical, major, minor, and warning, according to their severities. The maintenance personnel can change the alarm severity by using the NMS. This function is supported by all the boards. l Critical alarm: A critical alarm indicates a critical problem with the network. A critical problem can be the failure, overload, or system restart of mission-critical boards. It must be cleared immediately. Otherwise, system breakdown may occur. Major alarm: A major alarm indicates failure of certain boards or links, such as communication links. Urgent action is required to rectify the fault as this type of alarms affects the QoS of the system. Minor alarm: A minor alarm indicates a non-service affecting problem that needs to be solved, for example, fan speed exceeds threshold alarm. This type of alarms does not affect the QoS of the system, but you need to locate and remove these faults in time. Warning alarm: A warning alarm indicates a potential error that may affect the QoS of the system, for example, License file expiring precaution alarm. This type of alarms needs to be handled based on actual conditions.

Critical alarms and major alarms need to be handled immediately to avoid system failures and service interruptions.

E.2.2 Alarm Suppression


The maintenance personnel can change the alarm monitoring attribute by setting the alarm suppression function. A board detects only the alarms that are not suppressed. The alarm suppression function helps users to ignore their unconcerned alarms. This function is supported by all the boards.

E.2.3 Alarm Auto-Report


If Alarm Auto-Report is set to Reported, all the detected alarms are reported to the NMS in a timely manner. If Alarm Auto-Report is set to Not Report, the alarms are reported only when
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 714

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

E Alarm Management

alarm query is performed on the NMS. The maintenance personnel can change the setting on the NMS. This function is supported by all the boards.

E.2.4 Alarm Reversion


In the case of a port that is not configured with services, certain alarms may be reported. To filter the alarms that users are not concerned, set these alarms to be reversed. In this manner, the alarm status at this port is the opposite to the actual case. That is, the status is displayed as normal when an alarm is actually reported. The alarm reversion function is available in three modes, namely, non-reversion, automatic reversion, and manual reversion. l Non-revertive In this mode, the alarms are monitored by default and alarm reversion cannot be enabled for a port. l Auto reversion In this mode, alarm reversion can be enabled for a port where alarms are reported. After alarm reversion is enabled at a port, alarms are not reported. When the current alarm is cleared, the alarm reversion automatically changes to the disabled status. That is, it changes to the non-reversion mode. Then, the alarm reporting status at the port is the same as the actual status. l Manual reversion In this mode, alarm reversion can be enabled for a port regardless of whether any alarms are reported at the port. After alarm reversion is enabled, the alarm reporting status at the port is opposite to the actual status. After alarm reversion is manually disabled, the alarm reversion status changes to the non-reversion mode. Then, the alarm reporting status at the port is the same as the actual status. Pay attention to the following points when you set the alarm reversion function: l l Alarm reversion does not change the actual status of alarms on the board, as well as the indication status of the alarm indicators. Alarm reversion is realized on the NE software. The alarm data is the same on the NE and the NMS, which indicates the status after the alarm reversion. If you directly query the alarm data of a board, however, the actual alarm status is returned. Alarm reversion is set based on ports. It is supported by each port on the SL1D, SP3S, SP3D, IFX2, IFU2, IF1, ISU2, ISX2, SL4D, EM6TA, EM6FA, SL1DA, EG2D, EM6T, and EM6F boards.

E.2.5 Setting of the Bit Error Alarm Threshold


When the number of bit errors detected by a board exceeds a specified number, the board generates a bit error alarm. This specific number is the bit error alarm threshold, and the setting of this threshold is supported by all the bit error threshold-crossing and degrading alarms on the NE.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

715

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

E Alarm Management

Table E-1 Setting of the bit error alarm threshold Alarm Name B1_EXC B1_SD B2_EXC B2_SD B3_EXC B3_SD BIP_EXC BIP_SD MW_BER_EXC MW_BER_SD Default Alarm Threshold 10-3 10-6 10-3 10-6 10-3 10-6 10-3 10-6 10-3 10-6 Applicable Board SL4D, SL1DA, SL1D and IF1 SL1DA, SL4D, SL1D and IF1 SL1DA, SL4D, SL1D and IF1 ISU2, ISX2, EFP8, EMS6, SP3S, SP3D, IFU2, and IFX2 ISU2, ISX2, IFU2 and IFX2

E.2.6 AIS Insertion


AIS insertion can be set for certain alarms reported on a board. When the board detects the alarms, it inserts all 1s into the lower level service to indicate the remote end that the service is unavailable. Table E-2 Setting of the AIS insertion Trigger Condition B1_EXC B2_SD B2_EXC HP_LOM HP_TIM HP_SLM HP_UNEQ B3_EXC B3_SD B1_SD Default Value Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled SL1DA, SL4D, SL1D and IF1 SL1DA, SL4D, SL1D and IF1
716

Applicable Board SL1DA, SL4D, SL1D and IF1 SL1DA, SL4D, SL1D and IF1 SL1DA, SL4D, SL1D and IF1

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

E Alarm Management

Trigger Condition LP_TIM LP_UNEQ LP_SLM T_ALOS BIP_EXC BIP_SD MW_BER_EXC MW_BER_SD

Default Value Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled

Applicable Board SP3S and SP3D

ISU2, ISX2, IFX2 and IFU2

NOTE

l When the SL1D/SL4D/SL1DA, board detects the R_LOS, R_LOF, MS_AIS, AU_AIS, or AU_LOP alarm, it forcibly inserts the AIS. l When the IF1 board detects the MW_LOF, MW_LIM, R_LOF, MS_AIS, AU_AIS, or AU_LOP alarm, it forcibly inserts the AIS. l When the ISU2, ISX2, IFX2 and IFU2 board detect the MW_LOF, MW_LIM, or R_LOF alarm, it forcibly inserts the AIS.

E.2.7 UNEQ Insertion


When a board detects that the service path is not in use or that the LOS alarm exists, it inserts all 0s into the service signal to notify the remote end that this signal is unavailable. Table E-3 Setting of the UNEQ insertion Trigger Condition T_ALOS Service path being not in use Default Value Disabled Disabled Applicable Board SP3S and SP3D

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

717

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

F Performance Event Management

Performance Event Management

The performance event management is classified into the NE performance event management and board performance event management. F.1 NE Performance Event Management The NE performance event management function set by user is applicable to all the boards on the NE. F.2 Board Performance Event Management The performance event management function is only applicable to the board on which users have configured this function.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

718

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

F Performance Event Management

F.1 NE Performance Event Management


The NE performance event management function set by user is applicable to all the boards on the NE. The OptiX RTN 980 supports the following NE performance event management functions: l l l Setting NE performance event monitoring Setting the start/end time of performance events Enabling/Disabling the reporting of UAT events

For details about these functions, see the manuals or online Help of the NMS.

F.2 Board Performance Event Management


The performance event management function is only applicable to the board on which users have configured this function. Table F-1 Board performance event management function Function Setting 15-minute/24hour performance monitoring Setting 15-minute/24hour performance event auto-reporting Setting performance thresholds Resetting the performance register Generating performance threshold-crossing alarms Monitoring UAT events Monitoring CSES performance events Applicable Board SL1DA, EMS6, SL1D, SP3S, SP3D, SL4D, CSHN, ODU, IFX2, IFU2, ISU2, ISX2, ML1, MD1, EFP8, and IF1 SL1DA, EMS6, SL1D, SP3S, SP3D, SL4D, CSHN, ODU, IFX2, IFU2, ISU2, ISX2, ML1, MD1, EFP8, and IF1 SL1DA, EMS6, SL1D, SL4D, SP3S, SP3D, IFX2, IFU2, ISU2, ISX2, ML1, MD1, EFP8, CSHN, MP1, and IF1 SL1DA, SL1D, SL4D, SP3S, SP3D, ODU, IFX2, IFU2, ISU2, ISX2, and IF1 SL1DA, EMS6, SL1D, SL4D, SP3S, SP3D, ODU, IFX2, IFU2, ISU2, ISX2, ML1, MD1, EFP8, and IF1 SL1DA, EMS6, SL1D, SL4D, SP3S, SP3D, IFX2, IFU2, ISU2, ISX2, EFP8, and IF1 SL1DA, EMS6, SL1D, SL4D, SP3S, SP3D, IFX2, IFU2, ISU2, ISX2, EFP8, and IF1

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

719

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

G Alarm Suppression Relationship

G
MW_LOF

Alarm Suppression Relationship

When the alarm suppression function is disabled on an NE, the root alarm and certain correlated alarms are reported if a fault occurs on this NE. After the alarm suppression function is enabled, the reporting of the correlated alarms is suppressed according to the relationship between alarms when the root alarm is reported. The alarm suppression relationship can be classified into the suppression relationship between intra-board alarms and suppression relationship between interboard alarms. Table G-1 Suppression relationship between intra-board alarms Alarm Identifier Identifier of the Suppressed Alarm R_LOS, R_LOF, R_LOC, MW_FEC_UNCOR, MW_RDI, MW_LIM, MS_AIS, B1_EXC, B1_SD, MS_RDI, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_REI, AU_AIS, AU_LOP, B3_EXC, B3_SD, HP_TIM, HP_UNEQ, HP_SLM, HP_RDI, HP_LOM, HP_REI, MW_BER_EXC, and MW_BER_SD MW_RDI MW_BER_SD R_LOS, R_LOC, R_LOF, J0_MM, B1_EXC, B1_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_REI, AU_AIS, AU_LOP, HP_TIM, HP_UNEQ, HP_SLM, HP_RDI, B3_EXC, B3_SD, HP_LOM, HP_REI, IN_PWR_LOW, MW_RDI, and MW_LIM

MW_LIM MW_BER_EXC LSR_NO_FITED

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

720

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

G Alarm Suppression Relationship

Alarm Identifier R_LOS or R_LOC

Identifier of the Suppressed Alarm R_LOF, J0_MM, B1_EXC, B1_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_REI, AU_AIS, AU_LOP, HP_TIM, HP_UNEQ, HP_SLM, HP_RDI, B3_EXC, B3_SD, HP_LOM, HP_REI, IN_PWR_LOW, MW_RDI, and MW_LIM J0_MM, B1_EXC, B1_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_REI, AU_AIS, AU_LOP, HP_TIM, HP_UNEQ, HP_SLM, HP_RDI, B3_EXC, B3_SD, HP_LOM, HP_REI, MW_RDI, MW_LIM, MW_BER_EXC, and MW_BER_SD B2_SD, MS_REI, MS_RDI, AU_AIS, AU_LOP, HP_TIM, HP_UNEQ, HP_SLM, HP_RDI, B3_EXC, B3_SD, HP_LOM, HP_REI, and B2_EXC MS_REI AU_LOP, B3_EXC, B3_SD, HP_TIM, HP_SLM, HP_UNEQ, HP_RDI, HP_LOM, and HP_REI B3_EXC, B3_SD, HP_TIM, HP_SLM, HP_UNEQ, HP_RDI, HP_LOM, and HP_REI HP_TIM, HP_LOM, and HP_RDI HP_REI LP_TIM, LP_RDI, LP_RFI, LP_REI, BIP_SD, and BIP_EXC LP_REI B1_SD, and MS_REI B2_SD, and MS_REI B3_SD LP_TIM, LP_UNEQ, LP_RDI, LP_REI, LP_RFI, LP_R_FIFO, BIP_EXC, BIP_SD, LP_SLM, TU_LOP, and DOWN_E1_AIS LP_TIM, LP_UNEQ, LP_RDI, LP_REI, LP_RFI, LP_R_FIFO, BIP_EXC, BIP_SD, LP_SLM, and DOWN_E1_AIS

R_LOF

MS_AIS

MS_RDI AU_AIS

AU_LOP

HP_UNEQ HP_RDI LP_UNEQ LP_RDI B1_EXC B2_EXC B3_EXC TU_AIS

TU_LOP

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

721

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

G Alarm Suppression Relationship

Alarm Identifier T_ALOS E1_LOS BIP_EXC LASER_MOD_ERR UP_E1_AIS LFA LMFA ALM_E1RAI ETH_EFM_DF ETH_EFM_REMFAULT ALM_IMA_LIF IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV

Identifier of the Suppressed Alarm E1_LOS, DDN_LFA and UP_E1_AIS UP_E1_AIS BIP_SD ETH_LOS LFA, DDN_LFA, and ALM_E1RAI LMFA, ALM_IMA_LIF, and ALM_E1RAI ALM_IMA_LIF ALM_IMA_RFI, and ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE ETH_EFM_REMFAULT ETH_EFM_EVENT ALM_IMA_LODS VC_LOC, and VP_LOC MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN, MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess, and MPLS_TUNNEL_SF MPLS_TUNNEL_SD MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV ETH_APS_LOST, ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATCH, and ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATCH, and ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL MPLS_PW_UNKNOWN, MPLS_PW_Excess, and MPLS_PW_SF MPLS_PW_SD PWAPS_LOST, PWAPS_TYPE_MISMATCH, and PWAPS_SWITCH_FAIL PWAPS_TYPE_MISMATCH, and PWAPS_SWITCH_FAIL ETH_CFM_LOC CES_STRAYPKT_EXC, CES_JTROVR_EXC, and CES_JTRUDR_EXC

MPLS_TUNNEL_SF MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI ETH_APS_PATH_MISMATCH

ETH_APS_LOST MPLS_PW_LOCV MPLS_PW_SF PWAPSAPS_PATH_MISMATCH PWAPS_LOST ETH_CFM_MISMERGE CES_LOSPKT_EXC

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

722

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

G Alarm Suppression Relationship

Alarm Identifier CES_STRAYPKT_EXC PG_LINK_FAIL

Identifier of the Suppressed Alarm CES_MISORDERPKT_EXC, and CES_MALPKT_EXC PG_PRT_DEGRADED

Table G-2 Suppression relationship between intra-board alarms Alarm Identifier R_LOS, R_LOC, MS_AIS, AU_AIS, or AU_LOP MW_LOF or MW_LIM ETH_LOS MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI Identifier of the Suppressed Alarm TU_AIS TU_AIS MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV, MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL MPLS_PW_LOCV MPLS_PW_BDI

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

723

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

H Indicators of Boards

H
Indicators of Boards
Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off

Indicators of Boards

Table H-1 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHN Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. PROG Blinks on (green) and off at 100 ms intervals Blinks on (green) and off at 300 ms intervals On (green) Software is being loaded to the board during the power-on or resetting process of the board. The board software is in BIOS boot state during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l When the board is being powered on or being reset, the upper layer software is being initialized. l When the board is running, the software is running normally. Blinks on (red) and off at 100 ms intervals The BOOTROM self-check fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

724

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

H Indicators of Boards

Indicator

State On (red)

Meaning The memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. The logic file or upper layer software is lost during the running process of the board. The pluggable storage card is faulty.

SYNC

On (green) On (red)

The clock is working properly. The clock source is lost or a clock switchover occurs. The system is working properly. A critical or major alarm occurs in the system. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the system. There is no power supplied to the system. In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. In an unprotected system, the board has been activated.

SRV

On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off

ACT

On (green)

Off

In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one. In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.

LOS1

On (red) Off

The first optical port on the line is reporting the R_LOS alarm. The first optical port on the line is free of R_LOS alarms. The second optical port on the line is reporting the R_LOS alarm. The second optical port on the line is free of R_LOS alarms. The connection at the GE1 port is working properly. The connection at the GE1 port is interrupted. Data is being transmitted or received at the GE1 port.
725

LOS2

On (red) Off

LINK1

On (green) Off

ACT1

On or blinking (yellow)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

H Indicators of Boards

Indicator

State Off

Meaning No data is being transmitted or received at the GE1 port. The connection at the GE2 port is working properly. The connection at the GE2 port is interrupted. Data is being transmitted or received at the GE2 port. No data is being transmitted or received at the GE2 port. A critical alarm occurs on the NE. A major alarm occurs on the NE. A minor alarm occurs on the NE.

LINK2

On (green) Off

ACT2

On or blinking (yellow) Off

CRIT MAJ MIN

On (red) On (orange) On (yellow)

Table H-2 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1 Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) LINK On (green) On (red) ODU On (green) The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The radio link is normal. The radio link is faulty. The ODU is working properly.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

726

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

H Indicators of Boards

Indicator

State On (red)

Meaning l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU.

On (yellow) Blinks on (yellow) and off at 300 ms intervals RMT On (yellow) Off ACT On (green)

The ODU is reporting minor alarms. The antennas are not aligned. The remote equipment is reporting defects. The remote equipment is free of defects. l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. l In an unprotected system, the board has been activated.

Off

l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one. l In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.

Table H-3 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2 Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) LINK On (green) The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The radio link is normal.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

727

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

H Indicators of Boards

Indicator

State On (red)

Meaning The radio link is faulty. The ODU is working properly. l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU.

ODU

On (green) On (red)

On (yellow) Blinks on (yellow) and off at 300 ms intervals RMT On (yellow) Off ACT On (green)

The ODU is reporting minor alarms. The antennas are not aligned.

The remote equipment is reporting defects. The remote equipment is free of defects. l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. l In an unprotected system, the board has been activated.

Off

l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one. l In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.

Table H-4 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2 Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) LINK On (green) The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The radio link is normal.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

728

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

H Indicators of Boards

Indicator

State On (red)

Meaning The radio link is faulty. The ODU is working properly. l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU.

ODU

On (green) On (red)

On (yellow) Blinks on (yellow) and off at 300 ms intervals RMT On (yellow) Off ACT On (green)

The ODU is reporting minor alarms. The antennas are not aligned. The remote equipment is reporting defects. The remote equipment is free of defects. l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. l In an unprotected system, the board has been activated.

Off

l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one. l In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.

Table H-5 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2 Indicator XPIC State On (green) On (red) Off STAT On (green) On (red) Meaning The XPIC input signal is normal. The XPIC input signal is lost. The XPIC function is disabled. The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

729

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

H Indicators of Boards

Indicator

State Off

Meaning l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.

SRV

On (green) On (red) On (yellow)

The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The radio link is normal. The radio link is faulty. The ODU is working properly. l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU.

LINK

On (green) On (red)

ODU

On (green) On (red)

On (yellow) Blinks on (yellow) and off at 300 ms intervals RMT On (yellow) Off ACT On (green)

The ODU is reporting minor alarms. The antennas are not aligned. The remote equipment is reporting defects. The remote equipment is free of defects. l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. l In an unprotected system, the board has been activated.

Off

l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one. l In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

730

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

H Indicators of Boards

Table H-6 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2 Indicator XPIC State On (green) On (red) Off STAT On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The XPIC input signal is normal. The XPIC input signal is lost. The XPIC function is disabled. The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) LINK On (green) On (red) ODU On (green) On (red) The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The radio link is normal. The radio link is faulty. The ODU is working properly. l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU. On (yellow) Blinks on (yellow) and off at 300 ms intervals RMT On (yellow) Off The ODU is reporting minor alarms. The antennas are not aligned. The remote equipment is reporting defects. The remote equipment is free of defects.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

731

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

H Indicators of Boards

Indicator ACT

State On (green)

Meaning l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. l In an unprotected system, the board has been activated.

Off

l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one. l In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.

Table H-7 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off PROG Blinks on (green) and off at 100 ms intervals Blinks on (green) and off at 300 ms intervals On (green) The system is working properly. A critical or major alarm occurs in the system. A minor alarm occurs in the system. There is no power supplied to the system. Software is being loaded to the board during the power-on or resetting process of the board. The board software is in BIOS boot state during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l When the board is being powered on or being reset, the upper layer software is being initialized. l When the board is running, the software is running normally. Blinks on (red) and off at 100 ms intervals The BOOTROM self-check fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

732

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

H Indicators of Boards

Indicator

State On (red)

Meaning l The memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The logic file or upper layer software is lost during the running process of the board. l The pluggable storage card is faulty.

LINK1a

On (green) Blinking (green) Off

The GE1 port is connected correctly and is not receiving or transmitting data. The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting data. The GE1 port is not connected or is connected incorrectly. The GE2 port is connected correctly and is not receiving or transmitting data. The GE2 port is receiving or transmitting data. The GE2 port is not connected or is connected incorrectly.

LINK2a

On (green) Blinking (green) Off

NOTE

a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the corresponding GE ports.

Table H-8 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6TA/EM6FA Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

The system is working properly. A critical or major alarm occurs in the system. A minor alarm occurs in the system. There is no power supplied to the system.
733

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

H Indicators of Boards

Indicator PROG

State Blinks on (green) and off at 100 ms intervals Blinks on (green) and off at 300 ms intervals On (green)

Meaning Software is being loaded to the board during the power-on or resetting process of the board. The board software is in BIOS boot state during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l When the board is being powered on or being reset, the upper layer software is being initialized. l When the board is running, the software is running normally.

Blinks on (red) and off at 100 ms intervals On (red)

The BOOTROM self-check fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. The memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails during the poweron or resetting process of the board. The logic file or upper layer software is lost during the running process of the board. The pluggable storage card is faulty.

L/A1a

On (green) Blinking (yellow) Off

The GE1 port is connected correctly and is not receiving or transmitting data. The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting data. The GE1 port is not connected or is connected incorrectly. The GE2 port is connected correctly and is not receiving or transmitting data. The GE2 port is receiving or transmitting data. The GE2 port is not connected or is connected incorrectly.

L/A2a

On (green) Blinking (yellow) Off

NOTE

a: The L/A1 and L/A2 indicators are available only on the EM6FA and indicate the states of the corresponding GE ports.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

734

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

H Indicators of Boards

Table H-9 Status explanation for indicators on the EMS6 Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. PROG Blinks on (green) and off at 100 ms intervals Blinks on (green) and off at 300 ms intervals On (green) Software is being loaded to the board during the power-on or resetting process of the board. The board software is in BIOS boot state during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The upper layer software is being initialized during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The software is running properly during the running process of the board. Blinks on (red) and off at 100 ms intervals On (red) The BOOTROM self-check fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The logic file or upper layer software is lost during the running process of the board. l The pluggable storage card is faulty. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off LINK1 On (green) Blinks on (red) and off at 300 ms intervals Blinks 300 ms on (red) and 700 ms off The system is working normally. A critical or major alarm occurs in the system. A minor alarm occurs in the system. There is no power supplied to the system. The GE1 port is connected correctly. The receive optical power at the GE1 optical port is higher than the upper threshold. The receive optical power at the GE1 optical port is lower than the lower threshold.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

735

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

H Indicators of Boards

Indicator

State Off

Meaning The GE1 port is not connected or is connected incorrectly. The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting data. The GE1 port is not receiving or transmitting data. The GE2 port is connected correctly. The receive optical power at the GE2 optical port is higher than the upper threshold. The receive optical power at the GE2 optical port is lower than the lower threshold. The GE1 port is not connected or is connected incorrectly. The GE2 port is receiving or transmitting data. The GE2 port is not receiving or transmitting data.

ACT1

Blinking (yellow) Off

LINK2

On (green) Blinks on (red) and off at 300 ms intervals Blinks 300 ms on (red) and 700 ms off Off

ACT2

Blinking (yellow) Off

Table H-10 Status explanation for indicators on the EFP8 Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. PROG Blinks on (green) and off at 100 ms intervals Blinks on (green) and off at 300 ms intervals On (green) Software is being loaded to the board during the power-on or resetting process of the board. The board software is in BIOS boot state during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l When the board is being powered on or being reset, the upper layer software is being initialized. l When the board is running, the software is running normally.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

736

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

H Indicators of Boards

Indicator

State Blinks on (red) and off at 100 ms intervals On (red)

Meaning The BOOTROM self-check fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The logic file or upper layer software is lost during the running process of the board. l The pluggable storage card is faulty.

SRV

On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off

The system is working properly. A critical or major alarm occurs in the system. A minor alarm occurs in the system. There is no power supplied to the system.

Table H-11 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D/SL1DA Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off LOS1 On (red) The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The first port of the SL1D/ SL1DA is reporting the R_LOS alarm.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

737

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

H Indicators of Boards

Indicator

State Off

Meaning The first port of the SL1D/ SL1DA is free of R_LOS alarms. The second port of the SL1D/SL1DA is reporting the R_LOS alarm. The second port of the SL1D/SL1DA is free of R_LOS alarms.

LOS2

On (red)

Off

Table H-12 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured.

Table H-13 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1 Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

738

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

H Indicators of Boards

Indicator

State Off

Meaning l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.

SRV

On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off

The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured.

Table H-14 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off The system is working properly. A critical or major alarm occurs in the system. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the system. There is no power supplied to the system.

Table H-15 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU Indicator PWR Status On (green) Off ALM On (orange) On (red)
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Description The power supply is normal. There is no power supply. The board is in the initialization state. An alarm is reported on the PIU.
739

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

H Indicators of Boards

Indicator

Status Off

Description No alarm occurs.

Table H-16 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN Indicator FAN State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The fan is working properly. The fan is faulty. The fan is not powered on or is not installed.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

740

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

I
Terms are listed in an alphabetical order. I.1 0-9 This section provides the terms starting with numbers. I.2 A-E This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E. I.3 F-J This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J. I.4 K-O This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O. I.5 P-T This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T. I.6 U-Z This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.

Glossary

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

741

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

I.1 0-9
This section provides the terms starting with numbers. 1U The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/1.75 in.)

I.2 A-E
This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E.

A
ABR ACAP access control list ACL adaptive modulation See available bit rate See adjacent channel alternate polarization A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have access to a resource. See access control list A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation scheme according to the channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment adopts a highefficiency modulation scheme to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrum utilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment adopts the low-efficiency modulation scheme to improve the anti-interference capability of the link that carries high-priority services. See analog to digital converter Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signals contained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/ or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM. Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses through ARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the host converts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame. The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipment through its IP address. A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals. See add/drop multiplexer The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to the multiplex section frame start. See assured forwarding A collection of objects that makes a whole. An aggregation can be a concrete or conceptual set of whole-part relationships among objects.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 742

ADC add/drop multiplexer

Address Resolution Protocol

adjacent channel alternate polarization ADM administrative unit

AF aggregation

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

AIS

See alarm indication signal

alarm automatic report When an alarm is generated on the device side, the alarm is reported to the Network Management System (NMS). Then, an alarm panel prompts and the user can view the details of the alarm. alarm cascading Alarm Filtering The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets. An NE reports the detected alarm to the element management system (EMS). Based on the filter state of the alarm, the EMS determines whether to display or save the alarm information. If the filter state of an alarm is set to Filter, the alarm is not displayed or stored on the EMS. The alarm, however, is still monitored by the NE.

alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure has been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers. alarm suppression A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be the networkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific function module of a specific board. See adaptive modulation An electronic circuit that converts continuous signals to discrete digital numbers. The reverse operation is performed by a digital-to-analog converter (DAC). See automatic protection switching See Address Resolution Protocol One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF. It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay. For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic that exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward the traffic instead of discarding the packets. A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells. A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous in the sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate. Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode. See Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM permanent virtual circuit See automatic transmit power control A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fiber Link. Generally used to ensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong. See administrative unit Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switch to a standby facility to recover the traffic. A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detected at the receiver A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possible forwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-time quality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay.

AM analog to digital converter APS ARP assured forwarding

Asynchronous Transfer Mode

ATM ATM PVC ATPC attenuator AU automatic protection switching automatic transmit power control available bit rate

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

743

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

B
backward defect indication bandwidth When detecting a defect, the sink node of an LSP uses backward defect indication (BDI) to inform the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path. A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate. A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM network. It interworks with the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface. It provides the following functions: radio resource management, base station management, power control, handover control, and traffic measurement. One BSC controls and manages one or more BTSs in an actual network.

base station controller

base transceiver station A Base Transceiver Station terminates the radio interface. It allows transmission of traffic and signaling across the air interface. The BTS includes the baseband processing, radio equipment, and the antenna. basic input/output system BDI BE BER best effort A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output control programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer. See backward defect indication See best effort See bit error rate A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwarded following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of the network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the time it reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter, packet loss ratio, and high reliability. The binding strap is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side (made of transparent polypropylene material) and one mat side (made of black nylon material). See basic input/output system See bit interleaved parity An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding bit in the received digital signal. Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure the communications quality of a network. A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by the transmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by setting the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes the BIP-X. See bridge protocol data unit

binding strap BIOS BIP bit error bit error rate bit interleaved parity

BPDU

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

744

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

bridge protocol data unit

The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state. A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is determined by the broadcast address. See base station controller See base transceiver station A storage area used for handling data in transit. Buffers are used in inter-networking to compensate for differences in processing speed between network devices. Bursts of data can be stored in buffers until they can be handled by slower processing devices. In a program, buffers are created to hold some amount of data from each of the files that will be read or written. In a streaming media application, the program uses buffers to store an advance supply of audio or video data to compensate for momentary delays.

broadcast BSC BTS buffer

C
cable tie cable tray cable trough CAR CBR CBS CC CCC CCDP CCM CE The tape used to bind the cables. N/A N/A See committed access rate See constant bit rate See committed burst size See connectivity check See circuit cross connect See co-channel dual polarization See continuity check message See customer edge

central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer's main data-transfer path, the bus. CES CF CGMP channel See circuit emulation service See compact flash See Cisco Group Management Protocol A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two or more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio (microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmitted per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per second. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s), and Tb/s (1012 bit/s).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 745

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

CIR circuit cross connect circuit emulation service

See committed information rate An implementation of MPLS L2VPN through the static configuration of labels. A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original sequence at the reception end. N/A See common and internal spanning tree A switch of the highest priority is elected as the root in an MSTP network. The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a network. A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization is twice the transmission capacity of the single polarization. A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into the same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDM does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in a short-distance chain network. A packet whose priority is determined by defined colors. A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface. CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate can be defined. committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.

Cisco Group Management Protocol CIST CIST root clock tracing co-channel dual polarization coarse wavelength division multiplexing colored packet committed access rate

committed burst size

committed information The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normal rate conditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred to the leaky bucket. common and internal spanning tree compact flash The single spanning tree calculated by STP and RSTP together with the logical continuation of that connectivity by using MST Bridges and regions, calculated by MSTP to ensure that all LANs in the bridged local area network are simply and fully connected. Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used in portable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory in a standardized enclosure. A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can be used a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence. Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved by each MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically.

concatenation connectivity check

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

746

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

constant bit rate

A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise clocking to ensure undistorted transmission. CCM is used to detect the link status. Used to protect optical fibers. See central processing unit See cyclic redundancy check A technology used in the case of the Co-Channel Dual Polarization (CCDP) to eliminate the cross-connect interference between two polarization waves in the CCDP. A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host. See coarse wavelength division multiplexing A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.

continuity check message corrugated pipe CPU CRC cross polarization interference cancellation customer edge CWDM cyclic redundancy check

D
data communication network data communications channel A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the Data Communication Function (DCF). The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to transmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12 is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel. A kind of PDU which is used in Connectionless Network Protocol, such as IP datagram, UDP datagram. See direct current See DC-return common (with ground) DC-return common (with ground) See DC-return common (with ground) See DC-return isolate (with ground) A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment. A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 747

Datagram DC DC-C DC-C DC-C DC-I DC-return common (with ground) DC-return common (with ground)

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

DC-return isolate (with A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with ground) the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment. DCC DCN DDF DDN DE differentiated services See data communications channel See data communication network See digital distribution frame See digital data network See discard eligible A service architecture that provides the end-to-end QoS function. It consists of a series of functional units implemented at the network nodes, including a small group of perhop forwarding behaviors, packet classification functions, and traffic conditioning functions such as metering, marking, shaping and policing. A marker in the header of each IP packet that prompts network routers to apply differentiated grades of service to various packet streams. It is specified by the DiffServ policy proposed by the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force). This allows Internet and other IP-based network service providers to offer different levels of service to customers. See differentiated services A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex technology. A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange with transmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection, cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals. A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of the carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, the information can be transmitted by the carrier. Electrical current whose direction of flow does not reverse. The current may stop or change amplitude, but it always flows in the same direction. A bit in the frame relay header. It indicates the priority of a packet. If a node supports the FR QoS, the rate of the accessed FR packets is controlled. When the packet traffic exceeds the specified traffic, the DE value of the redundant packets is set to 1. In the case of network congestion, the packets with DE value as 1 are discarded at the node. An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical dense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routing datagrams with its neighbors. A DS node that connects one DS domain to a node either in another DS domain or in a domain that is not DS-capable. In the DifferServ mechanism, the DS domain is a domain consisting of a group of network nodes that share the same service provisioning policy and same PHB. It provides point-to-point QoS guarantees for services transmitted over this domain. A DS node located at the center of a DS domain. It is a non-DS boundary node. A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node. See differentiated services code point

differentiated services code point

DiffServ digital data network

digital distribution frame digital modulation

direct current discard eligible

Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol DS boundary node DS domain

DS interior node DS node DSCP

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

748

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent radio waves orthogonally polarized. DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol

E
E-Aggr E-LAN E-Line E-Tree EBS ECC EF electromagnetic compatibility See Ethernet aggregation See Ethernet LAN See Ethernet line See Ethernet-tree See excess burst size See embedded control channel See expedited forwarding Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment. Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment. The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different electrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field. A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer, to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM) information between NEs. See electromagnetic compatibility See electromagnetic interference A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification. See Ethernet private line See Ethernet private LAN service A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate for the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading. See Ethernet ring protection switching See electrostatic discharge Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap. A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/ s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining. A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/ s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining.

electromagnetic interference electrostatic discharge embedded control channel EMC EMI Engineering label EPL EPLAN equalization ERPS ESD ESD jack Ethernet

Ethernet

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

749

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

Ethernet aggregation Ethernet LAN Ethernet line Ethernet private LAN service Ethernet private line Ethernet ring protection switching Ethernet virtual private LAN service Ethernet virtual private line Ethernet-tree ETS ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute EVPL EVPLAN excess burst size

A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual connection). A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet virtual connection). A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual connection). An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a dedicated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-point connections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network. protection switching mechanisms for ETH layer Ethernet ring topologies. An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a shared bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over shared bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. An Ethernet service type that is based on a Point-to-multipoint Ethernet Virtual Connection. European Telecommunication Standards See European Telecommunications Standards Institute A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.

See Ethernet virtual private line See Ethernet virtual private LAN service A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the traffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded. An operation to check if the protection switching protocol functions normally. The protection switching is not really performed. Connecting a storage system to more disk enclosures through connection cables, expanding the capacity of the storage system. The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP value of EF PHB is "101110".

Exercise Switching expansion expedited forwarding

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

750

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

I.3 F-J
This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.

F
failure If the fault persists long enough to consider the ability of an item with a required function to be terminated. The item may be considered as having failed; a fault has now been detected. Any network that supports transmission rate of 100Mbits/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 times faster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and so on. Fast Ethernet is extended from the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the following three types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables), 100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core optical fibers). The link pulse that is used to encode information during automatic negotiation. See frequency diversity See forward defect indication See fast Ethernet See forward error correction fast failure detection A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for connections between subracks or inside a subrack. A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but also overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the limited number of gate arrays. See First in First out A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computers on the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be an FTP client and the other an FTP server. A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked. For normal traffic signals, switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exists on the protection section, by issuing a forced switch request for that traffic signal. Forward defect indication (FDI) is generated and traced forward to the sink node of the LSP by the node that first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the defect and its location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected higher level client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers. A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during transmission are corrected at the receive end.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 751

fast Ethernet

fast link pulse FD FDI FE FEC FFD fiber patch cord field programmable gate array

FIFO File Transfer Protocol

First in First out Forced switch

forward defect indication

forward error correction

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

Forwarding plane FPGA fragment Fragmentation frame

Also referred to as the data plane. The forwarding plane is connection-oriented, and can be used in Layer 2 networks such as an ATM network. See field programmable gate array Piece of a larger packet that has been broken down to smaller units. Process of breaking a packet into smaller units when transmitting over a network medium that cannot support the original size of the packet. A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame length is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle. A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words, a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements prespecified by the sending and receiving parties. A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certain frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. See File Transfer Protocol A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in both directions, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-line telephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heard at the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road with one lane for each direction.

frequency diversity

FTP full-duplex

G
gateway network element GE generic framing procedure A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and the NM application layer See gigabit Ethernet A framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has been standardized by ITU-T SG15.

generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that initiatively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This is to adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream router to avoid packet discarding and congestion. GFP gigabit Ethernet See generic framing procedure GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet. It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge (switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth. In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus. A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, and timing services to worldwide users. See gateway network element See Global Positioning System

Global Positioning System GNE GPS

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

752

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

graphical user interface A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options with graphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen. GTS GUI guide rail See generic traffic shaping See graphical user interface Components to guide, position, and support plug-in boards.

H
HA half-duplex See high availability A transmitting mode in which a half-duplex system provides for communication in both directions, but only one direction at a time (not simultaneously). Typically, once a party begins receiving a signal, it must wait for the transmitter to stop transmitting, before replying. See high level data link control A type of QoS that can control the traffic of users, and perform the scheduling according to the priority of user services. HQoS has a perfect traffic statistics function, and the administrator can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each service. Hence, the bandwidth can be allocated reasonably through traffic analysis. Typically, a scheme in which two modules operate in active/standby mode to achieve high availability. When the active module fails, the standby module automatically takes over the system functions of the active module. The HDLC protocol is a general purpose protocol which operates at the data link layer of the OSI reference model. Each piece of data is encapsulated in an HDLC frame by adding a trailer and a header. A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirement for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables the maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing the WCDMA network topology. In an SDH network, the higher order path layers provide a server network from the lower order path layers. The priority of the tunnel with respect to holding resources, ranging from 0 (indicates the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the resources occupied by the tunnel can be preempted by other tunnels. A network connection between two distant nodes. For Internet operation a hop represents a small step on the route from one main computer to another. A mechanism of ensuring device running security. The environment variables and storage information of each running device are synchronized to the standby device. When the faults occur on the running device, the standby device can take over the services in the faulty device in automatic or manual way to ensure the normal running of the entire system. See higher order path See hierarchical quality of service See hot standby See High Speed Downlink Packet Access
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 753

HDLC hierarchical quality of service

high availability

high level data link control High Speed Downlink Packet Access

higher order path Hold priority

hop hot standby

HP HQoS HSB HSDPA


Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

HSM HTB hybrid radio

hitless switch mode high tributary bus The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid radio supports the AM function.

I
ICMP IDU IEC IEEE IETF IF IGMP IGMP snooping See Internet Control Message Protocol See indoor unit See International Electrotechnical Commission See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers See Internet Engineering Task Force See intermediate frequency See Internet Group Management Protocol A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyze the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) packet between hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner, the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently. See inverse multiplexing over ATM The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing, multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services. A method of looping the signals from the cross-connect unit back to the cross-connect unit. A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical, electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.

IMA indoor unit Inloop Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF signal. Intermediate System The basic unit in the IS-IS protocol used to transmit routing information and generate routes.

Intermediate System to A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to forward Intermediate System datagrams or packets through a packet-based network, a process called routing. routing protocol internal spanning tree International Electrotechnical Commission International Organization for Standardization A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a special MSTI whose ID is 0. The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and nongovernmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronic standards. An international association that works to establish global standards for communications and information exchange. Primary among its accomplishments is the widely accepted ISO/OSI reference model, which defines standards for the interaction of computers connected by communications networks.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

754

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

International Telecommunication UnionTelecommunication Standardization Sector Internet Control Message Protocol

An international body that develops worldwide standards for telecommunications technologies. These standards are grouped together in series which are prefixed with a letter indicating the general subject and a number specifying the particular standard. For example, X.25 comes from the "X" series which deals with data networks and open system communications and number "25" deals with packet switched networks. A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction and other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP software on one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See also communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1). A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet. Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged with studying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groups that concentrate on specific topics, such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisher of the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard. The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships. The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sent across an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet delivery service. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. The entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the two fundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791. A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed as the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits. A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed as the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits. The ATM inverse multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and demultiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This is referred to as an IMA group. See Internet Protocol See Internet protocol version 6 See Internet protocol version 6 See Intermediate System to Intermediate System routing protocol See International Organization for Standardization See internal spanning tree See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector

Internet Engineering Task Force

Internet Group Management Protocol Internet Protocol

Internet protocol version 6

Internet protocol version 6

inverse multiplexing over ATM

IP IPV6 IPv6 IS-IS ISO IST ITU-T

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

755

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

J
Jitter Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system instability.

I.4 K-O
This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.

L
L2VPN label switched path See Layer 2 virtual private network A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on normal routing mechanisms, or through configuration. Basic element of MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups received in the label forwarding table. See Link Aggregation Control Protocol See link aggregation group See local area network See local area network link access protocol-SDH A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor laser as the light source. A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is the second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.

label switching router

LACP LAG LAN LAN LAPS Laser

layer 2 switch

Layer 2 virtual private A virtual private network achieved by Layer 2 switching technologies in the packet network switched (IP/MPLS) network. LB LCAS LCT line rate line rate forwarding Link Aggregation Control Protocol See loopback See link capacity adjustment scheme local craft terminal The maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value of line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media. The line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media. A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface to increase bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE 802.3ad.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

756

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were a single link. link capacity adjustment scheme LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a control mechanism to hitlessly increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation, increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the responsibility of the Network and Element Management Systems. Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link is a downstream link adjacent to the PLR. When the PLR fails to provide node protection, the link protection should be provided. linear multiplex section protection A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet, FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/ s (that is, 1 Gbit/s). A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet, FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/ s (that is, 1 Gbit/s). When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to the working channel. See Loss Of Frame loss of multiframe A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the signal or message can be analyzed for errors. See loss of pointer See Loss Of Signal A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost frame delineation. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer. Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start of cell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer. Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the received signal. lower order path link-state pass through See label switched path

Link Protection

LMSP local area network

local area network

Locked switching

LOF LOM loopback LOP LOS Loss Of Frame

loss of pointer

Loss Of Signal LP LPT LSP

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

757

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

LSR

See label switching router

M
MA MAC MAC MADM main topology See maintenance association See media access control See media access control multiple add/drop multiplexer A interface that displays the connection relationships of NEs on the NMS (screen display). The default client interface of the NMS, a basic component of the humanmachine interactive interface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network, the alarms of different NEs, subnets in the network, the communication status as well as the basic network operation status. All topology management functions are accessed here. That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, the connectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of Maintenance Entities. A MEP is an actively managed CFM Entity, associated with a specific DSAP of a Service Instance, which can generate and receive CFM frames and track any responses. It is an end point of a single Maintenance Association, and terminates a separate Maintenance Entity for each of the other MEPs in the same Maintenance Association. The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. The devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP. Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP. A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such as routers and switches) in a network. Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition exists on other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal.

maintenance association maintenance association end point

maintenance domain maintenance point management information base manual switch

maximum transmission The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies, unit depending on the network576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbps Token Ring. Responsibility for determining the size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmitted across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks involved. MBS MCF MD MDI Mean Time Between Failures Mean Time To Repair
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

maximum burst size See message communication function See maintenance domain See medium dependent interface The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure of the reliability of the system. The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 758

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

media access control

A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer. A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer. The electrical and mechanical interface between the equipment and the media transmission. See maintenance association end point maintenance end point The MCF is composed of a protocol stack that allows exchange of management information with their prs. See management information base maintenance intermediate point A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements or components. See maintenance point maintenance point identification See Multiprotocol Label Switching The MPLS L2VPN provides the Layer 2 VPN service based on an MPLS network. In this case, on a uniform MPLS network, the carrier is able to provide Layer 2 VPNs of different media types, such as ATM, FR, VLAN, Ethernet, and PPP. The MPLS OAM provides continuity check for a single LSP, and provides a set of fault detection tools and fault correct mechanisms for MPLS networks. The MPLS OAM and relevant protection switching components implement the detection function for the CRLSP forwarding plane, and perform the protection switching in 50 ms after a fault occurs. In this way, the impact of a fault can be lowered to the minimum. See multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering

media access control

medium dependent interface MEP MEP message communication function MIB MIP mounting ear MP MPID MPLS MPLS L2VPN

MPLS OAM

MPLS TE

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

759

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

MPLS TE tunnel

In the case of reroute deployment, or when traffic needs to be transported through multiple trails, multiple LSP tunnels might be used. In traffic engineering, such a group of LSP tunnels are referred to as TE tunnels. An LSP tunnel of this kind has two identifiers. One is the Tunnel ID carried by the SENDER object, and is used to uniquely define the TE tunnel. The other is the LSP ID carried by the SENDER_TEMPLATE or FILTER_SPEC object. See multiplex section See multiplex section protection See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol See Mean Time Between Failures See Mean Time To Repair See maximum transmission unit A process of transmitting packets of data from one source to many destinations. The destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast group rather than a host. Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs. The trail between and including two multiplex section trail termination functions. A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a "protection" channel. A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of networks, and is beneficial to routing. N/A

MS MSP MSTP MTBF MTTR MTU Multicast

Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol

multiplex section multiplex section protection Multiprotocol Label Switching

multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering

N
N+1 protection NE NE Explorer A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection channel. See network element The main operation interface, of the NMS, which is used to manage the telecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can query, manage and maintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

760

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

network element

A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One NE is at least equipped with one system control and communication(SCC) board which manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the SCC board.

Network Management A system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network. System network service access A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer can point access OSI network services. network to network interface next hop NLP NMS NNI node An internal interface within a network linking two or more elements. The next router to which a packet is sent from any given router as it traverses a network on its journey to its final destination. normal link pulse See Network Management System See network to network interface A node stands for a managed device in the network. For a device with a single frame, one node stands for one device. For a device with multiple frames, one node stands for one frame of the device. Therefore, a node does not always mean a device. A parameter of the FRR protection. It indicates that the bypass tunnel should be able to protect the downstream node that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the PLR. The node cannot be a merge point, and the bypass tunnel should also be able to protect the downstream link that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the PLR. A network element whose communication with the NM application layer must be transferred by the gateway network element application layer. See non-gateway network element See network service access point not stop forwarding

Node Protection

non-gateway network element non-GNE NSAP NSF

O
OAM ODF ODU OM One-to-One Backup See operation, administration and maintenance See optical distribution frame See outdoor unit Operation and maintenance A local repair method in which a backup tunnel is separately created for each protected tunnel at a PLR.

open shortest path first A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A link state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routers in the area.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

761

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

Open Systems Interconnection

A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made by different vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven different categories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user. Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above. Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message source and destination, and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions. A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation, activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification, location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an operational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber access network to users/subscribers. A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and an optical source (or a detector).+ A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers. A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations. See Open Systems Interconnection See open shortest path first The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequency conversion and amplification for RF signals. A method of looping back the input signals received at a port to an output port without changing the structure of the signals. The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.

operation, administration and maintenance

optic fiber connector

optical distribution frame orderwire OSI OSPF outdoor unit Outloop Output optical power

I.5 P-T
This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T.

P
packet switched network Packing case Path A telecommunication network which works in packet switching mode. A case which is used for packing the board or subrack. A performance resource object defined in the network management system. The left end of a path is a device node whose port needs to be specified and the right end of a path is a certain IP address which can be configured by the user. By defining a path in the network management system, a user can test the performance of a network path between a device port and an IP address. The tested performance may be the path delay, packet loss ratio or other aspects. See peak burst size See printed circuit board

PBS PCB

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

762

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

PCI bus PDH PDU PE peak burst size

PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) bus. A high performance bus, 32-bit or 64-bit for interconnecting chips, expansion boards, and processor/memory subsystems. See plesiochronous digital hierarchy See protocol data unit See provider edge A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded. A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be not less than the committed information rate. Penultimate Hop Popping (PHP) is a function performed by certain routers in an MPLS enabled network. It refers to the process whereby the outermost label of an MPLS tagged packet is removed by a Label Switched Router (LSR) before the packet is passed to an adjacent Label Edge Router (LER). IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network should select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the IETF defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding (EF), assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE). See per-hop behavior See penultimate hop popping See peak information rate physical link aggregation A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.

peak information rate penultimate hop popping

per-hop behavior

PHB PHP PIR PLA plesiochronous digital hierarchy

Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulates data packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack. polarization A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed or rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called vertically polarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the tip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave. A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies power for the subracks in the cabinet. See Point-to-Point Protocol See priority queue See pseudo random binary sequence primary reference clock

Power box PPP PQ PRBS PRC

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

763

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

printed circuit board

A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto a non-conductive substrate. An abstract data type in computer programming that supports the following three operations: (1) InsertWithPriority: add an element to the queue with an associated priority (2) GetNext: remove the element from the queue that has the highest priority, and return it (also known as "PopElement(Off)", or "GetMinimum") (3) PeekAtNext (optional): look at the element with highest priority without removing it A cable which connects the equipment and the protection ground bar. Usually, one half of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green. A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection. It is a data packet at the network layer of the OSI model. A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is responsible for VPN user management, establishment of LSPs between PEs, and exchange of routing information between sites of the same VPN. During the process, a PE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network and the public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.

priority queue

protection ground cable Protection path protocol data unit provider edge

pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the sequence values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences. pseudo wire An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is established and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW is maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.

pseudo wire emulation A type of end-to-end Layer 2 transmitting technology. It emulates the essential attributes edge-to-edge of a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a Packet Switched Network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real situation. PSN PTN PW PWE3 See packet switched network packet transport network See pseudo wire See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge

Q
QinQ A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It encapsulates the tag of the user's private virtual local area network (VLAN) into the tag of the public VLAN. The packet carries two layers of tags to travel through the backbone network of the carrier. In this manner, the layer 2 virtual private network (VPN) is provided for the user. See quality of service See quadrature phase shift keying

QoS QPSK

quadrature phase shift A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation and keying the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four dots are evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can perform twobit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the minimum BER.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 764

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

quality of service

A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel. Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a service provider to meet the demands of users.

R
radio frequency A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an electromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave. The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The AC with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classified into such high-frequency current. A device in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity of the radio resources.

radio network controller

random early detection A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronization resulted in traditional Tail-Drop can be prevented. Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RDI received signal level Received Signal Strength Indicator Receiver Sensitivity RED Reed-Solomon-Code An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with the STP protocol. See remote defect indication The signal level at a receiver input terminal. The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in the receiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDD within a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-12 BER (The FEC is open). See random early detection A forward error correction code located before interleaving that enables correction of errors induced by burst noise. Widely used error correction scheme to fight transmission errors at the receiver site. See remote error indication A signal transmitted at the first opportunity in the outgoing direction when a terminal detects specific defects in the incoming signal.

REI remote defect indication

remote error indication A remote error indication (REI) is sent upstream to signal an error condition. There are two types of REI alarms: Remote error indication line (REI-L) is sent to the upstream LTE when errors are detected in the B2 byte. Remote error indication path (REI-P) is sent to the upstream PTE when errors are detected in the B3 byte. Request For Comments A document in which a standard, a protocol, or other information pertaining to the operation of the Internet is published. The RFC is actually issued, under the control of the IAB, after discussion and serves as the standard. RFCs can be obtained from sources such as InterNIC.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

765

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

Resource Reservation Protocol

The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and is used to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transport layer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network control protocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP). A traffic control method. In telecommunication, when detecting that the transmit end transmits a large volume of traffic, the receive end sends signals to ask the transmit end to slow down the transmission rate. See radio frequency See Request For Comments See Routing Information Protocol remote network monitoring remote network monitoring See radio network controller An alarm directly caused by anomaly events or faults in the network. Some lower-level alarms always accompany a root alarm. A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/ IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically. A mapping table that stores the relationship between the original address, destination address, short message (SM) protocol type and account. The SMSC delivers an SM to the designated account according to the information set in the route table. A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth. A table that stores and updates the locations (addresses) of network devices. Routers regularly share routing table information to be up to date. A router relies on the destination address and on the information in the table that gives the possible routes--in hops or in number of jumps--between itself, intervening routers, and the destination. Routing tables are updated frequently as new information is available. See received signal level See Received Signal Strength Indicator See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol See Resource Reservation Protocol radio transmission node

reverse pressure

RF RFC RIP RMON RMON RNC Root alarm route route table

Routing Information Protocol

routing table

RSL RSSI RSTP RSVP RTN

S
SD SDH SEMF See space diversity See synchronous digital hierarchy See synchronous equipment management function

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

766

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

service level agreement A service contract between a customer and a service provider that specifies the forwarding service a customer should receive. A customer may be a user organization (source domain) or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). A SLA may include traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreement as a whole or partially. Service Level Agreement * A management-documented agreement that defines the relationship between service provider and its customer. It also provides specific, quantifiable information about measuring and evaluating the delivery of services. The SLA details the specific operating and support requirements for each service provided. It protects the service provider and customer and allows the service provider to provide evidence that it has achieved the documented target measure. See severely errored second The priority of the tunnel with respect to obtaining resources, ranging from 0 (indicates the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the tunnel can preempt the resources required by other backup tunnels.

SES Setup Priority

severely errored second A one-second period which has a bit error ratio X 10-3 or at least one defect. Time interval of one second during which a given digital signal is received with an error ratio greater than 1 X 10 -3 (Rec. ITU R F. 592 needs correction). SF SFP side trough signal cable signal fail signal to noise ratio See signal fail See small form-factor pluggable The trough on the side of the cable rack, which is used to place nuts so as to fix the cabinet. Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber signal cable. A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect condition (non-degrade defect) is active. The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and is usually expressed in dB (Decibel). A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the transmission of management information between any two points. The polling mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control information about each device is maintained by a management information block. Designating or pertaining to a method of operation in which information can be transmitted in either direction, but not simultaneously, between two points. See service level agreement See Service Level Agreement * To divide data into the information units proper for transmission. A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers. See subnetwork connection

Simple Network Management Protocol

simplex SLA SLA* Slicing small form-factor pluggable SNC

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

767

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

SNCP SNMP SNR space diversity

See subnetwork connection protection See Simple Network Management Protocol See signal to noise ratio A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a specific distance to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD is used.

Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundant network to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prune a loop network into a loop-free tree network. SSM static virtual circuit See Synchronization Status Message Static virtual circuit. A static implementation of MPLS L2VPN that transfers L2VPN information by manual configuration of VC labels, instead of by a signaling protocol.

Statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can be transmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only to active input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devices to be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. Compare with TDM. STM STM-1 STM-N STP sub-network See Synchronous Transport Module See synchronous transport mode-1 See synchronous transport module of order N See Spanning Tree Protocol Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group of network management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected or correlated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clock subnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, a sub-network is used to contain the equipment located in adjacent regions and closely related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on a topological view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-network planning can better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view space can be saved, on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus on the equipment under their management. The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine, server or router and is matched with the IP address.

subnet mask

subnetwork connection A "transport entity" that transfers information across a subnetwork, it is formed by the association of "ports" on the boundary of the subnetwork. subnetwork connection A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protection protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level. SVC switch See static virtual circuit To filter, forward frames based on label or the destination address of each frame. This behavior operates at the data link layer of the OSI model.

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

768

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

Synchronization Status A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link. Message Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clock information through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on their clocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff, and forward the synchronization information to downstream nodes. synchronous digital hierarchy A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode, transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and BISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is used only for signals. SDH is suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure. The SEMF converts performance data and implementation specific hardware alarms into object-oriented messages for transmission over DCCs and/or a Q interface.

synchronous equipment management function

synchronous transport Synchronous Transfer Mode at 155 Mbit/s. mode-1 Synchronous Transport Module An STM is the information structure used to support section layer connections in the SDH. It consists of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125. The information is suitably conditioned for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is synchronized to the network. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. This is termed STM-1. Higher capacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic rate. STM capacities for N = 4, N = 16 and N = 64 are defined; higher values are under consideration.

synchronous transport A STM-N is the information structure used to support section layer connections in SDH. See ITU-T Recommendation G. 707 for STM modules of order 1, 4, 16 and 64. module of order N

T
tail drop A type of QoS. When a queue within a network router reaches its maximum length, packet drops can occur. When a packet drop occurs, connection-based protocols such as TCP slow down their transmission rates in an attempt to let queued packets be serviced, thereby letting the queue empty. This is also known as tail drop because packets are dropped from the input end (tail) of the queue. A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded when the queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-wide synchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism. tag control information See Transmission Control Protocol See time division multiplexing See traffic engineering See traffic engineering database

Tail drop

TCI TCP TDM TE TEDB

Telecommunication A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications Management Network network. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation, maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networks and services.
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 769

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

TIM time division multiplexing

trace identifier mismatch A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3, ...), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over one channel. A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly. The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in the network. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives, and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero. See Telecommunication Management Network A ToS sub-field (the bits 0 to 2 in the ToS field) in the ToS field of the IP packet header. See tributary protection switch A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the load of the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic management parameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize the utilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused by unbalanced loads. TEDB is the abbreviation of the traffic engineering database. MPLS TE needs to know the features of the dynamic TE of every links by expanding the current IGP, which uses the link state algorithm, such as OSPF and IS-IS. The expanded OSPF and IS-IS contain some TE features, such as the link bandwidth and color. The maximum reserved bandwidth of the link and the unreserved bandwidth of every link with priority are rather important. Every router collects the information about TE of every links in its area and generates TE DataBase. TEDB is the base of forming the dynamic TE path in the MPLS TE network. It is a way of controlling the network traffic from a computer to optimize or guarantee the performance and minimize the delay. It actively adjusts the output speed of traffic in the scenario that the traffic matches network resources provided by the lower layer devices, avoiding packet loss and congestion. The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to be sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the complete messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in the ISO/OSI reference model. Tributary protection switching, a function provided by the equipment, is intended to protect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board. See two rate three color marker See time to live tributary unit A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs. In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel is an MPLS tunnel.

time to live

TMN ToS priority TPS traffic engineering

traffic engineering database

Traffic shaping

Transmission Control Protocol

tributary protection switch trTCM TTL TU Tunnel

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

770

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

two rate three color marker

The trTCM meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates, Peak Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their associated burst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it exceeds the PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it exceeds or doesn't exceed the CIR.

I.6 U-Z
This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.

U
U-VLAN UAS UBR UDP underfloor cabling UNI unicast unspecified bit rate A VLAN attribute indicating that the current VLAN is a user VLAN of an M-VLAN. Multicast services are copied from the M-VLAN to the user VLAN. unavailable second See unspecified bit rate See User Datagram Protocol The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor. See user network interface The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient. No commitment to transmission. No feedback to congestion. This type of service is ideal for the transmission of IP datagrams. In case of congestion, UBR cells are discarded, and no feedback or request for slowing down the data rate is delivered to the sender. An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS(Network Management system). The configuration data then covers the configuration data stored at the NMS side. A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable connectionless packet delivery service. Therefore, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated, delayed, or delivered out of order. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is, the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is received.

upload

User Datagram Protocol

user network interface The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for example, ATM switches).

V
V-UNI variable bit rate See virtual user-network interface One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls. See variable bit rate See virtual container
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 771

VBR VC
Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

VCC VCG VCI VCTRUNK virtual channel connection virtual channel identifier virtual concatenation group virtual container

See virtual channel connection See virtual concatenation group See virtual channel identifier A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal port of a data service processing board The VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A logical grouping of multiple virtual channel connections into one virtual connection. A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used to identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on its way to its destination. A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same virtual concatenation link The information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. It consists of information payload and path Overhead (POH) information fields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 or 500 s. A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated with switched Ethernet. The field in the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) cell header that identifies to which virtual path the cell belongs. A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLS enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through the MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.

virtual local area network virtual path identifier virtual private LAN service

virtual private network A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network via connections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities. virtual route forward VRF performs the function of establishing multiple virtual routing devices on one actual routing device. That is, the L3 interfaces of the device are distributed to different VRFs, performing the function of establishing multiple virtual route forwarding instances on the device. A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service classification and traffic control in HQoS. See virtual local area network An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the public switched telephone network (PSTN). See voice over IP See virtual path identifier See virtual private LAN service See virtual private network See virtual route forward

virtual user-network interface VLAN voice over IP

VoIP VPI VPLS VPN VRF

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

772

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

I Glossary

W
wait to restore WAN Web LCT weighted fair queuing The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line. See wide area network The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located on the NE management layer of the transport network A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all priority queues can be scheduled.

weighted random early A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCP detection synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-priority packet when calculating the packet loss ratio. weighted round Robin N/A WFQ wide area network See weighted fair queuing A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as a province, a state or even a country. A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe. See weighted random early detection See weighted round Robin See wait to restore

winding pipe WRED WRR WTR

X
XPIC See cross polarization interference cancellation

Issue 02 (2012-01-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

773

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen